
Glass PC 5~ 06 6 

Book -V5" 

1813 



A NEW 

PORTUGUESE 

G R A MM A R 

IN FOUR PARTS; 

CONTAINING 

I. Rules for the Combination and Use of the different Parts of 

Speech. 
II. The, Syntax, in which are explained, after a more co- 
pious manner than hitherto attempted, the peculiar uses of 
the Portuguese Pat t'cles. 

III. A Vocabulary, more particularly containing the_Terms of 
Commerce, War, and Navigation, with a variety of 
Phrases and familiar Dialogues, taken from common con- 
versation and th' be^t au^o; 

IV. Various Passages ex-. <ct«d from the most approved ancient 
and modern writers, rn p.ose and verse, with a view to faci- 
litate the reading of the most valuable Portuguese books. 

By ANTHONY VIEYRA, Transtagano. 

THE NINTH EDITION, 

CAREFULLY REVISED AND GRE \TLY IMPROVED, 

WITH THE PORTUGUESE WORDS PROPERLY ACCENTED, 

ACCORDING TO THE LATEST AND BEST AUTHORITIES, 

By Mr. I. P. AILLAUD. ^ ^ 

— — — — ■1 i- i .n i Mii i r . ■ i . l ii i — — — ^— »— — MMpiMM^I 

.■■ .~: . ( < '-' //- # 

Iveccsst est enim inter quos mercaiurce et ebntraefwutri smt, tnter eos 
qunque strwoms e<ase cmimercia. Ubertus Folieta. 



LOJYDOW: 

Pointed egr K WINGRAVE, in the Strand, 
1813, 



S C uansaiti, Tfimer, ret^borough courf/l'ket'gireet," London. 



,o<- 



* v*t> X TO 



\ 

ROBERT ORME, Esq. 



SIR, 

THE best Historians and the greatest Poet 
my country has produced, have dedi- 
cated their talents to the subject which at 
present employs yours ; and as no one is 
more sensible than yourself of the Geo- 
graphical, Commercial, and Political Know- 
ledge, which may be derived from an ac- 
quaintance with their writings on Indian 
affairs, this work of mine can nowise be 
addressed with greater propriety than to 
yourself. 

I am, Sir, 

Your most humble servant, 



■ ANTHONY VIEYRA. 



387#<° 



THE AUTHOR'S . . 
PREFACE. 

JS the usefulness of the Portuguese language 
is so well known to all English merchants 
who carry on a general trade with the different 
Parts of the known world, it will be needless to 
use any arguments here to prove it ; and I shall 
refer what I have to say on the copiousness and 
energy of this language, to the Preface to my 
English and Portuguese Dictionary. 

The reader will find in the First Part of this 
Grammar, what is material as a foundation of 
the whole. 

At the end of the Second Part is a full ex- 
planation of the Particles, on which I have he- 
stowed moie time and labour, because this sub- 
ject has been hitherto much neglected, although 
the principal ornament and ekgance not only of 
the Portuguese, but of every other language^ 
chiefly consist in the proper arrangement and 
judicious interspersion of the words. 

In the Third Part is a larger collection than 
hitherto published of the terms of Trade, War, 



' I ft 1 

Navigation, &c. which he present intercourse 
between the nations renders particularly useful. 

Having found a great difficulty in procuring 
Portuguese books in this Country, 1 have been 
commonly obliged to furnish with part of my 
private collection those Gentlemen whom I have 
had the honour of assisting in the study of this 
language, during my residence here ; therefore, 
in the Fourth Part I have given some passages 
selected from the best Portuguese Authors, and 
which will, at the same time, facilitate the read- 
ing of their most eminent writers. 



Advertisement to this New Edition. 

'J'HIS new Edition of Mr. Vieyra's Gram- 
mar, has been not only accurately marked 
with the proper accents to facilitate the Pro- 
nunciation and the Intelligence of the Lan- 
guage, but even materially altered in the 
body of the Work. The accentuation is a 
matter of so much consequence in the Portu- 
guese Language, that on$ accent used in the 
room of another, often changes entirely the 
signification of the word, as for instance in 
the words Avo and Av6 ; the former, when 



[ vii 3 

marked with an acute, meaning grand-mother % 
the latter with a circumflex, meaning grand- 
father. This interesting part, in which all 
the former Editions have been so deficient, 
(using only the acute) has been scrupulously 
corrected in the present one. In that part 
which treats of the Pronunciation, some very 
necessary corrections have been introduced. 
The pronunciation of the ch, wrongly ex- 
plained in the other Editions, is here in this*, 
brought to its real sound. 

New passages from the best Modern Wri- 
ters, have been substituted for some of the 
Ancient ones, to enable the learners to form 
a proper idea of the variations and progress 
of the Language, down to the present time. 
A new Vocabulary of the Military Words of 
. Command and a fresh Translation of the Com- 
mercial Letters have also been inserted in this 
Edition. 

Such are the principal alterations made in 
this Work, which, it is hoped, will meet with 
the approbation of the public. 

London, May, 1813. * 



CONTENTS, 



*>ART I. 

flFthe Portuguese Alphabet, and 

the manner of pronouncing each 

separate Letter Page 1 

Qf the manner of pronouncing 

the Portuguese Letters as 

combined in Syllables - 3 

Of the Articles - - - - 8 

Of the Nouns - - - - 1 1 

Of the Pronouns - - - 25 

Of Verbs 44 

Of the Participles - - -113 
Of ike Adverbs - - - -114 
Of the Prepositions - - - 117 
Of the Conjunctions - - - 118 
Jnterjective Particles - - 120 
Some Abbreviations used in 
the Portuguese Language 121 

PART II. 

Of the Division of Syntax - 122 
Of the Syntax of Articles - 1 26 
Of the Syntax of Nouns, and 

first, of the Substantives -131 
Of the Syntax of Adjectives 132 
Of the Syntax of the Compa- 
ratives and Superlatives - 1 35 
Of the Syntax of Pronouns - 1 3*f 



Of the Syntax of Verbs - 139 

Of the Syntax of Particles 
and Gerunds - - - - 152 

Of Prepositions - - - - 15$ 

Of the Portuguese Ortho- 
graphy - - - - - 191 ' 

Of the Quantity of Syllables, 
and their Sound - - 209 

Etymolouy of the Portuguese 
Tongue from the Latin - 215 

PART III. 

The most elegant Phrases of 

the Portuguese Language 218 T5 %* 

A Vocabulary of Words most 
used in Discourse - - 1 

Of the Portuguese Coin - 58 

A Collect ion of Portuguese 

. Proverbs - - - - - 50 

Familiar Dialogues - - 6S 

Letters on Mercantile Af- 
fairs, fyc. - - - - - 83 

PART IV. 

Several useful and entertain- 
ing Passages, collected 
from the best Portuguese 
Writers 107 



A NEW 



A NEW 

PORTUGUESE 

GRAMMAR 



PART L 

CHAP. I, 
Of the PORTUGUESE Alphabet. 

And the manner of pronouncing each separate Letter. 

HPHE Portuguese alphabet contains twenty-four 
letters, viz. 

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M, N, O, P, Q, 
R, S, T, U, V, X, Y, Z. 

The A is expressed by a sound like that of a in 
the English words at, rat, fat, &c. 

B is expressed by a sound like that of the be, in 
the first syllable of the English word Betty. 

C is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
syllable of the English word celebrated. 

D is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
syllable of the English word declare: 

E is expressed by a sound like that which we give 
to the English a when we pronounce the word care>* 

B 



S PORTUGUESE 

. E is expressed by the same sound as in English. 

G is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
syllable of the English word generation. 

H is expressed by a sound like that of the Eng- 
lish word aghast if you cut off the two last letters 
st, and keep the accent on the second a. 

I is expressed by the sound of our ee. 

J is called j consodnte, it. is expressed by the sound 
of ee, and has the same power as the g before e or L 
L, as in English. 
M, as in English. 
N r as in English. 

O has nearly the same sound as in the English 
word store. 

P is expressed by a sound like that of pe in the 
English word penny. 

Q is expressed by a sound like that of the Eng- 
lish k. 

R is expressed by a sound like that of the English 
participle erred, if you can cut off the last letter d. 

S, as in English. 

T is expressed by a sound like that of tha in the 
English word Thames. 

U is expressed by a sound like that of oo in the 
English word poop. 

V is expressed by a sound like that of oo ; they 
call it also oo consodnte, i. e. the v consonant. 

X is expressed by a sound like that of our pro- 
noun personal she, if you add an s to it, or asshees. 

Y "is. expressed by a sound like that of an i in the 
English word visible, and is called ypsilon. 

Z is expressed by the sound of our English zed, 
leaving out tfye d, or zea. 



GRAMMAR, $ 

Of the manner of pronouncing the Portuguese Letters 
as combined in Syllables ; and first 

Of the Vowels. 

A. 

A in Portuguese is commonly pronounced like a 
in the following English words adapted, castle, &c. 
It is sometimes pronounced with less strength, and 
closely, as in dmbos, where the a is pronounced like 
a in the English word ambition. . 

E. 

The letter e has two different sounds ; the one 
open like ai in daily; the other close, like that in the 
English word mellow. Examples of the former,^/?, 
faith, pe, foot, &c. Examples of the latter, ride, a 
net, parede, sl wall, &c. In this consists a great part 
of the beauty of the Portuguese pronunciation, which 
however, cannot be learnt but by a long, use, not- 
withstanding all the rules that can be given. 

I. 

Is pronounced like ee in the English word steel, 
£90 ; or like i in the English words still, ainda ; vi- 
sible, visivel. 

O. 

This vowel has two sounds ; one open, as in the 
word do, pity, where the is pronounced like our 
o in the word store; the other close, as in the Por- 
tuguese article do, of, and the word redondo, round, 
where the is pronounced like our u in turret or 
stumble. It is likewise in the different pronuncia- 
tion of this vowel that consists the greatest part of 
the beauty of the Portuguese pronunciation ; but 
it can be learned only by a long use* 

B2 



PORTUGUESE 

U. 

The vowel u is pronounced like oo in English. 

Y. 
Y has the same sound as the Portuguese vowel i. 



Of Consonants. 

B 

Keeps always the same sound as in English. 

C 

Before a, o, u, and the consonants /, r, is properly 
pronounced as k ; but before e and i it takes the 
hissing sound of s : it takes also the sound of s before 
a, o, u, when there is a dash under it thus f. 

#3* I could wish the learned in Portugal would follow the 
resolution of the Royal Academy of Madrid, by expunging 
such dash, and placing the s in its stead, since they have 
in doth languages the same hissing sound, which frequently 
occasions great confusion in the proper use of them. 

C before h is pronounced like sh in the English 
words shine, shape, &c. 

Double c is sounded only before e and i, the first 
with the sound of k, and the other with the hissing 
sound of s; as in aecidi nte, accident, pronounce 
aksidinte. 

D 

Is pronounced in Portuguese as in English. 

F. 
Is pronounced always as in English. 

G 

Before the vowels a, o, u, and before consonants, 
is pronounced as in English : example, gisto, taste ; 
gaiola, cage; grito> a cry. 



GRAMMAR. 5 

G before e and i denotes the sound of j conso- 
nant. 

Gua sounds almost like owxwa : example, g^rt/fl, 
pronounce gwarda, 

Gue, gui, are pronounced as gue in the word guest, 
and gui in the word gift ; but in the verbs arguir 
and redarguir, it is to be pronounced as if it were 
written argueer, &c. 

H. 

The letter h is never aspirated nor pronounced at 
the beginning of words, as hora, an hour ; homem, 
a man : but, according to the modern orthography, 
all those words are written without an h. 

H when preceded by a c, makes a sound with it 
like our sh. See the letter C, and also the letters 
L and N. 

J 
Is pronounced like our j consonant. 

K. 
The Portuguese have no such letter as k. 

L 

Is pronounced in Portuguese as in English. 
Lh is pronounced like g before an / in the Italian 
words figlio, Jbglio, &c. 

M 

Is pronounced as in English, when placed before 
a vowel with which it forms a syllable ; but, when 
it is at the end of words, and preceded by the letter 
e 3 it forms in Portuguese a nasal sound like that of 
the French words vin, wine ; pain, bread ; except 
soem, tdern, from the verbs soar, to&r, and some 
others. ' 

M at the end of words, preceded by an a, o, or 
i, has such a nasal obtuse sound that can only be 
learned from a master's mouth. 



6 PORTUGUESE 

N.. 

N being before a vowel with which it forms a syl- 
lable, is pronounced as in English ; otherwise, it 
only gives a nasal sound to the vowel that precedes it. 

N before h has the same sound as gn in Italian, 
or in the French words Espagne, Alkmagm. 

P. 
P and ph are pronounced as in English. 

Q 

Is pronounced like k : example, quero, I am will- 
ing, pronounce hero. 

^f* The vowel u after q in the word qual, which, 
must be uttered so smoothly as to render it almost 
imperceptible to the ear, is pronounced as in the 
English word quantity, in order to distinguish it 
from the substantive cal, lime. 

R. 

R and double r are pronounced as hi English, 

S. 

S and ss are pronounced as in English. 

S between two vowels is pronounced like a 2 ; 
particularly in the words ending in oso, and esa, as 
amoroso, cuidadoso, mesa, deffaa, &c. 

T 

Is pronounced as in English. 

V 

Is pronounced as in English. 

X 

Is pronounced as $h in English ; except in the 
word axioma, in which, according to Feyjo, the v is 
to be pronounced like c. 



GRAMMAR. 7 

X after the vowel e is pronounced like cs, in the 
words, extengam, extenmdo, expulso, excelUnte, and 
some other words. 

X between two vowels is pronounced like gz in 
the words exact amente, exornar ; except Alexandre, 
Paixam, Puxo, baxo, and some other words, that may 
be learnt by use. You must take care to pronounce 
the g so smoothly as to render it almost impercepti- 
ble to the ear. 

Z 

Is pronounced as in English, but at the end of 
words it is pronounced like s, as rapaz, boy; Fran- 
cez, French,; perdiz, partridge; voz, voice; luz, 
light, &c. 

The tittle, or little dash, which the Portuguese 
call til, is set by them over some letters instead of 
m ; as be instead of hem ; conve instead of corvoim ; 
hita instead of huma f and as it is then to be con- 
sidered as an m, see what we have said about the 
pronunciation of that letter. 

They also set their til,~, over the vowels, ao, aa, 
in the end of words, thus ao, aa. See what we 
have said above of m at the end of words preceded 
by an a. . * 

Of Diphthongs. 

The meeting of two vowels in one and the sam$ 
syllable constitute what is called a Diphthong, and 
are the following in the Portuguese language. 

Aa, as in magaa, an apple. 
• Ae, as in caes, dogs. 

Ay, as in pay, father. 

Ai, as in mals, more. 

Ao, as in pdo, wood. 

Au, as in causa, a cause. 

* It may be here observed that the curved mark,", is the most 
perfect, though it is found necessary, in English types, frequent* 
Jy to substitute the plain ~ instead of the curved. 



8 PORTUGUESE 

Eo, as in ceo, heaven. 

Ey, as in rSy, king. 

Ei, as in amei, I Wed. 

.Eu, as oj, I, 

Jo, as vza, he saw. 

Oe, as in j&om, they put ; compoem ) they compose ; 
inches, melons, See. 

Oy, as in boy, an ox ; foy, he was. 

Ou, as */<>#, I give; sou, I am. 

J7e, as azues 3 blue : 

pr The two vowels in the following words must 
be plainly and distinctly pronounced : 

Ai, as mpaiz, a country, pronounce pa4z. 

Ea, as in lamprea, a. lamprey, pronounce, lampri-a e 

la, as clemSncia, clemency, pronounce, clemenci-a. 

Io, as in navio, a ship, pronounce, navi-o. 

Iu, as vifooa, a widow, pronounce, vi-uya. 

Oa, as Lisboa, Lisbon, proa, a prow, pronounce, 
Lisb6-a, Sec. 

Oe, as toem, soem, from the verbs, toar, and aoir, 
pronounce, id-em, Sec. 

Oi, as rom, bad, pronounce, ro4m. 

Oo, as cooperagdm, co-operation, pronounce, co- 
operagao. 

Uiy as ruina, ruin, pronounce, ru-ina. 



CHAP. II 

Of the Articles. 

'J'HOSE particles called Articles, are properly 
prepositions, commonly put before nouns, to 
shew their gender, number, and case. 
These articles are definite or indefinite. 

Of the. Definite Article. 
The definite article marks the gender, number, 
and case of the nouns which it precedes. 



GRAMMAR. 9 

The English tongue "has but one definite article, 
namely the, which serves for both numbers. 

The Portuguese has two, viz. for the masculine 
and a for the feminine. 

The definite article has five cases, the nominative, 
genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative ; because 
the vocative in the nouns is designed and preceded 
merely by the particle 0. 

The Declension of the Masculine Article o. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nominative, 0, the. Nominative, os, the. 

Genitive, do, of the. Genitive, dos, of the. 

Dative, ao, or o\ to the. Dative, aos, or os, to the. 

Accusative, ao, or 0, the. Accusative, aos, or os, the. 

Ablative, do, from or by the. Ablative, dos y from or by the. 

The Declension of the Feminine Article a. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nominative, a, the. Nominative, as, the. 

Genitive, da, of the. Genitive, das, of the. 

Dative, a, to the. Dative, as, to the. 

Accusative, a, the. Accusative, as, the. 

Ablative, da, from the. Ablative, das, from or by the. 

P 5 * Observe, that the Portuguese have an article 
for each gender, both in the singular and the plural. 

Of tke Indefinite Article. 

The indefinite article may be put before the mas- 
culine as well as the feminine gender, before the 
plural as well as the singular number. 

The indefinite article has but four cases, the ge- 
nitive, dative, accusative, and ablative. 

One may put de before a noun masculine as well 
as a feminine, as huma cor 6a de rey, a king's crown ; 
the word rey is masculine; hum chapeo de pdlha y a 
hat of straw ; the word pdlha is of the feminine 
gender. 

The indefinite article de is also put before the plu- 
ral as well as the singular number; example, huma 



iO PORTUGUESE 

corda de fldres, a crown of flowers; hum prdto de 
arrdz, a plate of rice. 

Declension of the Indefinite Article; 
Genitive, de, of. Accusative, a. 

Dative, a, to. Ablative, de % from. 5 

#3- The accusative of this article is not expressed 
in English : example, Eu conheci a seupay, I knew 
his father, eu conheci a ska may, I knew his mother. 

The indefinite article may also be put before infi- 
nitives, and then it signifies to; as hetempodefalldr, 
de dormir, de Mr, &c. it is time to speak, to sleep, to 
read, &c. eu vdu a v£r, a falldr, I am going to see, 
to speak. 

N. B. Whenever we meet with of and to in Eng- 
lish, followed by the, remember they are the indefi- 
nite articles, and then we must make use of the 
indefinite article de, or a, in Portuguese. 

"When the verb is in the infinitive mood, and 
serves as nominative to the following verb, they put 
the article o before it ; as o comSr e o dormir sao as 
cousas mdis necessdrias nesta vida, eating and sleeping 
are the greatest necessaries of life. 

When the preposition in is followed by the article 
the or by a pronoun possessive, as in the, in my, in 
thy, in his, we must render it in Portuguese by em 
o or no, em os or nos, for the masculine ; and by em a 
orna, em as or nas, for the feminine : example, in the 
garden, em ojardim, or no jar dim; in the street, em 
a rua or na rua ; in thy book, em o teu, or no teu 
livro; in his bed, em a sua, or na sua cdma, &c. 

When after the preposition with, which in Portu- 
guese is expressed by com, we find the articles the, or 
a pronoun possessive, as with the, with my, Sec. we 
may say, com o, or co, com a or coa, com os, or cos, com 
as, or coas: example, with the prince, com o or co 
principe ; with the sword, com a or coa espada ; with 
the eyes, com os or cos olhos; with my books, com. os 
or cos mtus Iwros, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 11 

. When the preposition with is followed by a pro- 
noun possessive, and this by a noun of quality or 
kindred, as with your majesty, with your highness, with 
your excellency, with his brother, &c. with must then 
be rendered by the Portuguese word com, as com 
vossa mqfestdde, com vossa alteza, com sen irmao, with- 
out using the article. 

Observe, that sometimes the dative and accusative 
of the indefinite article are not expressed in English, 
particularly before pronouns personal and proper 
names ; example, convem a nos, it behoves us ; An- 
tonio matou a JPidro, Anthony killed Peter. 



CHAP. III. 

Of the Nouns. 



^HE 



Portuguese nouns have various termina- 
tions, as will appear hereafter. 
They have but two genders, the masculine and 
feminine. 

The Portuguese nouns have no variation of cases, 
like the Latin, and the article only distinguishes 
the case. 

Of nouns ending in a ; and of their declension. 

Singular. Plural; , 

Nom. a rainha, the queen. Nom. as rainkas, th? queens. 
Gen. da rainha, of the queen. Gen. das rainkas,oi the queens, 
Dat. a rainha, to the queen. Dat. as rainhas, to the queens. 
Ace. a rainha, the queen. . Ace. as rainkas, the queens, 
Voc. 6 rainka, O queen. Voc. 6 rainkas, O queens. 
Abl. daoupelta rainka, from Abl. das ou pellas rainkas, 
or by the queen. from or by the queens. 

We have already observed that the Portuguese 
nouns have no variation of cases ; therefore there is 



12 PORTUGUESE 

no occasion to display more examples of their de- 
clensions, because you need but change the article 
according to their gender. 

Of the Gender of Nouns ending in a. 

Nouns ending in a are generally of the feminine 
gender ; as rbsa, a rose ; janella, a window, &c. 
You must except dia, a day, planet a, & planet ; and 
other nouns ending in a, belonging to a man ; as 
mariola, a porter ; jesuita, a Jesuit : those derived 
from the Greek are likewise masculine ; as dogma, 
tpigrdmma, clima ; except scientific names, as ma- 
themdtica, theologia, Sec. 

Except also from this general rule some nouns 

that have the accent upon the last syllable ; as alva- 

. rd, a charter, or a prince's letters patent; Para, one 

of the captainships of the Portuguese America, &c. 

Observe, that the plural of nouns ending in a is 
formed by adding the letter s to the singular; as 
likewise the plural of all nouns that terminate in 
vowels. 

Observe also, that nouns ending in aa are of 
the feminine gender, and form their plural as those 
ending in a. 

Of the Gender of Nouns ending in e. 

Nouns ending in e are generally of the masculine 
gender ; as dente, a tooth ; vdlle, a Valley ; ventre, 
the womb, &c. 

The exceptions zxtfe, faith ; fonte, a fountain ; 
chave, a key ; torre, a tower ; dve, a fowl ; came, 
flesh or meat ; gente, people ; morte, death ; neve, 
snow ; noite, night ; ponte, a bridge ; piste, plague ; 
parte, part; serpente, a serpent; Ubre, a hare. 

Except also all names of virtues, vices, faculties, 
and those expressive of the passions of the mind; as 
virtude, virtue ; santiddde, holiness ; bonddde, good- 
ness ; vaidade, vanity ; ociosiddde, idleness, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 13 

Thirdly, idade, age ; velhice, old age ; rusticiddde, 
.rusticity ; capac idade, capacity ; feliciddde, happi- 
ness ; sorte, fortune ; arte, art ; arvore, a tree ; 
fertiliddde, fertility ; side, thirst; sebe, a hedge ; couve, 
cabbage ; herddde, a farm or manor ; diamine, a 
chimney ; parede, a wall; saude, health; rede, a net; 
mare, the tide \ fibre, fever; gale, a gallery, &c. 

Of the Gender of the Nouns ending in i. 

Nouns ending in i are masculine ; as extasi, *a 
rapture ; nebri, a hawk, &c. 

Of Nouns ending in o. 

Nouns ending in o are of the masculine gender; 
as livro, a book ;filho, a son ; brdgo, an arm ; vestido, 
a garment ; espeiho, a looking glass, &c. Except 
ndo, a ship ; Jilho, a fritter or pancake ; eiro, an 
eel. 

Of Nouns ending in u. 

All nouns ending in w are masculine; as peru,% 
turkey ; grvu, a crane. 

Of Nouns ending in y. 

Nouns ending in y are of the masculine gender* 
as rey, king; pay, father; boy, ox, &c. except ley, 
a law ; may, a mother. 

Of the other Terminations of Nouns, or of those, ter- 
minating in consonants, 

1 . All nouns ending in al, are masculine ; as 
(xndl, a sign or token; sal, salt. You must except 
cat, lime, which is feminine, and has no plural. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the letter / of the singular into es ; as sindes from 
silidl; animdes from animal 

2. Nouns ending in ar are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as ar, air. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as ares from ar. 



14 PORTUGUESE 

Some nouns ending in as in the plural are femi- 
nine, and have no singular ; as migas, exequias, 
&c. 

3. Nouns ending in az are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as rapaz, a boy ; except paz, . peace. The 
plural is formed by the addition of ez to the singular. 

4. Nouns ending in el are masculine ; as annel ; , 
a ring ; papel, paper, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the I of the singular into is ; as anneis, from annel; 
pap e is, from pap el. 

5. Nouns ending in em are of the masculine 
gender; as homem, a man; bem, benefit, &c. 
Except ordem, order ; viagem, a voyage ; vir- 
gem f a virgin, &c. but salvdgem, a savage,, is com- 
mon. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the m of the singular into ns ; as homens from ho* 
mem, &c. 

6. Nouns ending in er are of the masculine 
gender; as poder, power j prazer, pleasure, &c. 
Except colher, a spoon ; mulher, 2l woman. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as colkeres, from colher. 

7. Nouns ending in ez are of the masculine 
gender; as freguez, a parishioner or a customer; 
mez, month; arnez, levez, ?xvez y &c. Except 
surdiz, deafness ; tor quiz, vSz, &c 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as freguezes, from fregukz ; but 
iez has no plural. 

8. Nouns ending in z'/are of the masculine gen- 
der; asjiinil, a funnel ; barril, a barrel. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the / of the singular into s, as funis, from funil, Sec. 
Except aquatil, facil, pensil, See. which change the 
il into eis in the plural, as facets, from facil. 

S). Nouns ending in im are of the masculine gen- 
der, as espadim, a little sword. 



GRAMMAR. 15 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the m of the singular into ns, as espadins from es- 
padim. 

10. Nouns ending in ir or yr are of the mas- 
culine gender; but martir or martyr, a martyr, is 
common. 

The plural of these tiouns is formed by adding <s 
to the singular, 

11. All nouns ending in iz are of the mascu- 
line gender ; as apprendiz, an apprentice ; nariz, 
nose ; verniz, varnish ; matiz, a shadowing in paint- 
ing ; chqfariZy chamariz. Sec. Except aboiz*, perdiz, 
raiz, codorniz, matrix, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as perdizes from perdiz. 

12. Nouns ending in ol are of the masculine gen- 
der; as anzol, a hook; sol, the sun, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the / of the singular into es, as anzbes from anzol, 
&c. 

13. Nouns ending in omave of the masculine gen- 
der ; as som, sound ; dom, gift, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by chaiiging 
the m of the singular into ns, as sons from som, &c. 

14. Nouns ending in or are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as amor, love, temor, fear, &c. Except ddr, 
pain ; cor, colour,, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as amores from amdr. 

Nouns ending in os are of the masculine gender; 
as Dios, God. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the s into zes, as Deozes from DSos. 

15. Nouns ending in oz are of the masculine gen- 
der; as albernbz, a Moorish coat; arrdz, rice; algdz, 
hangman, &c. Excepts, a walnut; voz, voice; 

foz, the mouth of a river. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular. 



16 PORTUGUESE 

16. Nouns ending in ul or urn are of the mascu- 
line gender; as sul, the south ; Saul, Saul, a proper 
name of a man ; at urn, tunny-fish. 

The plural of those ending in ul, according to the 
learned Bluteau, is formed by changing the / of the 
singular into e$ 9 as sues from sul, azues from azul, 
blue, &c. Except consults from consul, a consul. 

The plural of those ending in uln 3 is formed by 
changing the m of the singular into ns, as at 6ns 
from atum. 

17. Nouns ending in uz'are of the masculine 
gender ; as arcabuz, an arquebuss. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular. 

18. Nouns ending in ao are of the feminine gen- 
der; as mao, hand; composigao, composition, ora- 
gao, oration, ~&c. Except pao, bread ; anad, a 
dwarf; ougao, a hand-worm ; trovao, thunder; es- 
quadrao, a squadron ; piao, a child's top ; borrao, 
a blot with ink , papelao, paste-board ; chad, the 
ground, quinhao, a share. 

There is no certain rule for the formation of the 
plural of the nouns ending in ao ; because some 
change the ao of the singular into aes, as Alemcies, 
from AkmaOy'dL German; capitaes, from capitao, a 
captain; caes, from cao, a dog, pats, from pao, a 
loaf; &c. Some change the ao of the singular in- 
to aos ; as cidadaos, from cidadao, a citizen ; chris- 
taos, from ahristao, a christian ; cortezaos from cor- 
ttzap, a courtier ; villaos, from villao, a villain, &c. 
Some change the ao of the singular into oes ; as ep- 
quadroes, from tsquadrad, a squadron ; troxdes, from 
trwvao, thunder; conclusoes, from conclusao, a con- 
clusion ; oragde. from oragao, an oration ; and 
generally all the Portuguese nouns that may be 
easily made English, by changing their termination 
gad into the English termination tion/zs declinagao, 
declension or declination, considera$ao, considera- 
tion, &c. and these are of the feminine gender. 



GRAMMAR. 17 

19. All nouns signifying a male, must be of the 
masculine gender ; as t% ue, duke; marquiz, a mar- 
quis ; conde, count, and those denoting a female are 
always feminine. f 

You may form two general rules from what has 
been said concerning the formation of the plural of 
nouns, viz. 

I. That all nouns ending in any of the vowels 
have their plural formed by adding the letter s to 
the singular. 

II. That the plural of nouns ending in az, ez, iz, 
ozj uz y is formed by adding es to the singular. 

Of Augment dtives. 

The Portuguese have their augmentatives formed 
by the increase of one or two syllables, which 
they add to the end of their nouns, and serve 
either to augment the signification of nouns, or to 
declare a thing contemptible; and so, from homem, 
a man, they form, homemzarrao, a great strong 
man ; tdlo, a fool, toleirao, a great fool, &c. and 
some others that may be learnt by use. They have 
also their augmentatives for the feminine ; as, 
molkerdna, a great stout woman ; tohirbna, &c. 

There are a great many nouns that appear, by 
their termination, to be augmentatives, though they 
are not; as,Jbrao, a ferret; atqfdna, an ass or a 
horse-mill, &c. 

Of Dimifiutives. 

The diminutives lfcssen the signification of their 
primitives. 

The diminutives in the Portuguese language are 
always formed by changing the last vowel of the 
primitives into inho ; but they denote either small- 
ness of things, or kindness and flattery ; as bichinho, 
a little worm, from bicho, a worm ; coitadinho, from 
mtadoy a poor little man ; bomtinho> a little pretty 

C 



18 PORTUGUESE 

person or thing, from boruto, pretty. Sometimes 
they are formed by adding zinho to the primitives ; 
as cadzinlio, a little dog, from cad, a dog, irmaozinho, 
dear little brother, from irmao, &c. 

The diminutives that serve for the feminine have 
their termination in inha, or zinha; as madzinha, 
a little hand, from mad, a hand ; cabecinha, a little 
head, from cabe$a, a head. You may see in the last 
example, that the diminutives serving for the femi- 
nine and ending in inha, are formed by changing 
the last syllable a of the primitive into inha. 

Observe that many nouns appear to be diminu- 
tives without being so; as moinho, a mill; espinha, 
a fish-bone. 

Note, the diminutives in Portuguese convey some- 
times a bad meaning, and denote contempt. 

Of Nouns Adjective. 

All adjectives ending in o make their feminine by 
changing o into a ; as dduta, from douto, learned ; 
but mho, bad, makes ma in the feminine. 

Those that end in ao have their feminine in an ; 
as, saa, from sad, healthy ; loucaa, from loucao, brisk, 
gay, beautiful ; meaa, from meao, middling, ordi- 
nary. 

Those ending in e are common to both genders ; 
as, forte, strong, &c. 

Those that end in m make their feminine by add- 
ing an a to the masculine ; as, huma, from hum, 
one; alguma, from algum, son^e, cScc. and sometimes 
by changing the m into a; as, commua, from com- 
mum, common; boa, from bom, good. 

Those that end in u make their feminine by add- 
ing a to the masculine, as nua, from nu, naked ; 
crua, from cru, raw. 

Those that end in ez are common to both gen- 
ders; as cortez, civil^ kind; capdz, capable, &c. ex- 
cept some which make the feminine, by adding a 



GRAMMAR. - ig 

to the masculine ; as, Franceza, from Francez, 
French ; Portugueza, from Portaguez. Portuguese 
Espanhol, Spanish, makes Espanhola in the femi- 
nine : but generally those that end in / are common 
to both genders ; as affdvel, affable ; cruel, cruel, 
* Sec. 

Of the Comparison of Adjectives. 

The comparison of adjectives is the way of in- 
creasing their signification by certain degrees, which 
are three, viz. the positive, comparative and super- 
lative. 

The positive lays down the natural signification 
of the adjective; as, nobre, noble; grdnde, great. 

The comparative raises it to a higher degree, by 
comparing it to the positive, which in Portuguese 
is performed by the adverbs mdis, more; menos, less ; 
as, mdis nobre, more noble; menos bella, less hand- 
some. 

There are some adjectives which do not admit of < 
mdis or mSnos before them; as celeste, nascido, com- 
prddo, desterrddo, Sec. 

There are 'four Portuguese comparatives which 
end in or: they may also be expressed by mais, 
more, before their positive ; as, 
Mayor, greater, mais grdnde. 
Menor, less, mais pequen&. 
Pedr, worse, mais roim. 
Melhor, better, mais bum. 
To which may be added superidr, superior ; in- 
Jerior, inferior ; deteriur; and some others. 

. Observe, that there can be no comparison made 
without the word than ; and that this word is ex- 
pressed in Portuguese by que. 'Ex. Mais cldro que 
o sol, clearer than the sun ; mdis brdnco que a neve, 
more white than the snow. The particle que is 
sometimes preceded by the word do. Ex. isto he 
mdis do que iu Ike disse, this is more than I told him ; 

c,2 



%0 PORTUGUESE 

he mais prudSnte do que parece, he is more wise than 
it appears. 

N. B. The comparatives superidr, inferidr, and 
some others, do not require que before the second 
term but the dative of the articles, viz. a, as, do; 
aos : Examp. O outro he superior a este, the other 
is superior to this. 

When the Portuguese have a mind to heighten 
their comparisons, they make use of, muito mats, a 
great deal or much more ; as also of muito minos, a 
great deal, or much less. Ex. Casar he muito mais 
estimddo que PompSo, Caesar is much more esteemed 
than Pompey ; Pompiofoi muito mSnosfrliz que Cce- 
sar, Pompey was much less happy than Ccesar, 

Of the Superlative, 

The Portuguese superlative is formed from the 
noun adjective, by changing the last letter into - 
issimo for the masculine, and into issima for the femi- 
nine: thus, from hello is formed bellissimo and bells- 
sima, most handsome. But sometimes the superla- 
tive is formed by adding muito, very, to the posi- 
tive • as, muito alto, very tali. 

Observe that some superlatives are differently 
formed; as,J'rigidissinw, from frio, cold; amicissimv, 
from arnigo, friend ; antiquissimo, from antigo, an- 
cient; capacissimo, from capaz, capable ; nobilissimo, 
from nobre, noble ; acerrimo, from acre, sharp, or 
acerb ; riquissimo, from rzco, rich ; fertilissimo, from 
fertil, fruitful ; bonissimo, from bom, good ; jidelis- 
simo, from JiH, faithful ; sacratissimo, from sagrado, 
sacred, &c. 

The most is expressed also in Portuguese by o mais 
and a mais ; as the most fair, or fairest, o mais hel- 
lo, a mais bella. But you must observe, that there 
are some adjectives which do not admit of muito 9 
very, o mais, or a mais ; as mdrto, desterrado, &c. 

Observe, that by changing the last letter of the 
superlatives into amente, superlative adverbs are 



GRAMMAR. 21 

composed; as, from doutissimo, learned; doutissima- 
mente, most learnedly, &c. But the positive adverbs 
are formed by adding minte to the feminine of the 
( positive ; #s, dout anient e, learnedly, from douta, the 
feminine of douto ; prudentemente, prudently, from 
prudent e, prudent. 

Of Numeral Nouns ; and first ; , of Cardinal. 
The cardinal nouns are such as express the num- 
ber of things ; as, 



o-u-oct^o 



Mum, 

Tris, 

Quatro, Ai 

Cinco, 

Sets, 

Site, 

Outo or oito, 

Nove, 

Dez, 

O'nze, 

Doze, 

Treze, 

Quatorze, KcUtrr^ fourteen 

Quinze, /Circes fifteen 

Dezaseis, sixteen 

Dezasete, seventeen 

Dezvuto,-%>e**£i+ eighteen 

Dezanove, nineteen 

Vinte, twenty 

Vinte e hum, twenty-one 



one 

two 

three 

four 

five 

six 

seven 

eight 

nine 

ten 

eleven 

twelve 

thirteen 



Vinte e dous, twenty-two 
Vinte e ires, Sec. twenty- 
three, &c. 
Trinta, thirty 

Quarenta, /ejxuA* , i7% forty Aezuxsrewfa 



Cinco enta, 


■fifty 


Sessenta, 


sixty 


Setj!nta s 


seventy 


Oitenta, 


eighty 


Noventa, 


ninety 


Cem, 


a hundred 


Duzentos, 


two hundred 


Trezentos, 


three hundred 


Mil, 


a thousand 


Dous mil, 


two thousand 



Milhao, or conto, a million 
Huma dezina, half a score 
Huma duzia, * dozen 

Humavintina, a score 

Duas vintenas, two scor 
Tres vintenas, three score 



Observe, that ail the cardinals that are adjective 
nouns, are not declined, being of the common gen- 
der, except hum, huma, one ; dous, duas, two ; and 
those composed of cento, a hundred ; as, duzentos, 
duzentas, two hundred ; quatro cintos, quatro chit as, 
four hundred, &c. and when the feminine huma is 
preceded by a, and followed hy a outra, then huma 
signifies first, and a 6utra, secondly. 

The plural, huns, humas, is taken sometimes in- 
stead of alguns, algumas, signifying some ; as hum 
reys, some kings ; humas rainhas, some queens. 



t/o 



22 PORTUGUESE 

N. B. Cento loses to before a noun, either mascu- 
line or feminine, and the n is changed into m; there- 
fore you must say, cem soldddos, not cento soldados. 
It only retains to and n when it is followed by ano- 
ther number, as cento e hum, &c. a hundred and 
one, &c. and when it is substantive. 

N. B. Sometimes cento is made a substantive; as 
hum cento de castdnhas, one hundred of chesnuts ; 
and so all the cardinal numbers, when preceded by 
an article, or by another noun of number, as o cinco 
de pdos, the five of clubs ; hum sete, a seven. 

The cardinal number is rendered into English 
by the ordinal, when it expresses the day of the 
month, oMtae date of any act; as, chegou aqudtro 
de Mayo> he arrived the fourth day of May. 

Ordinal Nouns. 

Ordinal nouns are such as express the order of 
things; as, 

Decimo-oitdvo, eighteenth 
Decimo-nono, nineteenth 
Vigesimo, oxventc'simo, twen- 
tieth 
Vigesimo-primeiro, one and 
[twentieth 
Trigesimo, * '. • thirtieth 
Qua dr age simo, or guar an te- 
simo, fortieth 

Quinquagesimo, fiftieth 

Sexagesimo, sixtieth 

Septu age 'simo ', seventieth 
Octagesimo, 



Primeiro, 


first 


Segunjo, 


second 


Terceiro, 


third 


Quarto, 


fourth 


Quanta, /i/>it^ 


fifth 


Sixto, 


sixth 


Setimo, 


seventh 


Oitdvo, 


eighth 


No no, 


ninth 


Decimo, 


tenth 


Undecimo, or onzeno, eleventh 


Duodecimo, 


x twelfth 


Decimo -tercio, 


thirteenth 


Decimo -quarto, 


fourteenth 


D ecimo- quint o, 
Decimo-sexto, 


fifteenth 


sixteenth 



Nonage simo, 
Centesimo, 
Mil I e simo, 
Ultimo, 



eightieth 
ninetieth 
the hundredth 
the thousandth 
the laft 



DecimO'Septimo, seventeenth 

The proportionable numbers are, siniplez, dupli- 
cMo or dobrado, triplicddo or triplice or tresdobrddo, 
quadruplicado or quhdruplo, centuplo; a single, double, 
threefold, fourfold, a hundredfold. 



GRAMMAR. 23 

The distributive nouns are, hum a hum, one by 
one ; dous a clous, two by two. * 

In English all ordinal numbers may be formed 
into adverbs : but in Portuguese they have only 
primeiramhite, and secundariamente, or segundaria- 
mente, first, secondly; and to express thirdly, 
fourthly, &c. they say, em terceiro lugar, em quarto 
lugar, in the third place, in the fourth place. 

A method (for those who understand French) to learn 
a great many Portuguese zvords in a short time. 

We must observe, that the French syllable cha is 
generally expressed in Portuguese by ca, rejecting 
the h. Exam p. Charbon, charite, chastete, chapbn, 
chape lie, chapitre, Sec. the Portuguese say, carvao, 
caridade, castidade, capao, capella, capitulo, Sec. Ob- 
serve also the-following rules. 

French words ending in ance, or ence ; as, con- 
stance, vigilance, clemence, prudence, Sec. in Portu- 
guese end in dncia or tncia ; as constdncia, vzgildncia, 
clemencia, prudencia, &c. 

Agne makes dnha \ montagne, montdnha ; cam- 
pagne, campdnha. 

le makes ia ; comedie, comedia. Here you Jean 
the accent upon the e, and not upon the i, as in 
French ; poesie, poesia. 

Oire makes bria ; gloire, gloria ; victoire, victoria. 

lire makes ura ; imposture, impost ura ; figure, 
figura. 

Ison makes zab ; raison, razao ; prison, prizao. 

On makes ao; charbon, carvao ; baron, barao. 

Ulier makes ular : regulier, regular ; particulier, 
particular. 

French Terminations ending in Portuguese in e. 

Ant, ante; vigilant, vigilante-, amant, dmante. 
Ent, adjective, ente; prudent, prudinte ; diligent, 
diliginie. 



U PORTUGUESE 

Te makes ddde; purete, puriddde ; liberalite, li- 
foraliddde. 

French Terminations ending in Portuguese in vel. 
Able, vel ; louable, louvdvel ; aimable, amavel. 
French Terminations ending in Portuguese in ez. 
Ois, names of nations, ez ; Francis, France* z; 
Anglois, InglSz. 

French Terminations ending in Portuguese in o. 
Ain 9 and ien, names of nations, dno; Romain, 
Romano : Italien, Italidno ; Napolitain, Napolitdno. 
Aire, drio: salaire, saldrio; temeraire, temerdrio. 
Eau, eo, chapeau ; chapeo. 
Ent, substantive* into; sacrement, sacraminto. 
Eux, oso ; genereux, generoso ; gracieux, gr arioso. 
If wo; actif, activo, passif* passim. 
C, co; pore, porco ; Turc, Turco. 

French 'Terminations ending in Portuguese in or. 
Eur 3 or ; terreur, terrdr ; humeur, humor ; cha- 
leur, caldr. 

Change of Terminations of the Verbs and Participles. 

Er, in the infinitive mood of the first conjuga- 
tion, makes dr; aimer, amdr; chanter, cant dr. 

Ir makes ir, in the infinitive mood ; as, partir, 
partir , sentir, sentir. 

Oir makes er in the infinitive mood ; as, concevoir, 
conceber. 

The participles in e make ado ; aime, amddo ; 
Tp2Li\6,Jallddo. 

The participles in i make ido : dormi, dormido ; 
menti, mentido. 

The participles in u make do; as, concu, concebido 3 
entendu, entendido. 

There are a great many Portuguese words that 
have no manner of analogy with the French, which 
prevent these rules from being general. 



GRAMMAR. 25 

CHAP. III. 

Of Pronouns. 

'T'HE pronouns are personal, conjunctive, mixed, 
positive, demonstrative, interrogative, relative, 
or improper. 

Of personal Pronouns. 

The pronouns personal are °eu and nos for the first 
person ; they serve for the masculine and the femi- 
nine. 

Tu and vos for the second : these serve also for 
the masculine and feminine. 

E'lle, for the third person of the masculine gen- 
der ; and Hies in the plural. 

Ella, for the third person of the feminine gen- 
der, makes in the plural ellas. 

The pronouns personal are declined with the ar- 
ticle indefinite, de, a, a, da. 

The Declension of personal Pronouns. 

Firft Person. 

Singular Number. Plural Number. 

Nom. Eu, I. Nom. nos, we. / v^*«^ 

Gen. de mim, of me. r"£#w Gen. de nos, of us. 

Dat. a mim, to me. Dat. a nos, or nos, us. 

Ace. a mim, me. Ace. a nos, us. 

Abl, de mim, or por mim, AM. de nos, or por nos, from 
from or by me. or by us. 

With me is rendered by comigo ; and sometimes 
they add the pronoun mismo to it ; me is expressed 
by me in the Portuguese ; as speak to m^fallai-me ; 
tell me, dizei-me: sentl me, mandai-me; write tome, 
escrevei-me ; elle disse-me, he told me, &c. 

With us is rendered in Portuguese by com ndseo. 



. $6 PORTUGUES E 

Us is rendered by nos. Examp. tell us, dize'i-?2os; 
give us, dai-nos ; show us, mostrai-nos ; elle disse-nos, 
he told us, &c. In these examples us is not a pro- 
noun personal, but conjunctive, as you will see 
hereafter. 

Second Person. 
Singular. Plural. / 

Nom. tu, thou. '. Num. vos, ye or you. j' 

Gen. de ii, of thee! Gen. de vos, or vos, you. 

Dat. a ti, or te, to thee. Dat. a vos, or vos, you. 

Ace. *z ti, or te, thee. Ace. a vos, or vw, you. 

Abl. de ti, or ^r ti, from Abl. de vos, or por vos, horn 
or by thee. or by you. 

^ /FsVA /te is rendered by comtigo; and sometimes 
they add to it the pronoun mesmo. You, or yourself, 
after imperatives are rendered by vos, and not vos ; 
as, be you contented, contentai vos ; show yourself, 
mostrai-vos : hide yourself, escondei-vos. 

Thee or thyself, are expressed after imperatives by 
*e; as most rate, show thyself. 

TVithyouis rendered in Portuguese by com vdsco. 

Tbird Person. For the Masculine. 

>A Singular. Plural. 

Nom. Hie, he or i^ Nom. elles, they. 

Gen. delle, of him, or of it. Gen. dilles, of them. 

Dat. a elle, to him, or to it. Dat. a elles, to them. 

Ace. a elle, him, or it. Ace. a elles, them. 

Abl. delle ox por elle, from Abl. d elles or por elles, irom 
or by him or it. or by them. 

The Portuguese have no particular pronoun, as 
our it, for things that are inanimate. 

Remember that the pronoun him, or to him, when 
joined to a verb, is always rendered in Portuguese, 
by Ihe, and them, or to them, by Ihes. 

With him is rendered in Portuguese sometimes by 
com elle, and sometimes by comsigo, to which they 
add the pronoun mesmo* 



GRAM M A R. 27 



Third Person. Feminine. 

Singular. Plural, 

Nom. ella, she or it. Nom. ellas, they. 

Gen. delta, of her or of it. Gen. deltas, of them. 

Dat. a ella, to her or to it. Dat. a ellas, to them. 

Ace. a ella, her or it. Ace. a ellas, them. 

Abl. delta, or por ella, from Abl. deltas or por ellas, from 
<?r by her #r it. 0r b.y them. 

Remember that the pronoun her or to her, when 
joined to a verb, is always rendered in Portuguese 
by Ike, and them, or to them, by /Aes 5 as you will see 
in the pronouns conjunctive. 

/FsYA her is rendered in Portuguese by com ella 
or comsigo. • 

Of the Pronoun si, himself, or one's self. 

There is another pronoun personal that serves 
indifferentlv for the masculine and feminine : this 
is si, one's self. It has no nominative. » 

Gen. de si, of one's self, himself, or herself. 

Dat. a si, to one's self, &c. 

Ace. a si, one's self, &c. 

Abl. de si, for si, from or by one's self. 

It is joined with the pronoun mismo or mesma ; 
as t/e or por si mfomo, by himself; jfa?r $i mesma, pr 
rfe m mSsma, by herself; homem nao dma senao a 
si mesmo, man loves himself only; quern nao he bdm 
senao para si, nao he hem que viva, who minds no 
body but himself only, don't deserve to live ; vicio 
he abominavel de si mSsmo, vice is hateful of itself; 
a terra de si, or de si misma he fertil, the earth is 
fruitful of itself. 

Observe that they join also the pronoun mesmo to 
pronouns personal, a* the French do with their pro- 
noun meme, viz. 



28 PORTUGUESE 

Eu mismo, myself. nos mesmos, ourselves. 

Tu mesmo, thyself. vos mesmos, yourselves. 

Elle mesmo, himself. elles mesmos \ , , 

> Ella mesma, herself. *Otr mesmas f themselves - . 

9 Jiomem mesmo, man, himself; a misma virtude, virtue itself. 

1st. Observe, that mSsmo with the article is also 
an adjective, signifying the same ; thus o mesmo, a 
misma, as mesmos, as mismas, the same, relating to 
some nouns expressed or understood. 

2dly. Note, That they also join the adjective 6u- 
tro, other, to the plural of the pronouns personal, 
I and thou ; so they say, nos outros, we ; vos out r as, 
you. 

3dly. Comsigo may be rendered in English (as we 
have said above) by with him and with he?' ; but you 
must observe, that it may be rendered also by with 
them in the plural ; and sometimes by about him, 
about her or about them. Exam. Elle or ella, nunca 
trhz dinheiro comsigo, he, or she, never has money 
about him, or about her. 

Of conjunctive Pronouns, 

The pronouns conjunctive are so called, because 
they always come immediately before or after the 
verb that governs them. 

The pronouns conjunctive bear a great resem- 
blance to the pronouns personal ; the pronouns per- 
sonal are, 
Eu, I; tu, thou; elle, he ; nos, we; vos, ye ; elles, they. 

There are seven pronouns conjunctive, viz. me, 
to me, or me : te, to thee, or thee ; se, to himself, 
or himself, to herself, or herself; Ihe to him, or him, 
to her, or her; nos, to us, or us; ws, to you, or you, 
Ihes, to them, or them. 

Example. 

Isto me agrdda, this pleases me ; he-me necessdrio, I want. 
Deos te ve, God sees thee. 
Ella se louva, she praises herself. 



GRAMMAR. 29 

Eu lhe direi, I will tell him, or I will tell her. 
Eu Ihes prometti, I promised them : as well for the mas- 
culine as the feminine. 

The pronoun conjunctive, 7fo, is always put after 
the verb, when it is in the imperative mood ; as 
dizei-lhe, tell him ; cortai-lhe as azas, cut his wings ; 
but when the verb is in some other mood, it may 
be put either before or after it; as elk lhe cortdu, or 
ilk cortou-lhe a cabega, he has cut off his head. The 
same observation takes place in the other pronouns 
conjunctive. 

The pronoun conjunctive, se, is sometimes fol- 
lowed by me, Ihe, &c. as offer ece-se~me, it is offered 
to me; represent du-se-lhe, it was represented to him, 
&c. 

1st. Note, that the pronouns conjunctive are 
very often joined to a verb, preceded or followed 
by the verb haver. Examp. Dar-lhe-hei tdnta pan- 
cada, or Su Ihe hei de dar tdnta pancada, que, &c. I 
will cudgel him so much, that, &c. 

2dly. Lhe is sometimes rendered in English by 
you. Examp. Que Iheparece aquillo ? What do you 
think of that? assSnt a no que lhe digo,be persuaded, 
or believe what I telj you. 

Of Pronouns mixed. 

There are some pronouns in Portuguese which 
are composed of the pronouns personal and con- 
junctive, and which therefore are called mixed. 

To clear up this matter, you must express them 
as underneath, changing the letter e of the pronoun 
conjunctive into for the masculine, and a for the 
feminine; as to say, to me of it, instead of me 0, or 
me a, you must say, mo or ma. In the like manner, 
instead of lhe or lhe a you must say, Iho or lha, 
Sec. as you may observe in the following pronouns 
mixed, or rather contracted. 



PORTUGU ESE 

'me of it, ftheeofit 

mo, m. ^ or to \ or 

or him to thee. 



{me of it, ftl 

or to < 

it or him to me. tit 

{me of it. Tehee 

or ta < 

it or her to me. Lit or 

frae of them, A , f 

r,mJ . or tos,m. \ 

r, f. [them to me ias ' U { 



her to thee, 
me of them, . ftheeofthem 

mos, m. < or os ' m * 1 or 

mas, f. (jhem to me as \ ' Lthem to thee. 

selo, m. Tit to himself, to herself, or to themselves. 
sela, f. J it to herself, to himfelf, or to themfelves. 
selos, m.\ them to himself, to herself, or to themselves. 
selas, f. J them to herself, to himself, or to themselves. 
f to him, or to her of it 
tko, m.< or 

Lit to him, or to her. 

{to him, or to her of it 
or 
it to him, or to her. 
Ihos, m. \to them of it, to him of them, or to her of them. 



r, m.\ 



lhas, f. J to them of it, to him of them, or to her of them. 
nolo, yr, 1 us of it, or it to us. 

nola, f. /us of it* or it to us. 

nolos, m. p. 1 them to us. 
nolas, f. p. J them to us. 
f olo, m. 1 • r • • c 

™/«,f. •} you of it, *r it of you. 

tolas, f m p. P ' } ^ ou of them ' OT them to y° U ' 
Here you have some Examples. 

Para dar-lho, to give it. to him or* to her. 

Dai-mo, give it me. 

Eu to~dar£i, I'll give it yen. 

Entrego-io,\ deliver it to you. 

Dize-I/io, you tell it him, or her. 

Entreg&-lkos, deliver them to him, or to her. 

La selo haja, leave that to himself. 

Elk nolo disse, he told us of it. 

Eu volos mandarci, I'll fend to you. 

If the verbs are in the infinitive, the pronouns 

mixed may be put either before or after the verbs ; 

as, para dizermo, or pa?*a mo dizer, to tell me it; 

but if the verbs are in the gerund, the pronouns 



GRAMMAR. SI 

mixed must be transposed; as, dizendomo, and 
not mo dlz6ndo, in telling me it. 

You must make use of these pronouns, both mas- 
culine and feminine, according to the gender of the 
thing named, sent or delivered, and not of the per- 
son to whom the thing is said, sent, given, &c. 

Of possessive Pronouns. 

, Pronouns possessive, so called, because they denote 
that the thing spoken of belongs to the person or 
thing they are connected with, are of two sorts, ab- 
solute and relative. See the remarks hereafter. 

The English have no article in the nominative 
before the pronouns possessive; but the Portuguese 
have, as, rhy, o mbu, a minha, fern. Plur. os mSus, 
as ?7iinhaSy fern. 

The pronouns possessive in Portuguese are the 
following : 

Sing, me it, m. minka, f. 1 <r 

Plur. mius, m. minhas, f. / ' ' 

Sing, te'u, m. tua> f. \ , 

Plur. titts % m. tuas, f. J *' 

Sincr. seu t m. \ , - 

r,i 6 * >nis or its. 

Plur. seus % m. J 

Sing. sua. f . 1 i 

r,, a x r >ner or its. 

Plur. suas, tf 

Sing, nosso, m. nossa, L \ 

t»i 5 - r >our. 

rlur. nossos^ m. nossas, i. / 

Sing, vosso, rn. vossa, f. \ 

Plur. v6ssos,m. vossas, f.f' 

The pronouns possessive are declined with the 
definite article o for the masculine, and a for the 
feminine. 

Example. 

Singular. 
Nom, o mm livro, my book. 
Gen. do meu livro, of my book. 
Dat. ao meu livro, to my book. 
Ace. meu livro, my book. 
Abl, do ou petto miu livro, from or by my book. 



32 PORTUGUESE 



Plural. 

Nom. os meus livros, my books. 

Gen. dos meus livros, of my books. 

Dat. aos meus livros, to my books. 

Abl. dos oupUlos meus livros, from or by my books. 

Decline all the other masculines after the same 
manner, and their feminines by the article a ; as 
my house ; a minha cctsa; of my house, da minha 
casa, &c. 

Note, you must not use the definite article when 
the pronouns possessive precede nouns of quality, 
as well as those of kindred, but the indefinite arti- 
cle de, a, &c. 

Example. 

Fossa magestdde, your majesty. 

De vossa magestade, of your majesty, &c. 

Meu pay, my father. 

De meu pay, of my father, &c. 

From the above examples it appears that nouns 
declined by the indefinite article have no article in 
the nominative. 

Though the definite article is sometimes used be- 
fore nouns of kindred, yet we ought not to use it, 
according to the old proverb : tu vivendo bonos, scri- 
bendo sequare peritos. 

Seu is sometimes made use of in room ofvosso and 

wdssa, in the polite way of speaking : so they say, 

tinho o sSu livro, I have your book : fallei ao slu 

criado, I spoke to your servant; os sius olhos saS 

formosos, your eyes are handsome. 

' Remarks upon the Possesswes. 

The pronouns possessive absolute always come 
before the noun they belong to. We have ex- 
pressed them above. 



GRAMMAR. 33 

Pronouns possessive relative are so called because 
they not being joined to their substantive, suppose 
it either expressed before, or understood, and are 
related to it. They are the following: 





Masc. 


Fern. 


Sing. 


Meu,^ 


minlicii 


Plur. 


Meus, 


minhas, 


Sing. 


Teu, 


tua, 


Plur. 


TeuSy 


tuas, 


Sing. 


Seu, 


sua, hers. 


Plur. 


Seus, 


suas, theirs. 


Sing. 


Nosso, 


nossa, 


Plur. 


No'ssos, 


nossas, 


Sing. 


Vosso, 


vossa, 


Plur. 


Vgssos, 


' vossaSj 



>mine. 

} 



thine. 



ours. 



yours. 



To express in Portuguese it is mbie } it is thine, 
&c. we must say he meu, he teu, &c, 

The pronouns possessive absolute do not agree, in 
Portuguese, in gender with the noun of the posses- 
sor, as in English, but with that of the thing pos- 
sessed ; as, a may dma a seujilho, the mother loves 
her son ; o pai dma a suajilha, the father loves his 
daughter. So you see that the pronoun masculine 
seu, in Portuguese, is sometimes rendered by her in 
English, and the feminine sua by his. 

The same observation is to be made upon the 
possessives relative, according to the gender of the 
noun that is understood ; therefore they say of a 
hat, (for instance) belonging to a lady, he o sen, it 
is hers ; because the noun understood, viz.'chapeo, 
hat, is of the masculine gender. 

We have already said, that stu> and sua, are some- 
times rendered into English by your, when they are 
absolute : but you must also observe, that they are 
sometimes rendered into English by yours, when 
they are pronouns relative, and that in the polite 
way of speaking; and so they say, speaking of any 
thing belonging to a gentleman or ladv, he o sSu, or 
- D 



M PORTUGUESE 

he a sua, it is yours ; but if the gentleman or lady 
are not present, or if they do not speak directly to 
them* though present, then the pronouns seu and 
sua must be rendered into English by his or hers. 

Note, That the pronouns possessive absolute, in 
Portuguese, agree also in number with the noun of 
the thing possessed; hence it is that they say a sua 
histbria, its history, speaking of a kingdom, province, 
&c. or, his history, speaking of any history com- 
posed by a man ; or, her history, speaking of that 
written by a woman; or, their history, speaking of 
that written by several hands, or of several people. 
And from this example you may lea,rn, that the Por- 
tuguese have'no particular pronoun possessive for 
things that are inanimate, as we have the pronoun 
its. Hence at last it follows, that when the Portu- 
guese possessives seu and sua are relative, they are 
rendered into English by his, or hers, or theirs, ac- 
cording to the gender and number of the noun of 
the possessor that is understood.. 

You must also observe, that they sometimes add 
the third pronoun personal, clelle, of him, delles, of 
them, delta, of her, deltas, of them ; to denote more 
plainly whose thing it is they speak of; as o sen 
livro delles, their book ; as, as suas palavras delta, her 
words, &c. 

' Note, that the possessives absolute are left out 
when they are preceded by a verb, or by a pronoun 
conjunctive, which sufficiently denote whose thing 
it is they speak of; the Portuguese being then con- 
tented with the article ; as devo-lhe a vida, I owe 
my life to him, or to it; doe-me a harriga, my belly 
aches. 

When the pronouns possessive absolute are before 
nouns of different genders in the same sentence, and 
with which they are grammatically construed, they 
ought to be repeated ; as, seu pdi e sua ??iay, his fa- 
ther and mother : not seu pai e may. 



GRAMMA R. 35 

Moreover, the Portuguese use the pronoun pos- 
sessive absolute in the following case, when we use 
the possessive relative; a friend of mine, hufifrdos 
meus amigos. 

The possessives minha, tua, sua, nossa, vossa, may 
be also relative, but with a different meaning. Ex- 
amples ; Levarei a minha avdnte, I will insist upon 
it, I will obtain it ; elle levara a sua avdnte, he will 
insist npon it, he will do it ; leval a vossa avdnte* 
go on with your resolution ; J'azer das suas, to play 
tricks, to dodge. 

Os meus, os, seus, &c. signify my relations, or 
my friends, thy relations, or thy friends; as, os seus 
nao o querem, his parents or relations do not like 
him ; deiva-o hir com os s£us, let him go with his 
people, his countrymen, &c. 

lake notice, that when the pronoun possessive is 
accompanied by a pronoun demonstrative, they 
do not put the article in the nominative ; they 
do not say o este meu lixro, but este m6u lioro, this 
book of mine. But in all other cases they make 
use of the indefinite article ; as d* este or diste vosso 
livro, &c. 

Of the Fronouns demonstrative. 

They are called pronouns demonstrative, because 
they serve to point out or demonstrate any thing 
or person ; as, this book, .toe livro; that man, aquelle 
ho mem. 

There are three principal demonstratives in Por- 
tuguese, viz. este, this; hse, that; aquelle, that; but 
observe that toe shews the thing or person that is 
just near or by us; esse shews the thing that is a little 
farther, or near the person; ancl aquetlg shew s what 
is very distant from the person who speaks, or is 
spoken. of, and is expressed in English by that there, 
or yonder. You must also observe, that esse, essa, is 
used in writing to any person to express the place or 
town wherein he dwells ; as tinho fallddo nessa ciddde 

d 2- 



36 PORTUGUESE 

com muitos amigos, I have spoken in your city with 
many friends. 

These Pronouns are declined thus: 



Masc. 


Fern. Neut. 




fNom.^ffc, 
1 Gen. deste, 


esta, zsto, 


this. 


desta, disto, 


of this. 


Singular.^ Dat. a este, 


a esta, a zsto, 


to this. 


| Ace. este. 


esta, isto, 


this. 


LAbl. deste, 


desta, disto. 

No Neut. 


from this. 


("Nom. estes, 


est as, 


these. 


j Gen. destes, 


destas, 


of these. 


Plural. ^ Dat. a estes , 


a e'stas, 


to these. 


| Ace. estes, 


est as, 


these. 


LAbl. destes, 


destas, 


from these. 


Masc. 


Fern. Neut. 




f Nom. esse, 


essa, is so, 


that or it. 


| Gen. desse, 


dessa, disso, 


of that &c. 


Singular.-^ Dat. a esse, 


a essa, a isso. 


to that. 


j Ace. esse, 


essa, isso, 


that. 


LAbl. desse, 


dessa, disso, 

No Neut. 


from that. 


(Norn, esses, 


essas, 


those. 


j Gen. desses, 


dessas, 


of those. 


PluraL^ Dat. a esses, 


a essas, 


to those. 


( Ace. esses, 


essas, 


those. 


LAbl. desses, 


dessas, 


from those. 


Masc. 


Fem. Neut. 




f Nom. aquelle, 


aquella, aquillo, 


that. 


| Gen. daquelle, daquella, daquillo, 


of that. 


Singular. \ Dat. a aquelle, a aquella, a aquillo 


to that. 


Ace. aquelle, 


aquella, aquillo, 


that. 


LAbl. daquelle 


, daquella, daquillo, 
No Neut. 


from that. 


C Nom. aquelles 


a que lias, 


those. 


Gen. daquelle 
Plural,^ Dat. a a quelle 


Sydaque'llas, 


of those. 


'S,a aquellas, 


to those. 


j Ace. aquelles 


} aquellas, 


those. 


LAbl. daquelle 


s,daquellas, 


from those 



G R A M M A R. 37 

You must observe, that there is an elision of the 
vowel of the indefinite article in the genitive and 
ablative of the pronouns hie and isse, both in the 
singular and plural ; and that they write and pro- 
nounce deste, destas, Sec. instead of de tste.de esta$; 
and so in the neuter they write disso, disto, instead of 
de isso, de isto. The same observation you must make 
upon the pronoun aquelle, wherein you will see 
another elision besides, in the dative case. 

Note, That both the Portuguese and Spaniards 
have demonstratives of the neuter gender; though 
they do not agree with the substantives as in Latin, 
because they do not say isto homem,but iste homem, 
this man. But the word cousa, thing, is always un- 
derstood, though the neuter demonstrative does not 
agree with it; so that it is the same thing to say 
isto, or est a causa, this thing; isso, or hsa causa, that 
thing, &cv Example, isso he or essa he a causa de 
que nos estdmos falldndo, that is the thing we are 
speaking of; aquillo he or aquella he a causa que vos 
deveisjazer, that is the thing you must do, &c. 

When the preposition em, in, comes before the 
pronouns demonstrative, they make an elision of the 
vowel of it, and change the consonant m into n; 
and so, instead of writing and pronouncing em hte, 
em esta, em isto, em isso, em aquillo, they write and 
pronounce niste, nesta, nisto, nisso, &c. in this, in 
that, &e. 

The w r ords outro, Sutra, are often joined to the 
pronouns demonstrative, taking off the last e ; as 
est outro, essoutro, aquelloutro. Example; Est outro 
homem, this other man ; estdutra mother, this other 
woman ; essoutro homem, that other man. 

They also join very often the pronoun mfamo, the 
same, to the demonstrative ; as este mismo homem, 
this very same man ; aquillo mesmo, that very same 
thing. 

Aqui, all, and la are sometimes added to the de- 
monstrative, or on the noun that comes after it, in 



38 PORTUG UESE 

order to specify and particularize it still more ; as 
iste hbmem aqui, this man; aquella molher la, that 
woman : aqui, denoting a near, or present object ; 
and Id, a distant and absent one. 

The pronouns aquelle, aquella, aquelles, aquellas, 
when they relate to persons, and are followed by the 
relative que, are rendered into English by he who, or 
he that, she who or that, they ivho or that ; as aquelle 
que dma a virtude he feliz, he who loves virtue is 
happy ; aquilles que desprezao a sciencia nao conhecem 
o valor delta, they who despise learning know not 
the value of it. Yon must observe, that when 
aquelle, aquella, &e. are preceded by fate, esta, &c. 
then este signifies the last thing or person spoken of, 
and aquelle, &c. the first -, as Carlos J 6i grdnde, Fre- 
derico ambicidso, este valente, aqueltt poderoso, Charles 
was great, Frederic ambitious, the first powerful, 
the last courageous. 

The pronoun possessive absolute his, her, their y 
construed iii English with a noun followed by the 
pronoun relative who or that before a veib, is made 
into Portuguese by the genitive of the pronouns 
aquelle, aquella, aquelles, followed by que, and the 
possessive is left out; as, all men blame his manners 
who. often says that, which himself does not think, 
iodo o mundo censura o procedimento daquelle que tern 
por costume dizSr o que nao tern no pensamento ; Pro- 
vidence does not prosper their labours that slight 
their best friends, a Providencia nao abencoa o tra- 
balho daquelles que desprezao os sius mellwres amigos. 
The English pronoun such followed by as or that 
(but not governed of the verb substantive to be), is 
also rendered into Portuguese by aquelles que, or 
aquelles taes que, or aquelle que ; as, such as do not 
love virtue do not know it, aquelles or aquelles taes 
que nao dmab a virtude, nao a conhecem. 

The pronouns isso, isio, aquillo, before que, are 
Englished by what ; as elk diz aquillo que sabe, he 
says what he knows. 



GRAMMAR. 39 

Aquelle is also used to shew contempt; as que 
quer aquelle homem ? What does that man desire ? 

Of the Pronouns interrogative. 

The pronouns interrogative serve to ask ques- 
tions, and are as follows; who, what, which, quern, 
que, qual 

Example. 

Quern he? who is it ? 

Quern vos disse isso ? who told you so ? 

Que quer lis ? what will you have ? 

Com que se sustenta ? what does he maintain him- 
self with ? 

Que estais fazendo ? what are you doing ? 

Be que sefaz isto f from what is this done ? 

Que livro he este ? what book is this ? 

Que negocios tendts ? what affairs have you ? 

Que casa he? what house is it ? 

Be qualfalldis vos ? which do you speak of ? 

Qudl delles ? which of them ? 

Quern or qual dos dous ? which or whether of the 

two? 

These pronouns are thus declined. 

Singular and Plural. Singular and Plural. 

Masculine and Feminine. Masculine and Feminine. 

Norn, quern, who. Nom.^wf, what. 

Gen. de quern, of whom. Gen. dt que, of what. 

Dat. a quern, to whom. Dat. a que, to what. 

Ace. quem t whom. Ace. que, what. 

Abl. de quern, from whom. Abl. de que, from what. 

Qual is used in speaking both of persons and 
things, and is declined thus : 

Singular. Masculine and Feminine. 
Nom. qual, which or what. 
Gen. de qual, of which or what. 
Dat. a qual, to which or what. 
Ace. qual, which or what. 
Abl. da qual, from which of what. 



40 PORTUGUESE 

Plural. Masculine and Feminine. 

Nom. quaes, which or what. 

Gen. de quaes, of which or what. 

Dat. a quaes, to which or what. 

Ace. quaes, which or what. 

Abl. de quaes, from which or what. 

Observe, that when the word quer is added to 
quern, or qual, it quite alters the meaning; quemquer 
signifying whoever, or any person, and qualquer 
any one, whether man, woman, or thing ; and 
sometimes they add the participle que to them, as 
quemquer y que, &c. 

Of the Pronouns relative. 

Pronouns relative are those which shew the rela- 
tion, or reference, which a noun has to what follows 
it. They are the following ; qual, which ; que, that 
or which ; cujo, whose ; quern, who. 

Qual, in a sense of comparison, is followed by tal, 
and then qual is Englished by as, and tal bv of, 

N. B. When qual is only a relative, it is declined 
with the definite articles o or a. 

The pronoun que may be relative both to persons 
and things, and is common to all numbers, gen- 
ders, and cases ; as o livro que, the book which ; 
os livros que, the books which ; a carta que, the let- 
ter which ; as cartas que, the letters which; o mestre 
que ensina, the master who teacheth ; a mother que 
tinho, the wife that I have ; o hSmem que eu dmo, the 
man whom I love ; and it is declined thus : 

Singular and Plural. 

Nom. que, which or who. 

Gen. de que, of which or of whom. 

Dat. a que, to which or to whom. 

Ace. que, which or whom. 

Abl, de que, from which or from whom. 



GRAMMAR. 41 

Que is sometimes a conjunction; as creyo que hi- 
rii, I believe that I shall go. See the Syntax. 

The relative quern, who, is only relative to per- 
sons ; but in the nominative case of the singular is 
rendered into English by he who, or who ; as, quern 
fdlla deve conslderar, &c. he who speaks ought to 
consider, See. eu nao sei quern, I know not who. 

Observe, that quern is common to all numbers, 
o-enders, and cases : but it has no nominative in the 
plural. 

Quern is declined thus : 

Singular and Plural. 
Nom. quern, he who, or she who, or whoever. 
Gen. de quern, of whom. 
Dat. a quern, to whom. 
Ace. quern, whom. 
Abl. cle quern, from whom. 

Quern is sometimes a particle disjunctive, and then 
it signifies some; as, quern cdnia,e quern ri, some sing, 
and some laugh; and sometimes it serves to excla- 
mation; as quern me dera estar em casa ! how fain 
would I be at home ! 



fNom. 
] Gen. 
Sing.< Dat. 
j Ace. 
LAbl. 

The plural is formed by adding s to the singular; 
as, cujos, cujas, whose, &c. 

Note, that cujo must be followed by the noun or 
term which it refers to, and with which it agrees in 
gender, number and case ; as, a pessda cuja reputa- 
gao vos admirals, the person whose reputation you 
wonder at ; o ceo cujo soccorro nunca jalta, heaven, 
whose assistance never fails ; cuja beUa cara, whose 
fair visage : cujas bell&zas, whose beauties ; a cujo 



Zujo, cuja, 


is declin 


ed thus : 


Masc. 


Fern. 




cujo,^ 


cuja, 


whose. 


de cujo, 


de cuja, 


of whose. 


a cujo, 


a cuja, 


to whose. 


cujo, 


cuja, 


whose. 


de cujo, 


de cuja, 


from whose, 



m PORTUGUESE 

pal; to whose father ; de cujos irmaos tenho recebido, 
from whose brothers I have received. Observe also 
that cujo is not to be repeated, though the terms 
which it refers to be of different number; as, cuja 
valia e bbras, whose value and deeds. 

Note, that," .0, a, os, as, lo, la, &c. are also pro- 
nouns relative, when joined' to verbs. See the syn- 
tax, chap. iv. 

Of the imfwoper Pronouns. 

These pronouns are called improper, because in- 
deed they are not properly pronouns, but have a 
great resemblance with pronouns, as well as with 
adjectives. They are the following : 

Bunt, one. 

Alguem, somebody. 

Algum, some. 

Ninguem, nobody. 

Nenkum, none. 

Cadahum, every one, each. 

Cdda t every. 
Outro, outra, other. 

Outran, another. 

Qualqu'er* any one ; whether man, or woman, or thing. 
Qualquer dos dous, either of the two, or whethersoever of 

the two. 
Quemquer, whoever, or any person. 
Todo, all, or every. Tal, such, &c. 

Hum has two terminations, viz. hum, huma ; and 
in the plural it makes hum, and humas. It is de- 
clinable with the indefinite article. 

Alguem has only one termination,, and it is only 
declinable in the singular with the indefinite article. 

Algtim has two terminations, viz. algum, algbma ; 
and in the plural, alguns, algumas. It is declinable 
with the indefinite article. 

Ninguem has only one termination, and is only 
declinable in the singular with the indefinite arti- 
cle; ninguem cri, nobody believes it. 



GRAM M A R. 43 

Nenhum has two terminations, viz. nenhumas, nen- 
huma, and in the plural mnhuns, nenhumas ; and is 
only declinable with the indefinite article; nenhum 
homem, no man ; de nenhum effeito, of no effect. 

Cadahum has two terminations, viz. cadet Mm, ca- 
dahuma ; but it has no plural, and is only declinable 
with the indefinite article. 

Cdda has but one termination. It has no plural, 
and is only declinable with the indefinite article: 
cdda dia, every day ; cdda mez, every month. 

Outroh&s two terminations, viz. outro, outra; and 
in the plural, outros, dutras. It is declinable both 
with the definite and indefinite articles. 

Out rem has only one termination. It has no plu- 
ral, and takes the indefinite article. 

Qua/quer has but one termination. It makes 
quaesquer in the plural, and is declined with the 
indefinite article. Qualquer is said both of -persons 
and things. 

Quemquer has but one termination. It has no 
plural, and is declined with the indefinite article. 
It is rendered in English by any body : quemquer vos 
dird, any body will tell you. Quemquer is used in 
speaking of a person; 

Tddo has two terminations, viz. tddo, toda ; and 
in the plural, tddos, todas. It is declinable with the 
indefinite article. It is sometimes taken substan- 
tively, and then it signifies the whole ; as o tddo he 
mayor que a sua parte, the whole is bigger than its 
part. 

Tal has only one termination. It makes taes in 
the plural, and it is declined with the indefinite ar- 
ticle. It is common to the masculine and to the 
feminine genders ; and sometimes it is joined to 
qual ; as, tal qual Ule he, such as it is. 

Tal supplies sometimes the place of the person 
whose name is not specified ; as, hum tal velhdco deve 
sir castigado, such a rogue ought to be punished. 



44 , PORTUGUESE 



CHAP. IV. 



Of Verbs. 



TTHE verb is a part of speech which serves to ex- 
press that which is attributed to the subject 
in denoting the being or condition of the things and 
persons spoken of, the actions which they do, or the 
impressions they receive. 

The first and the most general division of Verbs 
is into personal and impersonal. 

A verb personal is conjugated by three persons. 



Example 

{eu dmo, 
tu dmas, 
elle a ma, 
{nos amdmos, 
vos amais, 
ciles dmao, 



I love, 
thou lovest, 
he Joves. 
we love, 
ye love, 
they love. 



A verb impersonal is conjugated by the third per- 
son of the singular number only ; as, chove, it rains, 
conv&m, it behoves. 

A verb, considered in regard to the syntax, is of 
four sorts, viz. active, passive, neuter, and recipro- 
cal. 

Some of the verbs are regular, and others irre- 
gular. 

Some are also called auxiliary verbs. We shall 
give their definitions in their proper places. 

Before you begin to learn the conjugations, it 
will be proper to observe, that all the verbs may be 



GRAMMAR. 45 

conjugated with the pronouns personal, eu, tu, Site, 
&c. or without them. 

Of the auxiliary Verbs. 

The auxiliary verbs are so called, because they 
help to the conjugation of other verbs. They are 
four in Portuguese, viz. hav£r, tSr, to have ; ser, 
estar, to be. The auxiliary verb s&r, to be, is also 
called the verb substantive, because it affirms what 
the subject is, and is always followed by a noun 
that particularizes what that subject is ; as ger rico, 
prudente, douto, &c. to be rich, wise, learned, &c. 



The Conjugation of the auxiliary Verb ter, or haver ? 
to have. 



{en tenho 
tu tens, 
elk tern, 



The Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

tenho i ou hey? I have. 

Sing. «4 tu tens, ou has, • thou hast. 

ou ka, he has or hath* 

C nos temos, ou kavemos, ou hemos, we have. 

Plur.< vos tendes, ou haveis, ou kSis, you have. 

X^elles tern, ou kao, they have. 

Preterimperfect. 

feu tinha, ou kavia, ou hia, I had. 

SingX tu tinhas, ou havias, ou hias, thou hadst. 

\JIU tinha, ou havia, ou hia, he had. 

f nos tinhamoSiOuhaviamoSyOukiamos, we had. 

Plur.< vos tinhieis, ou havieis, ou hzeis, you had. 

yjlles tinhao, ou haviao, ou hiao, they had. 

Preterperfect definite. 

feu tive, ou kouve, I had,* 

Sing.< /« tiveste, ou houveste, thou hadst. 

l/7/e /«/*, ou houve, he had. 

f«6>'j tivemos, ou houvtmos, we had. 

Plur.< vfo tiveUes, ou houvcstes, you had. 

l/7/w tivcrao ou h(yyirad % they had. 



46 PORTUGUESE 

Preterperfect. 
'eu te'nho tido, I have had. 



C eu te'nho tido 

ling.< tu tens tido, 

[^ elle tern tido, 



thou hast had. 

he has had. 
f 'nos timos tido, we have had. 

Plur.< vos tendes tido, you have had. 

Relies tern tido, they have-had. 



{: 

{: 



C eu terei, ou haverei, 
>ing < tu teres, ou haverds, 
[_elle terd, ou haver d, 



Preterpluperfect. 

'eu tin ha tido, I had Tiad. 

Sing.^J tu tin has tido, thou had had. 

tile tinha tido, he had had. 

nos tinhqmos tido, we had had. 

Plur.-^ vos tinhieis tido, you had had. 

Hies tinhao tido, they had had. 

This tense may also be conjugated thus; tivera, 
titer as , tivera 3 tiveramos, tivereis, tiverao. J hxA^h^ 1 ^* 

'\ First Future. 

I shall or will have. 

thou shalt or wilr. have. 

he shall or wilt have. 
Cncs teremos,on haveremos, we shall or will have. 
Plur.< vos tereis, ou haver eis, ye shall or will have. 
\JelUs terao, ou haver do, they shall or will have. 

Second Future. 

Sing, eu hei de ter, ou haver, &c. I must have, &c. 

Third Future. 

Sing, eu haverei de ter, ou haver, &c. I shall be obliged to 
have, &c. 

Fourth Future. 

Sing, eu havia de ter, ou haver, &c. I was to have, &c. •» 

Imperative. 

<>. (tern tu, ou hdjas tu, ^ have thou. 
in &\tenha elle, ou htija elle, let him have. 

C tenhdmos, ou hajdmos nos, let us have. 
Plur.< tende, ou havei, vos, . have ye. 

X^tenhao, ou hdjao elles, let them have. 



GRAMMAR. 47 

The imperative has no first person, because it is 
impossible to command one's self. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 
I join them together, because their tenses are similar. 

Present. 

{que iu tenka, ou kdj'a, 'that I have, or that I may have. 
que tu tenkas, ou hajas, thou hast, or mayest have. 
que Hie tenha, ou hdja, he has, or may have. 
{que nostenhdmos, ou hajdmos, we have, or may have. 
que vos tenkdis, ou hajdis y ye have, or may have. 
que iiles tenhao^ ou hajao, they have, or may have. 

First Preterimperfect. 

f que iu tivera or tivesse; "") 

houvera. or houvesse, { :, , T • • j T 

, . , ' .• , \ that I had, or I 

c . } que tu tivera s or tivesses, { ', ,, ,, 

Sinp-. < l j > i , > should, woiiid, 

e i ho uver as or houvesses, ( <-_* 1 r^ 

•>t ;-'■' j- ' i CSfc. have, Gfo 

I ^we e//<? tivera or livesse, 

{_ houvera or houvesse, J 

f^z/£ ha.? tiviramos or tivesse?nos, ") 

kouverainosoxkouvessemos, j that we had, <?r 

p, \quev6stivereisoxtwesseis, [ We should, 

r *] houvereisox houvesseis, f would, &5V. 

| ^«e e7/f j tiverao or tivessem, have, 21fc. 

I. kouyerao ox kouvessem, J 

Second Preterimperfect. 

r^OttW., \ I should, would, *r 

X^tllt ten a ou haver za, - J ' 

fnos terzamoson haverz'amos, "\ r TJ tJ 

•m -r -- ' ■ z. ' ■ l we should, would, 

Plur.< wj fcra2.r ou haverzeis, }• •- , , , » 

1 -*> M > * - z. > -* I <? r could have. &c. 

. \jzlles terzao ou haverzao, J ■ 

Preterperfect. 

{<7&£ iu tenha tzdo ou havzdo, that I have had. 

^«f tu tenkas tzdo ou havzdo, thou hast had. 

^&<r ^7/e ^wAfl tzdo ou havzdo , he has had. 

{^&£ «^j tenkdmos tzdo ou havzdo, we have had. 

^«e iwj tenhais tzdo ou havzdo, you have had. 

^z/<? e//w tinkdo tzdo ou havzdo, they have had. 



48 PORTUGUESE 

Preterpluperfect. 

It is compounded of the first preterimperfect 
subjunctive and the participle. 

Cse eu tivera ou tivesse "^ f 

Sing. < se tu tivtras ou tivesses 



i 



se etle tivera ou tivesse . v J if I had had, 

se nos tiveramos ou tivessemos ' '\ ksc. 

i 



Plur. •< se vo's tiver eis ou tivesseis 
se elks tiver ao ou tivcssem 

Second Preterpluperfect. 
It is compounded of the second preterimperfect 
subjunctive and the participle. 

C eu term ~\ f 

Sing. < tu terms | 

XJlleteria \ t idoA I should have had, Be. 

Cnos tetiamos^ ( , 

Plur. < vos terieis 

\J.lles teriao J L 

First Future. 

{se eu tiver, if I shall have. 

tu tiver es, thou shalt have. 

elle tiver, he shall have. 

Cse nos tivermos, if we shall have. 

Plur. < vos tiverdes, you shall have. 

I, elles tiverem, they shall have. 

This tense may be conjugated also thus : houver, 
houveres, houver; houvermas, houverdes, houverem. 
See the synt, of the auxiliary Verbs. 
Second Future. 
It is composed of the First Future and the Parti- 
ciple. 

Cse tu tiver "^ f 

Sing. < tiver es j 

livirmos ) tido > ) UI shail have had » &c ' 



C tivermos ( 

Plur. < tiverdes 

^ tiverem J 



Infinitive Mood. 

Present. 

ter, to have. 



GRAMMAR, 49 

Preterperfect. 

ter tido t to have had. 

Participles. 

Preterit; Sing. tido, tida. Plur. tidos, tidas, had. 

Future. 

que hd de ter, that is to have. 

Gerunds. 

tendo % having or in having, tendo, tido, having had. 

Supine. 
It is supplied in Portuguese by the prepositions 
a or para, and the verb in the infinitive; as, 
para ter, to have. 
In like manner are conjugated its compounds 
contenho, detenho, mantenho, &c. 

Remarks upon the auxiliary verb, ter, to have, 

The verb ter, to have, is an auxiliary or helping 
verb, which serves to conjugate other verbs : exam- 
ple, ter lido, to have read ; nos thnosfeito, we have 
done ; "elks tern visto, they have seen, &c. 

When the verb tir is followed by the participle 
que, before an infinitive mood, it denotes the duty, 
inclination, &c. of doing any thing ; as, que tendes 
quefazir ? what have you to do ? tenho quefaztr 
huma visita, I must pay a visit ; elk tern muito que 
diz&rvos, he has a great many things to tell you. 

Of the auxiliary verb haver. 

This is one of the most useful verbs in Portuguese, 
since it is not only auxiliary to itself, as eu hei de 
haver, I must have ; eu havia de havSr, I was to have, 
&c. but also to all sorts of verbs ; as eu hei de can- 
tar, I will sing, or I must sing, or I am to sing ; 
eu hei de Mr, I must go ; iu havia de f alter, I was 
to speak; £u hei de escrever, I must write, &c. In 
which examples you may see that the verb havSr, 
when auxiliary, has generally the particle de and 
the verb of the infinitive mood after it; and 

E 



50 PORTUGU ESE 

that then it denotes a firm resolution, possibility, or 
necessity of doing any thing, therefore it is not to 
be rendered into English by the verb to have ; as 
you may see by the second, third, and fourth future 
of the indicative mood. 

The verb havir, with the particle f/e,and the verb 
ser, to be, after it, is an auxiliary both to the passive 
verbs, and sometimes to the verb ser itself; as, hei 
de set fell z, I shall be happy : O principe ha de ser 
respeitado, the prince ought to be, or must be, re- 
spected. 

The same verb haver is also auxiliary without the 
particle de ; but then it is put after the verb to 
which it is auxiliary; and so they say, darvos-hei, I 
will give you ; ddrlhe-hei, I will give to him, &c. 
In which examples you may observe, that the auxi- 
liary verb havtr is put after the verb and the pro- 
nouns conjunctive, te, Ihe, &c. and sometimes it is 
put after the verbs and the pronoun mixed; as, 
mandar volo-he'i, I'll send it to you. Take notice, 
however, that in the foregoing examples the verb 
haver may be put before the other verb; but then it 
requires the particle de, and has a different meaning; 
as, in the first example, you may say, hfi d,e darvos, 
I must give to you. You must also observe that 
when the indicative present of the auxiliary verb 
haver is auxiliary to other verbs, as in the foregoing 
examples, you must cut off the last letters ei from 
the future of the verbs: and.so you ma}' say darlhe- 
hei, or hei de dar-lhe; but not darei Ike-hel, nor hei 
de darei the. Moreover, when the preterim perfect 
havia is to be auxiliary to any verb, and it is to be 
placed after it, you must make use of hia, hias, hia 9 
hiamos, him, hiao ; and so you may .say, dar-llie-lna, 
Mas, &c. but not dar-lhe-havia, havias., &c. I should 
give to him, thou shoulclst, &c. 

We shall not be at a loss how to express the in- 
terrogation in Portuguese, if we do but put the pro- 
nouns personal after the verbs, as in English, and 



GRAMMA R. 51 

we shall never mistake in saying terei tu? shall I 
have ? tcmos nbs ? have we ? tens tu f hast thou ? 
tern elk? has he? but sometimes they do not men- 
tion the pronouns at all ; as, quefaremos ? what/ shall 
we do ? cantaremos ? shall we sing ? 

Observe, that haver is sometimes Englished by to 
be; as, que ha de sir de mm? what is to become of 
me? 

When we speak by negation, we must use the 
word nao before the verb ; as, nab tenho, I have not ; 
vos nao conheceis, you do not know, &c. 

The conjugation of the auxiliary verb ser> or estar, 

to be. 

Indicative. 

Present. 

feu sou or estou, I am, 

Sing. < tu es or estds, thou art. 

\,eile he or estd t he is. 

fncs somos or estdmos, we are. 

Plur. < vos sois or estdis, you are. 

Relies sao or est do, they are. 

*Vtv 

Preterpifeperfect. 
A 

eu era or estdva, I was. 

Sing. ^ eras or estdvas, thou wast. > 

era or estdva, he was. /&• 

nos eramos or estdvamos, we were. 

ereis or estaveis, you were. 

irao or estdvao, they were. 



{' 

P 

Plur. •< 



{ 
{ 



Preterperfect definite. 



'iufui or esttve, I was. 

Sing. ^ foste or estiveste, thou wast. 

*y<?z or est eve, he was. 

fom'os or estivemos, we were. 

Plur. ^ fostes or estivestes, you were, 

forao or estiverao, they were. 
E 21 



5t PORTUGUESE 

Preterperfect. 

It is composed of the present indicative of the 
auxiliary verb ta\ to have, and its own participle, 
sido, or estado. 

Preterpluperfect. 

It is compounded of the pre terim perfect indica- 
tive, and the participle sido, or est ado. 

Ceu tinha sido or est ado, I had been. 
Sing. < tinhas sido or estado, thou hadst been. 

(„ tinha sido or estado, he had been. 
tznhamos sido or estqdo, we had been. 
Plur, < tinheis sido or estado , you had been. 

(^ tinkao sido or estddo, they had been. 

This tense may also be conjugated thus ; fbra, or 
estivira ; foras, or estiveras ; for a, or estroera ; fora- 
mos, or estiveramos ; fords, or estivereis ; forao, or 
estiverao. 



Future. 

{eu serii or estarei, I shall or will be. 

seras or estards, thou shalt be. 

sera or estara, he shall be. 

seremos, or estaremos, we shall be. 

Plur. ^ sereis or estareis, you shall be. 

I, j<?rao or estardo, they shall be. 

Imperative. 

q. /.$■£ /w or <?jAz, be thou. 

in £* \j"{?tf or tfj^'a £/&, let him be. 

Csejamos or estejdmos nos, let us be. 

Plur. < sede or €J/<h' z/^r, be you. 

X^sejao or estejao tiles, let them be. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

Present. 
Cque eu seja or estcja, that I may be, or that I be. 
Sing. * jf/tfj or estejas, thou mayst be, tfr be. 
I seja or <i/^, he may be, &c. 



GRAM MAR. S3 

sejamos or estejdmos, we may be. 



sejdmos or estejamos, we may be. 
Plur, < sejais, or estejdis, you may be. 

sejao or estejao, they may be. 



f 



First Preterimperfect. 

que eufora or fosse, , 1 that I were or might 
estivera or estivesse, J be. 

Sine. < forasoxfSsses \ th ou wert. 

oin S* ^ estwer as or estivesses, J 

fi™ or fosse, the were. 

^ estivera or estivesse, J 

Cque nosfSramos or f6ssemos^ 1 ^ wfi 

estiveramos or estivessemos, J 
p , J foreis or fbsseis, 1 

* 1 es liver eis or estivesseis, jY 

forao or f ossein, ~ \ h 

! J j^ .' * > they were. 

^ estiverao or estivessem, J J 

Second Preterimperfect. 



r 
{ 



r w ifrw or estaria, I should <?r would be. 

Sing. ■{ sen as or est arias, thou shouldest be, 

jma or estaria, he should be. 

seriamos or estariamos, we should be. 

Plur. ^ serieis or estarieis, you should be. 

seriao or estariao, they should be. 

Preterperfect. 

It is compounded of the present conjunctive of 
the auxiliary verb ?er, and its own participle $ztfo, 
or estado, 

Cque eu te'nha sido or estado, that I have been. 

Sing. < te'nhas sido or estado, thou hast been. 

l_ //ftAra jidfo, &c. he has been. 

f* tenhd?nos sido, &c. that we have been. 

Plur. < tenhdis sido, &c. you have been. 

^ tenhao sido, &c. they have been. 

Preterpluperfect. 

It is compounded of trie first preterimperfect sub- 
junctive of the verb tir, and its own participle. 



■ 

{ 



PORTUGUESE 

se iu tivera or tivesse 1 r T i j i_ 

Mo or eslddo jxH had been. 
°' * tiveras, &c. thou hadst been. 

tivera, &c. he had been. 

tiveramos, &c. we had been. 

Plur. ^ tivereis, &c. you had been. 

tiverao, &c. they had been. 

Second Preterpluperfect. 

It is compounded of the second pre terim perfect 
Subjunctive of the verb ter> and its own participle 
sido or esthdo. 

Ceu teria sido or estddo I should or would have been. 
Sing. ■< terias, &c. thou shouldst have been, 

V, teria, &c. he should have been. 

f teriamos, &c. ' we should have been. 

Plur. i terieis, &c. you should have been. 

^ teriao, &c. they should have been. 

First Future. 

C qudndo eu f8r or estiver, when I shall be. 

Sing. \ fdres or estiveres, thou shalt be. 

V„ for or estiver, he shall be. 

f* formos or estivermos, we shall be. 

Plur. < Jordes or estiverdes, you shall be. 

^ Jorcm or estiverem, they shall be. 

Second Future. . 

It is compounded of the future subjunctive of the 
verb tir, and its own participle. 

C qudndo eutiversidoQxestddo, when I shall have been. 
Sing. < tiveres sido, &c. thou shalt have been. 

^ tiver sido>, &c. he shall have been. 

r thermos sido, &c. we shall have been. 

Plur. < tiverdessido, &c. you shall have been. 

1 tiverem sido, &c. they shall have been* 

Infinitive. 

Present. 
sir or estdr ; to be. 

Preterperfect. 
tir sido or estddo 9 to have been. 



GRAMMA R, 55 

Participles. 

Pret. 

si do or est&do, been. 

Future. 
que h& de sir, or estar, that is to be. 

Gerunds. 

sindo or estdndo, being. 
Undo sido or estddo, having been, 

Supine. 

para sir or estar, to be. 
Remarks upon the verb ser and estar. 

There is a considerable difference between these 
verbs, ser and estar, both in Portuguese and Spanish, 
In English there is no word to distinguish them, since 
they are both rendered into English by to be. Ser 
signifies the proper and inseparable essence of a thing, 
its quality or quantity ; ser homem, to be a man ; 
sir bom, to be good ; ser alto, to be tall ; ser largo, 
to be wide ; ser brdnco, to be white, &c. But estar 
denotes a place, or any adventitious quality; as, 
estar em Londres, to be in London ; estar de saude, to 
be in health ; estar frio, to be cold ; estar quente, to 
be warm ; estar doente, to be sick ; estar infadado, 
to be angry ; estar allegre, to be merry, &c. 

Take notice, that you may use estar before the 
gerunds, but not ser; therefore you may say, estdu 
falldndo,lendo, &c. I am speaking, reading, &c, 
but not sou falldndo, &c. 

The three Conjugations of regular Active Verbs. 

A regular verb is such as is confined to general 
rules in its conjugation. 



56 PORTUGUESE 

A verb active denotes the action or impression of 
the subject, and governs a noun which is\he object 
of that action or impression ; as, amar a virtude, to 
love virtue ; receber cartas, to receive letters. 

The regular Portuguese verbs have three diffe- 
rent terminations in the infinitive ; to wit, in ar, er> 
ir; as, amar f to love; temer, to fear; admittir, to 
admit. 

An easy Method of learning to conjugate the Portu- 
guese Verbs. 

1 have reduced all the "tenses of the Portuguese 
verbs to eight; four of which are general, and 
have the same terminations in all the verbs ; and 
the other four may be likewise made general by 
changing some letters, and all the conjugations re- 
duced to one. 

The general tenses are, the future indicative, 
the first and second preterimperfect subjunctive, and 
the first future subjunctive. 

The future indicative is terminated in all the 
verbs, in 



The imperfect subjunctive, in 

ra or sse, ras or sses, ra or sse; ramos or ssemos, reis 
or sse is, rao or ssem. 

The second imperfect, in 
via, rias, ria ; riamos, rieis, riao. 

The first future subjunctive, in 
es, mos,. des, em. 

Note, that I have only put the termination of the 
second person singular of the future subjunctive, 
because the first and third of the same number are 
like their respective infinitives of the three conjuga- 
tions, which however keep both their last consonant 



GRAMMAR. r>7 

and vowel before the terminations I have marked 
for the second person singular, and for the whole 
plural. As to the future indicative, you have no- 
thing to do but add ei to the respective present infi- 
nitive of the three conjugations, in order to form 
the first person singular; and if you add to the same 
infinitive presents, you will form the second person 
singular of it, and so of all the rest, by adding to 
the infinitive present, a, emos, eis, ad. 

The imperfect subjunctive has two terminations 
for every person, both in the singular and plural ; 
but if you cut off the last consonant r of the infini- 
tive, and then add to it the terminations above- 
mentioned, you shall form the imperfect subjunc- 
tive, according to its two different terminations. 
Lastly, if you cut off the last consonant of the infi- 
nitive, and add to it the terminations above-men- 
tioned, you will form the second imperfect subjunc- 
tive. 

The present indicative of the three conjugations 
is formed by changing the last letters of the infini- 
tive-, viz. ar, er, ir, into o; as, dmo, entendo, admitto, 
from amar, entendir y admittir. 

The preterimperfect indicative is formed in the 
first conjugation, by changing the last consonant of 
the infinitive, viz. r, into va, vas, va, vdmos, veis, wo ; 
but in the second conjugation it is formed by 
changing the termination er of the infinitive into ia, 
las, i(L> iamos, ieis, iao; and in the third by changing 
the last consonant r of the infinitive into, a, as, a ; 
amos, eis, ad. 

The perfect definite in the first conjugation is 
formed by changing the termination ar of the infi- 
nitive into ei, aste, 6u, amos, dstes, arad ; and in the 
second conjugation, it is formed by changing the 
termination er of the infinitive into ij fate, So, Smos, 
estes, erao. In the third conjugation, the same tense 



38 PORTUGUESE 

is formed by changing the termination ir of the in- 
finitive into i, isle, io, imos, istes, imo. 

The present subjunctive in the first conjugation 
is formed by changing the termination ar of the 
infinitive into e, es, e, emos, eis, em; and in the 
second conjugation, it is formed by changing the 
termination er of the infinitive into a, as, a, amos, 
his, ao. In the third conjugation, the same tense is 
formed by changing the termination ir of the infi- 
nitive into the same terminations, a, as, a, &c. 

As to the imperative mood, you may only ob- 
serve, that the second person singular is always the 
same as the third person singular of the present in- 
dicative, in ail the conjugations. 

The participles of the preterperfect tense in the 
first conjugation are formed by changing the last 
consonant r of the infinitive into do for the mascu- 
line, and da for the feminine ; and into dos, das, 
for the plural ; but when you come to verbs of the 
second conjugation, you change the termination r 
of the infinitive into ido, ida y &c. 

In the third conjugation, you must change the 
last consonant r of the infinitive into do for the 
masculine, da for the feminine, &c. 

Thejirst Conjugation of the verbs in ar. 

The Indicative Mood. 

I shall put the pronouns personal, eu, tu,(lie 9 &c. 
no more. 

Present. 



dmo, 
dmas, 

dm a, 


I love, 
thou lovest. 
he loves. 


am dmo s, 


we love. 


amais, 


ye love, 
they love. 



GRAMMA R. 59 

Preterimperfect. 

am'ava, I did love. 

amavas, thou didst love. 

amdva, he did love. 

amdvamos, we did love. 

amdveis, you did love. 

amdvav, they did love. 

Preterperfect definite. 

amei, I loved. 

amdste, - thou lovedst. 

amou, he loved. 

amamos, we loved. 

amdstes, you loved. 

amarao, they loved. 

Preterperfect. 

This tense is composed of the participle amddo, 
and the present indicative auxiliary verb ter* 

tinko amddo, I have loved. 

tens amado, thou hast loved. 

tern amddo, he has loved. 

temos amddo, we have loved. 

tendes amddo, you have loved. 

tern amddo, they have loved. 

Preterpluperfect. 
This tense is composed of the participle amddo, 
and the imperfect of the auxiliary verb ter. 

N. B. This tense may be conjugated thus, amdra 9 
amdraSy amdra, amaramos, amdreis, amarao, or, 

tinha amddo, I had loved. 

tinhas amado, thou hast loved. 

tinha amddo, he had loved. 

tinhamos amddo, we had loved. 

tinkers amddo, you had loved. 

tinhao amddo, they had loved. 

Future. 
amarii, I shall or will love. 

amards, thou shalt love. 

&mard, he shall love. 



60 PORT IT GUESE 

amarimos, we shall love. 

amareis, you shall love. 

amardo, they shall love. 

Imperative. 

dma tu, love thou. 

dme elle, let him love. 

amemos nos, let us love. 

amdi vos, love you. 

dmem elles, let them love, 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

que in dme, that 1 may love. . 

dmes, thou mayest love. 

dme, he may love. 

amemos, we may love. 

ameis, you may love. 

dmem, they may love. 

First Preterimperfect. 

que eu amara, or amdsse, that I might ar could love. 
amdras, or amasses, they mightest love. 

amara, or amdsse, he might love. 

amdramoS) or amdssemos, we might love. 

amareis or amdsseis, ■ you might love. 

amdrao or amdsstm, they might love. 

When we find the conjunction if before the in- 
dicative imperfect, we must use the imperfect of the 
subjunctive or optative, when we speak by way of 
wish or desire ; as, If I did love, se eu amdsse, or 
amara, and not se eu amdva, if I had loved; if I 
had, se eu ivoera, twesse, and not se eu tiriha ; and 
so in all the verbs. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

amaria, I should love. 

amarias, thou shouldst love. 

amaria,. he should love. , 

amaridmos, we should love. 

amaritis, ' you should love. 
amariao, _ they should love 



GRAMMAR. 61 

Preterperfect. 

It is composed of the participle amado and the 
present subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 

qutiu tenha amddo, that I have loved. 

tehkas amddo y thou hast loved. 

tinha amddo, he has loved. 

tenhdmos amddo, we have loved. 

tenkdis amado, you have loved. 

tenhao amddo, they have loved. 

Preterpluperfect. 

a is composed of the participle amado and the 
first preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary 
verb ter. 

se £u tivera or tivesse amddo, if I had loved. 

tiveras or tive'sses amddo, thou hadst loved. 

tivera or tivesse amado, he had loved. 

tiviramQS or tivessemas amddo, we had loved. 
tivereis or tmesseis amddo, you had loved, - 

tivhao or iivissem amddo, they had loved. 

Sectind Preterpluperfect. 

It is composed of the participle amado and the 
second preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary 
verb ter. 



teria amado, 


I should have loved. 


ten' as amado, 


thou shouldst have loved 


teria amado, 


he should have loved. 


teriamos amado, 


we should have loved. 


tenets amddo, 


ye should have loved. 


teriao amddo, 


they should have loved. 




Future. 


quart do eu amdr, 


when I shall love. 


a?ndre$, 


thou shalt love. 


amdr, 


he shall love. 


amdrmos, 


we shall love. 


amardes, 


you shall love. 


amarem, 


they shall love. 



62 PORTUGUESE 

Second Future. 
It is composed of the participle amado, and the 
future subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 

qudndo iu tiver amddo, when I shall have loved. 

tivires amadv, thou shalt have loved. 

tiver amddo, he shall have loved. 

tivermos amddo, we shall have loved. - 

tiver des amddo, you shall have loved. 

tiverem amddo, they shall have loved. 

Infinitive. 

Present. ~ 
amdr, to love. 

Preterperfect. 
ter amddo, to have loved. 

Participle. 

Present. 
que dma, or amdnte, that loves. 

Pret. 
am'ado, masc. amdda, fern. loved. 

Future. 
que ha de amar^ that is to love. 

Gerunds. 

amdndo, loving. 
tendo amddo, having love4. 

Supine. 
para amar, to love. 
Note, the verbs terminating in the infinitive in 
car take qu in those tenses, where the c would other- 
wise meet with the vowel e; and those terminating 
in the infinitive in gar take an u in those tenses, 
where the g would otherwise meet with the same 
vowel e; that is to say, in the first person singular 
$f the preterperfect definite, in the third person 



GRAMMAR. 63 

singular, in the first and third plural of the impera- 
tive, and in the whole present subjunctive, which 
are the tenses I shall give you by way of example 
in the verbs peccar and pagar. 

Peccar, to sin. 

Preterperfect definite. 

eu pequei t I sinned — instead of peccei. 

Imperative. 

pique elle, let him sin : pequemos nos, let us sin ; piquem 
elles, let them sin — and not pecce elle, &c. 

Present subjunctive. 

que eu pcque, tu piques, that I may sin— 
and not que eu pecce, pecces, &c. 

Preterperfect definite. 

paguei, I paid. 

Pagar, to pay. 

Imperative. 

pdgue elle, paguemos nos, paguem Hies, let him pay, &c. 

Present subjunctive. 

que eu pdgue, pdgues, pdgue, paguemos, pagueis, pdguem, 
that I may pay, &c, — and not page, pages, &c. 

The other tenses are conjugated like aindr. 

Regular verbs in ar. 

Abafdr, to choke, or to smo- Agarrdr, to lay hold of. 

ther. Alagdr, to overflow. 

Abaldr, to shake. Amaldicodr, to curse. 

Abandr, to fan. Annular, to annul, or to 
Abastdr, to satiate. make void. 

Abaxdr, to bring or let down. Apressdr, to press, or hasten. 

Abencodr, to bless. Aquentdr, to warm. 

Abocanhdr, to carp. A rgumenidr,. to argue. 

Abomindr, to abominate. Assoprdr, to blow. 

Abotodr, to button. Atdr t to tie. 

Acabdr, to finish. Avassaldr, to subdue, to con- 
Admoestdr, to admonish, quer. 

Affrontdr, to abuse. Azeddr, to sour. 



64 



PORTUGUESE 



Of the Verbs passive. 

Before we proceed to the second conjugation, it 
is necessary to know that the Verbs passive, which 
express the suffering of an action, are nothing more 
than the participles of verbs active, conjugated with 
the verb sh\ to be. 



Example. 
Present tense. 



eu sou amado, 
tu es a?nado t 
elle he amddo, 
nos somos amados> 
vos sois amddos t 
elles sao amados> 



I am loved, 
thou art loved, 
be is loved, 
we are loved, 
you are loved, 
they are loved. 

and so throughout the other moods and tenses. 



The second conjugation of the verbs in er. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 



vendo, 


I sell. - 


vendes, 


thou seflest. 


vende^ 


he sells. 


vtndanoSy 


we sell. 


vendeis^ 


you sell. 


vendem, 


they sell. 




Preterimperfect. 


v en dia, 


I did sell. 


vendias, 


thou didst sei 


v en did) 


he did sell. 


vendiamos, 


we did sell. 


uendieis, 


yon did sell. 


vaiduw, 


they did sell. 




Preterperfect definite. 


ven di, 


I sold. 


vendesfe, 


thou soldest. 


vende'o, 


he sold. 



GRAMMAR. 

vendemos, we sold. 



«* 



vendestes, 
vender ao, 



you sold, 
they sold. 



tenho 

tens 

tern 

temos 

tendes 

tern 



tinka 

tinhas 

tinha 

tinhamos 

ttnheis 

tinhao 



\ 




vendido, 



I have sold, &c. 



Preterpluperfect. 

r 



y vendido, 



J 



i 



have sold, &c. 



This tense may also be conjugated thus ; vendera, vendiras, 
vendera, vendiramos, vendereis, venderao, 



vendereis 

venderds, 

vendera, 

venderemos 

vendereis 

vender do 



>mos, ( 
its, 

20, J 



Future. 



I shall or will sell, &c< 



Imperative Mood. 



vende tu, 
vend a elle, 
venddmos nos, 
vendei vos, 
vindao elles, 



sell thou, 
let him sell, 
let us sell. 
sell ye. 
let them sell. 



Optative and Subjunctive. 
que eu venda, ~\ 



vendas, 

venda, ! , T mm 

venddmos, > that I may sell, ^r. 

v en dais, 
\indao, J 

f 



6§ PORTUGUESE 



Preterimperfect. 

que eu vendera or vendesse, that I might or could sell? 

venderas-ox vendesses, &c. 

vendera or vendesse, 
venderamos or vendessemos, 
vender eis, or vendesseis, 
vender ao or vendessem, 

Second Preterimperfect. 

venderia, I should sell, &c. 

venderias, 

vender ta, - 

venderiamos, 

vender Zeis, 

venderiafi, 



Preterperfcct. 

que iu ienha 
tenhas 

Tnhdmos \ vl 
tenkais j 
tenhao J 



-) f 

> vendido, ^ that I 



Preterpluperfect. 



seiutivira or tivesse, 
tiviras or tivesses, 

tiv'era or tivesse V d{ , J ifIhad|oM &c . 

tiveramos or tivessemos, 
tivereis or tivesseis, 
tiverao or tivessem, 



sse t "\ 

esses, j 

J 

Second Preterpluperfect. 



terias 

term 

teriamos 

terieis 

teriao 



> vendido, \ I should have sold, &c f 



GRAMMAR. 67 

{ Future. 

qudndo iu vender, when I shall sell, &e* 

venderes, 
vender, 
vender mo 5, 
venderdes, 
venderem, 



quando eu tiver 
tivtres 
tiver 
tivermos 
tiverdes 
tiverem ) 



Second Future. 

f 

r when I shall have sold, 
► vendzdo, < ^ 



Infinitive Mood. 

Present. 

vender, to sell. 

Preterperfect. 

tir vend/do, to have sold. 

Participle, 
Present. 

que vende, that sell, that sells. 

Preterit. 

vtndido, masc. vcndida^ fern. Plur. vemdidos, vendzdas t sold. 

Future. 

que ha de vender, that is to sell. 

Gerund* 

vendendo, selling. 
tendo vendido, having sold. 

Supine. 
para vender, to sell. 

After the same manner as the verb vender, are 
conjugated all the other regular verbs of the second 
conjugation ending in er ; as the following ; 

f % 



68 PORTUGUESE 

Acometer, to attack. Esconder, to hide. 

Beber, to drink. Emvrender, to undertake. 

Comer, to eat. Meter, to put in. 

Comprehender, to perceive, or Offender, to offend. 

apprehend. Promrter, to promise. 

Come ter, o commit. Res ponder, to answer. 

Conceder, to grant. . Reprekender, to reprove. 

Correr, to run. Temer, to fear. 

Dever, to owe. Varrer, to sweep, &?c. 



The third conjugation of the verbs ending in ir. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 



admitto, 


I admit, &c. 


admittimos. 


admittes, 




admittis. 


admitte, 




admit tern. 



Preterimperfect. 
admittia, I did admit, &c. admittiamos. 

admittias, admittieis. 

admittia, admittiao. 

Preterperfect definite. 

admitti, I admitted. admittimos, 

admittis te, admittistes. 

admittio, admittirao. 

Preterperfect. 
This tense is composed of the participle admittido, 
and the present indicative of the auxiliary verb, ter. 

tenho admittido, I have admitted. 

tins admittido, &c. thou hast, &c. 

Preterpluperfect. 

This tense is composed of the particle admittido, 
and the imperfect of the auxiliary verb ter. 

tinha admittido, Sec. I had admitted. 

tinhas admittiao, &c. thou hadst, &c. 

This tense may also be conjugated thus; admittira, ad- 
mittiras, admittira, admittiramos, admittireis, admittirao* 



GRAMMA R. 69 

Future. 

admittirei, I shall or will admit. 

admiitirds, 

admittira, 

admit tiremos, 

admittireis, 

admittirdo, 

Imperative. 

admitle tu, admit thou. 

admiita elle, let him admit. 

admittdmos nos, let us admit. 

admitti vos, admit ye. 

admittao eltes, let them admit. 

Obtative and Subjunctive. 
Present. 

que $u admitta, that I may admit, &c. 

admittas, 
admitta, 
admittdmos ', 
admittdis, 
admittao, 

First Preterimperfect. 

que eu admittira or admittisse, that I might admit, &c. 

admittiras or admittzsses K 
admittira or admittisse, 
admittiramos or admitti ssemos, 
ad?nittireis or admittisseis, 
admittirao or admittissem, 

Second Preterimperfect. 

admittiria, I should or would admit, &c. 

admittirias, 

admittiria, 

admittiriamos, 

admittiritis \ 

admittiriao, 

Preterperfect. 
This tense is composed of the particle, admittido, 
and the present subjunctive of the verb tir. 

que eu tenha admitti do, that I have admitted. 

Mnhas admittUo, &c. thou hast admitted, &c. 



;a PORTUGUESE 

Preterpluperfect. 
It is composed of the first preterimperfect sub* 
junctive of the verb tir and the participle admittido, 
se eu tivera admittido, If I had admitted. 

tiveras, &c. thou hadst admitted, &c* 

Second Preterpluperfect. 
It is composed of the second preterimperfect sub* 
junctive of the verb tir and the participle admittido. 
eu teria admittido, I should have admitted, 
terias, &c. thou shouldst, &c. 

First Fufure. 

se iu admittir, If I shall admit, &c. 

admittires, 
admittzr ; 
admittirmos, 
admittirdes, 
admittzr em, 

Second Future. 

It is composed of the first future subjunctive of 
the verb tir and the participle admittido. 

se iu titter admittido, If I shall have admitted. 
tiveres, &c. thou shah, &c. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. 

admittzr, to admit. 

Preterperfect. 

tir admittido, to have admitted. 

Participle. 

admittido, for the masc. admit tida, for the fem. admitted. 

Future. 

que hd de admittir, that is to admit. 

Gerunds. 

admit Undo 9 admitting. 

Undo admittido, having admitted. 

Supines. 
fara admittir •, to admit. 



GRAMMAR. 71 

Conjugate after the same manner the following 
verbs : 

Abrir, to open. Nutrir, to nourish. 

Condnzir, to conduct. Reduzir, to reduce, to bring 
Introduzir, to introduce. to. 

Induzir, to induce. Traduzzr, to translate. 

Proditzir, to produce. Deduzir, to deduct, &c. 
Luzir, to shine. 

Of the irregular Verbs in ar. 

There are in each conjugation some verbs which 
do not conform to the common rule, and on that 
account are called irregulars. 

There are but two of the first conjugation, which 
in some of their tenses depart from the rule of the 
verb amar, viz, estar and dar. We have already- 
conjugated the first, and the second is conjugated 
in the following manner. 

Indicative. * 
Present. 
dou, I give. ddmos, we give. 

das, thou givest. dais, you give. 

da, he gives. dao, they give. 

Preterimperfect. 

day a, 1 did give, &c. (as in regular verbs of the first 

ddvas, &c. conjugation.) 

Preterperfect definite. 
dei, I gave. demos, we gave. 

de'ste, thou gavest. destes, you gave. 

deu, he gave. derao, they gave. 

Preterperfect. 
This tense is composed of the participle "d&do and 
the present indicative of the auxiliary verb ter ; as 
tenho dado, I have given, &c. 

Preterpluperfect. 
This tense is composed of the particle d&do and 
the imperfect of the auxiliary verb tir ; as iuttnha 
dado, &c, I had given, &c. 



72 PORTUGUESE 

Future. 

dareiy I shall or will give, &c. (as in the verb amdrj 
daras, &c. 

Imperative. 

dhnos nos. let us give. 
da tu, give thou. ddi vos. give thou. 

de elle i let him give. dim elUs< let them give. 

Obtative and Subjunctive. 
Present. 
que eu de, that I may give, &c. 
des, 
d£, 

demos, 
deis,. 
dem, 

Preterimperfect. 
que tu dira or desse, that I might give, &c. 

deras or desses, 
dera or de'sse, 
deramos or desscmos, 
dereis or desseis, 
derao or dc'ssem, 

Second Imperfect. 
daria, I should give, &c. dariamos. 

darias, darieis. 

daria, dariao. 

The preterperfect, preterpluperfect, and the se- 
cond pretei pluperfect, are composed of the participle 
dado, and the auxiliary verb tir, as in the regular 
verbs. 

. % Future. 

qudndo eu der t when I shall give, Sec. 
deres, . 
de'r, 

de'rmos, 
derdes, 
derem, 

Second Future. 

It is composed of the participle dMo } &c. as the 
regular verbs. 



GRAMMAR. 73 

Infinitive. 

Present. 
ddr, to give, &c. as in the regular verbs. 

Of the irregular Verbs in er. 

I begin with fazer, podSr, and saber, because they 
occur oftenest in discourse. 

Fazir, to do or make. 
Indicative. 

Present. 

fdgo, I do. fazemos, we do. 

fazes, thou dost. Jazeis, you do. 
faz t he does. fdzem, they do. 

Imperfect. 

fazia> I did or did make, &c.faziamos. 
fazias, fazieis. 

Jazi'a, faziao. 

Preterperfect definite. 

fiz, I made, &c* fizemos, 

fizeste, fizestes* 

jez, Jizerao. 

Preterperfect. 

tenhofeito, I have done, &c. 
tensJeito i &.c» 

Preterpluperfect. 

tinhaftito, I had done, &c. 
tinhasftitOy &c. 

Future. 

farci, I shall do, &c. (according to the regular verb.) 
fards, &c, 

Imperative. 

. \ fagdmos nos, let us do. 

jdzt tu t do thou. fazei yos, do you. 

fdfa elle, let him do. fdgao illcs, let them do. 



fi PORTUGUESE 

Optative. 

Present. 

que eujdga^ that I may do, &c , (according to the regu- 
fagas, lar verbs.) 

faga t &c. 

Preteriraperfect* 

que iujizira orjizesse, that I might do, &c. .' 
jizeras oxjizesses, 
fizera or fizesse, 
fiziramos or fizessemos^ 
Jizereis or Jizesseis, 
Jizerao or jizessem, 

Second Imperfect. 

faria, I should do, &c. Jartamos. 
jarias, farieis. 

Jan'a, jariao. 

Future. 

qua n do fajizir* when I shall do,. &c. 
. - jizeres, 
fizer, 
Jizermos t 
Jizerdes % 
fizerem^ 

Second Future* 

qudndo iu tiverfetio, when I shall have done, 
tiveresfeito, &c. 

Infinitive. 

fazer, to do. 

Gerunds. 
jazendo, doing or in doing. 

Participle. 
Jeito, made or done. 
After the same manner are conjugated desfazir, 
to undo ;. contrqfazer, to counterfeit; refaz&r, to 
make again. 



GRAMMAR., ff 

Podir, to be able. 
Indicative. 

Present. 

posso, I can or am able. podemos, - we can. 
podes, thou canst. podeis, you can. 

pode, he can. podem, they can. 

Imperfect. 
podia, I could or was able, &c. 
podias, &c. 

Preterperfect definite. 

^«*/<?, I could. pudemos, we could. 

pude'ste, thou couldst. pudestes, you could, 

/xfafc, he could. puderao, they could. 

Preterperfect. 

//w^0 podido, &c. I have been able, &c. 

Future. 

poderei, I shall be able, &c. 
poderas, &c. 

» There is no Imperative. 
Optative and Subjunctive. 

Present. 

que eu possa, that I may be able. 

possas, thou raayegt be able, &c« 
possa, 
possdmos, 
I possdis, 
po'ssafi, 

Imperfect. 

que eu pudera or pudhse, that I might be able. 

pudcras or pudesses, thou mightst be able, &c. 
pudera or pudisse, 
puderamos or pudessemo$ t 
pudereis or pude'sseis, 
puderao or puUesum^ 



7 6 PORTUGUESE 

Second Imperfect. 

poderia, I should be able, &c. 

poderias, &c. 

Future. 

qudndo £u pudir, when I shall be able, &c. 

pudireSj 
pudir, 
pudermos, 
puderdes, 
puuerem, 

Infinitive. 

Present. 
poder, to be able. 

Gerunds. 
podendo, being able. 

Participle. 
pudido, been able. 



Sabir, to know. 
Indicative. 

Present. 

sei, I know. sabemos, we know. 

sales, thou knowest. sabeis, you know. 
sdbe, he knows. sdbem, they know. 

Imperfect. 

sabia, I dici know. 

sabias, thou didst know, &c. 

sabia, &c. 

Pretprperfect definite. 

sou be, I knew, &c. soubemos. 
soubeste, \ soubestcs, 

soube, souberao. 

Preterperfect. 
tenho sabido % I have known, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 77 

Future. 
saberei, I shall or avill know, &c. (according to the 

saberds, &c. regular verbs.) 

Imperative. 

saibdmos nos, let us know, 
sabe tu y know thou. sabe'i vos, know you. 

saiba elle, let him know. saibao eltes, let them know# 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

Present. 

que eu sdiba, I may know. 

sdibas t thou mayst know, £s?c. 

sdiba, 

saibdmas, 

saibais, 

saibao ', 

Imperfect. 

que eu soubera or soubesse, that I might know, &c. 
soubcras_ or soubesses, 
soubera or soube'sse, 
soubiramos or soubesse?nos t 
soubereis or soubesseis, 
souberao or soubessem, 

Second Imperfect. 
saberia,, I should know, &c. saberiamos, 
saberias, saber/eis, 

saberia, saberiao. 

Future. 

qudndo eu souber, when! shall know, &c. 
souberes, 
soube'r, 
soubermos, 
souberdes, 
souberem, 

Infinitive, 

Present. 

saber, to know. 

Gerund. 

sabendo, knowing. 



7 8 PORTUGUESE 

Participle. 
sabido (for trie masc) sabida (for the feminine,) known. 



Of the irregular Verb trazer, to bring. 

Indicative. 

Present. 

trdgo, I bring. ' trazemos, we bring, &c. 

trdzes, thou bringest. trazeis. 

trdz, he brings. trdzem. 

Imperfect. 
trazia, I did bring. 
trazias, &c. thou didst bring, &c (according to the regulars.) 

Preterperfect definite; 

trouxe, I brought. trouxemos. 

trouxeste, thou broughtest, &c. trouxestes. 
trouxe, trouxerao. 

Preterperfect. 

ten ho trazido, I have brought, &c. 
tens trazido, &c. 

Future. 

trarei, I shall 0r will bring, &c. trarimos. 
trards, trareis, 

trard, trardo. 

Imperative. 

tragdmos nbs, let us bring* 
traze tu, bring thou. trazei vos, bring you. 

trdga ilk, let him bring, trdgao elles, let them bring. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

Present. 

que eu trdga, that I may bring, &c. 
trdgas, 
trdga, 
y tragdmos, 

tragdis, 
trdgao* 



GRAMMAR. 79 

Imperfect. 

cut &u trouxe'ra or irouxesse, that I may bring, fee. 
trouxiras or trouxe'sses, 
tronxera or irouxesse, 
trouxeramos or trouxessemos, 
trouxereis or trouze'sseis, 
trouxtrao or trouxessem, 

Second Imperfect. 

H trarta, I should bring, &c. trariamos. 
. trarias, traricis. 

traria, trariao. 

Future. 

qudndo eu trpuxer, when I shall bring, &c. 
trouxeres f 
trouxer, 
trouxermos, 
trouxerdes, 
trouxerem, 

Infinitive. 

Present. 

trazer, to bring. 

Gerund. 

trazendo, bringing. 

Participle. 

trazfdo t masc. trazzda, fern, brought. 



The conjugation of the Irregular Verb ver, to see. 
Indicative. 

Present. 
vejo, I see, vimos. 

ves, thou seest, vedes, 

vi % he sees, &c. ve'm. 

Imperfect. 
*>fo, I did see, &c. 

via, &c. 



8o PORTUGUESE 

Preterperfect definite. 
vi; I saw, &c. vimos. 

viste, vistes, 

vio t virao, 

Preterperfect. 

tenho visto, I have seen, &c, 

tens visto, &c. 

Future. 

vere'i, I shall see, &c. 
verds, &c. 

Imperative. 



ve tu 


, see thou 


. 


veja 


elle, let him 


see. 


vejdmos nos, let us see. 


vide 


vos, see you. 




ve'jao elles, let them 


see* 




Optative. 




q ue eu veja, 


that I may see, &c. 


vejdmos. 


vejas, 




vejdis. 


veja, 


Imperfect. 


vejao. 


que eu vira or visse, that I 


might see, &c 




viras or m.sses, 






vira or visse, 






viramos or vissemos % 






vireis or visseis, 






virao or vissem, 






Second Imperfect. 




eu veria, 


I should see, &c. 


veriamos. 


yerias, 




vcrieis. 


vena, 


Future. 


verido. 


qudndo eu vir, when I shall see, &c. 




vires, 






vir, 






virmos, 






virdes, 






virem, 





GRAMMAR. 81 

Infinitive. 
ver, to see. 

Gerund. 

vendo, seeing. 

Participle. 
visto % vista y seen. 

In like manner are conjugated the compounds 
antever, precir, and rev&r. 

The verb provSr, when it signifies to provide for, 
or, to take care of is conjugated in the present indi- 
cative thus : 

eu provenho, I take care of, &c. provimos. 
provens, provinces, 

prove'm, provem. 

But when it signifies to make provision, it is con- 
jugated thus : 

eu provejo, I make provision, &c. provimos* 
proves, prove is. 

prove, provem. 

The conjugation of the auxiliary verb dizer, to say. 
Indicative. 

Present. 

digo, I say, &c. dizemos. 

dizes, dizeis. 

diz, dizem. 

Preterimperfect. 

dizia, I did say, &c. 
dizias, &c. 

Preterperfect definite. 

di'sse, 1 said, &c» dissimos. 

disseste, dissestes. 

disse, disseraa. 

a 



82 PORTUGUESE 

Preterperfect. 
tenho ditto, I have said, &c. 
tens ditto, &c. 

Future. 

direi, I shall or will say, &c. 
dirds, &c. 

Imperative. 

dize tu, say thou. 

diga elle, let him say. 

digdmos nos, let us say. 

dizii vos, say you. 

digao elles, let them say. 

Optative. 

q ue eu diga, that I may say, &c. 

digas, &c. 

Imperfect. 

que eu dissira or dissesse, that I might say, &c. 

disseras or diss esses, 
dissira or diss esse, 
disseramos or dissessemos, 
dissereis or dissesseis, 
disserao or dissessem. 

Second Imperfect. 

diria, I should say, Oc, 

dirias, &c. 

Future. 

quando eu disser, when shall I say, &c. 

disseres 
disser, &c. 

Infinitive. 
dlzir, to say. 

Gerund. 
dizendo, saying. 

Participles. 

ditto, ditta, said. 



GRAMMA 11. 83 

Observe, that the compounds desdizer, to unsay, 
and contradizir, to contradict, are in all points con- 
jugated like dizer. 



The Conjugation of the irregular Verb querer, to be 
willing. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 

quero, I will, or am willing. 
queres, thou art willing. 
quer, he is willing, &c. 

queremos, 

quer St s y 
querem, 

Imperfect. 

queria, I was willing, &c* 

querias, &c. 

Preterperfect definite. 

quiz, I have been willing, &c. 

quizes te, 

quiz, 

quizemos, 

qui-zestes, 

quizeraOy 

Future. 

quererei, I shall be willing, &c . 

quereraSj &c. 

Imperative. 

queiras tu, be thou willing. 

queira Hie, let him be willing. 

queirdmos nos, let us be willing. 

queirais vos, be you willing. 

queirao elles, , let them be willing. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

queen queira, that. I may be willing, 6?c 

queiras, &c. 

G 2 



84 POKTUGU ESE 

Imperfect. 

que eu quizera or quizesse, that I were willing. 

quizeras or quizesses, thou wert willing. 

quizera or quizesse, he were willing. 

quizeramos or quizes semos, we were willing. 
quizereis or quize'sseis, you were willing. 

quizerao or quizessem, they were willing. 

Second Imperfect. 

eu querer m, I should or would be willing, £5V. 

quererias, &c. 

Future. 

qudndo eu quizcr, when I shall be willing, Be. 

quizeres, &c. 

Infinitive. 

querer 9 to be willing. 

Gerund. 

querendo, being willing. 

Participle. 
querido, been willing. 

Note, that yw/r is sometimes a conjunction, when 
repeated in a sentence, and that it is rendered into 
English by xvhether and or ; as, qu'er vos o tenhais 
feiiOi 9 u ^ r nci P> whether you have done that or no. 
But when it is not repeated, and is joined to the 
particle se, it is sometimes rendered into English 
by at least ; as, hum se qiier, one at least; and some- 
times by hoicever, when joined in the particle que ; 
as cqmo quer que .ssja, however it be. In all which 
cases, it is not to be confounded with the third per- 
son singular of the indicative of the verb querer. 

Take notice that the verb querer is sometimes 
used with the particle \?e instead of the verb dever ; 
as, as cousas nao se querem jeitas a pressa, things 
must not be done in a hurry. 



GRAMMA R. 85 

Of the irregular Verb valer, to be worth. 

I shall put no other tenses of this verb than the 
present indicative, the imperative, and the present 
of the subjunctive, none but these being irregular. 

Indicative Mood. 





Present. 


vdlho, 


I am worth, &c. 


vdlesy 




vale or val, 




valemos. 




valeis, 




valem, 


- 




Imperative. 


vale tu, 


be thou worth. 


vdlhi tile, 


let him be worth. 


valhdmos nos, 


let us be worth. 


valet vo's, 


be you worth. 


vdlhao illes, 


let them be worth 




Subjunctive. 


que eu vdlha, 


that I may be worth, &c. 


vdlh as, 




vdlha, 




valhdmos, 




valkdis, 




vdlhao, 





Of the irregular Verb perder, to lose. 

This verb change *he TMb&bre o of the present 
indicative into d in the other persons of the same 
tense, as well as in the other tenses, if you except 
the imperative and present subjunctive ; in which 
it is conjugated in the following manner : 





Indicative. 




Present. 


per co, 

perdes, 

pe'rde, 


I lose, &c. per demos, 
perdeis. 
perdem. 



$6 PORTUGUESE 

Imperative. 

perde tu, . lose thou. 
perca elle, let him lose. 

percdmos nos 9 let us lose. 

per dei vos lose you. 

pircao elles, let them lose. 

Subjunctive. 

que in perca, that I may lose, &c. 

percas, 
perca, &c. 

The compounds of the verb ter, as, contenho, I 
contain ; defenho, I detain, &c. are conjugated like 
it. 

Some verbs of this conjugation are only irregu- 
lar in the participle passive ; as, escrito, from escre- 
*v6r ; absdlto, from absolvSr. 

Those that have the j before o in the present in- 
dicative change the j into g in all tenses and per- 
sons, in which ihej would otherwise meet with the 
vowels iore; ns 9 eiegir, to elect; eu elejo, tu eleges, 
&c. I elect, &c. 

Imperfect. Preter-def. 

elegia, &c. ckgu degeste, &c. I elected, 6?c. 

The verbs ending in eyo in the present indica- 
tive, change that termination into ia in the imper- 
fect, and into i in the preter-definite, and are so 
conjugated. l^ %jU**L 

Indicative. 

Present. 

iu leyo, I read, &c. lemos. 

lis, ledes. 

le, lem. 

Imperfect. 

£u lid, I did read, &c. 

lias, &c. 



GRAMMAR, 87 

Preter definite. 

eu li, 1 read, &c, 

lette, &c. 

Imperative. 

ledmosnos, let us read. 
le tu, read thou. lede vos, read you. 

lea elle, let him read, lead elks, let them read. 

Subjunctive. 

que eu lea, that I may read, &c, 

leas, 
le'a, &c. 

You may observe that they lose the y through all 
the other moods and tenses. The verb crer, to be- 
lieve, is conjugated in the same manner. I 



Of the irregular Verbs in ir. 

Ir, to go. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present tense. 



vou, I go. vdmos, 
vds, thou groest. ides, 
vai, Tie goes. vao, 


we go. 
you go. 
they go. 


Preterimperfect. 




kia, I did go, &c . 
hias, 

hia, 


hzamos, 

hieis, 

hiao. 



Preterperfect definite. 

fui, I went, fomos, we went. 

fostt, thou wentest. fostes, you went. 
foi, he went. jorao, they went. 

Preterperfect. 

*£W } ido { l have s°° e > &c - 



88 PORTUGUESE 

Preterpluperfeet. 

tl tinhas r { Uo > } l had g° ne » &c > 

Future. 

ire'i, I shall or will go, &c. 

iras, &c. 

Imperative. 

vdmos nos, let us go. 
vdi tu, go thou, ide vos, go ye. 

vd elle, let him go, vao eltes. let them go, 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

que eu vd, that I may go, &c. 

vd$i 
v4, 

vdmos, 
-vades, 
vao t 

First Preterimperfect. 

que eu fora or fosse, that I might go, &c. 

for as ox fosses, ,,v - 
fora ox fosse, 
for am os oxfossemos, 
forets or Jo 'sseis, 
forao oxfossem, 

Second Preterimperfect. 

iria, I should go, &c. 

irias, &c. 

Preterperfect. 

It is composed of the participle ido and the pre- 
sent subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 

Preterpluperfeet. 

It is composed of the participle ido and the first 
preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb tSr. 



GRAMMAR. 89 

Second Preterpluperfect. 
It is composed of the participle ido and the second 
preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb 
tir. 

Future. 

qudndo eufor, when I shall go, &c. 

fores, 

M r , 

formos, 
fordes, 
Jorem, 

Second Future. 

qudndo eu tiver, J ,, \ when I shall have gone, 

tivires, &c. \ / &c. 

Infinitive. 

Present. 

it, to go. 

Gerund. 

indo, g°i n g». 

Part. 

ido, dc 



>one. 



Vi>\ to •■' lie. 
Indicative. 

Present. 

venho, I come, &c. vinos, 
pens, vin . j, 

vem, ve'm, 

Imperfect 

vinka, I did come, &c, v'nhvmos. 
vinkas, vinkeu. 

vinha, vinhao. 

Preter defini ■>*. 

vim, I came, &c. viemos". 

vie*te, vu <-s* 

veio f vierao. -. 



90 



PORTUGUESE 



Preterim perfect. 

tenho vindo, I have come, &c. 
tens vindo, &c. 



virei, 
viras, &c. 



Future. 
I .shall come, &c, 



Imperative. 

venhdmos nos, let us come. 
vim tu, come thou. vind pos, come you. 

venha elle, let him come, benkao ettes, let them come. 

Optative. 

Present. 

que eu venha. 

Imperfect. 
que eu viera, or vie'sse. 

Second Imperfect. 
viria, virias, &c. 

Infinitive. 

Present. 
vir, to come. 

Gerund. 
vindo, coming. 

Part. 
vindo, come. 
The compounds of vir ; as convir, to be conve- 
nient ; sobrevir, to come unlooked for, are con- 
jugated in the same manner. 

Of the irregular Verbs, mentir, to lie, sentir, to feel; 
servir, to serve ; ferir, to wound. 

These verbs change the i of the first person sin- 
gular of the present tense, indicative, into e in the 



GUAM MAR. 91 

other persons of the same tense, as well as in the 
other tenses and moods, except in the imperative 
and the present conjunctive, in which they are con- 
jugated thus : 

Indicative. 

Present. 
iu minto, tu mintes, elle minte, &c. 
iu sinto, fu sentes, elle sSti'ti, &c. , 

iu sirvo, tu serves, elle setve, &c. 

Imperative. 

minte tu, mintaille, mintdmos.ncs, menti vos, mintao elles. 
sente tu, sinta elle, jintdmos nos, senti vos, sintao elles* 
serve tu, szrva elle, sirvdmos no's, servi vbs, sirvao elles. 

Subjunctive. 

minta, mintas, &c. 
sinta, sintas, &c. 
sirva, sirvas, &c. 

The compounds, desmentir, assentir, consentir, dis- 
sentir, presentir, are conjugated like mtntir and sen- 
tir ; and also the verbs ajferir, referir, coriferir, de- 
ferir, differir, inferir. 

Of the irregular Verbs affligir, to afflict ; corrigir, to 
correct, fingir, to feign ; ungir, to anoint ; com- 
pungir, frigir, dirigir, tingir, cingir, &c. 

These verbs change the g of the infinitive mood 
into j in those tenses where the g would otherwise 
meet with the vowels o, as in the first person singu- 
lar of the present indicative afflijo ; or a, as in the 
third person of the imperative in both numbers, in 
the first plural of the same tense, and in the present 
subjunctive. 






Of the irregular Verb seguir, to follow. 

This verb changes the e of the infinitive mood 
into i in the first person singular of the present indi- 



9Z PORTUGUESE 

cative, eu sigo, I follow : in the present subjunctive 
que tu siga, that I may follow: and in the impera- 
tive, where it is conjugated thus : segue tu, siga elle, 
sigdmos nos, segui ws, sigqv Hies, 

Take notice that the u is lost in those tenses where 
it would otherwise meet with the vowels o and a, as 
you see in the examples ; and this observation also 
takes place in the verbs disiinguir, to distinguish; 
extingtiir, to extinguish, &c. 

. The compounds are ptrseguir, to persecute; con- 
seguir T to obtain ; .proseguir, to pursue. 

Of the irregular Verb ouvir, to hear. 

This verb changes the v of the infinitive mood 
into f in the first person singular of the present in- 
dicative, tu 6ugo, I hear, tu duves, &c. in the pre- 
sent subjunctive, and in the imperative mood, where 
it is conjugated thus : duve tu, ouca Hie, ougdmos nos, 
ouvi vos, ougao Hles/hear thou, &c. 

Of the irregular Verb dormir, to sleep. 

This verb changes the o of the infinitive mood 
into u in the first person singular of the present 
indicative, thus, eu durmo, tu dormes, elle dorme. 
Sec. 1 sleep, <§*c. In the present subjunctive, que 
eu durma, &c. that I may sleep ; and in the impe- 
rative mood, where it is conjugated thus; dorme tu, 
durnia Hie, durmdmos nos, dormi vos, dur'mao Hies, 
sleep thou, <$c. 

Of the irregular Verb fugir, to fly away. 

This. verb is irregular in the present indicative, 
and is thus conjugated : fujo, foges.foge, fugimos, 
fugis, fogem, I run away, &;c. It is also irregular 
in the imperative mood, where it is conjugated 
thus : foge tu,fuja Hle,fujdmos ms,fugi vos. fujao 
Hies. Finally, it is irregular in the present subjunc- 
tive ; que eufuja,fujas, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 93 

It keeps the u in all other tenses and moods, as 
also the g. 

The verb surgir, to arrive, or to come to an an- 
chor, has the same irregularity, and makes sicrto, in 
the participle passive. 

The verbs subir, cubrir, encubrir, descubrir, acu-_ __ * • 
dir, buHir, sumir, comumir, cuspir, const ruir/fos/ir^^^^' 
Sec. have the same irregularity in regard to the let- 
ter u. 

Of the irregular Verb pedir, to ask. 

This verb is irregular in the first person singular 
of the present indicative and subjunctive, as well as 
in the imperative, in which it changes the a? into f. 

Indicative. 

tu pego, I ask, &c. nos pedimos. 

tu pedes, vos pedis, 

tile, pede, tiles fiedem. 

Imperative. 

pegamos nos, let us ask. 
pede tu, ask thou. pedi vos, ask you. i 

pega tile, let him ask. pegao elles, let them ask. 

Subjunctive. 

que eu pega, that I may ask, &e. pegamos. 

pegas, pegdis. 

pega. pegao. 

In like manner is conjugated the verb medir 7 to , 
measure : eu mico % tu medes, Sec. 

Of the irregular Verb vestir, to dress. 

Indicative. 





Present. 




eu vis to, 


I dress, &c. 


vestimos. 


veste.s, 




vestzs. 


veste, 




vestem* 



94 PORTUGUESE 

Imperative. 

vistdmos nos, let us dress. 
visit tu, dress thou. vesti vbs, dress you. 

vista tile, let him dress. vistao elks, let them dress. 

Subjunctive. 
Present. 
qut eu vista, that I may dress, &c. ~ vistdmos, 
vistas, vistdis, 

vista, vistao. 

In all other tenses and moods it keeps the let- 
ter e ; and in like manner is conjugated the verb 
despir. 

Of the irregular Verb sortir, to furnish, or stock. 

Feyjo says, that the o of this verb is to be changed 
into u, in those tenses where the t is followed by e 
or a, and that it is to be kept, when the t is followed 
by i ; but in the Fabula dos planetas we. read, surtio 
effSyto, it took effect : and in Andrade 2 part . Apolo- 
get. we read, nao sortirao effeyto, where the verb 
sortirab is in the same tense, viz. in the preterperfect 
definite; therefore nothing can be determined about 
the irregularity of this verb. 

Of the irregular Verb carpir, to weep. 

This verb is defective, and is only used in those 
tenses and persons where the p is followed by i; as 
carpimos, carpis, we weep, you weep. Preterim per- 
fect, carpia, carpias, &c. I did weep, fyc. 

Of the irregular Verb parir, to bring forth young as 
any female doth. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 

eu pairo, I bring forth, &c. parimos. 

pares, par is. 

pare, pdrem. 
Imperfect. 
paria, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 95 

Imperative Mood. 

pairdmos, 
pare tu, bring thou forth, &c, part, 
pair a ella t pdirao. 

Subjunctive. 

Present. 

que eu paira, that I may say, &c. pairdmos* 

pair as, pair&iS, 

paira, pairao. 

Of the irregular Verb repetir, to repeat. 

Indicative. 

Present. 

repito, I repeat, &c. repetimos. 

repe'tes, repetis. 

repete, repe'tem. ; x , 

Imperfect. 
repetja, repetias, &c. 
Preterperfect definite. 
repetz, repetis te, &<:• 

Imperative. 
repete tu, repeat thou, &c. repitamos, &c. 

rep it a elle, 

Subjunctive. 
Present. 
que eu repita> that I may repeat, &c. 
repitas, &c. 

Imperfect. 
repetir a, or repetisse, that I might repeat. 

Of the irregular Verbs sahir, to go out, and cahir, t& 

fall, 

Indicative. 
Present. 
sdyo y I go out, &c. sakimos* 

sdhes, sahis. 

sdhe y sdkem. 

Preterimperfect, 
sahia } sah'as, &c. 



96 PORTUGUESE 

Preter perfect definite, 
sahi, sahiste, &c. 

Imperative. 

sahdtnos nos. 
sake tu, sahi vos. 

sdya elle, sdyao elles. 

Subjunctive. 

que eu sdya, sdyas, &c. 

This is the common way of writing the irregular 
tenses of the verb sahir as well as those of the verb 
cahir, viz. ou cdyo, tucahes, &c. I fall,.<Sfc. according 
to Feyjo, 

Of the irregular Verb, ordir, to warp in a loom. 

Feyjo says that this verb changes the o into u, in 
those persons where it would otherwise meet with 
the syllables da, de, do. 

Of the irregular Verb advertir, to warn. 

Adoertir is irregular in the following tenses, only 
by changing vir into ver. 

Indicative. 

Present. 

advirto, I warn, &c. advertimos. 

advertes, advertis. 

adverte, ' advertem. 

Imperative. 

advirtamos nos. 
advirte tu, warn thou, &c adverti vos. 

advxrta elle, adv'irtao elles. 

Subjunctive. 

Present. 
que eu advirta, that I may warn, &c. advirtamos. 
advirtas, advirtais. 

advirta^ advirtao, 



GRAMMAR. $7 

The Conjugation of the irregular Verb p6i\ to place. 
Indicative. 

Present. 

pinko, I put, &c. pomos. 

pdens, pondes. 

■ poem, poem. 

Preterim perfect. 

punka,! did put. prinkamos. 

punkas, punheis. 

punka, punkao. 

Preterperfect definite. 

puzy I put, &c. puzemos. 

puzeste, - puzestes. 

poz i puztrao. 

Freterperfect. 

It is composed of the present indicative of the 
auxiliary verb t£r, and the participle posto. 

Preterpluperfect. 
It is composed of the participle posto^ and the 
imperfect of the auxiliary verb ter. 

Future. 

porei, I shall or will put, &c. porcmos* 
pords, poreis. 

pord % pordo. 

Imperative. 

ponhdmos nos, 
poem, put thou, &c. ponde vis. 

pdnka elle, ponkab* elks. 

Optative and Subjunctive* 
Present. 
que eu ponha, that I may put, &c* 
ponkas, &c. 

First Preterimperfect. 

que eu puzera or puzesse, that I might put, &c* 
pu%fras or puzesses, &c. 
H 



98 PORTUGUESE 

Second Preterimperfect. 
eu porta, I should put, &c. 

porias, See. 

Preterperfect. 
It is composed of the participle pdsto, and the 
present subjunctive of the auxiliary verb t£r. 
Preterpluperfect. 
It is composed of the participle pdsto, and the 
first preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary 
verb tir. 

Second Preterpluperfect. 
It is composed of the participle pdsto, and the 
second preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary 
verb tir. 

Future, 
qudndo eu pusc'r, when I shall put, &c. 

pushes, &c. 

Second Future. 
It is composed of the participle pdsto, and the 
future subjunctive of the auxiliary verb th\ 

Infinitive. 

Present. 

por, to put. 

Gerund. 

pondo, putting. 

Participle passive. 

posto, put. 

After the same manner are conjugated the verbs 

derived from por ; a,s compdr, to compose ; dispdr, 

to dispose ; propdr, to propose, &c. 

Some verbs are irregular only in the participle 
' passive ; as aberto, from ahrir ; escrito, from escre- 
vir, &c. 

Of Verbs Neuter, 
Verbs neuter are those which make a complete, 
sense of themselves, and do not govern any case af- 



GRAMMAR. 99 

*er them, like the verbs active ; as dormir, to sleep; 
anddr, to go; tremir, to tremble, &c. But you 
must take notice that we meet with some verbs neu- 
ter which may govern an accusative ; as dormir hum 
sono profunda, to sleep soundly ; iufui anddndo miu 
caminho, e nao disse huma paldvra, I went my way, 
and said not a word. We may also say, that the 
verbs neuter are those which, in their compound 
tenses, are seldom or never conjugated with the verb 
ser, to be ; as, I sleep, I tremble, I speak, &c. We 
may indeed say, iu tinho dormido, I have slept; t'u 
tenho tremido, I have trembled; but not, I am slept, 
&c. I said seldom, because sometimes the verbs 
neuter may be conjugated with the verb set; as, 
sir bem fallddo, to have a good name. 

. It is necessary to be acquainted with the nature 
of a verb neuter, to avoid mistakes in the participle, 
as may be seen in the Syntax of Participles. 



Of Reciprocal Verbs. 

The name of Reciprocal Verbs is given to such 
as return the action upon the agent, and are conju- 
gated through all their tenses with the pronouns 
conjunctive me, te, se, &c. 

Example. 

Indicative. Present. 

iu me arrependo, I repent, &c. 

tu te arrependes, 
Site se arrepende, &c. 

Imperfect. 
iu me arrependia, I did repent, &c. 

and so of the rest. 

Yet we are to take notice that the pronouns con- 
junctive me, te, Sec. may be placed either before or 
after the verb, in the indicative, and consequently 
we may say, iu me limbro, or eu Umbro-me, I r#* 

h 2 



100 PORTUGUESE . 

member; me lembrei, or lembrei-me, I remembered, 
&c. But in the imperative they ought to be placed 
after the verb, as in the following 

Example. 

lembrtmo-nos nos. 
limbra-te lu, remember thou, &c. lembrai-vos vos. 
limbre-se tile, lembrem se elks. 

In which example you must observe also, that the 
first person plural, which in the other verbs is like 
the first person plural of the present subjunctive, has 
the last consonant, s, cut off; and so from lembremos 
we cut off the s to make lembrtmo-nos ; anH from 
arrependdmos we make arrependdmo-nos, &c. In re- 
gard to the infinitive, we may say, he necessario ar- 
repender-se dos peccados, it is necessary to repent sins ; 
he necesshrio lembrar-se, it is necessary to remember ; 
and not se arrepender, or se lembrar. In like man- 
ner we may say, kmbrdndo-me, remembering, and not 
me lembrdndo. Yet you must take notice that the 
•present infinitive may be preceded by the particle 
para, (which forms the Portuguese supine) and 
,then the pronoun conjunctive may be placed either 
before or after it; and so we may say, paralembrar- 
se, or para se lembrar, to remember, or in order to 
remember. 

As for the subjunctive mood, you must put the 
pronoun conjunctive before the present : but you 
must carefully observe, that the pronouns conjunc- 
tive must be placed before it when preceded by the 
particles se, if, que, that ; and so you may say, que 
hi me lembrdsse, se Su me kmbrdsse, that I might re- 
member, &c. but not que eu lelnbrasse me, &c. But 
when the first preterimperfect is not preceded by 
any particle, then you must place the pronoun con- 
junctive after it; as, arrepcnderame tu disso, I wish 
I repented it. 

In the second preterimperfect we may place the 
pronouns conjunctive either before or after it, there* 



GRAMMAR. 101 

fore you may say arrependeria-me se % Sec, or eu me 
arrepe?7(le?ia se, Sec. I should repent if, &c. 

In the future you must always place the pronouns 
conjunctive before it; and so we may say, qudndo 
eu me lembrdr, when I shall remember : but not 
qudndo Su kmbrdr-me. 

Note, all the verbs active may become recipro- 
cals. 

Example. 

eu me dmo, I love myself. 

tu te dmas, thou lovest thyself. 

tile se dma, he loves himself. 

nos nos amdmos, we love ourselves, &c. 

The Conjugation of the reciprocal Verb ir-se, to go 

away. 
Indicative. 
Present. 
tu me vou, I go away. 
tu te vds, &c. thou goest away, &c, 

Preterimperfect. 
eu me kza, I did go away. 
tu te kiaSy&c, thou didst go away, &c, 

Preterperfect definite. 
eu mefui, I went away. 
tu tefoste, &c. thou wentest away, &c. 
Preterperfect. 
eu me tenho ido t I am gone away, or I have gone away. 
tu te tens ido, &c. thou hast gone away, &c. 

Preterpluperfect. 
eu me tinha ido, I was gone away, or I had gone away, 

tu te tinhas ido 9 &c. thou hast gone away, &c. 

Future. 
tu me irei, &c. I shall or will go away, 
tu te irds, 8cc. thou shah go away. 

Imperative. 

vdi-te, go thou away, 

vd-se, let him go away. 

vdmo-nos 9 let us go away. 

ide~vos t go away, get away, of get you gone* 

vdo-se, let them go away. 



102 PORTUGUESE 

Subjunctive. 

Present. 
que eu me va, that I may go away. 

que tu te vds, &c. that thou mayest go away, See, 

First Preterimperfect. 

eu mefora, or me fosse, I went away. 

teforas, or te fosses, &c. thou wentest away, &c. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

eu me iria, I would, &c. go away. 

tu te irias, thou wouldst, &c. 

Preterperfect. 

que eu me tenha ido, that I have gone away, &c. 

Preterpluperfect. 

que eu me tivera, or me tivesse ido, that I had gone away. 

Second Preterpluperfect. 

eu me teria ido, I should have gone away, &c. 

Future. 
qudndo eu me for, when I shall go away, &c. 

Second Future. 
qudndo eu me tiver /do, when I shall have gone away, &c, 

Infinitive. 

fr.se, to go away. 

Preterperfect. 

terse ido, to have gone away. 

Participles. 

Present. 
que se vd t that is gone away. 



GRAMMAR. 10s 

Preterit. 
ido, gone away. 

Future. 
que ha de z'r-sc, that is to go away. 

Gerunds. 

indorse \ going away. • 
tendo-se ido, having gone away. 

Supine. 
para z'r-se, to gOj or in order to go away. 

You must observe, that in the compound tenses 
the pronouns me, te, Sec. are placed before the auxi- 
liary verb. 

£dly. This verb is also said of vessels to signify 
their being leaky ; as vai-se a cuba, the tub leaks. 
It is also used before the gerunds; as, o inverno 
vai-se acabdndo, the winter is drawing towards an 
end; elles vao-se prepardndo, they are preparing 
themselves: in which examples and in the like, the 
verb is to be rendered into English by the verb to 
be itself, and without addition of the adverb away ; 
and sometimes it is placed before the present infi- 
nitive ; as, xr-se deitar, to go to bed. 

Of the reciprocal Verb vir-se, to come away. 

This verb is to be conjugated like the verb vir; 
but you must place the pronouns conjunctive, me, 
te, &c. according to the observations we have made 
above. 

Of the reciprocal Verb avir-se, to agree. 

This is a compound verb, which is to be conju* 
gated by putting the particle a before the verb vir 
in all its tenses and moods; but you must always 



104 PORTUGUESE 

make use of the observations already made about 
the pronouns conjunctive; and the same care must 
be had with the reciprocal verb havir-se, to behave; 
in the conjugation of which, you have nothing to 
do but to add the pronouns conjunctive to the verb 
havSr. 

Impersonal Verbs. 

There are three sorts of verbs impersonal, which 
have only the third person singular. 

The first are properly im personals of themselves ; 

as 3 

succede, it happens. 

basta, it is enough, or it suffices. 

chovc, it rains. 

troveja, it thunders. 

The second are derived from verbs active, fol- 
lowed by the particle se, which renders them im- 
personal; as, dma-se, they love ; diz-se, they say ; 
mota-se, it is noted. ^They are also called passive 
im personals. 

The third, which have a great affinity with re- 
ciprocal verbs, are conjugated with the pronouns 
conjunctive, me, te, Ike, nos, ws, Ikes; as doe me, 
doete, doe-Ike, &c. 

The impersonal verbs of themselves are,, 

convem, it is convenient. 
succede, it happens, or it falls out. 
estd-me bem, it becomes me. 
b&sta, it is enough. 
M-se, it.is necessary. 
chovisca, it misles. 
chove, or cake pedra, it hails, 
gea, ir freezes. 
nc'va, it snows, 

Juzila, or relampaguea, it lightens; 
importa, it matters, it concerns, 
Parect, it seems, 



GRAMMAR. 105 

and the like, which are conjugated with the third 
persons, singular of each tense ; as, 

Indicative. 

Present. 
chove, it rains. 

Imperfect. * 
chovia, it did rain* 

Preterperfect definite; 
choveo, it rained. 

Preterperfect. 
- ttm chovzdo, it has rained. 

Preterpluperfect. 
tinha chovido t it had rained. 

Future. 
chovcrd, it shall or will rain. 

Imperative. 

ckova, let it rain. 

Optative and Subjunctive, 

Present. 

que ckova, that it may rain. 

Imperfect. 
que chovcra, or choztesse, that it might raits. ' 
Second Imperfect. 
choveriu, it should rain. 

Future. 
qudndo chover, when it shall rain. 

Second Future. 
qudndo tivit ckovi'do, when it shall have rained, 

Infinitive. 

thovir, to rain. 



105 PORTUGUESE 

The particle se, which composes the second sort 
of impersonal verbs, may be placed either before or 
after them ; as diz-se, they say ; sabe-se, it is known ; 
sabia-se, it was known : logo se soube, it was imme- 
diately known; se diz, it is said, fyc. but sometimes 
they make no use of the particle se, and only put 
the verb in the third person plural; as, dizem, in- 
stead of se diz, they say. 

In like manner all the verbs active may become 
impersonal. 

In regard to these verbs, take notice, that when 
the noun that follows them is in the singular num- 
ber, you must put the verb in the singular ; if the 
noun be in the plural, you put the verb in the plu- 
ral: 

Example. 

Louva-se o capitao, they praise the captain. 
Louvao-se os capitals \ they praise the captains. 
Ve-se hum ho mem, they see a man. 
Vem-sc homens, they see men. 

When Ihe is used after the word se, then Ihe is to 
be rendered into English by his or her ; as, louva- 
se-lhe o valdr, they praise his or her courage. 

The third sort of impersonal verbs are such as 
are conjugated with the pronouns personal, me, te, 
Ihe, &c. with the third person, singular. 

Example. 
Indicative. 

Present. 

desagrdda-mc, I am. displeased, or it displeases me. 

desagrada-tt, thou art displeased. 

desagrdda-lhe, he or she is displeased. 

desagrdda-nos, we are displeased. 

dejagrdi-a-vos, you are displeased. 

desagrdda-lhes, they are displeased. 

Imperfect. 
dtsagraddva-me, I was displeased. 



GRAMMAR. 107 

Preterperfect definite. 
desagradou-me, I was displeased. 

Future. 
desagradar-me-hd, I shall be displeased. 

Optative. 

que me desagrade, that I may be displeased. 

- Imperfect. 

que me desagradara or me desagradasse, that I were displeased, 

Second Imperfect. 

desagraddr-me-kia, I should be displeased. 

Conjugate after the same manner, 

succede-me, it happens to me. 
dde-me, it grieves or it pains me. 
pareee-me, it seems to me. 
he-me preciso, it behoves me. 
agrada-me, it pleases me. ' 

lembro-me, I remember. 

Many of these impersonal verbs have the third 
person singular and plural ; as, 
doe me a perna, my leg pains me. 
ddem-me os olhos, I have sore eyes. 
o vosso vestido parece-me novo, your coat appears new to 

me. 
os vossos sapdtosme parecem muito compr/dos, your shoe* 

seem to me too long. 

Of the Verb ser, to be. 

The verb ser is also used as an impersonal, as it 
appears in the following examples : he timpo de le- 
vantar-se, it is time to get up; era ttmpo de hir y it 
was time to go, fyc. and particularly when it is con- 
jugated with the adjectives preciso or necessario ; as, 
1 he preciso or necessario J azer isto, this must be done; 
era preciso or necessario escrevir, it was necessary to 
write; £u iria, se fdsse preciso, I would go, if it 



IMS PORTUGUESE 

should be necessary; he preciso que eu va, I must 
go ; he preciso que eu leya, I must read ; he preciso 
que elle coma, he must eat ; seria preciso que eu fosse, 
I should go. You see by the last examples, that 
when the verb ser and the adjective are before the 
conjunctive mood, with the participle que, the con- 
junctive is rendered in English by the infinitive ; 
but if the verb ser is followed by the relative or par- 
ticiple que, it must then be rendered in English in 
the folio wing manner ; as eu he que tenhofeito aquillo, 
ffiS I who have done that ; tu he que tens, fyc. 'tis 
thou who hast, &c. tile he que tern, 8§c. 'tis he who, 
&c. nbs he que itmos, &c. 'tis we who have, &c. vos 
he que tendts, 8$c. 'tis you who have, &c. Hies he que 
tern, 8$c. 'tis they have, &c, a ley he que o mdnda, 'tis 
the law that prescribes it; ilia he que o ere, 'tis she 
who believes it; tiles he que o fiztrao ? is it they 
have done it ? tu hi que ofiz, 'twas I who did it ; en- 
tdo he que tu tomo as minhas medidas, 'tis then I take 
my measures ; entao he que tu vi, 'twas then I saw, 
or only then I saw. You may observe that que is 
not relative in the last examples, and that it is left 
out in English. 

Of the Verb haver, when it is impersonaL 

It is to be so conjugated. 

Indicative. 

Present, 

hd, or nafi hd, there is, or there is not, or there are, or 
there are not. 

Imperfect, 
havia, there was, or there were. 

Preterperfect definite. 
houve, there was, or there were. 



GRAMMAR. 109 

Preterperfect. 
tern kavido, there has been or there have been. 

Preterpluperfect. 
fin ha kavido, there had been. 

Future. 
haver a, there shall be. 

Imperative. 
hdja, let there be. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 
que hdja, that there may be. 

Imperfect. 
$ue houvera or kouvesse, that there were; 

Second Imperfect. 
kaveria, there would be. 

Preterperfect. 
' f ue tinha kavido, if there had been. 

Preterpluperfect. 
se tivesse kavido, - if there had been. 

Future. 
qudndo houver, when there will or shall be. 

Second Future. 

Qudndo tiver kavido, when there shall have been. 

Infinitive. 
" haver, there to be. 

Pret. 
fir kavido, there to have been. 

Gerunds. 

kaver.do, there being. 

tindo *'kavido, in there having been. 

Those who learn Portuguese are greatly at a loss 
,ho\v to render the following expression there is not; 



110 PORTUGUESE 

is there f and though there is nothing so easy ; how- 
ever, I have explained them at large in the following 
conjugation. 

Conjugation of the Verb impersonal there is, ha, 
when it marks the place, through all its tenses. 



There is of it, 
There is not of it, 
Is there of it ? 
Is there not of it^? 
Therre was of it, 
There was not of it, 
Was there of it ? 
Was there not of it ? 
There was of it, 
There was not of it, 
Was there of it ? 
Was there not of it ? 
There shall be of it, 
There shall not be of it, 
Shall there be of it ? 
Shall there not be of it ? 
That there may be of it, 
That there may not be of it, 
That there were of it, 
That there were not of it, 
There would be of it, 
There would not be of it, 
Would there not be of it? 
If there had been of it, 
If there had not been of it, 
Had there been of it ? 
Had there not been of it ? 
There would have been of it, 
There would not have been 

of it, 
Would there have been of it ? 
Would there not have been 

of it ? 
When there will be of it, 
When there will not be of it, 



ha la disso. 
nao hd Id disso, 
hd Id disso ? 
nao hd Id disso ? 
havia Id disso. 
nao havia Id disso, 
havia Id disso? 
nao havia Id disso ? 
houve Id disso, 
nao houve Id disso. 
houve Id disso ? 
nao houve Id disso ? 
haverd Id disso. 
nao haverd Id disso. 
haverd Id disso ? 
nao haverd Id disso ? 
que hdja la disso. 
nao hdja Id disso. [disso. 
que houvera or houvesse Id 
nao houvera or houvesse Id 
haveria Jd disso. \jiisso» 
nao haveria Id disso. 
nao haveria Id disso ? 
se five's se havido Id disso. 
se nao tivesse havido Id disso. 
teria havido Id disso ? 
nao teria havido Id disso ? 
teria havido Id disso. 
nao teria havido Id disso, 

teria havido Id disso ? 
nao teria havido Id disso ? 

quando houver Id disso. 
qudndo nao houver Id disst. 



GRAMMAR. Ill 

When there will have been qudndo tivir havido la disso. 

of it, 

When there will not have qudndo nao tiver havido Id 

been of it, disso. 

Will there have been of it ? terd havido la disso ? 

Will there not have been too nao terd havido Id disso t 

much di it? 

For there having been too por ter havido Id demasiada* 

much of it, mente disso. 

In there having been too little tindo havido Id muito pouco 

of it. disso. 

Most ways of speaking beginning with some, and 
the verb to be, are expressed in Portuguese by the 
impersonal ha; as, some friends are false, ha ami- 
gosfdlsos; some Christians are unworthy of that 
name, hd Christ dos que nao sao dignos de tal ndme. 

Observe that ha comes before a substantive even 
of the plural number. 

The impersonal ha is besides used to denote a 
quantity of time, space, and number; as, hd de% 
dnnos que morreo, he has been dead these ten years ; 
or, he died ten years ago ; ha trinta milhdens oV almas 
em Franca, there are thirty millions of souls in 
France; de Paris a Ldndres ha 120 Ugoas, Paris is 
120 leagues from London. 

The question of space is asked thus, qudnto hd de 
Paris a Londres ? how far is Paris from London? 

Of the impersonal Verb ha-se, it is necessary, or must. 

This verb answers to the Italian bisogna, and to 
the French ilfaut, and always requires after it the 
particle de, and the infinitive. It denotes the ne- 
cessity of doing something, and is Englished by must, 
and sometimes by the verb to be, through all its 
tenses, with some of these words, necessary, requisite, 
needful: and as it denotes the necessity of doing 
something in general, without specifying who must, 
therefore the subject coming before must may be 
either /or we, he, or she, or any body, according tc* 
the sense of the speech ; as, 



112 PORTUGUESE 

Ha se defozer aguillo, one, or we, or you, or he> 
or somebody must do that. 

Ha-se de hir, I or you, or we or somebody must 

go- 
Sometimes the verb coming after this impersonal, 

is Englished by the passive voice; as, ha-se defazfa 

isto, this must be clone. 

It is very often joined with mister; as, ha-se de 

mister din heir o para demdndas, one must have money 

to go to law ; ha-se de mister hum bom amigo para 

fazer for tuna no mfoido, to push one's fortune in the 

world, one must have a good friend. 

As for the conjugation of this verb, you must 

make use of the verb to be with necessary, as I have 

already said. 

Example. 

Present, ha-se, it is necessary. Imperfect, havia- 
se, it was necessary ; and so through all the tenses 
and moods. 

You must take notice, that sometimes the infini- 
tive that follows the particle de is placed between 
this impersonal and its particle se; as, ha-de achar-se, 
it 'will be found, and sometimes the infinitive pre- 
cedes the impersonal, and this follows the particle 
se ; as, achar-se-ha, it will be found ; and in this 
case you must not join the particle de to it. Observe, 
that the infinitive may be also placed between 
the imperfect tense of this impersonal verb and its 
particle se; as, havia de achar-se, it was to be 
found ; but when the infinitive precedes both the 
impersonal and its particle se, then you must put 
the particle se before the impersonal, and make use 
of the imperfect hia, and not havia; so you niay 
say, achdr-se hia, and not achar-se-havia. 



- . GRAMMAR. 11 j 

Of the defective Verbs carpir, to weep, and soer, to be 

wont. 

The verb carpir is used only in those tenses and 
persons where thesis followed by an i; as, carpi- 
mos, carpis, we weep, you weep. Preterimp. carpia, 
carplas, &c. I did weep, &c. 

The verb socr is only used in the third persons of 
the present indicative of the preterimperfect of the 
sanae mood, and in the gerund; as, elle she , he is 
wont; elles soem, they are wont. Imperf. Hie soia, 
he was wont; Sites soiao, they were wont. Ge- 
rund, soendo, being wont. 



CHAP. V. 

Of the Participles. 

'"THE participle is a tense of the infinitive, which 
serves to form the preterperfects and preter- 
pluperfects of all the verbs ; as, tenho amado, I have 
loved ; tinha amado, I had loved. 

Amado is a participle, and all the verbs in ar form 
the participle in ado ; as, amado, cantado, &c. 

Amado is likewise a noun adjective. Example. 
Hdmem amado, mother amada; livros amados, let r as 
amadas. 

Some participles are frequently abridged; as,e«- 
volto, or envolvido, corrupt o or corrompido, enxuto or 
enxugado ; and several others, which the use of au- 
thors will point out to you. 

The regular verbs ending in er or ir form the 
participle in ido ; as, vendido, rxcebido, luzido, nu- 
tr'ido, &c. 

I 



114 PORTUGUESE 

There are three sorts of participles ; namely, ac- 
tive, passive, and absolute. 

The active participles are composed of the verb 
ter ; as, tenho amado, tinha amado, &c. 

The passive participles are preceded by the verb 
ser, to be ; as, sou amkdo, sendo louvado, &c. 

The passive participles are of the same nature 
as those called absolute in Latin ; and you must ob- 
serve, that having and being are often left out in 
Portuguese. 

EXAMPL E. 

Feito isto, having done this. 
Dito isto, having said so. . 
Acabada a cea, after he or they have supped. 

The auxiliary and participle are not always im- 
mediately joined together in compound tenses ; as, 
Nos temos, com a graqa de Deos, vencido os nossos 
inimigos, we have, by the grace of God, overcome 
our enemies. 



CHAP. VI. 

Of the Adverbs. 

HTHE adverb is that which gives more or less force 
to the verb. 

The adverb has the same effect with the verb as 
the adjective with the substantive : it explains the 
accidents and circumstances of the action of the 
verb. 

There are a great many sorts ; as, adverbs of 
time, place, quantity, &c. 

Adverbs of time; as, at present, present envente ; 
now, agora; yesterday, untem; to day, hoje; never, 



GRAMMAR. 115 

nunca; always, sempre ; in the mean time; entrc- 
tdnio. 

Adverbs of place; as, where, onde ; here, aqui ; 
from whence, donde ; there, ali ; from hence, da- 
qui; above, em cima ; below, em baxo;_far, longe ; 
near, perto. 

Adverbs of quantity ; as, how much, qudnto, 
how many, quant os ; or quant as ; so much, tdnio ; 
mucb,miato.; little, pouco. 

A great many adverbs are formed from adjec- 
tives, changing o into amente ; sdnto, santamenie^ 
liolily ; rico, ricamenie, richly ; douto, doutame i nte y 
learnedly. 

From adjectives in e or / we likewise form adverbs, 
by adding merit e to them ; as, 

Consldnte, const ant emente, constantly. 

Diligent e 7 diligent entente, diligently. 

Prudent e, prudent emente, prudently, 

Fiel, jielmente, faithfully. 

In order to assist the memory of those who. are 
learning the Portuguese language, I have here col- 
lected a large number of adverbs, which, by fre- 
quent repetition, may be easily retained, especially, 
those terminated in mente. 

A Collection of Adverbs. 

Abundantemente, abundantly. Adeds, farewell. 

Com razaojustamtnte, justly. Admit avelmente, "j , . 

Ab s olutaminte, "absolutely. MaravilhGsaminte, V , . ~ 

A Escachapernas, or a ca- A'smilmaravilhas,} 

valleiro, a-straddle. Astutamente, cunningly. 

Agora, or por hora, now at Atreicoadamente, treacher- 

this time. ously. 

Jdpara jd, now, immediately Be maraviiha, very seldom, 

Comcondifao,upon condition. A miudo, often. 

De parte, aside. Assi'm, so, e** . * ** -™^^ ^kJ^^miafk. 

De travez, askew, asquint; Tao, so. — ^^tt^U-, *^<Ji^' 

as, olhdr de travez, \a look A'pressa, in haste, 

askew, or asquint. Faalmenfe, easily. 

Actualmente, actually. A'o avesso^ or dsave'ssas, the 

De propbsitd, purposely. \ - wrong side outward. 

I 2 



be- */L?*£^ & vef^&s <*^>-*^^ Arr-r*jfiJfcr~i&ni 



IIS PORTU 

De improviso, or improvisa- 

mente, at unawares. 
Antigamente, anciently. 
Quasi, pretty near, almost. 
Entdo, then. 

Desde entao, since that time. 
Desdequdndo ? since when ? 
Dequdnda ha? from what 

time ?. how long ? 
De qudndo em qudndo, now 

and then, ever and anon. 
Qudndo bem,or ainda qudndo , 

albeit, ahhough it should 

be. 
Qudndo muito, at the most. 
Qudndo m.enos, at least. 
Cd, here, or hither. " 
La, there. -" 
Alt, there, in that place. 

f there, expresses the 
j place where stands the 
Ahi,<{ person spoken to; as, 
j ahi onde estds, there 
^where you are.. 
Acoid, there. 
Trdz, or detraz, behind. 
Para trdz, backward. 
I'sto he, to wit. 
Em vez, instead, 
Tambem, also. 
Tdnto que A 
Logo que, j 
De pensddo, wilfully. 
Acdso, by chance. 
Fixamcnte., stedfastly. 
Finalmtnte, finally. 
Livrtmente., freely. 
Muito, much. 
Depressa, quickly. 
Aqui, here. 
Ate aqui, as far. as here, or 

till now, or hitherto. 
D'aqui em didnte, hencefor- 
ward, or. hereafter. 
Mem, well. 



as soon as. 



GUESE 

A'manhda, to-morrow. 

Amanhda pela manhda, to- 
morrow morning. 

Despots a" a' manhda, after 
to morrow. 

Ultimaminte, lastly. 

Cdrno, as. 

CSmo ? how ? 

Cedo, soon. 

Tarde, late. 

Frimeiro que, before that. 

Primeiro que tudo, before all, 
or in the first place. 

Fcra, abroad, out. 

Jfd, already 

De sajto, at one jump. 

De qudndo em qudndo, from 
time to time. 

Antes, before. 

Despots, afterwards. 

Jimtamente, together. 

Enieiramente, entirely. 

A'o redor, or em tor no, about. 

Debdlde, in vain. . 

Loucamznte, madly. 

Muito, very. 

Atremdamente, boldly. 

Felicemente, happily. 

Vergonhosamente, shamefully 

Nunca, never. 

Nunca mats, never since. 

Logo, immediately. 

Ainda, yet ; as, ainda nao 
veto, he is not come yet. 

Ainda, even ; as, stria vtr- 
gonha ainda ofalldr nisso, 
it were a shame even t<» 
speak of it._ 
- Nem se quer, even. 

Vilmente, basely 4 

Mai, ill. 

Mais, more* 

Minos, less. 

Ate, until or even. 

Sim, yes. 



fC 






*?+' 



GRAMMAR. 117 

Nao, no, not. Qudndo, when. 

0' nd-, where. Nada^ nothing. 

Be cor, Hy heart. Verdadeiramente, truly. 

As vezes. sometimes, from Dentro, within, 
time to time. Devagar, softly. 



CHAP. VII. 

Of the Prepositions. 

pREPOSITIONS are a part of speech indeclin- 
able, most commonly set before a noun, a pro- 
noun, or verb. 

Every preposition requires some case after it, as 
you will see in the following collection : 

Genitive. 

Antes do dia, before day-break. 

Duinti de. Deos, before God. , 

Dentro da ivreja, within the church. 

De traz no paldcio, behind the palace. 

Debdxo da mesa,, under the table. 

Em cima da mesa, upon the table. 

Alem. besides. 

Alem dos mares, on that side of the seas. 

Alem disso, besides that, moreover. 

Alem de que, idem. 

Aquem, or daquem dos mares, on this side of the seas. 

Ao redor, or em conto-no da ciddde, round about the city. 

Perto de Londres, near London. 

Acerca da quelle negocio, concerning that affair. 

Fora da cdsa, out of the house. 

For a de perigo, out of danger. 

Fora de si, out of one's wits. 

This preposition governs also a nominative j as, fora seu 
irmao, except fits brother, or his, brother excepted. 
Defronte de minha casa, over-against my house. 
Defronte da igreja, facing the church. 
Despois de cea> after supper. 

Dative. 
Quanto dquillo, with respect to that. 
Pegddo a murdtha, close to the wall. 



118 PORTUGUESE 

Disde o bico do pi ate a cabeca, from top to toe. 

Accusative. 

Perdnte ojuzz, before the judge. 

Entre, between, among, or amongst. 

E'ntre os homens, among men. 

Sob re a mho,, upon the table. 

Confornie, or segundo a ley, according to the law. 

Por amor de Deos, for God's sake. 

Pelo mundo, through the world. 

Pela rua, through the streets. 

Pelas terras, through the lands. 

Por grdnde que se'ja, let it. never be so great. 

Contra tiles, against them. 

Trdz do templo, behind the temple. 

Durante, during ; as, durante o invemo, during the winter. 

We shall be more particular about prepositions 
when we examine their construction. 



CHAP. VIII. 

Of the Conjunctions. 

A CONJUGATION is an indeclinable part of 

speech which serves to join the members and 

parts of speech together, in shewing the dependency 

of relation and coherency between the words and 

sentences. 

Some conjugations are copulative, which join, 
and, as it were, couple two terms together ; as, e, 
and : Portugueses e Ingleses, Portuguese and English. 

Some are disjunctive, which shew separation or 
division; as, hem, nor, neither; ou, either, or. 
Example ; nem este, nem ague 4 lie, neither this, nor 
that ; ou este, ou aquelle, either this or that ; nem 
mals, nem menos, neither more nor less ; quer ofaca, 
quer nao, tudo para mini he o mesmo, it is all one to 
me whether he does it, or no; querseja verddde, quer 
nao, whether it be true, or not; nem se quer hu?n, 
not even one. 



GRAMMAR. 119 

The adversative denote restriction, or contrariety ; 
as, mas, or porem, but ; comtudo, yet, however ; mas 
antes, or pello contrario, nay. 

The conjunctions conditional suppose a condi- 
tion, and serve to restrain and limit what has just 
been said ; as, se, if ; Qom condicam que, com is to que, 
dado caso que, provided that, or upon condition that, 
or in case that, &c. 

The concessive, which shew the assent we give to 
a thing; as, zmbbra, or seja embbra } well and good ; 
estafeito, done, agreed. 

The causal shew the reason of something; as, 
porque, for, or because, or why. 

The concluding denote a consequence drawn 
from what is before ; as, logo or por consequential 
therefore, then, or consequently. 

The transitive, which serve to pass from one sen- 
tence to another ; as, alem disso, moreover, or besides 
that ; sobre tudo, or em summa, after all, upon the 
whole, in the main ; a propbsito, now I think on't, 
or now we are speaking of that. 

There are others of a different sort ; as, se quh\ 
or ao mbxos, at least ; aindaque, although ; de sbrtt 
que, so that ; antes quero pedir quefurtdr, I'll rather 
ask than steal; antes morrerei que dizer-volo, I'll 
rather die than tell you ; jd que, since, &c. 

To the above-mentioned parts of speech gramma- 
rians have added Interjections, which are particles 
serving to denote some passion or emotion of the 
mind; but there is another sort, which may be called 
demonstrative; as, aqui and la; Ex. Sste hbmem aqui, 
this man ; aquella molher la, that woman, &c. and 
some others continuative, because they denote con- 
tinuation in the speech ; as, com effeito, in effect ; 
alem disso, besides ; bra vejdmos, now let us see; final- 
mente Jhnonos embbra, and so, sir, we went away. 
To which we may add those invented to imitate the 
sounds of dumb creatures, and the noise which is 
occasioned by the clashing of bodies against one 
another ; as, %iz > traz } tb wick-thwack, &c. 



120 PORTUGUESE 

Interjective Particles. 

Of Joy. 
Ha, ha, ha ! Ha, ha, ha ! 
Oh que gosto! Oh joy ! 

Of Grief. 
Ay! Alas ! ah ! 

Ay de mim! Woe is me! lack ! 
MeuDeos! My God! 

Of Pain. 

Ay! Ay ! 

Oh! Oh! 

To encourage. 

A'nimo! \ ^ , 

n* , , > Come, come on ! 

To call. 
O, ola, Ho, hey, hip ! 

Of admiration or surprise. 
O, O la, ahi! Lack-a-day ! 
A' pre! Heyday ! 

Of aversion. 
Trra! \ 

Nada! > Away, away with, fye ! 
Fora! S 

For making people go out of the way, or stand away. 
Guardem-se, or arredem-se ! Have a care, clear the 
way, or stand away ! 

For shouting. 
Viva! Huzza ! 

Of silence. 
Calawos I Hush ! Peace ! 

Of cursing and threatening. 
Ai, guai ! Woe ! 

For derision. 
Ah! Ah! oh! oh! oh! 

Of wishing. 
O' proDera a Dios! Would to God ! 



GRAMMAR. 121 

Oxcdal or hah I O that ! 
O sel Would! 

The interjection O serves for different emotions 
of the mind, as admiration, grief, wish, &c. and 
sometimes is used ironically, but differently uttered, 
according to the emotion which it expresses. 

Some Abbreviations used in the Portuguese 
Language. 

An t0 Antonio Anthony 

Seb aril Sebastidm Sebastian 

B mo P e Beads si mo Padre The most blessedFather 

Cap™ Capxtao Captain 

Comp* Companhia Company 

Corr" Car r iio Post 

D. Dom or Dona Don or Dona 

D r , D or D out or Doctor 

D s Bios God 

D°, D a Ditto, ditta, Said 

Ex mo , Ex ma Excellent issimo, maWlost excellent 

V. E. Fossa exceUinaa Your Excellence 

V. S. Vbssa senhoria Your Lordship 

V. A. Fossa altesa Your Highness 

V. M. or V raee Vossa merci You 

V»P. Vossa paterniddde Your Paternity 

V. Mag de Vossa magesidde Your Majesty 

S. Santo Saint 

Eran co Francisco Francis 

G de Guarde Save 

J, H. S. 'Jesus Jesus 

M s a s Muitos dnnos Many Years 

M e Me'stre Master 

S or , S ra Senkor, ora, Sir, Lady 

H rao Reverendissimo Mot Reverend 

P a Para For 

Q e due That 

Q d0 Qudndo When 

Q m Quern Who 

Q t9 , Qudnto How much 

Supp te Supplicdnte Petitioner 

Gen al General General 

Tent e Tenente Lieutenant 

V. G. Verbi gratia For Example. 

And many others, that must be learned by use. 



122 PORTUGUESE 



A NEW 



PORTUGUESE 

GRAMMAR 



PART IL 

CHAP. L 

Of the Division of Syntax. 

gYNTAX is a Greek word, by the Latins called 
construction; and it signifies the right placing and 
connecting of words in a sentence. It is divided 
into three sorts ; the first, of Order or Arrangement ; 
the second, of Concordance ; the third of Govern- 
ment. The Syntax of Order or Arrangement, is the 
fit disposition of words in a sentence. The Syntax 
of Concordance, is when the parts of speech agree 
with one another, as the substantive with the adjec- 
tive, or the nominative with the verb. The Syntax 
of Government, is when one part of speech governs 
another. 

For the sake of those who, perhaps, have not a 
grammatical knowledge of their own language, I 
shall lay down some general rules of Portuguese 
construction. 



G R A M MAR. 4g* J23 

Of the Order of Words.. 

1. The nominative is that to which we attribute 
the action of the verb, and is generally ranged in 
the first place; it may be either a noun or pronoun, 
as, Francisco escreve, Francis writes; eufalto, I speak. 

2. When the action of the verb is attributed to 
many persons or things, these all belong to the no- 
minative, and are ranged in the first place, together 
with their conjunction; as, Pedro e Paulo iem x 
Peter and Paul read. 

3. The adjectives belonging to the nominative 
substantive, to which the action of the verb is attri- 
buted, are put after the substantive, and before the 
verb ; as, os estuddntes morlgerados e diligcntes estu- 
dao, the obedient and diligent scholars do study. 

4. If the nominative has an article, this article 
always takes the first place. 

5. Sometimes an infinitive is put for a noun, and 
stands for a nominative ; as o dormir faz hem, 
sleeping does one good : and sometimes a verb with 
its case; as, he acto de humanidade ter compaixao dos 
affiictos, to have compassion on the afflicted is an 
act of humanity. 

6. The nominative is sometimes understood; as, 
imo, where you understand eu; and so of the other 
persons of the verb. 

7. After the nominative you put the verb; and if 
there is an adverb, it is to be placed immediately 
after the verb, whose accident and circumstances it 
explains ; as, Pedro dmapor extremo a gloria, Peter 
is extremely fond of glory. 

8. The cases governed by the verb are put after 
it; they may be one, or many, according to the na- 
ture of the action ; as, hi dmo a Pedro, I love Peter. 
Fago presence de-hum livro a Paulo, I make a present 

, of a book to Paul. 



*« 124 PORTUGUESE 

9. The preposition is always put before the case 
it governs ; as, perto de casa, near the house. 

10. The relative is always placed after the ante- 
cedent; as, Pedro qual estuda, Peter who studies. 

II, Of Concordance. 

1. The adjectives agree with their substantives 
in gender, number, and case ; as, homem virtuoso, a 
virtuous man; bella molker, a handsome woman ; 
sumptuosos palacios, &c. sumptuous palaces> &c. 

2. When two or more substantives singular come 
together, the adjective belonging to them must be 
put in the plural; as, tdnto el rey como a rainha 
montddos a cavallo parecem bem, both the king and 
the queen look well when they ride. 

3. If the substantives happen to be one in the 
singular and the other in the plural, or to be of 
different genders, the adjective common to both 
agrees in number and gender with the last; as, tile 

' iinha os olhos e a boca aberta, or elletinha a boca e os 
olhos aberlos, his eyes and mouth were opened. As 
lagoas e rios estdvao congelddos, the ponds and rivers 
were frozen. 

4. But when there is one or many words between 
the last noun and the adjective, that adjective (com- 
mon to all) agrees with the noun masculine, though 
the last noun be feminine; and if the nouns are in 
the singular, then the adjrctive common shall be put 
in the plural number and masculine gender; as, 
rio e a lagoa estdvao cogdddos ; the pond and river 
were frozen, O trabalho, a industria, e a for tuna 
unidos ; pains, industry, and fortunejoined together. 

5. Every verb personal agrees with its nomina- 
tivet expressed or understood, both in number and 
person. 

6. The relative qual with the article agrees en- 
tirely with the antecedent ; but without the article 



GRAMMAR. 1£5 

and denoting an absolute quality, it agrees with 
what follows ; as, aquelle coracao o qual, &c. that 
heart which, 8$c. Consider x a ndo quaes seriao as con- 
digoens, &c. considering which would be the con- 
ditions, $c. 

7. The question and answer always agree in every 
thing; as, a que senhora pertencevm ce ? illerespondeo, 
perthico a rainha: Ta what lady do you belong, sir? 
and he answered, I belong to the queen. 

III. Of the Dependence of the Parts of Speech on 
one another. 

1. The nominative being the basis of the sen- 
tence, the verb depends on it, as the other cases 
depend on the verb,, Theadjective depends on the 
substantive that supports it ; and the adverb on 
the verb whose accidents it explains. 

2. The genitive depends on a substantive, ex- 
pressed or understood, by which it is governed. 

3. The accusative depends either on a verb ac- 
tive, or on a preposition. 

4. The ablative depends on a preposition by 
which it is governed ; as, parto de Roma, I go from 
Rome. 

5. The dative and vocative have, strictly speak- 
ing, no dependence on the other parts: the dative 
is common, as it were, to all nouns and verbs ; the 
vocative only points out the person to whom you 
speak. 

I now come to the Construction of the several 
parts of speech. 



1-26 PORTUGUESE 

CHAP. II. 

Of the Syntax 1 of Articles. 

T>EFORE we come to the syntax of the articles, 
remember that o, a, os, as, are articles only 
when they precede the nouns or pronouns, but not 
when joined to the verbs. 

Those who understand Latin will quickly per- 
ceive the difference, if they take notice that every 
time they render o, a, by ilium, Mam, Mud; or by 
mm, earn, id; and os, as, by illos, Mas, Ma; or by 
cos, eas, ea; they are relative pronouns. 

1. The article is used before the names of the 
species or things which can be spoken of; therefore 
nouns of substances, arts, sciences, plays, metals, 
virtues, and vices, having no article before them in 
English, require the article in Portuguese; as, 

O ouro e a prat a nao pbdem fazer feliz ao h6mem> 
gold and silver cannot make the happiness of man. 

A virtude nao he compativel com o vicio, virtue 
cannot agree with vice. 

A philosophia he huma sciincia muito nobre, philo- 
sophy is a very noble science. 

Joguimos as cartas, let us play at cards. 

2. The article is not placed before a substantive 
which is followed by the adjective of number that 
stands for a surname, or meet with a proper or 
Christian name; as, Joseph Primtiro, Joseph the 
First. 

3. When a book or some part of it, as chapter, 
page, &c. is quoted, the adjective of number may 
come either before or after the substantive ; but if 
it comes after, the two words are construed with- 
out article; as, livro primeiro, capiiulo segundo, &e. 
book i. chapter ii. If the adjective of number 



GRAMMAR. 127 

comes before the substantive, it takes the article ; 
.as, o primeiro livro, the first book. 

4. O placed before que signifies what or which ; 
as, j%« o que quiser, let him do what he likes ; o que 

iujiz, which I did. 

5. The article is never made use of before proper 
names of men, women, gods, goddesses, saints. 

6. The article is not used in Portuguese before 
the pronouns possessive relative; as, de quern he est a 
cdsa ? he minha, he tua, 8$c. whose house is this ? it 
is mine, it is thine, &c. 

7. When a mount's, mountain's or hilfs name, is 
preceded by the word monte, it takes neither ar- 
ticle or preposition; as, o Monte Atlante, Mount 
Atlas; os Mantes Pireneos, the Pirenean Moun- 
tains; but after the word serra, a ridge of hills, it 
takes the article ; as, a Serra da Estrella, Mount- 
Strella; Serra do Potosi, Mount Potosi; hqwever, 
they say r also, Serra Lioa. 

8. The noun of the measure, weight, and the 
number of the things that have been bought, re- 
quires the articles ; as, o trigo xende-se a tdnto o al- 
queire, what is sold so much a peck, three quarts 
and one pint. 

A manteiga vinde-se a tdnto o arratel, butter cost 
so much a pound. 

Os Svos vendem-se a tdnto a duzia, eggs are sold 
so much a dozen. 

9. No article is used with proper names of per- 
sons and planets, except a terra, the earth ; a sol, 
the sun ; a lua, the moon. 

10. When proper names are used in a determi- 
nate sense, that is, when they are applied to parti- 
cular objects, then they take. the article; o Dios 
dos Christ dos, the God of Christians; o Archimedes 
de Inglaterra, the Archimedes of England. The 
proper names of renowned poets and painters keep 
also the article ; as, o Camoem, o Pipe, o TJsso, o 
TicidnOy &c. 



1S8 PORTUGUESE 

1 J. The indefinite article de is used before nouns 
following one of this, sorte, especie,genero, and any 
other noun of which they express the kind, charac- 
ter, quality, and nature: which sort of nouns are 
usually Englished hy an adjective, or even by the 
substantive itself placed adjectively, and making 
together, as it were, but a word compound; as, 
Dor de cabSca, the head ach; huma sorte de fruto, 
a sort of fruit ; foliar de tolo, a foolish speech. 

Sometimes the English adjective may be made by 
an adjective too in Portuguese, as in the last example 
humjallar tolo, a foolish speech ; but sometimes too 
the Portuguese express the English adjective by a 
substantive of the same signification with de before 
the other noun, though they have an adjective of 
the same nature as the English adjective; as, odiabo 
•de minha mother, my devilish wife; and sometimes 
the adjective is used by them substantively, or the 
substantive is understood ; as, o velhaco de meufilho 9 
my rascally son; a velhaca de sua may, his or her 
rascally mother. Finally they also make use of the 
definite article; as, o didbo do home???,, or da molher, 
the devilish man or woman ; a pobre da molher, the 
poor woman, &c. 

12. Nouns are used without article in the fol- 
lowing cases : 

1st. At the title of a performance, and in the 
middle of sentences, where they characterise in a 
particular manner the person or thing spoken of, in 
which case the English use especially the particle 
a; as, 

Discurso sobre as obrigacoens da reUgiao natural, 
a discourse concerning the obligations of natural 
religion. 

P?^imiira ph?He, the first part. 

O Conde de Clermont, pmicipe do Sdngue, ?norreo y 
&c. the count^f Clermont, a prince of the blood, 
died, fyc. 



GRAM M A R. 12.9 

O S. t0 Antonio, nao de noventa pecas, the St. An- 
thony ; a ninety gun ship. 

2dly. In sentences of exclamation ; as, 

As mais bellas fibres sad as que memos durao; qualquer 
chuva as desmaia, o vento as murcha, o sol as queima > 
e acaba de secdr ; semfallar numa infinidade de insec- 
tos que as perseguem e deitao a perder ; natural e verda- 
deira imagem da belleza das senhoras! the handsomest 
flowers last hut a very short time ; the least rain 
tarnishes them, the wind withers them, the sun 
scorches them, and completes the drying of them; 
without mentioning an infinite number of insects 
that spoil and hurt them : a natural and true image 
of the ladies beauty ! 

Sdly. When they meet with a noun of number in 
an indefinite sense ; as, mil soldados de cwoallo contra 
cem infantes, a thousand horse against an hundred 
foot. 

Tenho lido dous poetas, I have read two poets, that 
is, any pair out of ail that ever existed. 

But before a noun of number, in a definite sense, 
it would take the article ; as, 

Tenho lido os dous poetas, I have read both poets ; 
because this plainly indicates a definite pair, of 
whom some mention has been made already. 

Os cem infantes que combat trad contra os mil de ca- 
ydllo, que, fyc. the hundred foot that fought with the 
thousand horse, that, &c. 

4thly. After the verb ser, when it signifies to be- 
come } and after ser tornado por, to be accounted ; 
passar por, to pass for ; as, file sera doutor com o tem- 
po, he will become a doctor in time ; elle pas sa por 
marinheiro, he passes for a sailor. 

When the adjective is used substantively, then it 
must have the neuter Portuguese article o before it ; 

O verde offende menos a vista <queovermelho, green 
hurts the eye less than red. 

There are also some adverbs preceded by the -neu- 

K 



130 PORTUGUESE 

tral article o ; as the following, o melhdr que iupuder, 
the best I will be able ; o minos que for posswel, the 
less it will be possible. 

Articles are repeated in Portuguese before as 
many nouns (requiring the article) as there are in 
the sentence ; as, 

O ouro, a prat a, a saude, as hdnras, e os deleites nao 
pbdem fazirfeliz ao homem que nao tern sciencia nem 
virtude, gold, silver, health, honours, and pleasures, 
cannot make a man happy without wisdom and 
virtue. 

The article o is put before the word senhor, sir, or 
my lord ; as, 

O senhor duque, my lord duke; o senhor president e, 
my lord the president; os senhdres, the gentlemen ; 
dos senhbres, of the gentlemen. 

You must observe the same rule for the feminine 
article a, which is to be prefixed to senhora, my lady, 
or madam ; as, a senhor a duqueza, or condissa de } $c. 
my lady duchess, or countess of, &c. 

The article is never used in Portuguese as it is in 
English, before mats more, or mcnos less, in the fol- 
lowing sentences, qudnto metis vivemos, tdnio metis 
aprendimos, the longer we live, the more we learn ; 
qudnto mais hum hydropxeo bebe, metis side tern, the 
more an hydropick drinks, the more thirsty he is ; 
qudnto metis hum homem he pobre, qudnto menos cui- 
dados tern, the poorer people are, the less care they 
have, &c. . 

Sometimes the English particle to, before infini- 
tives, is rendered in Portuguese by the article o ; 
as, hefdcil o dizir, o v6?% tyc. it is easy to say, to see, 
&c. 

In a word, the natural associators with articles are 
those common appellatives, which denote the several 
genera and species of beings, or those words which, 
though indefinite, are yet capable, through the ar- 
ticle, of becoming definite. Therefore Jpollonius 



GRAMMAR. 131 

makes it part of the pronoun's definition, to refuse 
coalescence with the article ; and it would be ab- 
surd to say o eu K the I ; or o tu, the thou ; because 
nothing can make those pronouns more definite 
than they are. 

N. B/When the adjective hum, huma, is used as 
an article in Portuguese, it respects our primary 
perception, and denotes individuals as unknown; 
but the articles, o, a } respect our secondary percep- 
tion, and denote individuals as known. To explain 
by an example : I see an object pass by which 
I never saw till then ; what do I say ? All vai hum 
pobre com huma barba comprida, there goes a beggar 
with a long beard. The man departs and returns a 
week after ; What do I say then ? AH vai o pobre 
da barba comprida, there goes the beggar with the 
long beard. 



i 



CHAP. III. 

Of the Syntax of Nouns ; and first, of the Substantives. 

Yf^HEN two or more substantives come together 
without a comma between them, thev all 
govern each the next in the genitive, the first 
governing the second, the second the third in the 
same case, and so on ; (that is, the first is always 
followed by the preposition de, or by the article be- 
fore the next noun) but that genitive can never 
come in Portuguese before the nouns that governs 
it, as in English : 

A philosophia de Newton, Newton's philosophy. 

As guar das do principe, the prince's guards. 

A porta da casa, the house-gate. 
K2 



HH PORTUGUESE 

Eis aqiii a casa do companheiro do irmao de minha 
mother, here is my wife's brother's partner's house. 

When two substantives singular are the nomina- 
tive of a verb, this must be put in the plural ; as, 
meu irmao e meu pai estao no cdmpo, my brother and 
my father are in the countiy. 

If the nominative is a collective name, the verb 
is always put in the singular; as, toda a ciddde assis- 
tie, all the city was present. 

Of the Syntax of Adjectives. 

Of adjectives, some are put before the noun, and 
some after; and others may be put indifferently, 
either before or after. 

The pronouns adjective possessive, meu, teu, seu % 
fyc and adjectives of number, come before the sub- 
stantive as in English. Ex. Meupdi, my father; a 
sua casa, his house ; duas pecoas y two people ; o pri- 
meiro komem, the first man. 

But when the adjective of number stands for a 
surname, or meets with a proper or Christian name, 
it comes after che substantive, without the article.; 
as, Jodo V. John the fifth. 

These following Adjectives come after the Substantive. 

1st. Verbal adjectives and participles ; as, hum 
hbmem diver tido, a comical, a merry man ; huma mot- 
her estimdda, a woman esteemed. 

2dly. Adjectives of names of nations; as, hum 
mathemdtico Inglez, an English mathematician; hum 
alfaiate France z, a French taylor ; musica Italidna, 
Italian music. 

3dly. Adjectives of colour ; as, hum vestido nSgro, 
a black suit of clothes ; hum capote vermellw, a red 
cloak, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 13S 

4thly. Adjectives of figure; as, huma mesa redon- 
da, a round table ; hum cdmpo triangular, a triangu- 
lar field, &c. 

5thly. Adjectives expressing some physical or na- 
tural quality ; such are quinte, hot; Jrio, cold; hu- 
mido, wet ; corcovddo, hunch-backed, &c. 

Most other adjectives are placed before or after 
the substantive; zs^sdnto, holy; verdadeiro, true, &c. 

If the substantive has three or more adjectives be- 
longing to it, they must absolutely be put after it 
with the enclitic e before the last, which must like- 
wise be observed, even when there be but two ad- 
jectives ; for the Portuguese don't say, huma desa- 
gradavel erifadonha bbra, &c. but huma bbra desagra^ 
davele erifadonha, &c. a disagreeable, tedious work. 

Of adjectives, some always require after them 
either a noun or verb, which they govern ; as, 
digno de louvor, praise-worthy ; digno de sir amado, 
worthy to be loved ; capdz de ensinar, capable to 
teach ; and these have always the particle de after 
them. 

Some will be used absolutely without being ever 
attended by any noun or verb ; as, prudinte, wise ; 
incurdvel, incurable, &c. 

Others may be construed both with and without 
a noun, which they govern ; ella lie huma mother 
imensivel, she is a woman without any sensibility ; 
ella he insensivel ao amor, she is insensible and a 
stranger to the passion of love. 

The following adjectives, which require the pre- 
position de before the next infinitive, govern the 
genitive case. Observe, that some of them require 
in English the preposition at or with before the next 
noun. 

Digno, worthy ; as, ilk he digno de louvor, he is 
worthy of praise. This adjective is sometimes fok 
lowed by que; as, digna que du ndmeffose, S$c. her 
najae deserved to be, &c. 



134 PORTUGUESE 

Indigno, unworthy; as, indigno da estimagab que f ago 
dille, unworthy of the esteem which I have for him. 

Capdz, capable ; incapaz, incapable ; as, capdz, 
ou incapaz de servir a propria pdtria, capable or in- 
capable to serve one's country. 

Not ado, charged; as, not ado de avar&za, charged 
with avarice. • 

Content e, glad; as estdu contSnte do suCcesso que 
ille teve, I am glad or overjoyed at his success. 

Cangddo, tired ; as, cangado de estuddr, tired of 
studying. 

Dezejoso, greedy ; as, dezejdso de gloria, greedy of 
glory, &c. as likewise adjectives signifying fullness, 
emptiness, plenty, want, desire, knowledge, remem- 
brance, ignorance, or forgetting. 

All adjectives signifying inclination, advantage 
and disadvantage, profit or disprofit, pleasure or 
displeasure, due, submission, resistance, likeness, 
govern the dative case ; as, insensivel as qffrdntas, 
insensible of affronts ; serinclinado a alguma cousa, to 
be inclined to something ; nocivo a saude, hurtful to 
health. 

These adjectives signifying dimensions, as, alto, 
high, tall; largo, wide, broad ; and comprido, long, 
come after the words of the measure of magnitude, 
both in English and Portuguese; but they are pre- 
ceded by de in Portuguese ; as, des pes de largo, ten 
feet broad ; seis pes de comprido, six feet long, &c. 
they also turn the adjective of the dimension into 
its substantive, with the word of the measure before : 
but the word of the dimension is always preceded 
by de; as, seis pes de altera, six feet high; dezpes 
de largura, ten feet broad. 

The adjectives signifying experience, knowledge, 
or science, require em, or no, na, nos, nas, after them ; 
as, versddo nos Ivoros, versed in books ; expertd na 
tnedicina, expert in medicine. 

The cardinal nouns require the genitive case after 
them ; as, hum dos dous, one of the two. 



' GRAMMAR. 135 

The ordinal nouns, as well as the collective and 
proportional, likewise require the genitive after 
them ; as, o primeiro dos riys, the first of the kings, 
huma duzia de ovos, a dozen of eggs, &c. 

Of the Syntax of the Comparatives and Super- 
latives. 

The comparative is not made of the positive in 
Portuguese, as in Latin and English, but by adding 
mats more, or minos less, which govern que, signify- 
ing than; as, o todohe mayor que a parte, the whole 
is greater than the part ; o siu amdnte he mats bello, 
mais mdgo, e mais rico que ella, her lover is handsomer, 
younger, and richer than she is ; iu dcho-o agora 
minos hello do que qudndo o comprei, I now find it less 
handsome than when I brought it. 

The simple comparatives mais, and minos, meet- 
ing with a noun of number, are attended by de; as, 
ainda que ille tives&e mais de cem hbmens, though he 
has above an hundred men ; ille tern mais de vinte 
dnnos, he is above twenty. 

i When the comparison is made by so as, as muck 
as, they must be rendered by c6mo. 

Example. 

O miu livro he tao hello Como o vosso, my book is 
as handsome as yours; hum principe nao he tao po- 
deroso como hum riy, a prince is not so powerful as 
a king. 

They put sometimes muito and pouco before the 
simple comparatives mais and minos ; as, ille he 
muito mais grdnde, he is taller by much ; ille hi 
pouco mais grdnde, he is taller by little, Sec. 



136 .'; PORTUGUESE 

CHAR IV. 

Of the Syntax of Pronouns. 

"l/l/*E have sufficiently explained the pronouns 
in the first part* and to avoid any further 
repetition, I shall only observe, that, 

1st. The English make use of the verb to be, put 
impersonally through all its tenses in the third per- 
son, before the pronouns personal, 2, thou, he, she, %ve> 
you, they ; it is I ; it is he, &c. In Portuguese the 
verb to be, on this occasion, is not impersonal ; and 
they express, it is f, by sou eu; it is thou, es tu ; 
it is he, he ilk; it is we, somes nos; it is ye, sdis vos, 
it is she, he ilia ; it is they, masc. sao tiles ; it is 
they, fern, sao ellas; and in like manner through all 
the tenses; as, it was I, em eu; it was we, eramos 
nos, &c. 

gdly. The Portuguese seldom make use of the 
second person singular or plural, but when through 
a great familiarity anions friends, or speaking to 
God, or a father and mother to their children, or to 
servants; thus, you are in the right of it, is ex- 
pressed by vm ce tern vazab, instead of t hides razao ; 
como est a vm ce ? how do you do? In the plural they 
say vni ccs . 

Observe here, that when ati adjective comes after 
vm ce V. S. V. E. &e. it does not agree in gender 
with-vm* V. S. &c, but with the person we speak 
to or we speak of, therefore they speak to a lady or 
woman thus ; vm ce he muito bella, you are very 
beautiful ; and to a man they say, vm ce he muito bom, 
you are very good. 

3dly. Ncs is generally used by the king, a gover- 
nor, or a bishop, in their writings, and then it sig^ 
nifies in English we ; as, nos manddmos, or mandamos, 
we command \ but nos before or after a verb in Por- 



GRAMM AR. 157 

tuguese signifies its in English; as, elk nos disse, he 
told us; dai-nosttmpo, give us time. 

4thly. Vos is also applied to a single person, but 
only speaking to interiors, or between familiar 
friends, to avoid the word thou, tu, which would 
be too gross and unmannerly. 

4 5thly. The pronouns conjunctive are joined to 
verbs, and stand for the dative and accusative cases, 
as, deu me, he gave me; dma-me, love me ; but the 
pronouns personal are used instead of them when 
they are preceded by a preposition, aud not imme- 
diately followed by a verb ; elle fdll6u contra mim, 
he spoke against me. 

6thly. When o, a, os, as, are joined to the pre- 
sent infinitive moodj they change the last r of it into 
to, la, <$& thus ; para ama-lo, to love him ; para vila^ 
or, ve las, to see her, or them, &c. and when they 
are joined to the preterperfect indicative of the 
verb JazSr, and some others that have that tense end- 
ing in iz, they change the last z of them into lo, la, 
8$c. &sji-lo ? I did it; ellefe-lo, he did, or made it> 
&o. but when they are joined to the future indica- 
tive of any verb with the auxiliary verb haver, then 
they change the terminations rii, rds, &c. of the 
futures into lo, ki, tyc. as fd-lo-hei, I'll do it; ama- 
lo- hei, I'll love him, &c. 

Remarks on the Pronouns. 

1st. Him, or it, which follow the verb in English,, 
must be expressed in Portuguese, as in the following 
examples : 

When him or it in English follow the verb in the 
first person of the singular number, it must be ex- 
pressed in Portuguese by o before or after the verb. 
£xam. I call him or it, iu o chdmo, or eu chdmo-o. 

When him or it in English follow the verb in the 
first person of the singular number, it may be ex- 
press«d in Portuguese either by o before the verb, or 



138 PORTUGUESE 

lo after it, making an elision of the last consonant 
of the verb. Exam. Thou callest him or it, tu o 
chdmas, or tu chdma lo. 

When him or it is joined with the third person 
singular of a verb, it may be expressed by o before 
or after the verb. Ex. He calls him or it, ilk o 
chdma, or Site chdma-o. 

When him or it is with a verb in the first person 
plural, it may be expressed in Portuguese either by 
o before the verb, or lo after it, making an elision 
as in the second case. Ex. We call him or it, nbs 
o chamdmos, or nbs chamdmo-lo. 

When him or it is after a verb in* the second person 
plural, it is expressed in Portuguese either by o 
before the verb, or lo after it, making an elision, 
&c. Ex. You call him or it, ws o chamdis, or vos 
chamcti-lo. 

When him or it follows the verb in the third per- 
son plural, it may be expressed in Portuguese either 
by.0 before the verb, or no after it. Examp. They 
call him or it, Hies o chdmao, or elks chdmao-no. 

2dly. Her or it after a verb in English is ex- 
pressed in Portuguese by a, according to the rules 
just now proposed. • 

3dly. Them after a verb is expressed in Portu- 
guese by os for the masculine, and by as for the fe- 
minine, according to the gender and the rules pro- 
posed. 

4thly. The words o, a, os, as, must always be 
put after the gerunds, but not before the infinitives. 
Examp. Seeing him, we must not say, o vendo, but 
vendo-o, because v&ndo is a gerund. To see him, in- 
stead of saying para *ver-o 3 you must say para d-vir, 
is in the infinitive. 

5thly. The words lo, la, los, las, must always be 
put after the verbs. Examp. To see him, you must 
say, para ve-lo, or para o ver, and not para lo v&r. 
The same words must follow also the adverb ei ; 



GRAMMAR. 139 

and so you -must say, ei-lo aqui, here he is ; ei-lo ali, 
there he is; ei-los aqui, here they are; ei-la ali, there 
she is; ei-las ali, there they are. They follow like- 
wise the persons of the verbs ; eu ji-lo ; tu jizes- 
te~lo ; ellejfi-lo ; nosfizemo-lo, &c. I made it, &c. 

Note, that I have been speaking of the words o, 
a, os, as, to, la, los, las, and not of the articles o, a, 
cs, as; because when those words precede, and 
sometimes when they follow the verbs, they are not 
articles, but pronouns relative. They are articles 
only when they precede the nouns or pronouns. 



CHAR V. 

Of the Syntax of Verbs. 

T^HE verbs through every tense and mood 
(except the infinitive) ought to be preceded 
by a nominative case, either expressed or under- 
stood, with which they must agree in number and 
person. The nominative is expressed when we say, 
iudmo, tu cant as; understood when we say, canto, 
digo, &c. 

The Portuguese, as well as English, use the se- 
cond person plural, though they address themselves 
but to a single person. 

Example. 

Men amigo, *vos nab tindes razao, my friend, you 
are in the wrong. 

And if we would speak in the third person, we 
must say, vem ce tern razao, sir, you are in the right. 

The verb active governs the accusative; as, dmo 
a virt&de, I love virtue. 



140 PORTUGUESE 

The verb passive requires an ablative after it; as 
6s ddutos sao envejados pellos ignordntes, the learned 
are envied by the ignorant. 

You must observe, that there is in Portuguese 
another way of making the passive, by adding the 
relative se to the third person singular or plural ; as 
dma se Dios, God is loved. 

When there are two nominatives singular before 
a verb, it must be put in the plural number. 

When a noun is collective, the verb requires the 
singular, not the plural; as, a gent e est a olhdndo, the 
people are looking. 

Syntax of the auxiliary Verbs. 

The verb ter is made use of to conjugate all the 
compound tenses of verbs; as, tenlro amddo, tinha 
amddo, I have loved, I had loved. 

Ter signifies also to possess, to obtain ; as tenho 
dinheiro, I have money ; tern muiia capaciddde, he 
has a great deal of capacity. 

Haver, in account books and trade, expresses 
credit or discharge. 

HavSr is also taken impersonally in Portuguese, 
and it signifies in English there be; as ha muito dura 
no Mexico, there is a great quantity of gold in 
Mexico. 

Havh^-se, made reciprocal, is the same as to be~ 
have, to act ; as houve-se o governador com talpru- 
dencia que, 8$c. the governor behaved with such 
wisdom, that, &c. 

We have already observed the difference betwixt 
ser and est dr. 

The verb estdr is also used to conjugate the other 
verbs, chiefly expressing action ; as estvu lendo, estou 
escrevendo, I am reading, I am writing. 

Estdr, with the preposition em, in, or with no, na, 
nos, nas, signifies to be present in a place; as, est 6% 
no cdmpo, I am in the country* 



GRAMMAR. 141 

Estar, with the preposition para denotes the in- 
clination of doing what the following verb expresses, 
but without a full determination ; as, estou para ir 
me para Ldndres > I have a mind to go and live in 
London. 

Estar, with the preposition /tor, and the infinitive 
of the verb following, means, that the thing express- 
ed by the verb is not yet done ; as, isto est a por 
escrever, this is not yet written ; isto est a por alimpar, 
this is not yet cleaned ; est ar por alguem signifies to 
agree with one, or to be of his opinion. 

N. B. See in the Third Part the different signi- 
fications of the verbs estar and haver. 

When sir signifies the possessive of one thing, it 
governs the genitive ; as, a rua hi d' el-rey, the 
street belongs to the king ; est a casa he de meupay, 
this house belongs to my father. 

Em ser is taken for a thing to be whole or entire, 
without any alteration or mutilation ; as, asfazen- 
das estao em ser, the goods are not sold. 

Of the Syntax of Verbs active, passive, 8$c. 

When two verbs come together, with or without 
any nominative case, then the latter must be in the 
infinitive mood ; as, quer vm cc aprender afallar In- 
glez ? will you learn to speak English ? 

All verbs active govern the accusative ; but if 
they are followed by a proper name of God, man, 
or woman, or any noun expressing their qualities or 
title, then it governs the dative case ; as, conhico a 
seu pay, I know his father ; Acharao a zfoao no 
caminko, they found John hi the road. 

All' verbs of gesture, moving, going, resting, or 
doing, as also the verbs that have the word that 
goes before, and the word that comes after, both be- 
longing to one thing, require the nominative after 
them ; as, Pedro vai errMo, Peter goes on wrong ; 



142 PORTUGUESE 

opobre dbrme descangddo, the poor sleeps without care. 
Also the verb of the infinitive mood has the same 
case, when verbs of wishing and the like come after 
them ; as, todos dezejao ser ricos, every body wishes 
to be rich ; antes quisera ser douto que parecek, I 
had rather be learned than be accounted so. 

After verbs the Portuguese express yes and no by 
que sim and que ndo, Example, creyo que sim, I be- 
lieve yes ; creyo que nao, I believe not ; digo que sim, 
I say yes ; cuido que nao, I think not ; aposto que 
sim, I lay yes ; quereis apostdr que nao ? have you a 
mind to lay not? 

Verbs signifying grief, compassion, want, remem- 
brance, forgetting, &c. will have the genitive ; as, 
pisame muito da morte de seu irmdo, I am very sorry 
for the death of your brother; elle mbrre defome, he 
perishes by hunger; lembre-se do que me disse, re- 
member what you said to me ; compade$i-me das suas 
disgra$as, I pitied him for his misfortunes; esqueci- 
me de tudo isto, all this I forgot. 

The reciprocals of jeering, boasting, and distrust- 
ing, govern also the genitive; as,jactcir-se, gkriar- 
se, picar-se, envergonhar-se, &c. 

All the verbs active govern the dative only when 
the substantive represents a person ; as, iu conhcgo 
a vm ce , &c. I know you, &c. 

The following verbs belong to this rule of the 
dative : 

Jogar, to play ; &s,jogdr cartas, to play at cards ; 
jogdr aos centos, to play at picquet ; jogar aoxadrez t 
to play at chess, &c. 

Obedecir, desobedecer, agraddr, comprazer ; as, eu 
obed&go a Dios e el-rey, I obey God and the king ; 
comprazio em tudo aos soldddos, in all he pleased the 
soldiers. 

Manddr, when it signifies to command an army, 
company, &c. requires the accusative, but, when 
other things, the dative ; as ille manddva a camlla- 
ria, he commanded the horse ; o- governador man- 



GRAMMAR. 143 

Mu a todos os moradores que se retirdssem para suas 
cdsas, the governor ordered all the inhabitants to 
retire into their houses. 

Ir, to go ; as, vou a Paris, I go to Paris. 

Assistir, ajuddr, socorrir, to help ; as, assist ir ao 
officio divino, to assist at divine service. 

Sauddr, to salute or greet ; as, elle sduda a todos t 
he salutes every body. 

Falldr, to speak ; satizfazer, to satisfy ; servir, to 
serve; favorecer, to favour ; ameagdr, to threaten. 

The verbs of pleasing, displeasing, granting, de- 
nying, pardoning, will have the person in the da- 
tive case. 

The im personals acontecer, succedir, import dr, per- 
tenc&r, and the like to these, will have often two 
datives, of person ; as, a mim me succedeo, it happen- 
ed to me ; a elle the convent, it suits him, or it is con- 
venient for him; a elle ndo Ihe importa, it does not 
concern him, &c. 

All the active verbs require an accusative; and 
the Latin verbs which govern the accusative of the 
things, and the dative of the person, govern gene- 
rally the same in Portuguese ; as, escrevei o que digo 
a vosso irmdo, write to your brother what I do say. 

Verbs of asking, teaching, arraying, will have an 
accusative of the doer or sufferer, and sometimes 
verbs neuter will have an accusative of the thing ; 
as, gozdr saude, to enjoy health ; pego iste favor, I 
ask this favour; ille toca muito bemfiduta, he plays 
very well on the flute ; curdr Jiuma doinga, to cure 
a sickness. 

Verbs passive, and the greatest part of the reci- 
procals require the ablative, with de, do, da, dps, 
das, por, or pello, pSlla, pellos, pellas ; as, fui cha~ 
mddo porel riy, I was called by the king; retirei-me 
da ciddde, I retired from the city ; elle f Si amddo do 
povo, he was loved by the people. But you must 
except acostdr se, which requires a dative preceded 
by a; encostdr-se, which sometimes will have a da- 



144 PORTUGUESE 

live, and sometimes an ablative preceded by em, no^ 
na, nos, ornas ; meter-se, which requires an ablative; 
sent arse, introduzir-se, &c. which must have the 
ablative with the preposition em, no, na, nos, nas. 

The verbs joined with a noun which they govern, 
must have the infinitive with de ; as ienho vontadc 
de rir, I am near laughing. 

The price of any thing bought or sold, or bar- 
tered, will have the accusative withpor. 

The verb par se, when it signifies to begin, must 
have the infinitive, with the particle a ; as, por-se a 
chorar, to begin to cry. 

Verbs of plenty, filling, emptying, loading, un- 
loading, will have the ablative ; as, esta terra abim- 
da de trigo ; this country abounds with corn ; elk 
estd carregado de miserias s lie is loaded with calami- 
ties. 

Verbs denoting custom, help, beginning, exhorta- 
tion, invitation, require the infinitive with the par- 
ticle a; as, ajuddr a seme&r, to help sowing; convi- 
ddu me a tear, he invited me to supper. 

Verbs that signify distance, receiving, or taking 
away, will have the ablative; as, a Madeira dista 
de Marrbcos 320 milhas, Madeira lies 320 miles 
from Morocco. 

Note, that the verbs signifying receiving,or taking 
away, generally require the ablative of the person ; 
hut they sometimes require an accusative : particu- 
larly the verb receber, when it signifies to welcome, or 
to entertain : as, Ule recebe todos com muito agrado, he 
gives his company a hearty reception, he makes 
them very welcome. 

Verbs denoting obligation, govern the following 
infinitive with the preposition a; as, hi o obrigarei 
afazer isto,\ will oblige him to do it. 

Verbs of arguing, quarrelling, fighting, &c. will 
have the ablative with ccm ; B.s,pelej6u metis de huma 
hdra com siu ivnmo, he quarrelled more than one hour 
with his brother. 



GRAMMAR. 145 

After the verb substantive sir, to be, para is made 

use of as well as a: the first is employed to denote 

the use or destination of any thing; as, esta pinna 

he para escrever, this pen is to write with. But the 

particle a is used to denote only the action ; as, elle 

jqi o primeiro afugir, he was the first to run away. 

The verbs of motion to a place always govern 

the dative ; as, vou a comedia, I go to the play. 

Though the verb voltar, to return, may also have 

an accusative, with the preposition para. But the 

verbs of motion from a place govern the ablative 

with de, do, da, dos, das; as, vhiho do cdmpo, I come 

from the country. I,f the motion is through a place, 

then the, verbs govern the accusative, with por; 

as, passarei por Lbndres, I will come by the way of 

London. 

Of the Use and Construction of the Tenses. 

Though we have spoken at large upon the tenses 
in the First Part, you must, however, take notice. 

1. That they make use of the infinitive and the 
auxiliary verb hater, together with the pronouns lo, 
la, ios, las, instead of the future indicative; as, 
ouvir-lo-hei, I will hear him; and then the r of the 
infinitive is changed into lo, la, los, las ; and some- 
times they make use of the infinitive mood and the 

* auxiliary verb haver, with the pronouns conjunctive 
me, te, se, &c. instead of the same future ; as, 
dar-lhe-hei, I will give him ; agastar-se-ha^ he will 
be angry. 

2. That when we find the particle if, which in 
Portuguese is expressed by se, before the imperfect 
indicative, we must generally use the imperfect sub- 
junctive in Portuguese ; example, se iu tivesse, if I 
had ; se eu pudesse, if I could. But sometimes they 
use the imperfect indicative; as, disse-lhe que se 
querla r &c. ; he told him that if he was willing, fyc. 

X4 



146 PORTUGUESE 

3. That the first imperfect subjunctive in Portu- 
guese is also used in a sense that denotes the present, 
especially in sentences of wishing ; as, quizera que 
Domingo jizesse bdm tempo, I wish it would be fine 
weather on Sunday. But if the same tense is pre- 
ceded by ainda que, although, then it must be ren- 
dered into English by the second imperfect subjunc- 
tive, or by the imperfect indicative ; as, 6u nao a 
quizera, ainda que twesse milhoens de siu, though she 
was worth several millions, I would not have her ; 
ainda que elle consentisse nisso,. nao se podia fazer, al- 
though he would consent to it, that could not be 
done. Lastly, when the first imperfect subjunctive 
is preceded by se, it is sometimes rendered into 
English by the second imperfect subjunctive ; as, 
se Hie viesse, if he should come. 

The English are apt to put the first imperfect of 
the subjunctive where the Portuguese make use of 
the second ; as, I had been in the wrong, nao term 
tido razao ; and though they may say nao tivera tido 
razao, they may not say nao tivesse tido razao, to 
express the English of, I should hate been in the 
wrong, or I had been in the wrong. 

Note, that to express in Portuguese, though that 
should be,\ve must say, qudndo issojvsse, and not seria. 

The Portuguese use the future tense subjunctive 
after the conjunction if, when they speak of a future 
action, but the English, the present indicative : ex- 
ample, to-morrow, if I have time, amanhaa se tiver 
tempo, and not se tenho ; if he comes, we shall see 
him, nbs o xeremos, se Hie mir. 

A conjunction between two verbs obliges the last 
to be of the same number; person, and tense as the 
first: example, the king wills and commands, el rei 
quer e ordfoia; I see and I know, 4u vcjo e conhefo* 

Sometimes the present is made use of, instead of 
the preter definite in narrations, as, no mhmo thnpo 
que hia anddndo, o encontra, o despe, e o ata a huma 



GRAMMAR. 147 

tirvore, as be was going, he meets him, strips him, 
and ties him to a tree. 

When the Portuguese use the infinitive with a 
third person in the plural, they add em to it, and it 
is generally preceded by por, for, and para, in order 
to, that, or to the end that; as Sites J'drao enforcddos 
por fur tar em, they were hanged for robbing ; para 
serem enformddos, that, to the end that they may be 
informed ; para poderem dizer, that they may be 
able to say. 

Observe, that when the Portuguese put/w,before 
the first future subjunctive, they speak of a time 
past; as, por faiiardes, because you have spoken. 
But when they put para before it, then they speak 
of a time to come ; as para falldrmos, that, or to 
the end that we may speak, in order to speak. 

Of Moods. 

All the tenses of the indicative mood may be em- 
ployed without any conjunction before them ; but 
they admit also of some. Besides the conjunction 
que, those that may be made use of are se, cdmo, and 
qudndo; with some distinction in respect to se be- 
cause this conjunction is seldom used before the fu- 
ture tense, and then it is governed by a verb signi- 
fying ignorance, doubt, or interrogation ; as, nao 
sei se had de vir, I do not know if they shall come ! 
estou em duvida se os inimigos passarao o rio, I doubt 
if the enemies will pass the river; nao per g unto se 
partird, I do not ask if he will set out. 

The optative or subjunctive in Portuguese has al- 
ways some sign annexed; as, oxala, prouvera a 
Deos, o se! would to God, I pray God, God grant; 
&c. ; que, para, que, &c. that, &c, 

The particle que is not expressed in the present 
of this mood ; but it is understood in sentences of 
wishing or praying; as, Dios o faga bom, let God 
amend him. 

l 2 



148 PORTUGUESE 

When- que is between two verbs, the Jast is not 
always put in the subjunctive, because, though some 
say creyo que venha, I believe he comes ; I think it is 
better, to say creyo que vem; but when there is a ne- 
gation, the verb following que must be put in the 
subjunctive ; as, nao creyo que venha, I do not be- 
lieve he will come, nao creyo que venha tao c£do, I do 
not believe he will come so soon. 

When the verbs crer, to believe, saber, to know, 
are used interrogatively, and followed by the par- 
ticle que, the next verb is put in the indicative, 
when the person that asked the question makes no 
doubt of the thing which is the object in question ; 
as, if knowing that peace is made, I want to know 
if the people whom I converse with know it too, I 
will express myself thus, sabeis vos que est a felt a a 
paz f do you know that peace is made ? But if I 
have it only by a report, and doubt of it, and want 
to be informed of it, I must ask the question thus, 
sabeis vos que a paz estejafeita? and by no means 
sabeis vos que estafeita a paz? 

You must observe also, that the present subjunc- 
tive of saber is elegantly used when it is attended by 
a negative, and the particle que in this phrase, nao 
que eu saiba, not that I know of. 

All the verbs used impersonally with the particle 
que require the subjunctive ; as, he preciso que elle 
venha, he must come ; convent que isto sefaga, it is 
convenient that this be done. You must only ex- 
cept such sentences as express any positive assurance, 
or certainty ; as, he certo que vem, it is certain that 
he comes ; seique estdem cdsa,l know he is at home. 

From these observations it follows, that all the 
verbs not expressing a positive assurance, or believ- 
ing, but only denoting ignorance, doubt, fear, as- 
tonishment, admiration, wishing, praying, pretension, 
or desire, govern the subjunctive mood after que; 
as, duvido que possa, I doubt it is in his power ; 
temo que morra,! am afraid he will die; admiro-mt 



GRAMMA R. 149 

que consinta nisso, I wonder be agrees to it, &c. ; to 
all which they add o.vala, an Arabic word,, signify- 
ing God grant, which is used in Portuguese before 
all the tenses of the optative or conjunctive, as well 
<is praza a Deos, may it please God; ov,prouvera a 
Decs, might it please God. 

When que is relative, and there is a verb in the 
imperative or in the indicative, with a negative or 
interrogation before it, it governs likewise the sub- 
junctive ; as nao ha cousa que mais me inquiete, there is 
nothing that disturbs me more ; ha cousa no mundo 
que mepossa dar tdnto gdsto? is there any thing in 
the world that may give me more pleasure? allegai- 
Ihe t ant as razdens que possao persuadlr, give him 
so many reasons that he may be persuaded. 

The present subjunctive is sometimes rendered in- 
to English by the second preterimperfect subjunc- 
tive, when it is followed by a verb in the future 
tense ; as, ainda que 6u trahcilhe, nunca hei de cangar, 
though I should work, I never would be tired. 

The Portuguese use specially the same present 
subjunctive for the future ; as in these sentences, 
and others like : 

Nao duvido que venha, I do not doubt but he will 
come. 

Duvido que faga, I doubt that, or whether he 
will do it. 

Therefore avoid carefully those faults which fo- 
reigners are so apt to make,, in considering rather 
the tense which they want to turn into Portuguese, 
than the mood which the genius of the language 
requires. 

The present indicative is also used for the future, 
as well as in English : exam pie, jantais hdje em casa f 
do you dine at home to-day ? 



150 PORTUGUESE 

Of the Particles governing the Optative or Sub- 
junctive. 

The conjunction que, that, generally requires the 
subjunctive after it; but antes que, primeiro que, be- 
fore that, always requires it. 

Take notice, that que makes all the words to which 
it is joined become conjunctives, as, para que, to 
the end that ; bem que, ainda que, &c. Pbsto que, 
although; ate que, till ; qudndo, cbmo querque, which 
commonly govern the substantive. But com que 
assim governs the indicative; as, com que, or com que 
assim vira amanhaa, so he will come to-morrow. 

In Portuguese you must take care how you express 
though, or although; if it is by ainda que, you may 
put either the subjunctive or indicative after it: ex- 
ample ; ainda que seja hbmem honrado, though he is an 
honest man ; ainda que elle faz aquillo, though he 
does that. But if you render although or though 
by na5 obstante, then you must use the infinitive ; 
example, though he is an honest man ; nao obstante 
ser Hie homem honrado ; though he does this, nab 
obstante fazi r elle isto. 

The impersonal verbs generally govern the sub- 
junctive with que; but with this distinction, when 
the impersonal is in the present tense or future,, of 
the indicative mood, then it requires the present 
subjunctive mood; but when the impersonal, or any 
other verb taken impersonally, is in any of the pre- 
terites indicative, then it governs the imperfect, per- 
fect, or pluperfect of the subjunctive, according to 
the meaning of speech ; as, importa muito que el-rey 
vejajudo, it is of great moment that the king may 
see all; foi convenient e que o principe fosse com elle, it 
was convenient that the prince should go with him. 

The present subjunctive is likewise construed, 
when the particle por is separated from que, by an 
adjective; as, por grdnde, por admiravel, por douto 
que seja, though he be great, admirable, learned. 



GRAMMAR. 151 

An imperative often requires the future of the 
subjunctive; as succeda o que succeder, or seja o que 
fdr, happen what shall happen, at all events. 

The imperfect subjunctive is repeated in this 
phrase> and others like, succedesse, o que succedisse, 
let happen what would. 

The future of the subjunctive mood follow gene- 
rally these, logo que, qudndo, se, como, &c. ; as, logo 
que chegdr iremos a passedr, as soon as he comes, we 
will go and take a walk ; qudndo vier, estaremos 
promptos, when he comes we will be ready. 

Observe, that qudndo and logo que may also be 
construed with the indicative mood ; as, qudndo el 
rey vt tudo, nao o engdnao, when the king sees every 
thing, he is not deceived ; logo que chegou,fallei com 
Hie, as soon as he came, I spoke with him. 

Of the Infinitive Mood. 

In Portuguese there is not a general sign before 
the infinitive, as in English the particle to; but 
there are several particles used before the infinitive, 
denoting the same as to does in English, and they 
are governed by the preceding verbs or nouns. 
These particles are the following : a, para, de s com, 
em, por, ate, despots de ; and the article o, when the 
infinitive serves as a nominative to another verb; as, 
o dizer e o fazer sao duas cousas, saying and doing 
are two different things. 

A coming between two verbs, notes the second 
as the object of the first ; as, a tarddnga das nossas 
esperdn$as nos ensina a mortificdr os nossos dezejos, the 
delay of our hopes teaches us to mortify our de- 
sires ; elle comega a discorrer, he begins to reason. 

Para notes the intention or usefulness ; as, a ad- 
versidade serve para experimentar a paciencia, adver- 
sity serves to try one's patience. Para after an ad- 
jective denotes its object ; as, est a prdmpto para obe- 
dectr, he is ready to obey, 



152 PORTUGUESE 

De is put between two verbs, if the first go- 
verns the genitive or ablative ; and when the sub- 
stantive or adjective governs either of these two 
cases, de must go before the following verbs, or in- 
finitive ; as, venho de ver a meupdy, I have just seen 
my father ; he tempo de hir-se, it is time to go away ; 
el-rey fox servido dt mandar, the king has been 
pleased to order. 

The infinitive is on several occasions governed by 
prepositions or conjunctions; as, sem dizir palavra 
without speaking a word; where you may observe 
it is expressed in English by the participle present; 
as nunca se cdnga de jugdr, he is never weary of 
playing; diverte-se em cagar, he delights in hunting; 
elleestd doente por trabalhdr demasia&amente, by work- 
ing too much he is sick ; perde o seu tempo em passedr, 
he loses his time in walking ; hei-de ir-me sem me des- 
pedir? shall I go away without taking my leave? 

The infinitive is also used passively ; as, nao ha 
que dizer, que ver, &c. ; there is nothing to be said, 
seen, &c. 

The gerund of any verb active may be conjugated 
-with the verb estdr, to be, after the same manner as* 
in English; as, estou escrevendo, I am writing; ilk 
estdva dormindo, he was asleep, £$c. 



CHAP. VI. 

Of the Syntax of Participles and Gerunds. 

npHE participle in the Portuguese language 
generally ends in do> or to ; as, amado, visto> 
dito, &c. 

The active participles that follow the verb ter x 
to have, must end in o; as, 

Tenho msto el rey, I have seen the king. 



GRAMMAR. 153 

Tenho vistoa rainha, I have seen the queen. 

Eu tinha amado os livros, I had loved hooks. 

Eu tinha levado as cartas, I had carried the letters. 

We meet with authors who sometimes make the 
participles agree with the thing of which they arc 
speaking; as, in Camoens y Canto 1, Stanza xxix. 

E porque cd?no vistes, tern passados, 

Na*vidgem tad dsperos perigos, 

Tdntos climas, e ceos experimentados, $c. 
And Canto % Stan, lxxvi. 

Sao offerecimentos verdadeiros, 

E paldvras sinceras, nao dobrddas, 

As que o ret/ mdnda a os nobres cavaleiros, 

Que tdnto mar e terras tern passadas. 

If it be a verb neuter, the participle ought always 
to terminate in o: example, 

El rey tern j ant ado, the king has dined ; a rainha 
tern ceddo, the queen has supped ; os vossos amigos tern 
rido, your friends have laughed ; minhas irmdds tern 
dormidO) my sisters have slept. * 

. When the active participle happens to precede an 
infinitive, it must be terminated in o; as ojuiz Ihe 
tinha feito cortdr acabega, the judge has caused his 
head to be cut off. 

The passive participles which are joined with the 
tenses of the verb ser, to be, agree with the substan- 
tive that precedes the verb ser ; o capitdo Joi lou- 
vddo, the captain was praised; a virtude he estimdda, 
virtue is esteemed ; os preguigosos sad censurddos, the 
lazy are blamed ; as vossasjoyasjorao vendidas, your 
jewels were sold. 

The Portuguese generally suppress the gerunds 
having and being before the participles; as, dito isto 9 
having said so ; acabddo o sermao, the sermon being 
ended. This manner of speaking is called by gram- 
marians ablatives absolute. 

The participle of the present tense in Portuguese 
has singular and plural, but one termination serves 
for both genders ; as hum homem teminte a Deos, a 



154 PORTUGUESE 

man fearing God ; huma molher temente a Deos, a 
woman fearing God; homens temtntes a Deos, peo- 
ple fearing God. 

There are in Portuguese a great many participles 
which are used substantively ; as, ignordnte, amdnte, 
owcinte, estuddtite, &c. ; an ignorant, a lover, an au- 
ditor or hearer, a scholar, &c. 

it is better to place the nominative after the ge- 
rund than before ; as estdndo el rey na comedia, the 
king being at the play. 



CHAP. VII. 
Of Prepositions. 

J^ PREPOSITION is a part of speech, which is put 
before nouns, and sometimes before verbs, to 
explain some particular circumstance. 

Prepositions may be divided into separable and 
inseparable. An inseparable preposition is never 
found but in compound words, and signifies nothing 
of itself. A separable preposition is generally sepa- 
rated from other words, and signifies something of 
itself. 

The inseparable prepositions are, 

Ab and abs ; as abrogdr, to abrogate ; abstir-se y 
to abstain. 

Arce, or archi ; as, arcebispo, an archbishop ; a r~ 
chiduque, an archduke. 

Ad; as,- adventicio, adventitious. 

Am ; as, ambiguo, ambiguous ; ampdro, protec- 
tion, shelter. 

Circum ; as, circumstdncia, circumstance. 

Co; as, cohabit dr, to live together, to cohabit. 

Des, serves to express the contrary of the word 
it is joined to ; as, desac&rto, mistake ; desfazer, to 



GRAMMA R. 155 

undo ; desenganar, to undeceive ; are the contrary 
of ace* r to, faze* r, and enganar. 

Dis ; as, dispor, to dispose; distinguir, to distin- 
guish ; distribuir, to distribute. 

Ex ; as, extrahir, to extract. 

In, has commonly a negative or privative sense, 
denoting the contrary of the meaning of the word 
it precedes ; as, incapdz, unable ; infeliz, unhappy ; 
inac^ao, inaction, $c. ; but sometimes it is affirma- 
tive, as in Latin. 

Observe, that in before r is changed into ir; as, 
irregular, irregular ; irrational, irrational : before /, 
into il; as illegitimo, illegitimate ; before m, in is 
changed into im; as, immaterial, immaterial. 

Ob; as, obviar, to obviate. 

Pos; as, pospor, to postpose, or to postpone. 

Pre ; as, precedir, to go before ; predecessdr, an 
ancestor. 

Pro ; as, propor, to propose ; promettr, to pro- 
mise. 

Re } is a borrowed particle from the Latins, which 
generally denotes iteration, or backward action ; 
as, reedificar, to rebuild ; repercutir, to repercute, or 
strike back. 

So; as, socorrer;\o help, to succour. 

Sor; as, sorrir, to smile. 

Sos ; as, soster, to support. 

Soto ; as, sotopor, to put or lay under. 

Sub ; or sob ; as, subalterno, subaltern ; subscrevir, 
to subscribe ; sobpena, sobcolor, fyc. 

The Arabic article al, which is common to all 
genders and both numbers, is found in the begin- 
ning of almost all the words that remain in the Por- 
tuguese language from the Arabic, and it is the 
surest way to distinguish them. But the Portu- 
guese articles are added to the Arabic nouns, with- 
out taking off their article, al, as a almofada, the 
cushion; oJlcorao, the Coran, $c. 



156 PORTUGUESE 

The Greek preposition dnti enters into the com- 
position of a great many Portuguese words, which 
cannot be set down here. It is enough to observe, 
that it signifies generally opposite ; as in Antipodas, 
Antipodes ; antipapa, antipope ; and sometimes it 
signifies before ; as in aniiloquio, a preface, a speak- 
ing first; but in this last sense it is derived from the 
Latin preposition ante. 

Of separable Prepositions. 

It is absolutely impossible ever to attain to the 
knowledge of any language whatever, without tho- 
roughly understanding the divers relations denoted 
by the prepositions, and the several cases of nouns 
which they govern ; both which relations and cases 
being arbitrary, vary and differ much in all lan- 
guages. .This only instance will evince it : the 
English say, to think of a thing ; the French, to 
think to a thing; the Germans and Dutch, to think 
on, or upon a thing-, the Spaniards and Portuguese, 
to think in a thing, &c. Now it will avail an English- 
man but little to know that of\& expressed in Portu- 
guese by de, if he does not know which relations em 
and de denote in that language ; since the Portu- 
guese say, to think in a thing, and not of' a, thing ; 
therefore we will treat here of each of them, and of 
their construction separately. 

1st A, or rather ao, as, aos, (at, in, on, <§•&) de- 
note the place whither one is going ; as, 

Eu vou a Ldndres, I go to London. 

Voltar a Portugal, to return, or go back to Por- 
tugal. 

A, in this sense, is a preposition, but in the next 
observations, it is a particle. 

gdly. A denotes time ; as, chegar a tempo, to ar- 
rive in time; a todo o t&mpo, at all times. 

3dly; A denotes the way of being, or of doing of 
people; as also their posture, gesture, or action; as 



G RAMMA R. 157 

Estar-a sua vontadc, to be at one's ease. 

A direita, on the right hand ; a esquerda, on the 
left hand. 

Viver a sua vontdde } to live to one's mind, as one 
likes. 

Andar ape on a cavdllo,. to go on foot, or on horse- 
back. 

Montar a cavdllo, to ride on horseback. 

Correr a redea salt a , to ride full speed. 

Trajar a Francisa, to dress after the French way. 

Viver d Ingleza, to live after the English fashion. 

Andar a grdndes pdssos, to walk at a great rate. 

Andar a passos lentos, to walk very slowly. 

4thly. A denotes the price of things ; as, a oito 
xelins, at eight shillings. It denotes also the weight : 
but as the nouns signify ing weight are generally used 
in the plural number, hence it is that they add s to 
#, when it is placed before nouns of the feminine 
gender, and os when it precedes nouns of the mas- 
culine gender : so they say, as ongas, by the ounce ; 
aos arrdteis, by the pound, tyc. A denotes also the 
measure; as, medir a pdlmos, to span or measure by 
the hand extended. 

When a is preceded by daqui, and followed by a 
noun of time, it denotes the space of time after 
which something is to be done : as, el rey partira 
daqui a tres dias, the king will set out three days 
hence. 

5thly. A denotes the tools used in working, as 
likewise the games one plays at; as, abrir ao buril s 
to grave ; wherein you see they add o to a; trabal- 
har a candea, to do any thing by candle-light ; d 
aguiha, with the needle. 

Andar a vela, to sail, or to be under sail. 

Jogar a pela, to play at tennis. 

Jogdr as cartas, to play at cards ; wherein you sec 
they add s to a when the noun is of the feminine 
gender, and placed in the plural number. 



158 PORTUGUESE 

Jogar aos centos, to play at piquet; wherein you 
see they add os to a when it precedes nouns signify- 
ing games, when they are of the masculine gender 
and put; in the plural number. 

6thly. A signifies sometimes as. Examp. Estd 
tsto a s6u gostof Is this as you like it? And some- 
times it signifies after; as, a sSu modo, after his or 
her way. It signifies also in; as, ao principio, in the 
beginning ; but then they add o to it. 

Tthly. A is also put before the infinitives, pre- 
ceded by another verb; a.s,ensinar a cantdr, to teach 
to sing. It is also placed between two equal num- 
bers, to denote order; as, ddus a ddus, two by two ; 
qudtro a quatro, four by four: and sometimes it is 
preceded by a participle or adjective, and followed 
by an infinitive mood, 

8thly. A is a particle of composition, serving to 
many nouns, verbs, and adverbs, of which it often 
increases the meaning ; as, adinheirado, very rich, 
that has a great deal of money ; but it generally ex- 
presses in verbs the action of the nouns they are 
composed of; as, ajoelhdr, to kneel down, which 
is formed from a and joelho, knee ; abrandar, to ap- 
pease ; alar gar, to enlarge ; from brdndo, soft ; 
largo, wide, 8§c. 

^hly. A, when it is preceded by the verb ser, and 
fo owed by the pronouns personal, signifies in the 
stead of; as, se tu fosse a vos,fa?'ia aquilo, if I was you- 
(in your place) I would do that. 

1 Othly. When a is placed before cdsa, and the sense 
implies going to, it is Englished by to, but the word 
cdsa is left out ; as, dlejoi a cdsa do governador, he 
went to the governor's. You must observe, that a 
in this sense is a proposition. 

11. A'o pe signifies near ; as, ponde hum ao pe do 
dutro, place, put, or set them near one another, 
Sometimes mismo comes before ao pe, to express 
still more the nearness of a thing, and mtsmo aope 



GRAM M A R. 159 

is Englished by hard by, just by, &c. ; as, a sua cdsa 
estd mtsmo ao pe da minha, his house is just by mine. 

12th. When the noun respeito is preceded by a, 
it is used in the same tense as em compar^agao, but re- 
quires one of these particles, do, da, dos, das, after 
i t, and signifies in comparison of', in regard to, in respect 
of; as, isto he ndda a respeito do que posso dizer, this 
is nothing to other things that I can say. 

13th. When a comes before a verb neuter, it 
marks a dative; and after a verb active, an accusa- 
tive case. 

A before the verb proposito is used in familiar dis- 
courses ; as, a proposito, esquecime de dizer-vos o dutro 
dia; now I think on't, I forgot to tell you t'other 
day. 

14th. Ao revez, or as avessas, are also used as 
prepositions, attended by, de, do, da, &c. ; and it sig- 
nifies quite the reverse, or, contrary, as, eitefaz tudo 
ao revez, or as avessas do que ouvera de ser, ou do que 
the dizem, he does every thing quite the reverse of 
right, or contrary to what he is bid* 

15th, A before troco signifies provided that. It 
is also used before the word tiro, as, a tiro de pica, 
within cannon shot. 

1 6th. Car a a car a, corpo a corpo, sign ify face to face, 
body to body. Tomar huma cousa a boa ou a ma 
parte, signifies to take a thing well or ill. 

Such are the chief relations denoted by the parti- 
cle a. The others must be learned in construing 
and reading good Portuguese books. 

1st. De, or rather do, da, dos, das, (of, from, 
fyc.) denote, first, the place one comes from ; as, 
sahir de Londres, to go out of London ; vir de Fran- 
ca, das Tndias, 8$c. ; to come from France, from the 
Indies, &c. 

2d. De between two nouns denotes the quality of 
the person expressed by the first noun ; as, hum ho- 
mem de hdnra, a man of honour ; pr the matter which 
the thing of the first noun is made of; as, 



160 PORTUGUESE 

Huma estatua demarmore, a statue of marble. 

Huma ponte de madeira ou de pedra, a wood or 
stone bridge. 

Note, that two nouns so joined wit'h de are com- 
monly Englished by two nouns likewise, but with- 
out a preposition, or rather by a compound word, 
whose first noun (whether substantive or adjective) 
expresses the matter and quality, manner, form, and 
vise of the other ; as a stone-bridge, huma ponte de 
pedra; a dancing-master, hum niestre de ddnca, 

3d. De, do, da, dos, das, are used in Portuguese 
after the participles of the preterite, with ser ; as, 
ser amado, ou bem visto dopovo, dos sabios, &jc. ; to be 
beloved by the people, by the learned, &c. 

Note, that do serves for the masculine, da for the 
feminine, and de for both. 

4th. De sometimes signifies by; as, de noite, by 
night ; de dia, by day. 

5th. De before em, and many nouns of time de- 
notes the regular interval of the time after which 
something: begins again: as, eu vou veto de dous em 
dous, dias, I go to see him every other day ; and be- 
fore nouns of place and adverbs repeated with em or 
para between, de denotes the passing from one place 
or condition to another; as, correr de rua em rua, to 
run from street to street ; de ma! para peor, worse 
and worse. 

6th, De after some verbs, signifies after or hi; 
as, tile portdu-se d'esta sorte, he behaved in or after 
this manner. 

7th. De is used before an infinitive, and is then 
governed by some preceding noun or verb ; as, ca- 
paz de ensinar, capable to teach ; digno de ser amado, 
worthy to be loved, &c. ; procurar defazer, to endea- 
vour to do; authoriciade de pre gar, the power or au- 
thority of preaching, &;c. 

8th. De is sometimes Englished by on; 3iS,p6r-sc 
dejoelhos, to kneel down on one's knees. 



GRAMMAR. 161 

9. De between two nouns denotes the use which 
a thing is designed for ; as, azeite de candea, lamp- 
oil; arma de fogo, a fire arm, moinho de vdnto, a 
windmill. 

Note, that this relation is expressed in English by 
two nouns, making a compound word : the first of 
which signifies the manner, form, and use, denoted 
by the Portuguese preposition ; as, cadeira de bra cos, 
an arm-chair, or elbow-chair; vela de cera, a wax- 
candle, &c. 

10. De denotes sometimes the quality of things; 
as meyas de tresfios, stockings with three threads. 
Sometimes it denotes also the price ; as, pdnno de 
dezoito ,velins, eighteen shilling cloth. 

11. De is sometimes Englished by upon; as, viver 
ou sustentar se deptLve, to live upon fish. Sometimes 
it is Englished by with; as, morrer defrio, to starve 
with cold. 

1 2. De sometimes signifies for or out of; as, saltar 
de akgr'ia, to leap for joy ; de modesto, out of mo- 
desty. 

13. De signifies sometimes at; as, zombar de al- 
gu£m, laugh at one. 

14. De is sometimes left out in English ; as, go- 
zar de huma cousa, to enjoy a thing. 

1 5 De followed by two nouns of number and the 
preposition ate between them, is Englished by be- 
tween ; as, hum homem de quarinta ate cincoenta dnnos, 
a man between forty and fihy. 

16. De, preceded by the preposition didnte, is left 
out in English ; as, didnte de mini, before me ; di- 
dnte de Deos, before God. 

17. De when it is placed before casa, and the 
sense implies coming from, is Englished by from; but 
the word casa sometimes is left out in English, and 
sometimes not; as, vbiho de casa (meaning my 
house) I come from home, from my house : but 
when they say, xenho da casa da Senhdra C } we must 

M 



162 PORTUGUESE 

render it in English thus, I am returning from Mrs. 

c: s 

Finally, de is used before several words ; as, de 
bru§Q$ x lying all along on the ground ; de madruga- 
da, soon in the morning; de veras, in earnest, seri- 
ously; de verao, in summer; hbmem de paldvra, a 
man as good as his word; de costas, backwards, or 
on one's back ; andar de pe, to be sickly without 
being bed-rid : and many others which must be 
learnt by use. 

A'ntes, 

III. Antes, before, shews a relation of time, of 
which it denotes priority ; and is always opposite 
to depots, after ; as, antes da criagao do mundo, before 
the creation of the world. 

Frimiiro is also a preposition ; as, Hie chegoupri- 
metro que eu, he arrived before me. 

Didnte. 

IV. Didnte, before, shews a relation of place, 
and it is always opposite to detrdz, behind. It sig- 
nifies also sometimes em, or napresenca; as, ha ar* 
mres didnte de sua cdsa, there are trees before his 
house ; ponde aquillo didnte do Jogo, set or put that 
before the fire ; pregdr didnte del-rei, to preach be- 
fore the king. 

« Didnte is also sometimes an adverb, and may be 
used instead of adidnte ; as, ir didnte or adidnte, to 
go before : but in the following phrase you must 
say, nad vddes tdnto adidnte, and not didnte, don't go 
so far; por didnte is to be Englished by on in the 
following phrase, idepor didnte, go on. 

Depdis. 

V. Depois, after, denotes posteriority of time, and 
it is used in opposition to antes ; as, depois do diluvio, 
after the deluge : depdis do meio dia, after noon. 

Depdis also is used with an infinitive ; as,feito 
aquillo, or tendofeito aquillo, or depois defaz&r aquillo, 



GRAMMAR. 163 

after having done that; and it is also made a con- 
junction with que, governing the indicative; as, dc- 
pdis que tevefeito aquillo, after he had done that. 

Detraz. 

VI. Detraz, behind, denotes posteriority both of 
place and order, and it is said in opposition to diante ; 
as, a sua casaesta detraz da vossa, his house is behind 
yours ; ilk vinha detraz de mim ; he walked after me. 

'. Em.. 

VII. Em, or no, na, nos, nas, (in, into, within, 
&c.) denote a relation both of time and place. The 
many various significations in which these preposi- 
tions are used, must be accurately observed, and 
much regard had to them in the practice. 

No and na are sometimes rendered into English by 
a ; as, duas vezes no dia, na semdna, &c. twice a day, 
a week, &c. 

No, na, &c. are always used before nouns de- 
noting the place wherein something is kept; as, esta 
no gabinete, it is in the closet ; na papeleira, in the 
bureau ; nas gavetas, in the drawers ; na rua, in the 
street, &c. but sometimes they are Englished by 
upon ; as, cahir no chad, to fall upon the ground. 

Em, no, na, &c. signifies commonly in ; as, em 
Londres, in London ; esta na graca del rSy, he is in 
favour with the king ; but in some cases it has a 
very particular meaning ; as, estar em Corpo, which 
signifies literally to be in body ; but the true sense of 
it is to be without a cloak; so that the body is more 
exposed to view without an upper garment. Estar 
em pernas,' literally, to be in legs, signifies to be bare- 
legged-, that is, the legs exposed without stockings. 
Estar em camisa is said of one that has only the 
shirt on his back. 

When this preposition em is before an infinitive 
in Portuguese, then it is an English gerund ; as, 
consiste emfallar bem, it consists in speaking well ; 

m % 



164 PORTUGUESE 

but when it is found before a gerund, it signifies as 
soon as ; as, em acabdndo irei, as soon as I have done, 
I will go. 

Nos nossos tempos is Englished by now a-days. 

Em is used in sentences that imply a general sense ; 
as, Elle estd em miserdvel estado, he is in a wretched 
condition; and not no miser dve I : but if the sentences 
imply a particular sense, you must make use of no, 
nas, &c. as, no miser dvel estado em que Hie esta, in the 
wretched condition wherein he is; and not em mise- 
ravel. You must observe in this last example and 
the like, that you ought to make use of em before 
que, and not of no, na, &c. which are to be placed 
only before qual ; therefore you must not say, no 
miseravel estado no que Hie estd ; but you may say, 
no miseravel estado no qual elle estd. 

Note, that em construed with pronouns without 
an article, makes a sort of adverb, rendered into 
English by a preposition and a noun; thus in this 
sentence, nbs iremos em cdche, we shall go in a coach, 
em cdche is an adverb of manner, which shews how 
we shall go : but no coche denotes something besides ; 
as if a company were considering how they shall ride 
to a place, somebody would say, vos ireis na cadei- 
rinha, e nos no cdche, you shall go in the chair, and 
we in the coach ; no cdche would be said in opposi- 
tion to na cadeirinha, and both respectively to some 
specified chair and coach ; or else they should say, 
vos iriis em cadeirinha, e nos em cdche. But in this 
other sentence, eu deLvei o meu chapeo no cdche, I left 
my hat in the coach, it would be improper to say 
em coche, because some particular coach is meant, 
to wit, that which has drove me here or there, dr 
which has been spoken of 

We say de verad no verao or em o verdo ; de inver- 
no, no inverno, &c. in summer, in winter, &c. 

Em is also rendered into English by at ; as, em 
iddo o Umpo, at all times. 



GRAMMAR, 165 

Em is used, and never no, na, &c. before proper 
names of cities and authors; as, tile estd emJLondres, 
he is in London ; nbs lemos em Cicero, we read in 
Cicero. But they say no Porto, in Oporto. 

Em, and no, na, &c. are construed with the names 
of kingdoms; as, em or net, Inglaterra, in England: 
but no, na, is most commonly construed with names 
of provinces ; as, no Alentejo, na Beira, &c. in Alen- 
tejo, in Beira, &c. 

Em is sometimes rendered into English by into: 
as Narciso foi transj'ormado em flor, Narcissus was 
metamorphosed into a flower : and sometimes by 
to; as de rua em rua, from street to street. 

No, na, are sometimes rendered into English by 
against ; as, dar co' a cabega na par Me, to dash one's 
head against the wall. 

No, na, &c. are also rendered into English by in, 
and sometimes by into ; as, ter hum meninu nos bracos, 
to hold a child in one's arms; entregar alguma cousa 
7ias maos de algutm, to deliver a thing into some- 
body's hands. 

Em js used before the word iravez, as in this 
phrase, por-se de mar em travezcom algutm, to fall out 
together. 

Em before a noun of time, denotes the space of 
time that slides away in doing something; as, el-rey 
foi a Hanover, em tres dias, the king went to Hano- 
ver in three days ; that is, he was no longer than 
three days in going. 

Em is sometimes used after the verb hir, to go; as, 
vdi em qudtro mSses que eu aqui cheguei, it is now 
going on four months since I came hither. 

Em before qudnto, and sometimes without it, is 
rendered into English by zvhile or whilst ; as, em 
qudnto vosfaziis aquillo, eufarei isto, while you do 
that, I shall do this : but if they are followed by a 
noun of time with an interrogation^ then they must 
be rendered into English by in how much, or many ; 
as, &m qudnto tempo? in how much time? You must 



166 PORTUGUES E 

observe, that em quanta a mini, a ti, a Site, &c. are 
rendered into English by for xvhat concerns me, thee, 
him, &c. 

You must observe that^o serves for the masculine, 
na for the*feminine, and em for both. 

Em signifies as; as, em sinal da sua amizade, as a 
token of his friendship • em premio, as a reward. 

The prepositions em, no, na, &c. and dentro, have 
very often the same signification, therefore they may 
sometimes be used one instead of the other ; as es- 
ta na gaveta, or dentro da gaveta, it is in the 
drawer • est a na cidade, or dentro da cidade, he is in 
town. 

Em before the words favor, utilidade, considera- 
carn, razao, and the like, signifies in behalf of for 
the sake of, on account of &c. as, em razao das bellaS 
accoens que elk t em felt o, in consideration of the great 
things he has performed. 

Observe, that they very often make an elision of 
the last vowels, o, a, of the preposition no, na y 
when there is a vowel in the beginning of the next 
word ; n agoa, instead of na agoa ; they also cut 
off the e of the preposition em, and change the m 
into n, as you may see in Camoens, Canto 2. Stanza 
xxxii. n' algum porto, instead of em algum porto, 
wherein you must observe that n is to be Englished 
by to, or into. 

Com. 

VII. This preposition signifies with, and it denotes 
conjunction, union, mixing, assembling, keeping 
company ; as, casdr huma donzella com hum hbmtm 
honrado, to marry a maid with an honest man ; hir 
com alguem, to go with one ; com a ajuda de DSos, 
by God's help, &c. 

Observe that most of the adverbs formed of the 
adjectives are turned in Portuguese by the pre- 

Eosition com and the substantive ; as, atrevidamtntc, 
oldly, com alrevimento, with boldness ; elegante- 



GRAMMAR. 16/ 

menle, elegantly ; com elegdncia, with elegance ; cor* 
tezmente, politely, com cortezia, with politeness, &c. 

You must observe, that the last consonant m is 
very often cut off, even before the noun of number 
hum, one ; and so they say, cum, instead of com hum, 
as you may see in Camoens, Cant. 2. Stanza xxxvii. 

Note, that with me, with thee, with himself, &c. 
are rendered into Portuguese by commigo, comtigo, 
or comvosco, comsigo, comnosco, comvosco, comsigo. 

When com is preceded by para, it signifies to- 
wards, and sometimes over, in English ; as, sejdmos 
piedosos para com ospobres, let us be merciful towards 
the poor. Ter grdnde podir para com alguem, to 
have a great influence over somebody's mind. 

Com before the word capah used metaphorically, 
and then it signifies wider colour, or pretext. 

Para. 

VIII. Para is rendered into English by for; but it 
signifies also fa, when it is found before the infinitive, 
'and denotes the intention, or purpose in doing 
something ; as, este Vvoro he para meu irmao, this 
book is for my brother; estapenna he para escreve'r, 
this pen is to write ; DSos nosfez para amalo, God 
made us for to love him ; o corner he necessario para 
conservdr a vida, eating is necessary for preserving 
life. 

Para que is rendered into English by for what ; 
as, para que he isto? for what is this? and sometimes 
by that, or in order that ; as, para que venha verme, 
that he may come and see me. But porque signifies 
why, for what, upon what account, as, porque 4 nao 
vindes? why don't you come? but when it is not 
followed by an interrogation, it signifies because. 

Para serves likewise before the verbs, to denote 
what one is able to do in consequence of his present 
disposition ; as, die he bast ant emente forte para anddr 
acavdllo, he is strong enough to ride; elk tern has* 



■168 PORTUGUESE 

tdnte cabeddl para sustentdr-se, he has means enough 
to maintain himself; a occasido he muito favordvel 
para nos nao servir-mos delta, the occasion is too fa- 
vourable to let it slip. 

Para expresses also the capacity or incapacity of 
doing any thing ; as, klle he homem para isto, he is 
the proper man wanted for this ; he homem para pou- 
co, he is good for little ; he homem para ndda, he is 
good for nothing. 

This preposition is also used to denote the end or 
motive of doing any thing ; as, trabdlho para o bem 
publico, I work for the public good ; hum Jtospitdl 
para os pobres, an hospital for the poor, 

Para is a preposition of time; as isto me bdsta para 
tddo o anno; this is sufficient to me for all the year ; 
estao unidos para sSmpre, they are united for ever ; 
para ddus mfaes era muito pouco, for two months it 
was too little. 

Para is sometimes preceded by the adverb Id, and 
followed by a noun of time, and then it is English- 
ed by against or towards ; as, Id para ojim da semd- 
na, against the end of the week, or towards the end 
of the, week. 

Para is sometimes Englished by considering, or 
with respect to ; as, iste menino estd muito adiantddo 
para a iddde que tern, or para o pduco ttmpo que 
aprinde, this child is very , forward for his age, $r 
considering the little time he has learned; para Ingiez 
fdlla demasiadam&nte, he talks too much considering 
that he is an Englishman. 

Para signifies sometimesjw^ or ready to; as, Hie 
estd para partir, he is just going away, he is ready 
to go. 

Para is also used before the word grdcas ; as, Ute 
nao he para grdgas, he takes no jest ; Ute nao estd 
para grdgas, he is out of bum our, or he is in an ill 
humour. 

Para onde ? signifies whither ? to what place f 



GRAMMA R. 169 

Para que? or para que Jim? signifies to what end 
ox purpose? Para cima signifies upward. 

Para huma e outra parte, signifies to both sides, 
places, or parts. 

Para is also Englished by towards, and is said of 
places; as, para ori6nte } towards, or to the east. 

Para 6nde quer que, signifies whether, or to what 
place thou wilt, any whither. 

Para dutra parte, signifies towards another place. 

Para comigo, towards me. 

Para didnte, signifies for the time to come. 

De mim, para mirn, signifies for what concerns me. 

Para is used by Camoens. Cant. 2. Stanza xxiv. 
before the preposition detrdz, and signifies back- 
wards. 

Para between two nouns of number is Englished 
by or, and sometimes by and; as, hum homem de 
quarenta para cincotnta dnnos, a man between forty 
and fifty ; dista quatro para cinco legoas, it is about 
four or five leagues distant. 

For. 

IX. Por,peUo,peUa,p6Uos,oxp&llas<s\gx\\x\e$for; as 
por amor de vos, for your sake ; por seis semdnas, for 
six weeks ; palavra por paid vra, word for word. 

Polo and pola instead of peUo and pella, are out of 
use. 

Por sometimes demotes that the thing is not yet 
done; as, esta bbra est a por acabar, this work is not 
yet finished. 

Por, by, for, over, or through ; as, alcancii-o por 
empenho, I obtained it by protection ; eu vou por 
dinheiro, I am going for money ; passiio pellos cdmpos, 
I walk through the fields; por todo reino, all over 
the kingdom. 

When por is before an infinitive, and followed by 
a negative, m the latter part of the sentence, it is 
Englished by although or though ; as, por ser devota, 
ox por devota que seja, nao dciva de ser molher, though 



170 PORTUGUESE 

she is a religious woman, yet she is a woman ; por ser 
pbbre, or por pbbre que seja, nao deixa de ser soberba, 
though she has no fortune, she is nevertheless, or for 
all that, proud. ' Wherein you see, that the negative 
with the verb deixar, are rendered into English hy 
the verb to be, and the particles nevertheless, yet, &c. 
You must observe that they sometimes put the words 
nem por isso before the verb deixar, but the sense is 
the same, and ^ou may as well say, por ser pobre, 
nem por isso deixa, Sec. 

Por followed by an adjective and the particle que 
with a vejb in the subjunctive mood, is rendered 
into English by never so; as, por grdnde que elle seja, 
let him be never so great ; por pouco que seja, never 
so little. 

Por, before menos, signifies^? 1 less than, or under; 
as vm ce nao o tera por minos de vinte libras, you shall 
not have it under twenty pounds. 

Por before quanto, with an interrogation, signifies 
for horv much, at zvhat rate ? But if there is no in- 
terrogation,, as in the following and the like sen- 
tences, then it is to be Englished by for never so 
much ; as, nao of aria por quanto me dessem, I would 
not do it for never so much. 

Por hefore cima signifies upwards, and before baxo 
is Englished hy doxvmvards ; as, o remedio bbra por 
cima e por baxo, the medicine operates, or works, up- 
wards and downwards. 

Por before pouco, muito, hem, &c. and followed by 
que, makes a sort of conjunction governing the sub- 
junctive, and is Englished by if followed by ever 
or never so little, much, well, &c. as, por pouco que 
erriis, if you do amiss never so little ; por bem que 
Sufaga, if I do never so well, &c. 

Por before mim signifies sometimes as for, or for 
all; as, por mim estou prdmpto, as for me, or, for my 
part I am ready ; por mim podlis dormir se quizerdes, 
you may sleep for all me. 



GRAMMAR. 171 

Por, pello, pella, &c. denote the efficient cause of a 
thing, as also the motive and means, or ways of do- 
ing; in all which significations they are Englished 
by by, through, out of, at, &c. as, 

A Asia J6i conquistada por Alexandre, Asia was 
conquered by Alexander. 

Vbs fallals nisso so porenveja, it is out of envy only 
you speak of it. 

Elle entrdu pilla porta, mas sahio pella janella, he 
got in at the door, but he got out at the window, 
&c. 

Por denotes place, after the verbs ir and passar ; 
as, por onde ireis vos? which way shall you go? 

Eu passar^i por Frdnga, I'll go through France ; 
por dnde passou elle? which way did he go? 

Por construed with nouns without an article, de- 
notes most times distribution of people, time, and place; 
and it is Englished by a, or every, before the noun; 
as, 

Elle deu tdntopor cabeca,he gave so much a head. 

Tdnto por soldado, por anno, por mes, por stmdna, Sec. 
so much a soldier, a year, a month, a week; a razao 
de vinte por cento, at the rate of twenty per cent. 

Elle pede tdnto por legoa, he asks so much a league, 
or every league. 

Por, between two nouns without an article, or 
between two infinitives without a preposition, de- 
notes the choice which one makes between two 
things, alike in their nature, but different in their 
circumstances; as, 

Casa por casa antes quero est a que aquella, since I 
must have one of these two houses, I like this better 
than that ; morrir por mower, melhbr, he morre*r 
combatendo quefugindo, when a man must die, it is 
better to die in fighting than in running away. 

Pello meyo is rendered into English by through ; 
as, pello mtyo dos cdmpos, through the fields. 

Pormiyo is rendered into English by by; as, elle 
alcanqtu siu intinto por miyo de astugias, he has 
compassed his ends by devices. 



17% PORTUGUESE 

For turno signifies in one's turn. 

For before the infinitives is used instead of para 
by the best Portuguese writers; and porque instead 
of para que; as you may see particularly in Camoens, 
Canto %. Stanza vii. and viii. and in the following 
example, por nao, or para nao repetir o que jd timos 
dito, not to repeat what we have already said. 

For is sometimes Englished by for, upon the ac- 
count of : for sake, &c. as, ellefara isto por amor dews, 
he will do this upon your account or for your sake; 
deixdrao'0 por morto, he was left for dead; en tinho-o 
por mSu amigo, I take him to be my friend ; todos os 
homens de bem sao, or estao por elk, all honest people 
are for him, or are on his side; por quern me tomais 
vos? who do you take me for? 

We have already observed, thaXporque without an 
interrogation signifies because ; but it has the same 
signification in the following sentence, and the like; 
porque Site he mentiroso segue-se que tambem iuoseja; 
because he is a liar, does it follow therefore that I 
an? one? 

Por istOj or por esta razao, signifies therefore. 

O porque signifies the reason, the cause, or the 
subject; as, sdbe-seo porque? is it known upon what 
account ? 

For modo de dizir signifies as one may say } if I, or 
we, may say, &c. 

For didnte signifies before; and por detrdz signi- 
fies behind. 

For ventura signifies perhaps. 

Ptllo passado signifies formerly, in tune past, here- 
tofore. 

Por nenhum cdso, by no means. 

Por mar e por terra, by se$ and land. 

Hum por hum signifies one by one. 

Por is sometimes Englished by in; as, Hies sad 
winte, por tddos, they are twenty in all. 

When the verb passdr is followed by por, then the 
wwdalto, signifies to forget; zhprnfalheaqmllopor 



GRAMMAR. 17$ 

alio, he forgot that ; but speaking of goods it sig- 
nifies to smuggle. 

Por joined with the verb ir signifies to fetch, and 
seek after; as, vaipor vinho, go fetch some wine; *oai 
pello medico, go see for the physician. 

Por is commonly used before the substantives; as, 
por eximplo, for example; por commodiddde, for con- 
venience ; por costume, for custom sake ; and many 
others, that may be learned by use. 

You must observe, that pello serves for the mas- 
culine, pella for the feminine, and por for both. 

Contra. 

X. Contra, (against, contrary to,) denotes opposi- 
tion; as, que diz vm ce contra istof what do you say 
against this? It signifies also over against, opposite to. 

Pro e contra signifies in English pro and con. 

Desde. 

XI Desde, denotes both time and place, and enu- 
meration of things, and is commonly followed in 
the sentence by the preposition ate (to); then dSsde 
denotes the term from whence, and ate that of hither- 
to-, as, 

Desde principio ate ojim, from the beginning to 
the end. 

E'llefoi a pe dfade Windsor ate Londres, he walked 
from Windsor to London. 

Eu tenho vis to tddos desde primeiro ate ultimo, I 
have seen them all from the first to the last; fdrao 
tddos mbrtos desde primeiro ate ultimo, they were 
all slain to a man. 

DSsde a criagao do mundo, from or since the crea- 
tion. 

Dhde b£r$o, ou infdncia, from the cradle, from 
a child. 



174 PORTUGUESE 

Dfedejd, even now ; as, desde jd prevejo, I even 
now foresee. 

Desde agora, from this time forward. 

Desde entdo, from that time ever since. 

Desde que, as soon as, when. 

Desde qudndo? how long since, or ago ? 

Rio navegavel disde o sen nascimento ; a river na- 
vigable at its very rise. 

AtL 

XII. Ate signifies till, even, to, &c. as you may 
see in the following examples. 

Ate onde? how far? 

Ate Roma, as far as Rome. ^ 

Ate qadndo? till when, or how long? 

Ate que iu viva, as long as I live. 

He hum hbmem de tdnta bonddde, que ate as sens 
inimigos sao obrigddos a estimdlo, he is so good a man 
that even his enemies have a value for him. 

Ate os mats vis homens tomdvao a Uberddde de, Sec. 
the very worst of men took such a libertv as to. 

Ate que, until, till. 

Ate as or ilk as, up to the ears. 

Elle vendto ate a camisa, he has sold the very 
shirt off his back. 

Ate agbrd, or ate aqui, till now, or hitherto. 

Ate aqui, (speaking of a place) to this place, hither, 
so far. 

Ate Id, to that place, so far. 

Ate que isto sefdea, till it be done. 

Ate entao, till then, till that time. 

Ate'is also used before an infinitive; as, griidr 
ate enrouquectr, to bawl one's self hoarse. 

Rir ate arrebentdr pellas ilhdrgas, to split one's 
sides with laughing. 

Ddr de comir a alguim ate arrebentdr, to fill, or 
cram one with victuals till he bursts. 



GRAMMAR. 175 

Ate a primeira, till our next meeting, till we 
meet again. 

Por cima. 

XIII. Por cima (above, over), denotes superiority 
of place; as, 

Morar por cima da alguem, to live or lodge above 
somebody. 

A bulla Ike passou por cima da cabeca, the ball went 
over bis head. 

Por cima de tudo, upon the whole. 

Para cima, 

XV. Para cima (above) denotes superiority of age, 
and is sometimes put at the end of the sentence; as, 

E'lles alistarao todos que tinhao de dez dnnos para 
cima, they enlisted every body above ten. 

A cima. 

* 

XV. A cima, (above) denotes rank, and some 
moral subjects ; as, 

A cima delle, above^ him, or superior to him. 

Estar a cima de tudo, to be above the world. 

Huma mother que esta a cima de tudo, naq se Ike da 
do que o mundo diz delta, a woman who is above the 
public censure, don't care what people say of her. 

Em cima. 

XVL Em cima (upon); as em cima da misa, upon 
the table. 

Em cima de tudo isto, or only em cima, signifies 
and besides all that, over and above all that. 

De cima. 

XVII. De cima, when it is an adverb, signifies 
from above; but when a preposition, it is Englished 
by from, off ox from off; as, 



176 PORTUGUESE. 

. Tirai aquillo de cima da misa, take that from off 
the table. 

Ellenunca Urdu os sSus olhos de cima delta, he never 
turned his eyes from her. 

Cahir de cima das arvores, to fall off the trees. 

Debaxo. 

XVIII. The preposition debaxo, (under, below, or 
from under) denotes the time and place ; I say the 

time of a denomination of a reign, or government; 
as, debaxo do imperio de August o, under the empire of 
Augustus. 

Debaxo, as a preposition of place, marks out in- 
feriority of position ; as, 

Tudo o que ha debaxo dos ceos, all there is under 
heaven. 

*Tir. huma almofada debaxo dos joelhos, to have a 
cushion under the knees. 

Estar debaxo da chave, to be under lock and key. 

Debaxo is sometimes rendered into English by 
upon ; as, affirmar huma causa debaxo de juramenio, 
to swear a thing, to declare upon oath. 

Abaxo. 

XIX. This preposition is rendered into English 
by under, inferior, or next ; as, assent 6u-se abaxo dalles, 
he sat inferior, or under them ; as, asscntou-se abaxo 
de mim ; he sat next, inferior to me, or he was next 
man to me : abaxo del-re* i elle he o primeiro, he is the 
next man to the king. 

This preposition is sometimes put at the end of 
the next phrases, de telhas abaxo, here below, in this 
lower world, de cabega abaxo, headlong. 

Fora. 

XX. Fora, (out, without, except, but,) denotes ex- 
clusion, and exception. It requires generally a ge- 
nitive before a noun of time, or place; but it go- 
verns also the nominative ; as, 



GRAMMAR, . i 177 

Fora do riyno, out -of the kingdom. 

For a da ciddde, out of town. 

Fora de tempo, out of season. 

Frocurdi-ofora decdsa, look for him without doors. 

Elks sahirao tddos, fora ddus ou trSs, they all 
went out except, or but two or three. 

Elk Ihe permite tudo, fora o ir as assembleas, he 
indulges her in every thing, but in going to assem- 
blies. 

Elk tern tddos os poderes,fora o de concluir, he has 
full powers, except of concluding. 

Fora is sometimes preceded by tao, and then it is 
to be rendered into English by so far ; as, elk estd 
tao fora de socorrer os sius alliddos, que se decldra con* 
tra elks, he is so far from assisting his allies, that he 
declares himself against them, 

Fora is sometimes rendered into English by be- 
sides ; as, fora daquelks que, &c. besides those that, 
S$c. and sometimes by beyond; as, fora de medida, 
beyond measure. 

Fora de floras signifies beyond the hour, or very late. 

For alguem fora da porta, or mandar alguem pella 
porta fora, to turn one out of doors. 

Defrdnte, ovfrdntz. 

This preposition governs the genitive, and signi- 
fies over against. It is followed by de, do, da, &c. 
as, 

Defrdnte da sua cdsa estd hum outeiro, over against 
his house is a hill. 

Eu estdva defrdnte delk, I was over against him. 

Sem. 

Sem signifies without ; as, 
Sem dinhiiro, without money. 
Sem duvida, without end. 

Sem dar a entender, or sem fazir conhecir, with- 
out giving to understand. 

N 



178 PORTUGUESE 

Sem mats, nem menos, without any reason or pro- 
vocation. 

Estar sem dmo, to be out of place. 

Sem que algum act L o precedent e possa derrogar o pre- 
sSnte, any former act to the contrary of the present 
notwithstanding. 

Sem governs also the infinitive, which is render- 
ed into English with the participle ; 2^, foliar sem 
sabSr, to speak without knowing. 

It is also a conjunction with que, governing the 
subjunctive* as, 

Enfkda-se sem que Ike digao ndda, he is angry with* 
out any body saying any thing to him 

Nad era euja bast ant anient e infeliz, semque procu- 
rasseis de acrescentar a minha infelicidade ? was I 
not miserable enough before, but you must still la- 
bour to make me more so ? 

Lembro-me sem que me digais, I remember with- 
out your telling. 

E'lle mra sem que mdndem por elle, be will come 
without sending for. 

Conforme, or segundo. 

XXIII. Conforme or segundo (according to, con- 
formable to), govern the nominative, and never 
the dative as in English : as, 

E'llefoi t rat ado conforme o seu merecimento, he was 
treated according to his deserts. 

Conforme o men parecer, in my judgment, in my 
opinion. 

In common conversation conforme is used adver- 
bially, and Englished as follows : 

Tsso he conforme, or only conforme, it is as it hap- 
pens ; may be yes ; may be not ; that is according. 

Conforme #. occasiab o pedir, according as there 
shall be need. 

: Sdbre. 

XXIV. Sdbre signifies upon ; as, sdbre a mesc^ 
upon the table; sdbre o rio, upon the river. 



GRAMMAR. 179 

SSbre tudo, or sobre todas as cousas, over all, above 
all, above all things, above any thing, especially ; 
as, sobre tudo thide cuidddo na saude, but howsoever 
the matter be, mind your health. 

For alguem sobre si, or ddr Ike o primeiro lugdr, 
to place one above himself. 
. Ir sobre huma ciddde, to march against a town. 

Ir sobre alguem, to fall, or to rush upon one. 

Ir sobre seguro, to go upon sure grounds. 

Sobre a noite, about or towards the evening. 

Sobre o verde, somewhat green. 

Sobre a minha paldvra, upon my word. 

Sobre paldvra, upon parole. 

3fanddr carta sobre cdrta,tosmd\etier upon letter. 

Elle recebeo a carta sobre o jantdr, he had just 
dined when he received the letter. 

EUedorme sobre o jantdr, he sleeps presently after 
dinner. 

Sobre isto, or sobre estas cousas, is sometimes 
Englished by more than that, or besides that ; as, 

Elle roubou-o, e sobre isto matou-o, he robbed him, 
and more than that, he killed him. 

Sobre que, is rendered into English by though 
or although; as, 

Este negbcio sobre que lie difficult 6so,nao he impossivel, 
altho' this is a hard affair, yet it is not impossible. 

Sobre is Englished sometimes by besides ; as, 

Sdbre as miserias da guerra, elle teve a disgrdca, 
&c. besides the miseries of the war, he had the mis- 
fortune of, 8$c. 

Estdr sdbre si, or an dar sobre-si, signifies to stand 
upon one's guard. 

Eu vos escreverei sobre esta materia, I will write 
to you about this matter. 

Ac&rca. 

XXV. A' circa signifies about ; as, dcSrca disto Iht 
disse, about this I told him ;' dcerca de Id ir the res~ 
pondi, about going there I answered him. 

N 2 



180 , PORTUGUESE 

Perto, junto, ao pe, pegado. 

XXVI. Perto, (near by, about) denotes proximity 
of place and time, and governs the genitive case; as 
aquillo estd muito perto do lume, that is very near the 
iire; perto das oito horas, about eight o'clock. 

Perto do rio, near the river. 

Est dmos perto do Natal, we are near Christmas. 

Ao pe requires also the genitive case ; as, 

Assenidivos ao pe de mini, sit down by me, or near 
me; ao pe do rio, near the river, &c. 

Note, that; too (near or by) and pegado, (hard by) 
require the dative case; as, 

Junto a ciddde, near the town. 

Pegado ao paldcio, hard by the palace. 
Longe. 

Longe, far, a great way off, governs the genitive^ 
and the particle de, or do, da, &c. as, 
Longe de cdsa, far from home. 
Longe daqui, far from hence. 

De longo, or ao longo. 

This preposition requires the genitive case; as, 
Ao longo da pray a, afong the shore. 
Ao Ungo da cost a, doprddo, &c. along the coast, the 
meadow, &c. 

Of further Particles. 

Ainda, ainda que, postoque or qudndo bem, ainda asshn 
or com tudo. 

Ainda signifies yet ; as, tile ainda nao viyo, he is 
not come yet. It signifies also even ; as, seria ver- 
gdnha ainda o falldr nisso, it were a shame even to 
speak of it; nem ainda por cem libras, no not for a, 
hundred pounds. 

Ainda que signifies, though, or although; as, ainda 
que vos sois mdis velho do que ille, though you be 
older than he; ainda que assim fdsse, though it 
were so. 



GRAMMAB. 181 

Ainda qui, is very often followed by com tudo, 
yet for all that ; as, ainda que ilk nab tvvesse neces- 
sidade disso, com tudo, &c. though he had no need of 
it, yet, %c. 

Ainda assim, or com tudo, is sometimes Englished 
by nevertheless, or for all t hat ; as, ainda assim sempre. 
flkfoi louvavel, he was praise- worthy for all that, 

Ja disde,jd que and j a por que. 

Ja desde is rendered into English by even from; 
as,ja desde o principio, even from the beginning. 

Ja que, signifies since ; as, 

Ja que isso assim he, since it is so. 

The particle que sometimes is not placed imme- 
diately after ja; as,ja ha clous dnnos que morreo, he 
died two years since or ago. 

Ja ha muito tempo que sahistes de casa, it is a long 
time since you went from home. 

Ja por que, is repeated in the same sentence, and 
then the first is rendered into English byfrst, be- 
cause; and the second by secondly, because ; as, ja 
por que eracego,japor que era coxo, first because he 
was blind, arid secondly because he was lame. 

Depots que. 

Depots que is rendered into English by after; as, 
Depots que eu tinha entrddo, after I was gone in. 

Com que. 

Com que is only a note either of introduction, or 
connexion; as, 

Com que havia hum homem enfkrmo, &c. now a 
certain man was sick ; sometimes they add to it 
the particle assim, and then it is to be rendered 
into English by and so. 

- Ou. 

Ou signifies or, or either; as, ou bom, ou mao, 
either good or bad; mais ou menos, more or less; 
ou elle queira ou nao, whether he will, or no. 



182 PORTUGUESE 

Quer. 

Quer, when a particle, must be repeated, and the 
first is rendered into English by either or whether, 
and the second by or ; as, quer elle queira quer nao, 
whether he will or no ; quer vos o tenhdisfeito, quer 
nao, whether you have done that, or no. 

Se quer or ao minos. 

Se quer or ao menos, &c. signifies at least, however ; 
as, se vos nao quereis s&r por Hie nao sejdis se quer 
contra elle, if you don't chuse to be for him, at least 
don't oppose him ; ddi-lhe se quer com que sustent ar- 
se, give him at least a subsistence ; o nbsso primeiro 
Jim he de livrarnos de todos os males, ao menos dos 
mayores, our chief end is to be freed from all, how- 
ever the greatest evils. 

Nem se quer hum, is rendered into English by 
never a one, so much, or in the following manner ; as, 
forao todos mbrtos, e nem se quer hum escapou, they 
were all slain to a man, 

Qudndo muito. 

Qudndo muito, (at most, at farthest, at long run), is 
generally used before the nouns of time and price; 
as, elle estara aqui dentro em hum mez qudndo muito, 
he will be here in a month at farthest ; dez libras 
qudndo muito, ten pounds at most. 

Tdnto. 

Tdnto, so much, is sometimes followed by como, 
and then it is rendered into English by as well as, 
as much as, &c. 

A'mo-te tdnto como a mim mismo, I love thee as 
well as myself. 

Elle time tdnto como qualquer de vos, quedhe resulte 
algum ddno, he is afraid of a harm as much as any 
of you. 



GRAMMAR. 185 

Cuidei que a est imdsset dnt ocomo a si mSsmo,l thought 
he made as high account of her, as of himself. 

Elks vem tdnto de dia como de noite, they can see 
as well by day as by night. 

E'u the tdnto ccmo v&s, I had as much as you. 

O'utro tdnto is rend ere d into English by the double, 
twice as much, or as much ; as, 

E'u alcancei out ro tdnto mdis -por isso, I had as 
much more for it ; hi posso fazer butro tdnto, I can 
do as much. • 

Tdnto followed by assim, is a particle merely ex- 
pletive ; as, 

Tdnto assim que Ihe posso tu fazer f how can I 
help it; vaite, tdnto assim nao ha nada para ti, go 
away, heie is nothing for you. 

Tdnto assim followed by que without an interro- 
gation, is sometimes rendered by so that, in so much 
that ; as, tdnto assim que elle nao quer ouvir mdis 
foliar nisso, so that he will hear no more of it. 

Tdnto mdis is followed by que, and Englished by 
end the more so as ; as, 

Eu estou prompto para ir. com vm ce hum dia destes 
a comedia, se vm ce quizer, tdnto mdis que se deve repre- 
sent dr huma not a peg a I am ready to go with you 
some day or other to the play, if you'll give me 
leave; and the more so, as a new piece is to be acted, 

Tdnto que, of logo que, is rendered into English by 
as soon as; as, tdnto que eu o vi, as soon as I saw him. 
- Tdnto melhor is rendered into English by so much 
the better. 

Tdntois sometimes preceded by com, and followed 
by que, and is Englished by so, provided that ; as corn 
tdnto que o fagais, provided that you do it ; com 
tdnto que me ndofaca mal, s® he do me no hurt. 

Tdnto qudnto is Englished by as much as; as, 

Tdnto qudnto posso, as much as I can. 

Tao. 
Tad, so, is generally followed by odmoi as, 



184 PORTUGUESE 

JEste nao he tad bom como o outro, this is not so good 
as the other; iu sei isso tao bem como *vos 9 1 know it 
as well as you. 

Tad is sometimes followed by que, and Englished 
by so, such, to that degree ; as, 

Elk he tao prudent e que nao tern igual, he is so wise 
that he has not his match ; nao sou tao louco que o 
creya, I am not so simple, or I am not such a fool as 
to believe it; faz tao grdnde tento que, &c. the wind 
is so high that, &c. or the wind blows to that de- 
gree, &c, 

Como. 

Como, is, Englished by as, like, how, &c. as you 
may see in the following expressions, 

Como? how? 

DizMmecdmo Ihe hei defallar ? tell me how I may 
speak to him. 

Como assimf how so ? 

Como ! what ! 

Como quer que, whereas. 

Como quer que seja, howsoever, in what manner, 
or fashion soever. 

Seja cdmofor, be it as it will. 

Cdmo isto assim he, since it is so. 

Como, as it w r ere, or almost. 

Como se, as if, or even as if; as, como se elks ti- 
niessem ja vencido, as if they had already over- 
come. 

Como iambem, as well as. 

Rico como elk he, as rich as he is. 

Comp s6is ffiiu amigo, quero, &c. as (or because) 
you are my friend, 111, &c. 

Dizeime o s cdmo, tell me how. 

Eu sei comofazer para que elk yenha, I know the 
way I shall take to make him come. 

Como elk la nao esteja, eu i?*£i, provided he is not 
there, I will come. 



GRAMMAR. 185 

Assim. 

Assim, so, thus, is rendered into English as you 
may see in the Following expressions, 

Pois he assim de veras f de veras que assim he, is 
it even so? it is even so. 

Assim seja, or seja assim, so be it, or be it so. 

Assim he, it is so. 

Para assim dizer, as it were. 

Assim soueu louco, que, &c, I am not so foolish as 
to, &c. 

Assim Deos me salve, as I hope to be saved. 

Tdnto assim, so that. 

Assim he que vos, &c, is this your way, &c v 

Assim como assim, after all, nevertheless, or for all 
that; as, em vao dilatais a vossa Jornada, assim como 
assim hepreciso que vqdes, it is in vain for you to put 
off your journey, you must go thither nevertheless, 
or for all that, you must go after all. 

Assim como, as well as, or as soon as. 

Pasta assim par agora, thus much for this time. 

Assim na paz, como na guerra, both in time of 
peace and war. 

Assim, assim, so so, indifferent. 

Assim queira elle como pode, he can if he will. 

Assim is sometimes preceded by e; as, e assim quh 
quer isto dizer? how now? what do you mean by 
this? And sometimes assim is followed by como; as, 
assim como o sol eclipsa os out r as planetas, da mesma 
sbrte, &c. as the sun eclipses the other planets, so, 
&e. * 

St. 

Se, if; as se elle vier, if he comes ; se me amasses, 
should you love me ; se elle Jusse homem de honra, 
were he but an honest man : se soubessem quern iu 
sou, todos diriab, &c. were it told who I am, every 
one would say, &c, se he. verdade que, &c. if so be 
that, 8$c> 



186 PORTUGUESE 

The reciprocal verbs, as well as those that arc 
used impersonally, may have two se se joined toge- 
ther; as, se sej'dr, if he goes away ; se sefdlla nisso, 
if they speak to it. 

• Se is sometimes rendered into English by whether; 
and when it is repeated, the second is Englished by 
or; as, 

Quisera sabSr se a culpa he nossa, se vossa, I would 
know whelher it is your fault, or ours. 

Alias. 
Alias, is sometimes rendered into English by else; 
as, entrdi, porque alias fecharSi a porta, come in, or 
else I'll shut the door ; porque alias seriao os vossos 
filhos immundos, else were your children unclean. 
And sometimes it is rendered into English by other- 
wise, in other things, or respects. 

Embora. 

Embora is sometimes rendered into English by 
prosperously, auspiciously ; but sometimes it is a par- 
ticle merely expletive, and answers to the Italian 
pure; as, dixei mutt o embora o que quizerdes, say what 
you please : the Italian says, ditepur quelche vi place. 

Muito embora seja assim, well, let it be so. 

Embora is sometimes Englished by away; as, 
waite embora) go away. 

Sendo. 

Sendo signifies if not, did not y were it not that, but, 
that; as, 

Sendo Jivesse medo de meu pay, but that I fear my 
father. 

Se elle noo tvoesse vergdnha de confessdr, but that 
he was ashamed to confess. 

Note, that the following expressions, in which 
they make use of this particle, may be Englished 
by but, for, and some other variations. 

Se naojd&sepor elle, but for him, or had it not 
been for him, or had he not been* 



GRAMMAR. 187 

Senao fosse por vos, had you not been, or had it 
not been for you, without you, without your help, 
hindrance, fyc. 

Se nao fosse por mim, elle morreria de fome 3 were it 
not for me, he would starve. 

Senao is sometimes Englished by but: as, nem Sites 
fern btttro intSnto, senao > &c. nor do they aim at any 
thing else but, &c. 

Ninguem disse assim senao Cicero, nobody said so 
but Cicero. 

Senao may be also expressed in Portuguese by 
mats que in the following^ sentence, and the like. 

Elle nao faz senao jogar, or elle nao fazmais que 
jogar, he does nothing but play. 

Nao, nao por qui. 

Nao, not, or no, when followed by porquS, is 
Englished by not that, not but that-, as, nao porquS 
Ihefaltasse engenho, not but that he had wit; nao por- 
que nao fbsse just o, mas porquS, &c. not but that it 
was right, but because, &c. nao porquS a cdusa seja 
impossivel, mas porquS, &c, not that the thing is pos- 
sible, but because, 8$c. 

TambSm, or outrosi. 

TambSm, or outrosi, signifies also, too, likewise; as, 
vos assim o querSis e eu tambSm, you'll have it so, and 
I too. 

Para que, por que 4 . 

See the prepositions para and por. 



This particle is very much used by the Portuguese, 
and it is rendered into English several ways, as you 
may see in the following examples : 

Pois ide, e vinde logo, go then and come back pre- 
sently. 

Pois nao sou eu capaz defazSllo? what, am I not 
capable to do it ? 



188 PORTUGUESE 

Pols, or pois entao que quer dizer isto ? Well, and 
what of all this. 

Pais, or pois entao que hei de fazer? What shall 
I do then ? 

Pais eu digo que elle estd dentro, why, he is here 
within, I say. 

Pois por que me vigidis! Why then do you watch 
me? 

Fllle tern cabega; pois tambem hum alftnete a tem r 
he has got a head, and so has a pin. 

Pois before nao y and preceded by an interroga- 
tion, denotes a strong assertion, and is Englished by 
without doubt, yes, surely, to be sure, &c. as, vird elle ? 
pois nao! will he come ? yes to be sure. 

A'ntes, or mais depressa. 

These particles are sometimes rendered into Eng- 
lish by rather or sooner ; as, antes or mais depressa 
quizera morrer, I would rather die; antes quizera^ 
mver so que na vossa companhia, I would sooner live 
alone than be in your company. Sometimes antes 
is Englished by before ; as, l'de-vos antes que ille 
*venha, go away before he comes ; antes que eu morra, 
before I die. 

Mas antes, pelo contrdrio, mas pelo contrdrio. 

These particles are rendered into English by on 
the contrary, on the other hand, nay ; as, mas antes, 
mas pelo contrdrio, or pelo contrdrio isto he muito dij- 
ferente, nay it is quite another thing, mas antes, pelo 
contrdrio, &c. elle he avarento, nay, or on the con- 
trary, he is a covetous man. 

Para melhor dizer. 

This phrase is rendered into English by nay, as, 
elle tern j a bast ante, ou para melhor dizer, mais do 
necessdrio, he has already enough, nay too much ; 
A isto he que nos chamdnios diriito das gentes, ou para 
melhor dizer, da razdo ? this is what we call the law of 



GRAMMAR. 189 

nations, which may be called more properly the law 
of reason. 

Que. 

We have already observed that que is a particle 
which most conjunctions are composed of; as, ainda 
que, although ; de sorte que, so that, 8$c. 

The particle que sometimes is the sign of the third 
persons of the imperative, as let in English ; as T que 
falle, let him speak; que riao, let them laugh. 

Que is used between two verbs, to determine and 
specify the sense of the first, as eu vos asseguro que 
assim he, I assure you that it is so; duvido queassim 
sSja, I doubt whether it is so or no. 

Que is used also after hora in the beginning of a 
sentence, and followed by a verb in the subjunctive, 
to denote by exclamation one's surprize, aversion, 
and reluctance of something; in which case there is. 
a verb grammatically understood before que ; as, 
hora que se esquecesse Hie de si mesmo! I wonder, or 
is it possible for him to have forgot himself! 

The exclamation, or admiration, is sometimes 
expressed without any verb ; as, que gosto ; e ao 
mismo tSmpo, que pena ! how much pleasure and 
trouble at once ! 

Que is sometimes repeated • as, 

Que bellos livros que tendes; what fine books you. 
have got ! que bella que he a virtude ! how beautiful 
is virtue ! 

Que is sometimes followed by de; as, que de loucos 
ha no mundo ! how many fools there are in the world ! 

Que is used after nouns denoting time, and is 
sometimes Englished by when or since, &c. and 
sometimes left out; as 

O dia que elle partio, the day when he set out. 

Quanta tempo ha que estais em Ldndres ? how long 
have you lived in London? How long is it since 
you lived in London ? 

Ha dez dnnos quefaz a mesma cdusa, he has done 
the same thing these ten years, 



190 PORTUGUESE 

Ha dez dnnos que morreo, he died ten years ago. 

Que is sometimes rendered into English by be- 
cause, as you may see in Camoens, canto 2. stanza 
xvi. que levemente hum dnimo, and sometimes by 
that, to the end that, in order to ; as you may see 
ibid, stanza xvii, que cbmo vissem, que no rio, &c. 

Que before se in the beginning of a sentence, is a 
redundancy not expressed in English ; as que se vos 
dizeis que, if you say that, &c. 

Que is used after the conjunction a penas (scarce 
or hardly) and is Englished by but; as, apenas 
acabbu de jallar que logo morreo; he had hardly 
done speaking but he expired. 

Que sometimes is preceded by desorte, de maneira, 
de g£ito, and then it is Englished by so that, in such 
a manner, insomuch that ; as hi ofarei de sbrte que 
jiqueis contente, I will do it so that, or in that man- 
ner that, you shall be contented. 

De veras. 

De veras signifies in earnest ; but sometimes it 
is Englished by no sure ; de veras! nao oposso crer, 



no sure ! 



Hora. 

Hora, or bra, is an interjection that serves to en- 
courage, as we have seen above; but when it is re- 
peated, it is Englished by sometimes, one while, ano- 
ther xvhile; as, ora est a bem, bra esta mal, sometimes 
he is well, sometimes ill. elle bra esta de hum parecer, 
e ora de dutro, he is now of one opinion, and next 
moment of another, For bra, signifies now, for the 
present. 



GRAMMAR. 191 

CHAP. VIII. 

Of the Portuguese Orthography ; and first of 
Capitals and Stops. 

I. HTHE proper names, as well as the surnames, 
always begin with a capital. 

II. The names of nations, kingdoms, and pro- 
vinces, also begin with a capital; as, Franctz, 
French ; Inglez, English, &c. 

III. All names of dignities, and degrees, and ho- 
nours, require a capital; as Rey, Bispo y Sec. King, 
Bishop, &c. 

IV. At the beginning of a period, as well as of 
a verse, the first letter is always a capital. 

V. The names of arts and sciences, as well as 
those of kindred, begin with a capital. 

Of Stops. 

The use of stops, or points, is to distinguish words 
and sentences. 

The Portuguese have six stops, or pauses, viz. 

1. The ponto finals the same as our .period or full 
stop (.), and is used at the end of a period, to shew 
that the sentence is completely finished. 

2. The dous pontos, which is our colon (:), and 
is the pause made between two members of a pe- 
riod; that is, when the sense is complete, 'but the 
sentence not ended. 

3. The ponto e virgula, our semicolon (;), and 
denotes that short pauses which is made in the sub- 
division of the members or parts of a sentence. 

4. The ponto de interrogagam, the point of inter- 
rogation thus (?). 

5. Ponto de admiragam, the point of admiration 
thus(!). 

6. The virgula, the same with our comma (,) 
and is the shortest pause or resting, in speech, be- 
ing used chiefly to distinguish nouns, verbs, and 
adverbs, as also the parts of a shorter sentence. 



]Q<2 PORTUGUESE 

The conjunction e, the relative qual, and the dis- 
junctions ou and nem, require a comma before them. 

The Portuguese make use also of a parenthesis, 
thus ( ); but they do not make use of the diaeresis, 
called by their printers crema (•■) ; they make use 
also of the dngulo, thus a, called by the printers 
caret. 

The apostrophe, or, as they call it, viracento, like- 
wise takes place in this as in other languages, being 
designed only for the more pleasant and easy pro- 
nunciation of words, by cutting off an antecedent 
vowel ; as, (V drma&, d' e facts, and not darmas, defaas, 
&c. But this is somewhat excusable in cases where- 
in, by use, they seem to be one word; as nesta- 
neste, desta, deste, nalgum, daquSlie, nelle, neila, 
daqui, dali, atequi, ategora ; and not em elk, de 
Me, &c. 

Of the Accents. 

The accent, which is the very soul of articulated 
words, is a sound of the voice by which we pro- 
nounce some syllables shorter, others longer. 

I intend to speak here only of the accents the 
Portuguese ought to make use of, according to Ma- 
dureira, in his Portuguese Orthography, 

The Portuguese indeed are acquainted with three 
accents, but they ought to make use of two only, 
namely, the acute, which descends from the right 
to the left ('), and the circumflex, thus Q. 

1. The acute serves to prolong the pronuncia- 
tion, and is put, according to Ma dureira, on the 
third person singular of the future tense ; as amara 9 
lera, &c. 

Q. On the penultima of the preterphiperfect tense 
of the indicative mood ; as, amara, ensinara, &c. 

3. The acute accent ought to be put also on 
the penultima of the third persons of the present 
tense of the verb renunclar, pronunclar, duvidar, &c. 
thus renuiicia, pronuncia, duvida, &c. that they may 



G R A M M A R. 13$ 

be distinguished from the nouns renuncia, pronuncia, 
durida, &c. The same accent is also put on esta, 
no, to distinguish them from est a, this, and no, in the. 

The vowel has two sounds, according to the two 
accents that may be put on it; one open, when it is 
marked with the acute accent, and is pronounced 
like in store ; the other close, when it is marked 
with the circumflex accent, and then is pronounced 
like u in stumble. 

There are many nouns, both substantive and ad- 
jective, which are accented in the singular with the 
circumflex, and in the plural with the acute; and 
the adjectives that have two terminations, particu- 
larly those ending in oso, osa, must be accented (in 
the singular) with the circumflex in the masculine* 
and with the acute in the feminine ; as, 

Fogo, fire; plural, fogos. 

Forno, oven; plural, forms* 

dlho, eye ; plural, olhos. 

ovo, egg; plural, Svos. 

dsso, bone; plural, ossos. 

Pogo, well ; plural, pogos. 

Porco* hog ; plural, porcos. 

Rogo, prayer; plural, rogos. And so Joj 0, tdrno 4 
formoso, sequioso, supposto, povo, torto, torta, copioso> 
&c. 

The following keep the circumflex accent in 
both numbers; bolo, bolos; bojo, bojos; bolo, botos; 
coco,cocos; choro,choros; coto, cotos; Jorro,J'6rros; 
gordo, gordos ; g6sto, gostos ; gozo, gozos ; 16 bo, 16 bos; 
mop, mogos ; nojo, nojos ; potro, potros ; tolo, tolos ; 
ferrolho, f err olhos; raposo, raposos; arroz, arrdzes; 
algoz, algozes, &c. 

On the contrary, the following keep the acute ac- 
cent in both numbers: copo, copos ; mo do, modos; 
nosso, nossos ; vosso, vossos, &c. 

When the accent circumflex is put on the i, tbei*. 
the e is pronounced like the French masculine e ; 
but when e is accented with the acute accent, then 

O 



194 PORTUGUESE 

the e is to be pronoun cecl like the e open in French, 
and it is exceeding sonorous and long. See the 
pronunciation of the vowel e. 

Nouns ending in az, iz, oz, uz, must have the 
acute accent on the vowel before the z; as, rapaz, 
a boy; noz, a walnut; alcacuz, licorice; but you 
must except arroz, rice; algdz, a hang-man. 

Nouns ending in ez generally have the circumflex 
accent ; as twos, a 'month; marquSz, a marquis; &c 
except the surnames; as, A'lvarez, Antunez, Lopez, 
Henriquez, Goncalvez, Rodriguez, Perez, Nunez, 
TUlez, &c. 

Some Observations upon the Portuguese 
Orthography. 

Both the Portuguese orthqgraphers and best au* 
thors vary so much in their rules and ways of writ- 
ing, that it is a hard matter, and quite out of any 
grammarian's way, to clear up this part of the Portu- 
guese grammar : since it requires no less authority 
than that of the Royal Portuguese Academy. How- 
ever, not to omit such a material part of the Gram- 
mar, I shall present the learners with the following 
observations. 

I. When the Latin words from which the Portu- 
guese are derived, begin. with a b, the Portuguese 
likewise must begin with it ; therefore you must 
write and pronounce the b, in the following words, 
bom, bmdade, hem, b£nto,8cc. because they are derived 
from bonus, bonitas, Sec, But you must except bainha, 
bexiga, bairro, which begin with a b, though they arc 
derived- from vagina, vesica 3 vicus. 

II. Likewise if the Latin words begin with a v, 
the Portuguese words derived from them must also 
begin, with it; as vtda,vivtr,varrtr, ver, vinho,hz* 
from vita, vivere, verrere, videre, vinum, &c. 

Though b ought to be pronounced only by closing 
the lips, and v by touching the superior teeth with 
the inferior lips ; yet, by a certain affinity between 



GRAMMAR. m 

these two letters, in speaking there is a great confu- 
sion in the pronunciation of them in the province 
of F/ntre Douro e M'mho: and this confusion has 
not been peculiar to the Portuguese language, be* 
cause Nebriaa says, in his Castilian Orthography, that 
in his time some Spaniards could hardly make any 
distinction between the^e two letters. 

III. The p found in some words originally Latin, 
is changed in Portuguese into a b ; as., cabra,cabcllo % 
cabega, &c. from copra, capillm y caput, &c. 

IV. 7 he Portuguese generally make use of thejj 
in the following woids : ay, rey,Jrey, ley, may, pay> 
mayo, meyo, and some others. 

Blattau says, that we must make use of the y in 
words having a Greek origin; .as, sy'l/aba, Chryso** 
peia, pyramide, polt/gono, hydrographia, hydropico, 
phy'slca, hyperbole, hypocrita, Jpocrypho, &c. 

V. The ph are used by the Portuguese in some 
words taken from the Greek; as, philosophia, philo* 
logia, PhiladHphia, epitaphio, &c. 

VI. 1 he r in Portuguese has two pronunciations* 
one soft, expiessed by a single r, as in arado, a 
plough; and after the consonants, b, c. d,J\ g, p, t ; 
and another hard, in which two rr are used; as in 
barro, carro, &c. But you must observe, 

1. That in the beginning of a word tw T o rr must 
never be used, because then the r is always pro* 
nounced hard in Portuguese; as in the words remo % 
rico, rbda, &c. 

2. When the consonants /, n, s, are before the r, 
either in a single word, or a compound one, this 
letter must never be doubled, because then its sound 
is always strong ; as in abalroar, enriquecer, houra^ 
desrtgrddo, Htnrique, Israelita, &c. 

3. l'he r after a b, is also pronounced hard in 
compounds with the prepositions ab, ob, sub, and 
yet is not doubled ; as in abrogar, obrepgao,subrepcao> 

VII. The s is never doubled in the beginning 
of words, nor after the consonants ; therefore you 

o % 



196 PORTUGUESE 

must write sardr, saber, falsaminte, /also, mdnso, &c. 
The s is pronounced like z between two vowels, 
in words derived from the Latin, as well as in those 
that end in 6sa> and oso ; as musa, caso, riso, amoroso, 
cuidaddso, casa, &c. You must also observe, that 
coser signifies to sew, but cozer signifies to boil or 
bake. 

VIII. Th are generally used in words derived from 
the Greek; as, amphitheatro, atheist a, theologo, It- 
thargo, methodo, Sec. 

Th is also used in the Portuguese preposition athe ; 
though some write it thus ate. 

IX. When pt is found in Latin words, it must be 
kept in the Portuguese derived from them ; as, ap- 
to, inepto, bptimo, Sec. from apt us, ineptus, optimus, &c. 
You must make the same observation about ct. 

X. Ch, is sounded like k, in words derived from 
the Greek ; as ; orchdnjo, archiduque, Chrysbstomo, 
chrysol, chrisologo, Christ ovao, monarchia, Sec. These 
words must be written with ch, in order to preserve 
to the eye the etymology of words. 

Note, that ch in words that are not derived from 
the Greek is pronounced like sh in the English 
words shawl, shoot, Sec. but as some confound the 
ch with the x, and begin with x those words that 
should begin with ch, 1 thought it necessary to make 
a collection of them. 



Words beginning with 



CHA. 



Cha 

Chaa 

Chaca 

Cbacina 

Chaco 

Chacota 

Chafariz 

Chaga 

Chalupa 

ChW 



Chamalote 


Chancon£ta 


Chamar 


Chanqu£ta 


Chamatfz 


Chantagem 


Chambao 


Chantrado 


Chamejar 


Ch&ntre 


Chamica 


Cha 


Chamine 


Chapa 


Chamuscar 


C hapado 


Chan 9a 


Chapeado 


Chancela * 


Chapel&a 


Chancelaria 


Chapeo 


Chance? er 







GRAMMAR. l# 


Chapfm 


Chibarro 


Chofrado 


Chapinhar 


Chibo 


Chofre 


Chapuz 


Chicharos 


Choldabolda 


Charamela 


Chicharro 


Choque 


Charameleiro 


Chichelos 


Chora> 


Charco 


Chicoria 


Chorrilho 


Charneca 


Chicote 


Chorro 


Charneira 


Chifra ' 


C hover 


Charola 


Chifrar 


Choupa 


ChaYpa 


Chifre 


Choupana 


Charro 


Chilindrao 


Choupo, or Chopo 


Charrua 


Chilrdr 


Chounco 


Chasco 


Chimbeo 


Choutar. 


Chasona 


Chinear 


CHU# 


Chatim 


Chinch&iro 




Chato 


Chinchorro 


Chtfca 


Chavao 


Chinela 


Chupamel 


Chavascal 
Chave 


Chiqu6iro 
Chispa 


Chupar 
Chuchurriar 


Chavalha 


Chispar 


Chueo 
Chufa 


Chaveta 


Chiste 


Chavinha. 


Chita. 


Chumaco 
Chumbar 


CHE. 


CHOi 


Chumbo 


Chea, or Cheya 


Ch6ca 


Churriao* 


Chefe 


Choca 


Churume 


Chegar 


i Chocalhar 


Chusma 


Cheriar, and its ^-Chocalho 


Chuva 


rivatives. 


Chocar 


Chuveiro. 


Cherivia 


Chocarrear 




Ch£rne. 


Chocarrice 


CHY, 


CHI. 


Choco and Chocos 


Chiar 


Chocolate 


Chypre. 


The following words begin 


with ce and not «& 


C6a 


Ce*!ela 


Cegar 


Ceado 


Cectenho 


Cego 


Cear. 


Cedcr 


Cegonha 


CEB. 


Cedilho 


Cegude 


Cebola 


C&do 


Cegueira. 


Ceboll 


Cedro 


CEU 


Cebolinho. 


Cedula. 


Ceifa 


CED. 


CEG. 


Ceifad 


Ccdavim 


Cega 


Ceiraa 



198 



PORTUGUESE 



Ceinnha 


Centeal 


Cerracad* 


Ceivar. 


Cen^esimo 


Cerrar 




Cenreyo 


Cerralhtiro 


CEL. 


Cento 


Cerralho 




Centoculo 


Cerrarse 


Celada 


Centopea 


Cerro 


Celebracao 


Central 


Certa 


Celebrar 


C6ntro 


Certo 


Celebre 


Centuplo 


Ceifia 


Celeste 


Centuria 


Cert6za 


Celestial 


Centuriao 


Certida 


Celesuina 


Ceo 


Certificar 


Celeusma 
Co -»"a 


CEP. 


Cerva 
Cerval 


Ceiha 


Cepa 


Cerveja 


Celho 


Cepilho 


Cervtlhaf 


Celibado 


Cepo 


Cerviz 


Celibata 


Ceptro. 


Ceruda 


Ce^irola 


CER. 


Ceiuleo 


C^lidonia 




Cervo 


Cella 


Cera 


Cei zir. 


Celleiro 


Ceraferario 


CES. 


Celleireiro 


Cerbero 


Cekas. 


Cerca 


Cesar 




Cercado 


Cesar ea 


CEM. 


Cercar 


Cesma 


Cem ; 


Cercador 


Cesmaria 


Cemiterio. 


Cercadura 


Cesm&iro. 




Cerce 


Cessao 


CEN. 


Cerceado 


C< ssacao 


Cenaculo 


Cercear 


Cessar 


Csno 


Cercillo 


Cesta . 


Ctnobio 


Cerco 


Cestinha 


Ceriobitico 


Cerdoso 


Cestirho 


Ccnoiapbia 


Cerebro 


Cesteiro 


Cenoura 


Cereijas 


Cesto 


C^nrada 


Cercijal 


Cesiira 


Cenreira 


Ceremonia 




Censo 


Ceremonial 


CEV. 


Censor 


Ceneiro 


Ceva 


Centura 


Cerne 


Cevada 


Cemmado 


Cemelha 


Cevadal 


Censurar 


Cerol 


Cevadeira 


Centauro 


Ceroulas 


Cevadouro 


Centra 


Cerqueiro 


Cevar 



GRAMMAR. 

CEZ. 

Cezimbar. 



199 



Cezao 

N. B. Cerrar, signifies to shut, or shut up; but 
serrar signifies to saw, to cut timber or other mat- 
ter with a saw. 

The following words must have ci, and not «, in 
their beginning. 



CIA. 


Cig&no 


Cintura 


Ciarse 
Ciatica. 


Cigarra 
Cigude 
Cigurelha. 


Cinza 

Cinzfcnto 

Cinzfciro. 


CIB. 








CIL. 


Cio. 


Ciba 






Cibalho 


Cilada 


Cio 


Ciborio. 


Cilhas 


Cioso 




Cilhar 


Ciosa. 


CIC. 


Cilicia 




Cicatriz 
Cicero 


Cilicio 
Cilladas. 


CIP. 

Cipo 


Cicioso. 

CID. 


CIM. 

Cima 


Cipreste 
Cipriano. 


Cidadao 


Cirr.alha 


CIR. 


Cidadaos 


Cimbalo 


Clranda 


Cidade 
Cidad6a 


Cim£yra 
CimGnto 


Cirandagem 
Cirandar 


Cidra 

Cidrada 

Cidrao 

Cidiiira. 


Cimitarra 
Cimo. 

CIN. 


Circo 
Circulaeao 
Circular 
Circulo 


CIE. 


Cinca 


Circuito 




v-incar 


Circumcidar 


Ci£ncia. 


Cincho 


Circumcisao 


CIF. 


Cinco 


Circumterencia 


Cincofcnta 


Circumspecto 


Cifar 


Cingidouro 


Circumsp£c9ao 
Circumstancia 


Cifra 


Cingir 


Cifrar. 


Cfngulo 


Circumstantes 




Cinnamomo 


Cirio 


CIG, 


Cima 


Cirurgia 


Cigana 


Cintillar 


Cirurgiao 



200 



PORTUGUESE 



Cirzir. 

CIR. 

Ciscar 
Cisco 


Cita^ao 

Citado 

Citar 

Citerior 

Cithara 


< 

Ciiime 
Ciiimes 


Cisma 


Citharedo 


< 


Cismatico 


Citrino 


Cizania 


Cisne 


Civel 


Cizirao. 


Cisterciense 


Civil 




Cisterna 


Civilidade. 





citf. 



ciz. 



XL No Portuguese word begins with go; but ac- 
cording to Maitureira,. there are some that begin 
with ga, and gu; as gapato, gapateiro, gargago, guja, 
gugiddde, gumo, gurra, gurrar, and some others. 

The g is used after p in those Portuguese words 
that have in their Latin root pt ; as descripgao, ac* 
cepgao, &c. from descriptio, acceptio, &c. 



Of Double Letters. 

It is to be generally observed, that the consonants 
are doubled in those Portuguese words, whose Latin 
roots have likewise the same double consonants ; as 
accelerar, accento, occidbite, Sec. from accelero, ac* 
centus, occidens, &c. affligir, ajftuencia, affirviagao, &c. 
from qffligo, affluently ajfirmatio, &c, as you will see 
in the following collections. 

B. 

B is to be doubled in abbdde, abbacial, abbadia, ab- 
badessa, abbreviattira, abbreviate and some others. 



C is to be doubled in the following words, and 
some of their derivatives. 



A. 


Accento 


Accefta 


Abstrac^ao 


Ac^entuar 


Acteitacao 


Ac^ao 


Accep^ao 


Acceitador 



GRAMMAR. 



SOI 



Acceitar 

Acceflatf 

Accefsivel 

Acceflb 

Acceflorio 

Accidental 

Accidente 

Accelerada 

Accelcrado 

Accelerar 

Acclama9ao 

Acclamar 

Accommoda^ao 

Accomodado 

Accommodar 

Accumula9ao 

Accumulado I 

Accumular 

Accnfa^ao 

Accufado 

Accufador 

Accufar 

Accufativo 

Adftiic9ao 

Afflicgao 

Attracgao. 

B, 

Baccho 

Bocca 

Bocca^a 

Boccadinho 

Boccado 

Boccah 

c. 

Circumfpeccaof 
Coac^ao 

Coc^ao 

Collec^ao 

Conftric9ao 

Conftruc9ao 

Contracc^ao 

Qorrec^ao. 



D. 

Decoc^ao 
Deduc^ao 
Desjec9ao 
Defoccupa^ao 
Defoccupado 
JDefoccupar 
Detrac9ao 
Dic9ao 
Diccionario 
Direc9ao 
Diftrac9ao, 
E. 

Eccentrico 

Ecclefiaftico 

Erec9ao 

Evic9ao 

Exac9ao 

Extrac^ao. 

F. 

Fac9ao 
Fic9ao 
Jrac9ao 

I. 

Impeccabilidade 

Impeccavel 

Inaccefsivel 

Indic9ao 

Indiicgao 

Infec9ao 

Infracfao 

Infpec9ao 

Inftruc9ao 

Intellec9ao 

Interjec9ao 

Intertec9ao 

Introduc9ao. 

M. 
Manuduc9ad 

O. 

Objecgao 



Obftruc9ao 

Occafiao 

Occafionar 

Occafo 

Occidental 

Occidente 

Occiduo 

Occifao 

Occurrer 

Occultamente 

Occultado 

Occultar 

Occulto 

Occupa9ao 

Occupado 

Occupar 

Occurrencia. 

Occurrente. 



Peccado 

Peccador 

Peccadora 

Peccante 

Peccar 

Predic9ao 

Predccupar 

Produc9ab 

Projec9ao 

Profec9ao 

Putretac9ao, 

R. 
Rarefac9ao 
Recondac9ao 
Refec9ao 
Refrac9ao 
Refeccacao 
Reftric9ao 

S. 

Satisfac9^d 
Seccar 
Secco 
Sec^ao 



£02 

Secciira 

S6cco 

Soccorr£r 

Soccorro 

Subtract 

Succeder 

Successao 

Successo 



PORTUGUESE 



Successive) 


T. 


Successivel 


Success6r 


Transaccao 


Succintamente 


Tradac?ao 


Succinto 


V. 


Siicco 


Vacca 


Succoso 


Vaccada 


Succubo. 


Vaccum. 



D 



This letter is doubled in the following words: 
addigao, addicionddo, addiciomr, additamento, adduar, 



F is to be doubled in 



Affabilidade 

Affavel 

AfFadigado 

ABadigar 

Affajado 

Affagar 

Affagos 

AfFamado 

Affcimarse 

AfFastado 

Affastar 

Affazendado 

AfFazerse. 

AFFE. 

Affeado 

Affear 

Affeamento 

Affectadamente 

AfFectadq 

AfFectar 

AfFecto 

Affectuoso 

Affeicao 

AfFeicoado 

AfFeicoar 

AfFene 

AfFeitar 



AfFeminado 

Affeminarse 

AfFerradamente 

AfFerrado 

AfFerrar 

AfFerretoado 

AfFeretoar 

AfFerrolhado 

Afferrolhar 

Afferventado 

AfFerventar 

AfFervorado 

AfFervorar. 

AFFI, 

Affiado 

Affiar 

Affidalgado 

Affidalgarse 

Affigurado 

Affigurar 

Affiihada 

Affilador 

Affiiar 

Affinado 

Affinar 

Affincado 

Affincar 



Affirrnadam^nte 

Affirmador 

Affirmar 

Affistularse 

Affixar. 

AFFL. 

Afflamarfe 

Affiiccao 

Afflicto 

Affligir 

Affluencia 

AFFO. 

AfFocinhar 

AfFogado 

Affogador 

AfFogar 

AfFogamento 

AfFogueado 

AfFoguear 

AfForado 

AfForador 

Affjrar 

Aff,.)iamento 

Afformentar 

AfFormofeado 

AfFormofear. 



GRAMMAR. 



203 



Affoutado 
Affomar 
AfFou eza 
Affouto. 

AFFR. 

AfFracar 

AfFramengado 

Affreguesado 

AfFreguesarse 

AfFronta 

AfFrontado 

ArFrontam6nto 

AfFrontar 

AtFrontosamente 

Affromoso 

AfFroxadam£nte 

AfFroxado 

Affroxar. 

AFFU. 

Affugeriiado 
AfFugentar. 



Affumado 




AfFumar 


£. 


AfFundado 


Eflfectivamente 


AfFundarse 


EfFectivo 


AfFundirse 


EfFeito 


AfFuziliar. 


EffeiiuaV 


DI. 


Lfficazmente 


DifFamado 


Effi. acia 


DifFamar 


Efficaz 


DifFerenca 


Efficiente 


DifFeren^ar 


Efiigie 


DifFerencas 


0. 


DifFerente 


OfFender 


Differ entem^nte 


OfFerecer 


DifFicil 


OfFuscar. 


Difficuldade 




Difficu'iar 


s. 


Difficul'6sam£nte 


SuFFocar 


Difficuhoso 


SufFragio, and seme 


DifFusao 


others. 


D:fFusam6nte 




Diffuso 





G. 



This letter is to be doubled in 



Aggravante 
Aggravar 
Aggravado 
Aggravo 



Aggressor 
Exaggeracao 
Exaggerador 
Exaggerado 

L. 



Exaggerar 
Suggmr 
Suggestao 
Suggerido. 



L is to be doubled in 



AB. 



AL. 



Aballado 






Aballador 


Acafelladura 


AHega^ao 


Aballar 


Acafellar 


Allegado 


Aballo 


AcaIien«ado 


Alle^ar 


Aballisado 


Acallentar 


AHegoria 


Abilisador 


AccipeMado. 


Allc j g6rico 


Abaliisar. 


AF. 


A'ltgorisar 


- 


Affillado 


A^leiUM 


AC. 


Affillador 


Ailiviar 


Acafellador 


Affiliar. 


Allucinacao 



£04 

Allucinar 
Alludir 
Allurniar 
Allusa6\ 

AM. 

Amantellado 

Amarello 

Amarellecerse 

Amerellidad 

Amollado 

Amollar 

Amollecer 

Amollecido 

Amollent£r 

Ampolla. 

• AN. 

Annulacao 
Annullar. 

AP. 

Appellac^o 

Appellante 

Appellar 

Appellidar 

Appellido. 

AQ. 

Aquella 
Aquclle 
Aquell6utro 
Aquillo. 

AR. 

Arm 61 las 
Arrepellado 
Arrepellao 
Arrepellar. 

AT. 

Atropellado 
Atropellar. 

AV. 

Avillanado. 



PORTUGUESE 



BA. 

Bacellada 
Bac611o 
Barb611a 
Barrella. 

BE. 
Bella 

Bellamente 
Bello 
Belleza 
Belleguim 
Bellico 
Bellicoso 
Belligero 
Belluino. 

BU. 
Bulla ^ 
Bull£ri(N 

CA. 

Calliope 

Camillo 

Cavillacao 

Cavillosamente 

Caballina 

Gadella 

Cadellinha . 

Callb 

Camart6llo 

Cambadella 

Cancella 

Capella 

Capellao 

Capellada 

Capellama 

Capello 

Capillar 

Castella 

Castello 

Casullo 

Casulla 

Cavalla 

Cavallaria 



Cavalleiro 
Cavallo. 

CE. 

Cebolla 

Cebollal 

Cebollinbo 

Chanceller 

Chancellaria 

Cella 

Celleiro. 

CL. 

Clavellina 

CO. 

Codicillo 

C611a 

Coll ado 

Collar 

Colleira 

Colla^ao 

Collateral 

Colleccao 

Collecta 

Collectivo 

Collector 

Collega 

Collegiada 

Collegia! 

Collegio 

Colligar 

Colligir 

Colly'rio 

Collo 

CollocacaS 

Collocar 

Colloquio 

COM. 

Compellir 

Compostella 

Constellaca 

Corrollaria 

Cov^llo 



GRAMMAR. 



£05 



Courclla 


Encelleirar. 


©A. 


DE. 


EQ. 


Gabella 


Delia 


Equipollencia 


Gallado 


Delias 
Delle 


Equipollente. 


Galladura 
Gallar 


Delles 


ES. 


Gal lego 


Degollado 


Efcabellado 


Gallia 


Degolla^ao 


Efcabello 


Gallicado 


Degollar 


Efcudella ', 


Gallicar 


Degolladouro. 


Efcudellao 


Gailico 


X)I. 


Eftillacao 


Gallinha 




Eftillado 


Gallinhaco 


Diftillacjio 


" Eftillar 


Gallinheira 


Diftillador 


JL—JH i 1 I lh 

Eftillicidio 


Gallinbeiro 


Diftillar. 


Eftrella 


Gallinhola 


DO. 


Efirellado. 


Galliopoli 
Galliota 


Donzella. 


EX. 


Galliza 




Excellencia 


Gallo 


DU. 


Excelleme 


Gamella 


Duello 


Expellir. 


Gazella. 


F.B. 


FA. 


GO. 


EbulHcao 


Falla 
Fallacba 


G61Ia. 

HE. 


ELL. 

E'lla 


Fallacia 
'Falladot 


Hellefponto 
Hendecafy'llabo 


E'llas 


Fallar 


Hollanda 


E'lle 
pies 


Fallecer 
Fallecido 


Hypallage. 


Elleboro 


Fallencia 


JA; 


Ellipfe 
Elliptico. 


Fallido. 


Janella 


FE. 


Janelleira 
Janellinba 


EM. 


Ferdizello 


Jarmello. 


Emolli£nte 




I, 


Emollir 


FL. 






Flagellante 


Ulacao 


EN. 


Flagello. 


Illaquear 


Enallage 




Illativo 


Encapellado 


FO. 


Illegitimo 


Encapeliar 


F611e 


Illefo 


Encaftellado 


Folliculo 


Illicar 


Encaftellar 


Fontello. 


Illiciador 



206 


PORTUGU 


ESE 


Illiciram&nte- 


Mirandella 


Pelle 


Iliicito 


Mi^celiania 


Pe!)?sinha 


Illocavel 


Molle 


Pellica 


Illudido 


Molleira 


Pellicula 


Illudir 


Molleza 


Paneila 


Illuminacao 


Moll ice 


Pimpinella 


liluminado 


Mollidao 


Phillis 


Illiiminar 


Mollific&nte 


Pollegada 


Illuminative* 


MollfiVar 


Pollegar 


Illusao 


Mollnar 


Pollez 


Ilhiso 


Monosy'llabo. 


Pollucao 


Illustracao 


N. 


Polluto 


Illustrar 


Polysy'llabo 


Illustre 


Nella 


Portacollo 


Illustri-ssinio 


Nellas 


Portella 


Illy'rio 


Neile 


Postilla 


Imbella 


Wiles 


Pousaf61!es 


Impellir 


Ni^ella 


Pruneile 


Incapillato 


Novella 


Pulmelia 


Infallivel 


Novelleiro 


Pupilla 


Ininttlli^ivel 


Nulla 


Pupillo 


Intervallo. 


Nullidade 


PusilLnimidade 


- L. 


Nullo 


Pusillanime. 


Nuzcllos. 




Libello 


O. 


Q- 


Lordello 


Quartelia. 


Lousella. 


Odivellas 


R. 




Ollaria 


M. 


Olleiro 


Rabadella 


Marcel la 


Ougu&la. 


Rt-bellado 


Marccliina 


P. 


Rebellao 


Marcello 




Rebellarse 


Marteliada 


Palla 


Rebelliao 


Martellar 


Pdlladio 


Rella 


Martello 


Pal la rite 


Rodofolle 


Marteliinho, 


Pallas 


Rodopello 


Malfallante 


"Pall.a^o 


Ro<6lla 


Mallogrado 


Palliar 


Ruella 


Mamillar 


Pallidez 


S. 


Medulla 


Pailido 


Mellifluo 


Pallio 


Sella 


Mello 


Patadella 


Sell ado 


Metal lico 


Parallax 


Sellador 


Millenario 


Parallelo 


Sellagao 


Millesimo 


Paraleiiogramo 


Sellar 



GRAMMAR. 



:o7 






Selleiro 

Sello 

SentineUla 

Siby'lla 

Sigillo 

Sigillado 

Sobrepetliz 

Sugilla9ao 

Sy'llaba 

Syllabatico 

Syllabico 

Syllogisar 

Syllogismo. 

T. 

Tabella 

Tabelliao 

Tabellioa 

Tinllacao 

Titillar 



Tolla 

Tollice 

T6II0 

Torcic611o 

Tranquillidade 

Tranquillo 

Trella 

Trisy'llabo 

Tunicella 

Tullio 



Vacillaeao 

Vacillante 

Vacillar 

Valla 

Vallado 

Vallar 

Valle 

Vassallagem 



Vassallo 

VE. 

Velleidade. 

Vellicacao 

Vellicar 

Velio 

Velloso 

Velludo 

Verdesella 

VI, 

Villa :. 

Villania 

Vi'laamente 

Villao 

Villao 

Vitella 

Vitelline* 



N. B. Annullar signifies to annul; but annular is an 
adjective, and signifies annular, or in the form of a 
ring. L is doubled by some in the words pelo, pela, 
(for) thus pello, pella. 

M. 



M is to be doubled in 



Accommodar 

Commemoragao 

Commenda 

CommenMirar 

Commentar 

Comraerciar 

Commetrar 

Comminagao 

Commiseragao 

Commissao 

Commissario 

Commoead 

Commodo 

Comniover 



Comroiim 

Commungar 

Communicar 

Communidade 

Commutar 

Consummar 

Desaccomrnodar 

Descommodo 

Dilemma 

Emmadeirar 

Emmadeixar 

Emmagrecer 

Emmanquecor 

Emmassar 



Emmudecer 

Engomm&r 

Epigramma 

Flamma 

Flammante 

Flammula 

G^mma 

Gorama 

Grammatica 

Immaculada 

Immanente 

Imm'arcessivel 

Immaterial 

Immatur© 



508 PORTUGUESE 

Immediatamente Immortificado Mamma 

Immemoravel Immovel Mammar 

Immenfo Immudavel Recommendar 

Immensuravel Immiindo Somraa 

Immobilidade Immunidade Sommar 

Iinmoderadamente Immutavel Siimma 

Immodefto Incommodo Summario 

Immodico Incommunicavel Summidade 

Immolar Incommutavel Symmetria, and 

Immortalisar Inflammar some others 

N. B. M, and not n, is always made use of before 
h, m, p. 

N. - 

2Vis likewise doubled in several verbs compound- 
ed with an, en, in, con, as annddr, annexa, annao, 
annaia, annel, A'nna, anno, annular, connexab, connexo, 
depennar, empenndr, ennastrar, ennegredr, inndto, 
innavegdvel, innocincia, manna, Maridnna, pdnno 9 
penna, when it signifies a pen, tyrdnno, and some 
others. 



This letter is to be doubled in words beginning 
with p compounded with the Latin prepositions ad, 
ob, sub; as appardto, apparec6r, oppdr, opprimir, sup- 
por, Philippe, poppa, &c. 

N. B. Pdppa signifies pap, or a sort of spoon-meat 
for children ; but papa signifies the Pope. 

R. 

The r is doubled in such words as are strongly 
pronounced in the middle; as guerra, arrancar, ar- 
reddr, arrimar, arruinar, carregdr, cdrro, &c. 

S. 

The s is to be doubled in the Portuguese superla- 
tives, because it is doubled in the Latin roots; it i* 
also doubled in the following words ; 



GRAMMAR. 



204) 



Abbadessa 


Assaltar 


Condessa 


Asseyo 


Assar 


Assessor 


Assanhar 


Assim 


Assegurar 


Assistir 


Assignar 


Assombrar 


Assolar 


Asjoprar 


Accesso 


Assobiar 


Aggressor 


Assustar 


Appressar 


Atravessar 


Amassar 


Necessitar 


Arremessar 


Nisso 



Nosso 
Nossa 
E'ssa 
E'sse 
I'sso 
O'sso 
Passear 
Passar 
Remessa 

Ingresso, and many 
others. 



Tis doubled in the following words and their 
derivatives: 



Attemperar 


Attribuir 


Permittir 


Attenc,ao 


Attribiito 


Promettfcr 


Attender 


Attricio 


Remetter 


Attentar 


Attrito 


Remettir 


Attenuacao , 


Commett&r 


Setta 


Attenuar 


Demittir 


Sett6nta 


Attonno 


Enfittar 


Settecentos 


Attrac?ao 


Fitta 


Transmittir 


Attractivo 


Jntrommett£r 




Attrahir 


Omittir 





Of the Quantity of Syllables and their Sound. 

Of Words that make their Penultima in a. 

N. B. You must remember what we have said 
above about the accents. 

All words ending in dbo, aba, dco> dca, dcho, dcha, 
ago, dga, ado, dda, dfo, a fa, ago, dga, dgem, agre> dlho. 
dlha, dlo 9 dla, have the penultimas long; as didbo t 
mangdba, macaco } macdca, cavdca, mingicho, garndcha, 
viadrdgo, linhaoa, amddo, punhdda 9 (except reldmpago, 
antropofago, levado, and cdgado, which are short in 
the penultima), abdfo, abdfa, saramdgo, addgd, (ex- 
cept stdmago, or estdmago, dmago, amdraco, which 



210 PORTUGUESE 

are short,) trabdlho, toalha, baddlo, (except anomalo, bu- 
falo, escdndalo, which are short), tanchdgem, vindgre. 

Words ending in dmo, dma, dnho, dnha, dno, ana, 
have their penultimas long; as, escdmo, courdma, 
cast dnho, ardnha, engdno, pest ana ; except pampano, 
ty'mpano, bigamo. 

Words ending in dpo, dpa, dque, aro, dra, have 
their penultimas long ,• as, guardandpo, solcipa, bas~ 
bhque, empdro, sedra ; except cant aro, pucaro, laparo, 
bdj'aro, luparo, pifaro, picaro, camera, tdmara, pdssaro, 
Ldzaro, bdrbaro, cbcaras, &c. 

Words ending in drro, drra, ato, dta, dvo', dvd, 
axo, d,vas, make the penultima long ; as, bizdrro, 
bizdrra, biscdto, pat ar at a, escrdvo, escrdva; (except 
concava, and bisavo), cartdxo, tarrdxa. 

Of Words that make their Penultima in e. 

All words ending in ebo, eba, Mo, eda, efa, have 
their penultima long ; as, mancebo, manceba, azcdo, 
azeda, sanefa. \ 

Words ending in efe are long; as, magarefe : as 
well as those ending in eco, eca, ego, ega; as boneco, 
. boneca, cabigo, cabega. 

Words ending in ego, ega, are long; as, morcego, 
socego, relego, entrega, allega; except cbnego, trdjego, 
corrego, sofrego, pecego, Jo/ego, butega, cbcegas. 

Words ending in ijo, eja, elo, ela, are long ; as, 
qarangutjo, becfrjo, igreja, Alentejo, enveja, martelo, 
querela. 

Words ending in e?no,ema, eno, ena, are long; as, 
supremo, post ema, achw, afucSna ;' except apbzema. 

N. B. The penultima is short in the word ingreme. 

Words ending in epo, epa, epe, equc, ero, era, are 
long ; as, decepo, carepajulepe, mole que, sever o, severa 9 
tempero, (when a noun) : and tempero, (when a verb) 
except dspero, prospero. 

Words ending in eso, isa, ezo, eza, eto, it a, ete, 
ew, e'va, eve, are long ; as, aceso, accsa, desprczo, 



GRAMMAR. 211 

grandSza and despriso, (when a verb) entremeto, gal- 
hita, ramalhete, bojete, atrtvo, atreva, atreve. 

Of Words that make their Penultima in i. 

Words ending in ibo, iba, ibe, icho, icha, iche, ico, 
ica, igo, ica, ice, ido, ida, ifo, if a, ife, have the pe- 
nultima long- ; as, estribo, arriba, arribe, esguicho, 
esguicha, azeviche, pdnico, (a sort of stuff) bet ica ; 
except mecdnico, ecumenico, critico, politico, pdnico, 
(panic), and some others borrowed from the Greek 
and Latin. In Ted, ica, &c. as, rolled, preguiqa, vel- 
hice, marido, medfda; except humido, pallido, horrido, 
and some others derived from the Latin. In ifo, 
if a, &c. as borrifo, alcatifa, patife. 

Words ending in igo and iga, are long; as } amigo, 
artnga, except, prodigo, prodiga. 

Words ending in ijo, and ija, are long; as, affiijo, 
artemija. 

Words ending in ilho, ilha, are long; as, atilho, 
beatilha. Others ending in ilo, ila, as, gorgomilo, 
perfila, desfila. 

Words ending in imo, ima, have the penidtima 
long ; as Optimo, cadimo, esgrima, lastima, (when a 
verb); except lastima (when a noun), 3er6nimo 3 pes- \ 
simo, and all the superlatives, anommo, and some 
others. 

Words ending in inho, irifia, ino, ina, ipo, ipa, ipe, 
h a v e t h e pe n u 1 1 i rh a 1 o n g ; as, const ipo, const ipa, E uripo, 
acipipe. Others in iquo, iqua, ique, ifo, ira, ire ; as, 
iniquo, iniqua, la'mbique, retiro, mentira, suspire. 

Words ending in iso, isa, izo, iza, ito, ita, ivo, iva, 

zxo, ixa, are long in the penultima; as, arciso, camisa, 

juizo, qjuiza, alt ivo, alti^a, prolixo, prolLia, apito, 

cabrito ; except pulpit 0, vomit 0, decrepito, espirito, 

debit 0, and some others. 

Rides for such words as make their penultima in o. 
Words ending in obo, oba, obe, ohra, dbro, 6bre 9 
have their penultima long; as, lobo, Idba, arrbba. 

i? 2 



filS PORTUGUESE 

arrobe, gldbo, alcdva, obro, obra, cbbre, cobro 9 d6» 
bro. 

Words ending in Scho, bcha, oco, oca, 6go, oga, 6do, 
6da, ode, oso, bsa, ose, have the penultima long ; as, 
agarrocho, garrbcha, carbcha, bidco, except alliloco) 
massarbca, minhbca, almogo, moga, (a girl) moga, or 
mossa, (a notch) almdgo (when a verb,) carrbga, id- 
do, boda, bode, pbde, (the third person singular of the 
present indicative of the verb poder), pbde (the third 
person singular of the preterperfect definite of the 
same verb), galhSfa, bbfe. 

Words ending in bfro, ofra, of re, are long ; as, 
alcaxbfra, cbfre, enxoj're. 

Words ending in ogo, bga, bgue, are long; as, af- 
f°g°> a ff°g a > affbgue, desafbgo, when a verb, and des- 
qf ogo, when a noun. 

Words ending in ojo, bja, have the penultima long ; 
as, despbjo, when a verb, nojo, despojo when a noun. 

Words ending in bio, bla, ble, are long ; as, 'vio- 
la, gallxnhbla, bbla, engble, mxolo, bolo, rebolo, tolo, 
ceodla; except perola, j'rwolo benevolo, malevolo. 

Words ending in omo, oma, bme, have the penul- 
tima long; as, mordomo, redoma,J bme, except Thome, 

Words ending in onho, onha, ono, ona, have the 
penultima long; as, bisdnho, risonha, dono, atajona, 
dona % , except alt isono, and unisono. 

Words ending in bpla, opo, bpa, bpe, opro, bpra, 
Spre, bque, have the penultima long ; as, manbpla, 
topo, tbpa, galbpe, assdpro, when a verb, assbpra, as- 
sbpre, assdpro, when a noun, botoque. 

Words ending in bro, bra, ore, are long in the 
penultima ; as, penhbrd, penhbra, penhbre, choro when 
a noun ; ckbro when a verb; except bacoro, rzmora, 
pblvora, arxore. 

Words ending in drro, orra, are long ; as soc~ 
corro, mdrro, cachbrra\ and some others ending in 
6so, bse, bsa, bza, bza, as, primoroso, primorbsa, Indus- 
trioso, i?idustriosa, ciuzo, cibza, descbse. 



GRAMMAR. 213 

Words ending in oto, 6ta, bte, have their penulti- 
ma long ; as gdto, gota, bota, devoto, frota, capote, 
garrbte. 

Words ending in dvo, ova, ove, are long in the 
pen ultima ; as, dvo, corcova, aprove. 

Words ending in oxo, 6:ca, are long in the pe- 
nultima ; as, r6xo, roxa, pintarroxo. 

Rules for such Words as make their Penult ima 

in u. 

Words ending in ubo, uba, ubro, ubra, ucho, ucha, 
uco, uca, uco, uca, make the penultima long; as, 
adubo,aduba; except sfacubo, incubo, and some other; 
incubro, incubra, maciiucho, embucha, cadkco, caduca, 
rebugo, embuca 

Words ending in udo, uda, ude, ufo, ufa y ufe, 6go, 
uga, ujo, uja, have the penultima long; a^felpudo, 
felpuda, almude, pantufo, adufa, adufe, sanguesuga, 
caramujo, azambuja. 

Words ending in ulho, ulha,ulhe, ulo, ula, ule, umo, 
uma, ume, hnho, unha, ufthe ; as, bagilho, borbulha, 
entulhe, engulo, engula, bukbule; except vocdbulo, ves* 
tibulo, dngulo, regulo, opusculo, tremulo,pattbulo, thiri- 
bulo, and some others ; consumo, consuma, cardhne, 
testemunho, testemunha, empunhe. 

Words ending in uno, una, une, upo, upa, upe, uque, 
uro, bra, ure, are long in the penultima; as, desuno, 
fortuna, desune, apupo, apupa, apupe, estuque, maduro, 
madura, apure. 

Words ending in uso. usa, use, 6zo, ma, uze, uto t 
uta,ute, uxo, usa, uxe, have the penultima long; as, 
parajuso, par af usa, par af use, reduzo, reduza, reduze, con' 
duto, labuta, enxuta, labute; except computo when a 
noun; repuxo, empuxa, empuxe; and some others end* 
ing in uvo, uva, uve ; as, viuvo, viuva, enviuve. 

N. B. When the penultima is immediately fol- 
lowed by another vowel, jou must make the follow- 
ing observations : 



214 PORTUGUESE 

A before t must be accented with the acute ac- 
cent, and pronounced accordingly ; as, she, cae : 
but before i it has no accent. 

A before o must be pronounced and accented 
thus, bacaliao ; but when the relative o is added to 
the third person singular of the present indicative, 
then a has no accent ; as, dma-o. 

E before a is accented thus, balea ; and some- 
times with the acute, as assembled, idea, and some 
others , and sometimes has no accent at all, as in 
gavea, fimea, and some others. 

E before o is exceeding sonorous and long, as in 
■chapeo, cqntcheo ;. except pateo,ferreo, plumbeo, au- 
reo, argenteo. 

I before a, e, o, is long ; as, dizm, jazia, almo- 
tolza ; except such as are borrowed from the Latin ; 
as nescia, co-media, feria, sciencia, prudhicia, and sa- 
bia when an adjective, &c. / before o and e, is 
long ; as, desvie, dtsvio ; except vicio and some 
others. 

O before a is accented thus, coroa, toa, moa 7 
esmoa. 

O before e is long in the words doe, moe, roe, and 
in the verb soe when it signifies to be wont', but 
when it signifies to sound, it is to be accented thus, 
soe • • , . 

U before a is long; as rua, charrua; except mel- 



\yiua, imua. 



U before e and o is long ; as, concluo, recuo, con- 
clue, recue; except rheUifiuo, and some others derived 
from the Latin. 



GRAMMAR. 215 

CHAP. IX. 

Etymology of the Portuguese Tongue from the 

Latin. 

r jT}IE Portuguese retains so great an affinity to 
the Latin, that several words of the latter are 
preserved in the former, by only allowing a small 
alteration ; as may easily be seen in the following- 
observations. 

1. The o of the Latin words is preserved in some 
Portuguese ones; nay, some Latin words are entire- 
ly preserved in the Portuguese ; as, ho specie^ cor da, 
porta, Sec. 

2. The u is changed into o ; as, forca, goloso, 
estopa, mosca, amdmos, &c. from f urea, gulosus, stupa, 
musca, amamus, Sec. 

S. The diphthong, au, is frequently changed into 
ou ; as, louvdvel, duro, couve, mduro, Sec. from lauda- 
bilis, aurum, caulis, maurus, &c. 

4. The e is preserved in several Portuguese 
words ; as, certo, servo, erva, terra, ferro, &c. from 
certus, servus, herba, terra, fer rum, &c. 

5. The e takes the place of i ; as, enftrmo, seco, 
Sec. from infrmus, sicus, &c. ; and the i is sometimes 
preserved, as in indigno, benigno, &c. from indignus, 
benignus, &c. 

6. The b is also changed into v;. as, arvore, du- 
viddr, dever, estdva, amdva, Sec. from arbor, dubitare, 
<debere, stabat, amabat, &c. 

7. The c is very often changed into g; as, digo, 
agudo, amigo, migdlha, Sec. from dico, acutus, amicus, 
arnica, Sec. 

8. Cl is changed into ch ; as, chamdr, chdve, 
from clamare, clavis, &c. 

9. When the c in Latin is followed by t, this 
letter is changed into g ; as, accao, dicgao, Sec. from 
actio, dictio, Sec. ; and sometimes the e before t is 



216 PORTUGUESE 

changed into i; 2iS,feito, leito, ndite, leite, piito, &c. 
from f actus, ledum, node, lacte, pectus, &c. Finally, 
both the c and t are preserved in a great number of 
words ; as, acto, afflicto, distinct o, &c. from actus, qf- 
Jiictus, distinct us, &c. 

10. The d is several times lost; as, roer, excluir, 
rdio, &c. from rodere, excludere, radius, &c. 

11. The/* is frequently preserved ; as in filho, 
fazir,ferv6r,formdso, &c. from flius, facer e, fervor, 
formosus, &c. 

12. The g is changed into i ; as, rtino, from 
regnum. Sometimes it is quite lost, as in dedo,frio, 
setta, sinal, bainha, &c. from digitus, frigus, sagitta, 
signum, vagina, &c. 

13. The h is placed instead of the /; as, alho, 
from allium. Sometimes it is added ; as, artilho, 
alh£o,folha, conselho, &c. from articulus, alienus, fo- 
lium, consilium, &c. 

14. The n is sometimes added, and sometimes 
taken off; as, mdncha, iiha, Salitre, esp6so, from 
macula, insula, sal niirum, sponsus, &c. 

15. The mn is preserved by many Portuguese 
'writers in the words alumno, calumnia, columna, dam- 
no, solemne, sdmno, from alumnus, calumnia, columna, 
damnum, &c. 

16. The double nn of the Latin is preserved 
in several words; as in anno, innocencia, innocuo, inna- 
vegavel, innovar, connexo, &c. from annus, innocen- 
tia, innocuus, innaingabilis, innovare, connexus, &c. 

17. The gn and gm are preserved in several 
Portuguese words ; as in augmhito,fragmento, enig- 
ma, benigno, digno, indigno, ignominia, &c. from aug- 
mentum, fragment urn, anigma, benignus, dignus, &c. 

18. The e and the i after n are sometimes 
changed into h ; as in ardnha, vinha, Hcspdnha, cas- 
tdnha, &c. from aranea, vinea, Hispania, castanea, &c. 

19. The p is changed into b; as in cabra, ca~ 
htlhy cabi$a, &c. from capra, capillus^ caput, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 21? 

Sometimes pi is changed into ch ; as, chaga, choro, 
chuva, &c. from plaga, ploro, pluvia, &c. 

20. The q is changed into g ; as, igudl, alguim. 
antigo, dgoa, dguia, &c. from equus, aliquis, antzquus > 
aqua, aquila, &c. 

21. The £ is likewise changed into d; as,» ca» 
dia,fddo, lado, naddr, pieddde, &c. from catena, fatum, 
latus, natare, pittas, &c. The ti of the Latin is 
sometimes changed into ga, and sometimes into ci; 
as in grdga, clemSncia, paciencia,kc. from gratia, de- 
mentia, patientia, &c. 

N. B. All these alterations are not general in all 
the words but are used in several; and on some oc- 
casions the Latin word is preserved without any mu- 
tilation or variation. And as it would be endless to 
pretend to shew all the affinity between the.Portu- 
guese and the Latin, I shall only observe, that they 
sometimes add, and sometimes take off letters from 
the Latin roots ; as in facil, debil, jiniil, material, 
estrepito, estdmago, expect addr, especuldr, &c. from 
Jacilis, debilis 9 Jindlis f strepitus, spectator, &c. 



JfiND OF THE SECOND PART. 



2l8 



PORTUGUESE 



A NEW 



PORTUGUESE 



GRAMMAR. 



PART III. 



CONTAINING 

I. The most elegant Phrases of the Portuguese 

Language. 

II. • Such Words as are 7110s t used in Discourse. 

III. A Collection of the Choicest Portuguese Pro- 

verbs. 

IV. Familiar Dialogues. 

The different Significations of andar, to go. 



ANDAR a pe\ 
"** Anddr a cavdllo, 
Anddr pell a posta, 
Andar em coche, 
Anddr a vela, 
-Anddr pell a bolina, 
Anddr para didnte, 
Anddr para trdz, 
Anddr a tras de alguem, 



nPO go on foot. 
■*■ To ride on horseback. 
To ride, or go post. 
To ride in a coach. 
To sail. 

To sail with a side wind. 
To go forward. 
To go backward. 
To go behind, or after one 

also to follow, to press, to 

solicit a person. 



GRAM 
Anddr as apalpadellas, 

Anddr com tempo, 
■Anddr pejdda, 

Anddr sahida, 

Anddr per dido, 

An dar de pi, 

Anddr com hour a, 

An da, 

And a para didnte, 

Anddr de e sg u elk a , 

Anddr de mal para peor, 

Anddr de reixa com alguem, 



Com o anddr do tempo, 
Anddr de tralopc, 
Andar em corpo, 



And a o mundo as axiessas, 

Anddr espalhddos, 

Anddr trabaihdndo nalguma 

obra, 
Anddr de gatmhas, 
Anddr de c 6c or as, 
Anddr dizendo, 



MAR. £19 

To grope along, to grope,, or 

feel one's way. 
Togo according to the times. 
To be with child, or big with 

child. 
( 'speaking of a bitch) To be 

proud. 
To go astray. 

To be sickish, but not bed-rid* 
To act like an honest man. 
Go. 
Go on. 

To go sideling. 
To fall out of the frying-pan 

into the fire. 
To bear one a grudge, to 

have a spleen against him, 

to owe him a spite. 
At long run. 
To gallop.. 
To be in cuerpo, or to be 

without the ir.per coat or 

cloak, so as to diseover the 

true shape of the cuerpo 

or body. 
The world is come about. 
To lie about. 
To be about some piece of 

work. 
Togo crawling. 
To go on one's breech. 
To publish or report. 



The different Significations of dar and dar-se. 



Dar, 

Dar a entender, 

Darfe, 



Dar or vender fiddo, 
Dar d luz, 
Dar senhoria, 

Dar tu, or falldr a 
por tu, 



\utm 



To give, to strike. 

To make one believe. 

To credit, to believe, also to 
perceive, to descry, to take 
notice, to smell out. 

To sell, upon credit. 

To publish. 

To give the treatment pi 
Lordship. 

To thee and thou one. 



220 PORT 

Dar-se, a part/do, or Ian far. 

se no partido de aiguem, 
Dar palavra, 
Dar huma salva, 



Dar fiador, 
Dar principio, ox Jim, 
Dar conta, 
Dar-se ao estudo, 
Dar em quefalldr, 

Dar entrdda, 

Dar causa, 

Dar em que enUnder, 

Dar de Leber, 

Dar c duces, 

Dar hum coscorrdo, 

Dar pancadas, 

Dar murros, 

Dar murrddas, 

Dar ofdro a aiguem de algu- 

ma cousa, 
Dar huma estocdda, 
Dar os bons dias, 
Dar a guar dar, 
Dar a costa, 
Dar com aiguem, 

Dar em aiguem, 

Dar cartas, 

Dar sob re o inimigo, 

Dar os para bens, 

Dar os parabe.ns a aiguem 

da sua ch'gdda, 
Dar a mao ajuddndo, 
Dar a es col her, 
Dar en f ado a aiguem , 
Dar no dlvo, 
Dar as tdstas, 

Dar parte de hum negocio. 



UGUESE 

• To side with one, to be for 

him. 
To promise. 

To give a volley of ihot, or 
- to make a discharge of 

guns in honour of some 

persons of quality. 
To bail. 

To begin, or end. 
To give an account. 
To apply one's self to study. 
To make one speak, to give 

an occasion to be talked of. 
To give access to. 
To give cau«e. 
To vex one sadly, to trouble 

one. 
To give drink. 
To kick. 

To give a box on the ear. 
To beat with a cudgel. 
To cuff. 

To butt, as rams do. 
To smell out a matter. 

To give a thrust. 

To bid one good-morrow. 

To give in keeping. 

To run a-ground. 

To meet with one by chance, 

to light upon a person. 
To strike one, also to accuse 

one. 
To deal, or give the cards. 
To fall upon the enemy. 
To congratulate. 
To bid one welcome. 

To give a helping hand. 

To let one take his choice. 

To molest one. 

To hit the mark. 

To run away, to betake one'« 

self to flight. 
To impart a business* 



GRAM 

Dar pello amor de Dios, 
Dar huma sitrra, 
Dar huma volta eyn redondo, 
Dar huma vista de olhos, 
Dar alcdnce ao que se dezeja, 

Dar suspiros, 
Dar ouvidos, 
Dar em rosto, 

Da ca\ 

Deu-me huma dor, 
Dar que fazer a alguem, or 
occupdr dig u cm, 

Dar ho'ras, 

relogio da horas, 

Dar a alma a Deos, 

Dar comsigo em alguma 

parte, 
Dar leite, 
Dar garrote, 
Dar vdzes, 
O sol da nos olhos t 

Dar razoens, 

Dar comsigo no ckao, 

Darjruto, 

Dar as mabs, 

Dar com a porta na car a de 

alguem, 
Dar com a porta nos olhos a 

alguma cousa, (metaph.) 
Dar pressa, 
Dar tregoas, (metaph.) 
E'sta travissa vai dar a rua 

larga, 
Dei no pensamento de, &c. 
Quern me dera estdr em casa ! 
Nao sabe aonde ha de dar 

com a cabepa. 
I'sto vos ha de dar na c a be fa, 

Dar com a cabica pillas pa- 
rides, 



MAR. S2i 

To give for God's sake. 

To beat one soundly. 

To walk a turn. 

To cast an eye on. 

To obtain, or compass one's 

wish. 
To sigh. 

To give hearing. 
To upbraid, to cast in the 

teeth. 
Give hither. 
I was taken with a pain. 
To employ one, to set him at 

work, to set him upon some 

business. 
To strike. 
The clock strikes. 
To give up the ghost, to die. 
To cast one's self into a place, 

or to go to a place. 
To suckle. 
To strangle. 
To cry out, to bawl. 
The sun shines in one's 

eyes. 
To debate, or contend. 
To fall upon the ground. 
To bear fruit. 
To shake hands. 
To shut the door upon one. 

To slight, to despise a thing. 

To press, or hasten. 
Torespite,togivesomerespite 
This lane strikes, or goes into 

the broad street. 
It came into my head to, l£c. 
How fain would I be at home! 
He does not know which 

way to turn himself. 
The mischief will light upon 

your own head. 
To beat one's head against 

the wall. 



222 PORTU 

Dar cm todos, or dizer mat 

de todos, 
Dar boa conta de si, 

Dar a conta, 

E'U dar ii conta disso, 

E'lle deu em ir do u elle lit gar, 

Dar em dreg a, 

Dar em ridicularias, 

Dar humafiga a alguem, 

Dar-se por culpddo, 

De nenhuma sorte vos dels 
por entendido, or achddc, 
Dar-se por dggravado, 
Dar.se por satisfe'ito, 
Dar-se por vencido, 



Dar-se por desentendido, 



Qudndo se der a occasido? 

Dar-se pressa, 

Elle deu-se a to da a sorte de 

vicios, 
Nao se me da disso, 
Que se vos da a vos disso ? 
Pouco se me da, 
Nao se the da ?norrer, 
E'lUs dao-se mm to bem, 

E'sfa came nao se da bem co- 
rn? 's.o, 



GUESE 

To have a satirical virulent 
tongue, to spare nobody. 

To give a good account of 
himself, to behave cleverly. 

To pay an account. 

I'll be answerable for it. 

He began to use that place. 

To grow a very drug. 

To grow, or become ridicu- 
lous. 

To flirt at one, to fig, to give 
the fico. 

To acknowledge one's self 
guilty. 

Take no notice of any thing. 

To make a shew of anger. 

To rest satisfied. 

To submit, to surrender one's 
self a prisoner, or to yield 
a point. 

To feign one's self ignorant, 
to take no notice of any 
thing, to make as if one 
saw or knew not. 

When occasion shall require it 

To be in haste, to make haste. 

He gave himself over to all 
manner of vices. 

I mind it not. 

What have you to do with it ? 

I care but little. 

He does not fear death. 

They agree mighty well to- 
gether. 

This . meat does not agree 
with me; 



Of the different Significations of the Verb estar. 

We use the verb estar to make an action of re- 
pose, by putting the verb that follows in the g 
rund ; as, tilt est a escrcrendo } he is writing. 



e- 



Estar lias several other significations: as, 



E star em pi, 

Estdr bem, ou mat, 

Estdr as sent ado, 

Estdr para sahir, parafora, 

Estdr com o sentido em Fran- 
ca, or estdr com o sentido 
em Sutra parte, 

Estd muito bem, 

Estd para c hover, 

Estdr para cahir, 

Estar para morrer, 

Estdr em duvida, 

Estar emos a ver, 

Estdr com kuma mao sobrea 
outre, 

Estdr em casa, 

Fsto vos estd bem, 

Aquilo nao me esta bem, 

Estdr dormzndot 
Estdr fazendo, 
Estdr de nojo, 
Estdr dlerta, 
Estdr de sentinilla, 
Estd alegre, 
' FJlle estd ccmo quer, 
Estar em peri go, 
Estdr en co st ado, 
Estar esperdndo, 
Estdr muito te?npp, 
Estar calddo, 

Estdr on vivcr com 6ut%os, 
Estdr de chna, 
Estdr debdxo, 
Estdr bem avid do, 
Estar a espcra % 
E s tdr cnamo rddo , 
Estdr na cam a, 
Estdr de cdma, 
Estar no cdmpo, 
Estdr com saude, or de saude, 
Estar quiet o, 
Estdr neutral, 

Estar ei por tudo o que vos 
parecer mdis- convenient?, 



GRAMMAR. 223 

To stand upright. 
'To be well, or ill. 
To be sitting. 
To be just going out. 
To have one's wits a wool- 
gathering. 



It is well, it is very well. 

It is going to rain. 

To be ready to fall. 

To be like to die. 

To be in doubt. 

We will expect the issue. 

To stand idle. 

To stay at home. 

This becomes you very well. 

That does jiot become me 

well. 
To lie sleeping. 
To be a doing. 
To be in mourning. 
To look needfully about. 
To stand centry. 
To be. merry. 
He lives in clover. 
To be in danger. 
To lean upon. 
To expect. 

To stay a good while. 
To be silent. 
To dwell with others. 
To lie over. 
To lie under. 
To be in an ill taking. 
To lie in wait. 
To be in love. 
To be a-bed. 
To be bed-rid. 
To live in the country. 
To be in health. 
To stand still, or to be quiet. 
To stand neuter. 
I shall stand to whatever you 

shall think proper. 



224 PORTU 

A dtfficulddde esta em, &c. 
Estdr por alguem, 

Estdr por, or em lugdrde, &c, 
E'lle estdva na altura do Ca- 
iro de Boa Esperdnca, 
'Eu naoquiro estdr as razoens 

comvosco, 
Esta qudnto quizeres, 
Aonde estdis de cdsa 9 
Estar ei pello que disser apes- 
sda que for de vhsso mayor 
agrddo, 
Nao podemos estdr por isso, 
Nao quero estar pilla vossa 

sentenga, 
Como esta vm ce ? 



GUESE 

The difficulty consists in, &c» 
To stand for one, to be of hit 

side. 
To stand for, or signify. 
He stood off the Cape • of 

Good Hope. 
Iwon't stand, or dispute, with 

you. 
Stay as long as you please. 
Where do you live ? 
I'll refer it to whom you 

please. 

We can't stand to that. 
I wont take your judgment. 

How do you do, sir ? 



Estar, joined with the infinitive of a verb and the 
particle para, signifies to be ready, or about doing a 
thing, which has always reference to the signification 
of the verb ; as, 



Estou para ir t 
Estou para comprar hum ca- 
va 11 o, 
Estou para cazarme, 
Esta cdsa esta para cahir, 
Estou para dizer, 
Nao esta no meu poder, 
Estdr com a boca aberta (me- 

taph.) 
Estdr de regiment o, 
Estdr fiddo em alguem, 

Estar no f undo, 
Estdr defronte, 
Estdr em competencia, 
Estdr ao lume, 
Estdr de longe, 
Estdr ao ar, 
Estar alto, 

Estdr a mao diriita dt al- 
guem. 



I am going, I am ready to go* 
I am about buying a horse. 

I am going to be married. 

This house is ready to fall. 

I dare say. 

It is not in my power. 

To stare, to look, to hearken 

attentively. 
To keep to a diet. 
To trust to, to rely or depend 

upon one. 
To lie at the bottom. 
To lie over-against. 
To stand in competition. 
To stand by the fire. 
To stand at a distance. 
To stand in the air. 
To stand high, or in a high 

place. 
To be at one's right hand, to 

have the first place. 



GRAM 

Elk esteve em perigo de afo- 

gdrse,^ 
Nao estar no cdso de, &c. 

Estdr a ordem de alguem, 
Isso nao estd nos termos, 
Nao estou no caso 9 
Estdr as razoens, 

Estdr bem com alguem, 

Estdr kern, 

Bem aviddo estaria eu, se 9 

&c. 
Estdr em cone ei to de hdmem 

honrddo, 
Estdr nafe, 

Estdr de posse, 

Deixai estar isso, 
Estdr em si, 
Estdr fora de si, 
Deixavos estdr (a sort of 
threatening.) 



MAR. 22£ 

He was like to be drowned. 

Not to be able, or in the case 
of, &c. 

To be at one's disposal. 

That is not right, it won't do. 

I don't understand the case. 

To contend, to strive, or 
quarrel. 

To be in favour with one, to 
live in friendship with him. 

Tobe well, to be at one's ease. 

It would be very bad for me, 
indeed, if, &c. 

To be looked upon as an 
honest man. 

To believe, to think, or sup- 
pose. 

To possess, to have the pos- 
session of a thing. 

Let* that alone. 

To be in one's right wits. 

To be out of one's wits. 

I'll be revenged on you, you 
shall pay for it. 



We have already observed the difference between 
sir and estar. See page 55. 

Of the different Signification of fazer and fazer se, 

Fazer signifies to do, to make, to create ; also to form 
of materials ; also to feign, to seem, to make as if 



Ellefez que nao o via, 

Fazer huma saiide, 

E'lle Ihefez cortdr a cabeca, 

Fazer pe atrdz (metaph.) 



Que tindes v'os que fazer com 
tsto. 



He made as if he did not see it. 

To drink, or to toast a health. 

He caused his head to be cut 
off, 

To fall, or draw back, to give 
ground ; also yield, to sub- 
mit. 

What have you to do with 
it ? or what is that to you ? 



226 PORTU 

Fazer brio de alguma cousa, 

Fazer Jim ao dezejo, 

Fazer por alguma coufa % 



Fago por zjfo, 

Fazer ao negocio, or ao caso, 

Fazer efmolas, 

Fazer gdjio, 

Fazer gojio, 

Fazer o gdfio, or a vontdde 

a alguem, 
Fazer paralle'lo, 
Fazer de comer , 
Fazirfumo, 

Fazer auzente a alguem, 
Fazfrio* 
Fazer gentc, 
Fazer em pedacos, 
Fazer zombaria de alguem, 

Naofacdis cafo djjfo, 

Fa,zer agoada, 

JJio mefaz vir a ago a a bo- 

ca, 
Fazer alto, 
Fazer cdfa (in playing at 

backgammon.) 
Fazer a cea, 
Fazer car as, 
Fazer enredos, * ,■ 

Fazer carrdncas t 
Fazer cd/b, 

Fazer de tripas coracao, 
Fazer muito cafo de alguma 

couja, 
Naofago cafo delle, 
Fazer fefta, 
Fa z ir h umafejla, 



GUESE 

To make a pride of a thing, 

to take glory in it. 
To fatisfy one's delire, or 

longing. 
To take pains, to endeavour, 
to labour to a certain pur- 
pofe, to work for a certain. 
end. 
I endeavour after it. 
To come to the purpofe. 
To give alms. 
To fpend. 

To like, to be pleafed with. 
To pleafe one, to comply 

with one's deiire. 
To parallel, to compare. 
To cook. 
To fmoak. 

To believe one abfent. 
It is cold. 

To raife men, foldiers. 
To pull into pieces. 
To mock, or to laugh at a 

perfon. 
Do not mind that. 
To take in frefh water. 
This makes my teeth, or 

mouth, water. 
To halt in a march. 
To put two men on the fame 

point. 
To get fupper ready. 
To make mouths. 
To form a fecret defigia 

againfl another. 
To pout. 
To make account of, or 

efteem. 
To make one's utmoft efforts. 
To make great account of a 

thing, to make much of it. 
I don't mind him. 
To endear, to fondle. 
To give an entertainment, to 

feafl. 



GRAM 
Fazir as vezes de alguim, 

Fazir trapacas, 

Fazer lugdr, 
Fazir merce, 

Fazer ouvidos de mercador, 
Ter que fazir ; 
Fazer exercicio, 
Fazer exercicio (a military- 
word.) 
Os Jo I dados eft do faze n do 
% exercicio, 
Quefazeis aqui ? 
Fazer hum veflido, 
Fazer huma ley, hum difcur- 

A 

Fazer guerra, 

Fazer faker alguma coufa a 

alguim, 
Fazer enraivecir alguim, 
Fazer huma conta, 
Fazer conta, 
E'llefazia huma conta, efa- 

hio-lhe Sutra, 
Fazir contas com alguim, v 

Iffo nao mefaz nada, 

Fazir paufa, 

Fazir de dlguim tele, 

Fazir dinheiro de alguma 

coufa, 
Torndr a fazir, 
Fazir a razao, 
Ter que fazir com alguim, 

Fazir a alguim hum gilvdz 

na cara, 
Fazir hour a, 
Fazir fe, 

Fazir forte, 



M A R. 227 

To make any buSnefs fo r . 

another. 
To chicane, to cavil, to ufe 

tricks. 
To make room. 
To grant a favour. 
To make as if one were deaf. 
To be bufy. 
To ufe exercife. 
To exercife. 

The foldiers exercife. 

What make you here ? 
To make a fuit of clothes. 
To make a law, a fpeech. 

To make war. 

To make one acquainted witfi 

a thing. 
To make one mad. 
To caft up an account. 
To intend, or to propofe. 
He was much difappointed. 

To fettle the accounts with 

one. 
It makes nothing to me, that 

does not concern me. 
To make a Hand. 
To make a fool of one. 
To make money of a thing, 

to fell it. 
To make again. 
To pledge one. 
To deal with one, or to have 

to do with one. 
To mark one in the face. 

To honour. 

To make known, to teftify, 

to witnefs. 
To fortify, or ftrengthen. 



828 



PORTUGUESE 



Fazer mengao, 

Fazer mal, 

Fazer dt alguem o que huma 

pefsoa quer, 
Fazer huma apofla, 
Faz vento, 
Faz hoje outo dias, 

Fazer vida com algutm, 
Fazer a sua vontdde, 
Fazer o possivcl, 

Naofareis titida com isso, 
Naofagais mdis assim, 
Se torndrdes a fazer assim, 
Dezejo quefdgaa suafortuna t 
Custou-me mutto afazellovir, 

Fazer aoutremo quequize'ra- 

mos que out rem nos fusse 

a nos, 
Naotenho quefazer comisso, 
Fazer o que alguem mdnda, 
Faz de rnirn o qua vos pa- 

rccer, 
Fazer hum grdnde ejlrondo, 
E'lle Joi o que fez tudo na- 

quelle negocio, 
Que fare is hoje? 



Fazer o sen cu 



rso, 



Fazer huma boa cdsa, 
Fazer a bdrba, 
Fazer a cam a, 
Nao sei que I he fazer, 
Fazer grdnde negocio, 
Fazer o seu officio, 
Fazer profissao, 
Todos ofaziao motto, 

Fazer vir 7 



To mention. 

To hurt. 

To difpofe of one. 

To lay a wager. 

The wind blows. 

This day fe'nnight, or a week 
ago. 

To cohabit, or dwell together. 

To dp as one pleafes. 

To do one's beft, or endea- 
vour, to do one's utmoft. 

You will do no good in it. 

Do fo no more. 

If ever you do fo again. 

I wifh he may do well. 

I had much to do to get him 
to come. 

To do by others as you would 
be done by. 

I have nothing to do with it, 

To do as one is bid. 

Do with me as you fhall think 

fit. 
To make a great noife. 
He was the do-all in that 

bufinefs. 
What will you do to-day ? or 

how do you employ your- 

felf to-day. 
To finilh its courfe as a ftar 

does. 
To raife, to fet up one's family. 
To fhave. 
To make the bed. 
I can't help it. 
To drive a great trade. 
To exercife, or difcharge. 
To profefs. 
They gave out that he was 

dead. 
To call, or fend for. 



GRAM 

Fazir entrdr, ou sakir al- 

guem, 
1'sto naofaz ndda, 
Nao sei qu^ fazer disso, 
jfa naotenhoque fazer comellt 
Fazer hum livro, 
Fazer amizdde com alguem, 

Fazer exemplo em alguem, or 
castigdllo far a dar exem- 
pt", 

Fazer kuma cousa muito ao 
dcsentendido^ 



Fazer das suas, 

E'lle sempre estdfazendo das 

suas, 
Fazer fo sea's, 



Fazer de pessoa, 
Fazer jurdr alguem, 

Fazer J altar ', or vodr pellos 

ares, 
Fazer boa vezinhdnfa, 

Fazer lenha, 
Fazer a ronda, 
Fazer dtvidas, 

Faz lua, 
Fazer violencia, 
Fazer-se ao trabdlho, 

Fazer-se tolo, 
Fazer-se velho, 

Fazer-sefeio, 
Fazer-se soberbo, 
Faz-sc tdrdty 



MAR. 229 

To call in, or out, to bid one 
come in, or out. 

It is no matter. 

I have no need of it. 

1 have done with him. 

To write a book. 

To make friendfhip, to get 
into friendfhip with one. 

To make one a public ex- 
ample. 

To do a thing very covertly, 
fo that people can't appre- 
hend that it is done on fet 
purpofe, and with a defign. 

To play the fool, to dodge, 
to play tricks. 

He is always playing his fool- 
i(h tricks. 

To bully, to provoke, to ex- 
cite by words, or actions of 
contempt ; alfo to elude, or 
deceive by falfe fhow. 

To behave courageoufly. 

To tender the oaths to one, 
to put one to his oaths. 

To blow up. 

To keep fair with one's 

neighbours. 
To fell wood. 
To walk the rounds. 
To run in debt, to contract 

debts, 
The moon mines. 
To offer violence. 
To inure one's felf to hard- 

fhips. 
To play the ninny. 
To grow old, or to grow in 

years. 
To grow ugly. 
To grow proud. 
It grows late. 



230 PORTUGUESE 

Fazcr-se signifies also U feign, to pretend, to seem, 
make as if. 



Fazfe mouco, 



He won't hear. 



The different Significations of ter and ter-se. 



Ter quefazer, 

Ter odio, 

Ter por cojlume, 

Ter alguem por ignorante, 

Ter cuidado de, 

Ter cui dados, 

Terfajlio, 

Ter dnimo, 

Ter boafdma, 

Ter car a d'ago^ 

Ter necefjiddde, 

Ter prejfa, 

Ter muitos fumos, 

Ter grdnde prefumpfao, 

Ter razaoy 
Nao ter razao, 
Ter alguma coufa debdxo da 
lingua, 



To be buty. 

To hate. 

To be wont. 

To believe one ignorant. 

To be careful of. 

To be full of care, or thought- 
ful. 

To loath, to fee food with 
diilike. 

To have courage. 

To be well fpoken oL 

To have a brazen face. 

To be in want. 

To be in hafte. 

To be very proud. 

To prefume much on one's 
felf. 

To be in the right. 

To be in the wrong. 

To have a thing at one's 
tongue's end. 



Ter alguma cousana pont a da lingua, we say, to 
have a thing at one's fingers ends, to have it perfect. 
They also say, saber alguma cousa naspontas dos dedos, 
which exactly answers to our English phrase. 



Terjeifoensfeiticeiras, 

Ter mdfdma, 

Ter clumes, 

Ter meyos, 

Ter no penfamento, 

Ter obrigagdo, 

Ter mido, 

Ter razdo, e mats que razdo, 



To have a taking look. 

To be ill fpoken of. 

To be jealous of. 

To be* able, or have means. 

To bear in mind. 

To be obliged. 

To be fearful. 

To have reafon, to fpare. 



GRAM 

Que tendes vos com ijfo ? 
Ter carruagem e criados, 
Ter a alguem fufpinfo •, 
Homen que tern boafeicao, 

Ter mefa franca, 



Ter frio, 

Ter as coflas quentes com al- 
guem, 

Ter p or b em, 

Tenho-o por doudo, 

Ter mao nafua refolucdo, 

Ter com que, 

Nao tendes de que vos quel- 
xdr, 

Nao tendes que, &c. 

1'Jlo nao tern nada quefazer, 

com o que eu digo, 
Ter entre maos, 

Te'nho iffo por certo, 

Ir ter com alguem, 

Venho ter com vm" para fab ir 

comopdffa afenhorafulld- 

na, 
Ir ter a algum lugar, 
EJla rua vai ter ao mercddo, 

Ter alguem por ft, 

Temos por nosa authoridade 

dos mais prudentes, 
Ter parafi, 

Ter em muito, 
Ter em pouco, 
Ser tido em boa conta t 



Ter mao, 

Ter mao nalguma eoufa, 



MAR. 231 

What is that to you r* 

To keep a coach and fervants. 

To hold one in fufpence. 

A man of good addrefs, a po- 
lite man. 

To keep open table, to keep 
a table where a man may 
come without bidding. 

To be cold. 

To be backed, or fupported 
by one. 

To approve of, or confent. 

I take him to be mad. 

To be ftill in one mind, 

To have wherewith. 

You have no reafon of com- 
plaint. 

Itisufelefs, or it willbeto no 
purpofe for you to, &c. 

That is nothing to the pur- 
pofe. 

To have in hand, or in one's 
pofleffion. 

I hold that for a certainty. 

To addrefs one's felf to one. 

I addrefs, or apply myfelf to 
you to know how mifs fuch 
a one does. 

To go to a place. 

This ftreet ftrikes, or goes 
into the market. 

To be fupported, or protected 
by one. 

We have the wifeft men of 
our fide, or of our opinion. 

To think, or imagine, to 
reckon. 

To fet much by. 

To value but little. 

To be efteemed, regarded, or 
valued, to be in great 
efteem. 

To hold or keep in, to reftrain. 

To bear up, to fupport, to 
prop, to keep up,to hold up. 



GUESE 
Atoms that flick together, 

Hold, flop. 

To contain. 

To ftand, to ftand up. . 

To fit faft, or well, on horfe- 

back. 
To keep at home. 
To hold out, to refift, to ftand 

againft one, to cope with 

one, to oppofe, or refift 

him. 
I can't forbear laughing. 
He can't forbear fpeaking. 

The different Significations of querer. 

Querer signifies to will, to be willing, and to be- 
lieve ; as ; 



232 PORTU 

A'tomos que tern mao huns 

nos outros, 
Tenha mao, or tern mao, 
Ter, 

Terse em pe, 
Terse bem a cavdllo, 

Terse em cdsa, 
Terse com alguem, 



Nao me poffo ter com rho, 
NaGsepoaeter, que naofdlk, 



Quer em alguns, 
Querer bem, 
Querer mat, 
Antes querer, 
Queira Deos, 

Mas quero que assim seja, 
Que que r dizera q u elleh 6 mem ? 
Que quer dizir isto P 

Tsto quer dizer que, &c. 

E'u quero absolutamente que, 

E'u assim quero, 

E'lle quer que vos obedecdis, 

Nao quero, 

E'lle ofard qudndo quizer, 

E'lle quer partir amanhaa, 

mal que eu Ihe quero me, 
venha a mim, 



Some believe. 

To love. 

To hate. 

To have rather. 

God grant it, God fend it 

may be fo. 
I grant it, fuppofe it were fo. 
What does that man mean ? 
What means this ? what's the 

meaning of that ? 
The meaning is that, &c. 
I pofitively refolve that, &c. 
I'll have it fo. 
He will have you obey. 
I will not, I won't. 
He will do it when he pleafes, 

<?rwhen he has a mind fo it. 
He intends, or has a mind, to 

fet out to-morrow. 
I wifh him no more harm 

than I do myfelf. 



Havir, to have. 



Tu has de Mr, 
E'lle ha de vir hoje, 



You mult go. 

He is to come to day. 



GRAM 

Se iuhouver de hir, 
Aindaque ijfo me houveffe de 

cujiar a vida, 
E'lle efd lodo nu, e ha de ter 

muitojrio, 
Haveis vos de eftdr em cafa?+ 
Eu hei de achdrme Id, 
E'lle ha defer enforcddo, 
Eu hei de receber dlnheiro, 
Vos he que haveis de jugar, 
Aquillc he que vos havieis de 

fazer, 
Haver por bem, 
Haver por mat, 
Que ha defer, 
Aquillo nunca ha- defer, 
E'u hei defer a cdufa dafua 

morte, ou ruina, 
Para haver defalldr, ouvir, 

&c. 
Que ha defer de mim? 
Haver filhos, 

Livros do dive, e ha de haver t 

Haver mijier, 

Hd mijier apreffdrfe, 



MAR, 

If I (hail be obliged to go. 
Though I wejr 

life for't. 
He is all naked, he muft 

needs be very cold. 
Shall you be at home ? 
I muft be there. 
He is to be hanged. 
I am to receive money. 
You are to play. 
You fhould do that. 

To take in good part. 

To take in ill part. 

That is to be hereafter; 

That will never be. 

I fhall be the death, or ruin 

of him. 
In order to fpeak, hear, &c, 

What is to become of me ? 

To beget, to become the fa- 
ther of children. 

Books of debtor and creditor. 

To want. 

It is neceflary to hafte, or to 
make hafte. 



Haver, when impersonal, is rendered into Eng- 
lish by the verb to be, preceded by there ; as, 



Hd, 

Ha homens tao malvddos, 
Havia huma mother, 
Hdalguns bons eoutros mdos, 

Hdmuitas cdfas, 

Hd alguma coufa de novo ? 

Ha mats he huma hora, 

Hd muito tempo, 

Hd per to de huma hora que 

ellefahio, 
Ha hum anno, 



There is, or there are. 
There are men fo wicked. 
There was a woman. 
There are fome good, and 

fome bad. . 
There are feveral houfeg. 
Is there any news ? 
It is above an hour fince. 
Long fince. 
It is almoft an hour fince he 

went out. 
A year ago. 



-*34 

Hd onto dias, 

lid per to de 20 lego as daqui 

la, 
Nao ha, 
E'lle cuida que nao hd mdis 

que pur gar, 



Haver Je, v. r. 



Elle fdbe como Je hd-de ha- 
ver, or elle Jabe como ha 
de haver -Je, 

Elle- houveje de maneira 
que, &c. 



PORTUGUESE 

Eight days ago. 

It is near upon 20 leagues 

thither. 
There is not. 
He believes that purging is 

all irfall, or that purging it 

the only remedy in Tuch a 

cafe. 
To carry, to behave one's 

felf. 
He knows how to behave 

himfelf. 



He behaved himfelf in 
a manner that, & c. 



fuch 



N. B. When this verb is used impersonally, it is 
always followed by the particle de; as, 

Haje de mijier dinheiro, Money is wanted. 

Haje dejazer, ou dizer iflo, This muft be done, or faid. 

Haje dejazer que elle qui- People muft do what he 
zer, pleafes. 

Hir, a neuter and irregular verb, to go, to walk, 
to march ; also, to grow, to reach any estate gra- 
dually, to be going. 



Hir por mar e por terra, 
Como vao os vjfos negocios ? 
Tudo vai bem, 
As Juas coufas vao muito 

ma I, 
Hir d mdo, 

Hir pejfdndo, 
Hir an dan do, 



Hir and&ndo, or pajfdndo, 



Que vdi de novo 9 
Que vdi n'tfto ? or Snde vdi 
tfto a dar comjigo ? 



To travel by-fea and land. 
How go your concerns ? 
All is well, all goes well. 
Things go very ill (or very 

hard) with him. 
To hinder, to obftruft, to 

obviate. 
To grow out of fafhion or ufe. 
To go on or forward, to keep 

or hold on his way ; aljo 

to proceed, to continue 

on, to profecute. 
To ftiift, to pafs life not 

quite well, to live though 

with difficulty. 
Is there any thing new ? 
What of all this? 



GRAM 

Hir debdxo, 
Hir para, 

Quanta ?nais vdmos para a 
pnmavera, mats compri- 
' dos/do os diaSy 
Hir de mal para peor, 
Hir didnte, 
Hir por diante, 
Hir ao encontro, 
Hir aofundo, 
Hir e oir, 

Naofdfo mdis do que hir e 
voltdr, 

JJfo ja Id vdi, 

Eilo Id vdi, 

Eilo vdi, 

Que vos parece daquella mot- 
her ? eilo vai, ella nao he 
fea, 

Eilo vaiyfolga que ajfimfeja, 

Como as coufas agora vao, 

Por que parte idesf 
Deos va comvSJco, 

Hir a roda do mundo, 

Hir comalguem, 

E'Jia travejfa vdi ter d rua 

Idrga^ 
E'u o irei ver de caminho, 

Hir continuando o feu ca- 
minho, 

Hirfora do feu caminho, 

Hir hum ide huma .bdnda, e 
outro da Sutra, 

Hir para trdz, 

Hir detrdz, ' 

Hir atrdz de alguem, 

Hir em alcdnct de alguem, 

fjir bufcdr, 
Hir para dentro, 
Hir parafora, 



MAR. 235 

To come by the worft. 
To approach, to go near. 
The nearer the fpring, the 
longer the days. 

To grow worfe an 4 worfe. 

To go before. 

To go on, or forward. 

To go to meet. 

To fink, <?r fall to the bottom. 

To go to and fro, to go and 

come. 
I will not ftay, I fliall be 

back prefently. 
'Tis a thing paft and done. 
There he goes. 
So, fo, pretty well. 
How do you like that wo- 
man ? She is fo fo, fhe 

may pafs. 
Well, well, I am glad on't. 
As things go now, as the 

world goes. 
Which way d'ye go ? 
The Lord of heaven go with 

you. 
To go about the world. 
To go along with one. 
This lane goes into the broad 

ftreet. 
I will call upon him as I go 

along. 
To go along. 

To go out of one's way. 
To go afunder. 

To go backward. 

To go behind. 

To purfue, to go after one. 

To. go after one, in order to 

overtake him. 
To go for, or fetch. 
To go in. 
To go out. 



i> 3 6 

Hir peregrindndo, 
Hirfazer huma embaixada, 
Hir ver, cantar, &c. 
Vdmos, 

Hirfazer hum negocio, 
Hir com a mare, 
Hir par a par com alguem, 
Vdi para qudtro mejes que 
eu aquz chegu'ei, 

I'de em paz, 

tempo vai abranddndo, 
Hir (at cards), 
JKir-fe, v. r. 



Hirfe a Slha, ou a pattella, 

Hirfe o enfermo, 

A quarefma vdi-fe acabdndo, 

Hir-je, 



PORTUGUESE 



To go a pilgrimage. 
To go on an embafly. 
To go to fee, to fing, 6?c. 
Come, come on. . 
To go upon a bufinefs. 
To go with the tide. 
To go cheek byjole with one* 
It is now going on four 

months fitice I came hi- 
ther. 
Depart in peace. 
The weather grows mild. 
To go, to lay, to ftake, to fet. 
To go, to go away, to go 

one's way, to depart, aTfo 

to run, or leak. 
Is for the pot to boil over. 
Is for a fick man to die. 
Lent draws to an end. 
To flip, or pafs away (as 

time.) 
Nothing goes fafter than 

time. 
Thofe mountains extend, or 

ftretch themfelves. 
To go away, alfo to be over* 
Stay till the heat be over. 



Nddafe vai ?nais depreffa 

que o tempo, 
Aquelles monies vdo-fe ejlen- 

den do, 
Hir-je ember a, 
'Efperdi ate que a calmafe va 

embSra, 
Vdi-te embbra ; que naofdbes 

engoddr a gente, 
Hir-Je de huma carta (at 

cards), 
Vdi-f fazendo tdrde, 

Vai-fe chegdndo a noite, l tie mgnt draws on. 

Vdi-fe chegdndo o tempo da It grows near harveft 

Vai-fe acabdndo o men con* 

fulado, 
Hir ft efcapulindo, 
Hirfe a mdo, 



Away, or go, you know not 

how to wheedle people. 
To throw away a csfrd. 

It grows late. 

The night draws on. 



My confulfiiip is almoft at 

an end. 
To fneak away. 
To refrain, to forbear, to ab- 

ftain. 



Hir-se impersonal; as, vai-se, they go; foi-sc, 
they are gone ; hir-se ha, they shall go, 



GRAMMA R. 237 

To pray. 
Senkor, como amigo,fdfame Dear fir, do me the favour. 



favor, 
Eu vos pigo, or pefovos, 
Pecolke em cortefza, 
Pe'folhe encarecidamente, 

Pe'folhe por favor que, &c, 
Fa fame a fineza, 
Pe'folhe perdao, 



I pray you. 

I befeech you. 

I intreat, or conjure, you to 

do it. 
I beg of you that, &c. 
Do me the kindnefs, 
I beg your pardon. 



Expressions of Kindness. 



Minha vida, 

Minha alma, 

Meu amor, 

Meuquerido, minha querida, 

Meu coracdo, 

Filho do meu coracao, 

Filha da minha alma, 



My life. 

My dear foul. 

My love. 

My little darling. 

My dear love, my love, 

My dear child. 

My little honey. 



To shew Civility. 



Agradeqo a vm" , 
D6uavm a as agradecimentos, 
BHjo as maos de vm" , 
Falo-hei com todo gqfto, 
Com todo meu coracdo^ 
De muito boa vontdde, 
Vcja vm" fe p'ojfo fervir 

nalguma coufa, 
Difponha vm"como Ikepare- 

cer deft e feu criddo, 
EJlou efperdndo pel las 6r- 

dens de vm" , 
ya que vm ce qfsim ordena, 
As or dens de vm ce , 
Fico muito obrigado a vm" , 

Quer vm'* que eufdca alguma 

coufa, 
Sem ceremonia, 
Nao tern vm ce mdis quefallar, 
Fdcame a konra de de mepor 

uos pis dafnr*, 



to 



I thank you. - 

I give you thanks. 

I kifs your hand. 

I will do it cheerfully. 

With all my heart. 

Heartily, willingly. 

See if it is in my power 

ferve you. 
Do what you pleafe with 

your fervant. 
I wait for your commands. 

Since you will have it fo. 

At your fervice. 

I am very much obliged to 
you. 

Have you any thing to com- 
mand me. 

Without ceremony. 

You need but to fpeak. 

Prefent my refpefts, or duty, 
to my lady. 



238 ' PORTUGUESE 

Nao fei como agradec&r a I know not how to make 



vm ct tdntos favor es, 

Nao fou de comprimentos, 
Deixemos efles comprimen- 
tos, 
TJJo heo melhor, 



proper return for fo many 

favours. 
I am not for ceremonies. 
Away with thefe ceremonies 

or compliments. 
That is the beft way. 



To give tokens of Affirmation, Consent, Belief, 
and Refusal. 



He verdade, 

He ijfo verdade f 

He muito verdade, 

Para dizervos a verdade. 

Com effeito he ajfim, 

Quern duvida dffo ? 

Nao ha duvida nijfo, 

Pareceme que Jim, que nao, 

Apoflo que Jim, 

Apqjlo que nao, 

Greame vm ce ? 

EJid vm cl zombdndo ? 

Fdlla vm ce de veras ? 

Fa Ho de veras, 

Pois, ejldfeito, 

Pouco a pouco, 

f? nao he verdade, 
6 ha tal couja, 
He mentira, 
Eftdva zombdndo, 
Seja muto embSra, 
Nao qucro, 



It is true. 

Is it true ? 

It is but too true. 

To tell you the truth. 

Really it is fo. 

Who doubts it ? 

There is no doubt of it. 

I think fo, not. 

I lay it is. 

I lay it is not. 

Do believe me ? 

Don't you jefl? 

Are you in earned ? 

I am in earneft. 

Well, let it be fo, 

Softly, fair and foftly. 

It is not true. 

There is no fuch thing. 

It is a lie. 

I did but jeft. 

Let it be fo. j 

I won't, I wirf not. 



To consult. 



Que fe ha defazer ? 

Quefaremos ? 

Que Ihe par^ce a vm Ci que e« 

fdgat- . 
Que remedio tern ijfo? 
Facdmos qjfim, 
Facdmos huma couf* t 
Sera melhor que, 
Seria melhor que, * 



What is to be done ? 

What fhall we do ? 

What do you advife me to 

do? 
What remedy is there for it ? 
Let us do {q, and fo. 
Let us do one thing. 
It will be better that. 
It would be better that. 



Efperdi hum ptiuco, 
Dei x dime com ijfo, 
Antes guizera, 
Se ijfofojfe comigo, 
Trfdo he o mc/mo, 



GRAMMAR. 

Stay a little. 

Let me alone. 

I had rather. 

Were I in your place. 

It is all one. 



*39 



Of Eating and Drinking. 



TenhoJ6me % 

Morro defime, 

Coma vwf alguma coufa, 

Que quer vm ce comer f 

Quer vm" comer mais ? 

Tenho Jede, 

Jamatei a fame, 

Tfnho muitafede, 

Morro de fede, 

Dime de bebir, 

Viva vm ct muitos dnnos, 

Eu beberia hum ccpo 

vinho, 
Pees beba vm c \ 
Tenho bebido bajldnte, 
Nao p off o beber mats, 
J a matei ajede, 



de 



I am hungry. 

I am almoft ftarved. 

Eat Comet hing. 

What will you eat? 

Will you eat any more ? 

I am dry, or thirfty. 

I have no more ftomach. 

I am very dry. 

I am almoft dead with thirft 

Give me forae drink. 

I thank you. 

I could drink a glafs of wine. 

Drink then. 
I have drank enough. 
I can drink no more. 
I am no more thirfty, or my 
thirft is quenched. 



Of Going, Coming, Stirring, &c. 



Donde vem pm a f 
Para cndevai vm ce ? 
Vinho de ; vou para, or a, 
(hicr vm ce Jubir, ou defc&r? 

E'ntre vm Q %Jaya vm c % 

Nao ft hula daqui, 

Cheguefe para mim, 

Va-fe vm l \ 

Vem cd, 

E/pfre por mim t 

Nao va tao deprijfa, 

Tire-fe de diante de mim, 

Nao me toque, 

Deixe ejidr iffo, 

Efiou bem a qui, 

A' bra vm" a porta, 



From whence do you come ? 
Where do you go ? 
I come from ; I am going to. 
Will you come up, or come 

down ? 
Come in, go out. 
Do not ftir from hence. 
Come near to me. 
Go your way, be gone. 
Come hither. 
Stay for me. 
Do not go fo faft. 
Get you out of my way. 
Do not touch me. 
Let that alone. 
I am well here. 
Open the door. 



240 

Feche a porta, 

A'bra, oufkhe ajanella, 

Ve'nha vm c * por aqui, 
Pajfe por Id, 
Que procura vm ct f 
Que perdeo vm ce ? 



PORTUGUESE 

Shut the door. 

Open the window, or 

the window. 
Come this way. 
Pafs that way. 
What do you look for ? 
What have you loft ? 



(hut 



To wish well to a Person. 



O Ceo vos gudrde, 
Deos vos de boa fortune 
DezejO'VOS todo bem, 

Deos vos ajude, 

Deos vos per doe, 

I'de com Deos, 

Ate ver-nos, 

Bom proveitofaga a vm ce , 



Heaven preferve you. 
God fend you good luck. 
I wifh you every thing that 

is good. 
God aflift you. 
God forgive you. 
God be with you. 
Till I fee you again. 
Much good may do you- 



To wish ill. 



didbo tt live, 

Malditofejastu, 

Vdi para os quint os infernos, 

Vdite enforcdr, 

Enforcddojejas >tu, 



The devil take thee. 
A curfe on thee. 
Away, go to hell. 
Go and be hanged. 
Would thou wert hanged. 



To swear. 



AJfim Deos me. f dive, 



Arrebentadofeja eu, 
Em conciencia, 



As God mall help me, fihail 

fave me. 
May I burft. 
In my confcience. 

To threaten and insult. 



O'lha que te hei de dar, 
Deixa-te ejldr, or cala-te que 

me has de pagdr, 
Juro que tefarei arrepender 

difo, 
Se me enfaddrcs, 
Coitado de ti, 
Poucas razoens, or cala ejfa 

boca, 
I'Jlo bajla, 



Take care, I will beat thee. 
Thou wilt pay it me. 

I fwear thou malt repent of 

it. 
If you put me into a paflion. 
Woe be to thee. 
Hold your tongue, don't 

fpeak to me. 
It is enough, it is sufficient. 



GRAMMAR. 



*4* 



To mock, to blame, and to call one names. 



Que belofocinho ! 

Que cdra de mono ! 

Trapaceiro, 

Emhufteiro, 

Mexeriquez'ro, 

Que bctofogiito, 

Velhaco, 

Maroto, 

Md cdfla % 

Tonto, 

Afneirdo, 



O the fine fnout ! 

What an ape's face ! 

A chicaner. 

A cheat, an impoftor. 

A tale bearer, a tell-tale. 

O the dull thing. 

A knave. 

A rogue, a rafcal. 

Curfed race. 

Giddy-brains, blunderbufs. 

A great beaft, a thick-fkull. 



To admire. 



0' Dios ! 

Hepofsivel! 

Quern teria imaginddo, crido, 

dito, 
Que animal ! 
Que maravilha ! or que mi- 

Idgre ! 
Nao me maravilho ! 
Como podejer ijlo ! or CSmo 

he pofsivel ! 
Eis aquz como fdo as coiifas 

difle mundo ! 



O God ! 

Is it poffible ! 

Who would have thought, 

believed, faid ! 
What a beaft ! 

ftrange ! 

1 don't wonder. 
How can that be ! 

So goes the world ! 



To shew Joy and Displeasure. 



Qjue gqflo / 

Que gloria ! 

Que alegria ! 

Que contentamento he o miu 

Que feliciddde ! 

Sinto tffo, 

Sinto ijfo.na alma, 

Sinto ijfo no coragab', 

0' que deferaga he a mtnka 



What pleafure ! 
What glory ! 
What joy ! 
How pleafed I am ! 
What happinefs ! 
I am sorry for it. 
That touches my very foul, 
It pierces me to the heart. 
O how unhappy ami! 
R 



» 4 2 PORTU 

Ajfrontdr-me dejia sorte ! 

Afsim he que fe trdta. ? 

O'lha, maroto ! 

Que bella cortesia ! 

Nao deveria tratdr comigo 

defia forte % 
Parece-te bem ? 
Apr hide, peddfd d'afno, 
O'lha como.me trdta ejte ani- 

mdl y 
Olhdi que velhaco he efte, 
Que diabo tern elle feito ? 
Pots, ainda teimdis ? 



GUESE 

To affront me thus ! 

Do you deal thus ? 

You rogue ! 

O what fine manners ! 

Thou oughteft not to treat 

me thus. 
Doft thou think that it will ? 
Learn, beaft as thou art. 
See the brute, how he ufes 

me. 
Do you behold that rafcal. 
What the devil has he done ? 
What, are you obftinatcftill ? 



To call. 



O'uve! 

O'nde ejlas? 

Huma paldvra, 

Duas paldvras foment e, 



Hark! 

Where art thou ? 
A word. 

I'll fpeak but two .words to 
you. 



To, shew Uneasiness, Trouble, and Sorrow. 



Sinto or pefame, 
Deixa?ne, 

Pe'fo-te que me deixes. 
Nao me que'bres a cabifa, 
O'ra vdmos, deixame, 
Deixame, vai com Deos, 
Vdlte daqui or vaite embara, 
Vai tratdr da tua vzda, 
Vdite na ma hora, or vdite 

co'didbo, 
Nao mefacas a cabega tdnta, 
J a me tens dito ijfo hum cen- 
to de vezes, 



I am forry. 

Let me be quiet. 

Prithee get thee gone. 

Do not break my head. 

Away, away. 

Go, go, God be with you. 

Get thee gone from hence. 

Go mind your own bufinefs. 

Go to the devil. 

Do not make me giddy. 
You have told it me a hun- 
dred times already. 



To ask. 



Que novas ha ? 

Que he ijto ? que hdf 



What news ? 

What is this, what is the 
Ynatter ? 



GR A 

O'nde ides ? 
■Donde vindes ? 
Que quer dizer f 
De que ferve ? 
Que vos parece ? 
Quern teve tal atrevimento? 
Que dizem ? quefe diz ? 
Cdmo diz vm cs ? 
Por que nao me refponde ? 



MMAR. 243 

Where are you a-going ? 
Whence come you ? 
What do you mean ? 
To what purpofe ? 
What do you think ? 
Who is that has been fo bold ? 
What do they fay ? 
How do you fay ? 
Why don't you anfwer ? 



To forbid. 



Deixai ejidr iffo t 
Nao toqueis, 
Nao digdis ndda t 
Guarddivos, 



Let that alone. 
Do not touch. 
Say not a word, 
Have a care, 



Of speaking, saying, doing, &c. 



Falle vm" alio, 

Falle vm ct mdnfo^ 

Com quern fall a vm c ' ? 

Falle vm ce comigo ? 

Fa lie- 1 he, 

Fdlla vm™ Portuguez ? 

Quzdizvm"? 

Nao digo nada, 

E'lla nao quer caldr-Je. 

Ouvi dizer que 

Afsim mo difserao^ 

Afsim dizem, 

Afsim dizem todos, 

Quern Iho dijje a vm ce ? 

Dijfemo Sr. A. 

Pdis elle he que Iho dijfe ? 

Pots el la he que difl'e ? 

Qudndo ouvio vm. dizer ? 

Differ ao mo hoje, 

Nao poffo cre-to 4 

Que diz elle ? 

Que vos difje Hie ? 

Elle nao me diffe nada, 

Nao Iho dig a vm. 

F]u Iho direi, 

Nao diga ndda t 

Di/fe vm* aquillo ? 



Speak loud. 

Speak low. 

Who do you fpeak to ? 

Do you fpeak to me ? 

Speak to him, or to her. 

Do you fpeak Portuguefe ? 

What do you fay ? 

I fay nothing. 

She will not hold her tongue. 

I was told that 

I was told fo. 
They fay fo. 
Every one fays fo. 
Who told it you ? 
Mr. A. told it rne. 
Did he tell you fo ? 
Did fhe tell it ? 
When did you hear it ? 
I heard it to day. 
I can't believe it. 
What does he fay ? 
What did he fay to you ? 
He faid nothing to me. 
Do not tell him that. 
I'll tell him, or her of it. 
Say not a word. 
Did you fay that ? 



R s 



Nat 



s 4 4 P O R T U 

Nao o disse, 

Nao disse vm. assim ? 

Que estd vm.fazendo ? 

Que tern vm.feito ? 

Nao fag o nada, 

Rao tenhofeito nada, 

Tern vm. acabado ? 

Que estd ellefazendo ? 

Que fax ella ? 

Que quer, or que ordina vm ? 

Que Ihefalta ? 

Of understanding 

Entende-o, or percebe. o vm. 

bem ? 
Perce be vm. o que tile difse ? 

Percebe vm, o que elle diz ? 

Entendeme t or percebemevm.? 
Entendo a vm. muito bem, 
Nao entendo a vm. 
Sabe vm. a lingua Portu- 

gueza ? 
Nao a fit, 

Tem-me vm. percebido ? 
Agora o percebo, 
Naofe percebe o que elle diz, 

Parice gdgo, 



GUESE 

I did not fay it. 
Did you not fay fo ? 
What are you doing ? 
What have you done 1 
I do nothing. 
I have done nothing. 
Have you done ? 
What is he doing ? 
What does fhe do ? 
What is your pleafure ? 
What do you want ? 

or apprehending. 

Do you underftand him well? 

Did you underftand what he 

faid? 
Do you underftand what he 

fays? 
Do you underftand me ? 
I underftand you very well. 
I do not underftand you. 
Do you underftand Portu- 

guefe ? 
I do not underftand it. 
Did you underftand me ? 
Now I underftand you. 
One cannot underftand what 

he utters. 
He fpeaks like a ftammerer. 



Of knowing, or having Knowledge of. 



Sdbe vm. if so ? 
Nao o fit, 
Naofei ndda difso, 
E'lla bem o fabia, 
Porventura nao fabia elle 

if so ? 
Demos que eu o foubefse, 
Elle nao faberd ndda difso, 
Elle nuncaf>ube ndda diflo, 



Do you know that ? 
I do not know it. 
I knew nothing of it. 
She knew well of it. 
Did he not know of it ? 



" Suppofe I knew it. 
He (hall know nothing of it. 
He never knew any thing 
about this. 

E'ufoube-o primeiro,Qi antes I knew it before you. 
qut vm. o foubefse, 



GRAMMAR. 

He i]lo afsim ou nao ? Is it fo, or not ? 

Nao que iufaiba, 



245 



Not that I know of. 



Of knowing or being acquainted with, forgetting, 
and remembering'. 

Do you know him ? 

Do you know her ? 

Do you know them ? 

I know him very well. 

I do not know them. 

We do not know one another* 

I know him by fight. 

I have heard of her. 

He knew me very well. 

Do you know me ? 

I have forgot your name. 

Did you forget me ? 

Does fhe know you ? 

Does the gentleman know 

you? 
It appears he does not know 

me. 
The gentleman knows me 

well. 
He knows me no more. 
I have the honour to be 

known to him. 
Do you remember that ? 
I do not remember it, 
I do remember it very well. 



Conhice-o vm. ? 

Conhice-a vm. ? 

Conhice-os vm. ? 

Conhifo-o muito bent, 

Nao os conhego, 

Nos nao nos conkecimos, 

Conhico-o de vifta, 

Conhigo-a de nome, 

Elle conkecio-me muito bem, 

Conkice-me vm. ? 

Tinho-me esquecido do seuaome 

Tem-se vm. esquecido de mint ? 

Conkece-vos ella ? 

Conhice Sr. a vm. ? 

Parice que nao me conhice, 

Sr. bem me conhice, 

E'lleja me nao conhice, 
Tenho a honra defer feu con- 

hecido, 
Limbra-se vm. dijfo ? 
Nao me limbro diffo, 
Limbro-me muito bem dijfo, 



Of Age, Life, Death, &c. 



Que iddde tern vm. ? 

Que idadc tern seu irmaZ ? 

Tenho vinte e cinco dnnos, 

Tern vinte e do us dnnos, 

Vm. tcmmais dnnos do que eu, 

Que idadc terd vm. ? 

He vm. casddo ? 

Qudntas vizes tern vm. sido 

casado ? 
Qudntas molhlres tern vm. 

tide ? 



How old are you ? 

How old is your brother ? 

I am five and twenty. 

He is twenty-two years old. 

You are older than I. 

How old may you be ? 

Are you married ? 

How often have you been 

married ? 
How many wives have you 

had ? 



246 



PORTUGUESE 



Tern vm. ainda pay, e may ? 

Me u pay morreo, 

Minha may morreo. 

Ha dous dnnos que meu pay 

morreo, 
Minha may casou Sutra viz, 
Qudntosjilhos tern vm. ? 
Tenho quatro, 
Filhos, oufilhas ? 
Tenho humfilho, e tresfilhas ? 

Qudntos irmaos tern vm. ? 

Nao tenho nenhum vivo, 

TSdos morrerao, 

TSdos kavemos de morrir, 

Ofthewordhora, as a Noun as well as an Interjection. 

H6ra 9 



Have you father and mother 

ftill alive ? 
My father is dead. 
My mother is dead. 
My father has been dead thefe 

two years. 
My mother is married again. 
Howmanychildrenhaveyou? 
I have four. 
Sons or daughters ? 
I have one fon and 

daughters. 
How many brothers 

you ? 
I have none alive. 
They are all dead. 
We muft all die. 



three 



have 



Eu efiariila, diniro dehuma 

hora, 
Que horas sao ? 
Sao site horas, 
A que horas ejtareis vis la ? 

As horas que for preciso, 

Horas desoccupddas, 

A tiltima hora ou a hora da 

morte, 
Cada hora, 
De hora em hora, 
Meya hora, 
Hum quarto de hora y 
Hutna hora e miya, 
Perto das nove horas, 
Ha huma hora, 
Fora de horas, 
A horas, 

Recolher-se a boas horas, 
Recolhir-sefora de horas, 
Horas dejantar ou de cear, 
Perto das horas dejantdr, 



also a particular 
there within an 



An~ hour, 

time. 
I will be 

hour. 
What's o'clock ? 
It is feven o'clock. 
At what hour or time will 

you be there ? 
In due or good time, at the 

time appointed. 
Leifure hours. 
The laft hour, or the dying 

hour. 
Every hour. 
Hourly, every hour. 
Half an hour. 
A quarter of an hour. 
An hour and a half. 
About nine o'clock. 
An hour ago, or an hour fince. 
Beyond the hour, or very late. 
In time. 

To keep good hours. 
To keep Bad hours. 
Dinner, or (upper time. 
About dinner time. 



GRAMMAR. «47 

Ainda eftais na cdma a ejias Are you a-bed at this time of 



hbras? 
relogio da koras, 
Jfa dirao onze koras, 
Relogio de hora, 
Muitoa boas koras, 
A boas koras, 

Na md hora, 

Vdi te na ma- hora, 

Toda a hora que, 

A toda a hora que quizerdes, 

Hora, 

Molker que dnda para cada 

hora, 
Hbras de fazer orafao, 
Hbras de kir a igreja,^ 
Horas de kir para a cdma, 
Horas de comer, 
Jd naofao hbras, 
Chegdr d hora, 
EJidr efperdndoptllafua hora 
Naovir a hora, 



Sdo hbras de, &c, 
Hbras canonicas, 



Hbras, 



As quarenta hbras, 



CSnta das horas, 
Arte de dividir o tempo em 
. horas \ 



the day ? 

The clock ftrikes. 

It ftruck eleven o'clock. 

Hour-glafs. 

Early, betimes. 

In good time, in time, at the 
time appointed. 

In an ill hour, unluckily, un- 
fortunately. 

Go to the devil, go and be 
hanged. 

Whenfoever, at what time 
foever. 

At what time you will. 

Time or hour of child-birth. 

A woman near her time. 

Prayer-time. 

Church-time. 

Bed-time. 

Times of eating. 

The time is paft, it is too late. 

Is for a perfon to die. 

To wait for God's time. 

To long, to defire earneftly, 
to wifh with eagernefs 
continued, with em, or de 
before the thing defired. 

It is time to, &c. 

The fet time for the clergy to 
fay their office ; alfo thofe 
parts of the office itfelf, 
called Prime, Tierce, Sixth, 
None, &c. 
Any little prayer book, but 
particularly that in which 
is the office of the Blejfed 
Virgin. 
So they call the fpace of three 
days, in which the confe- 
crated Hoft is expofed and 
laid to public view. 
Horography, account of hours 
Horometry. 



a 4 8 PORTUGUESE 

Hora as an Adverb and Interjection* 



Hora deixa-o-hir, 

Hora deixate dejias par voices, 

Ho'ra,deixemo-nos defies com- 

primentos, 
Hora-vamos, defpdxate, 
Hora vdmos, nao ha perigo, 
Hora vamos, tira daqui ifto, 
Hora vdmos, tern vergonka, 
Hora, iu nao pojfo fqfrer 

aquillo, 
Hora hum, hora outro, 

E'lles hora eftdo Jobrt hum 
pe, hora fobre outro, 

Hora, que quer dizer ijfo ? 

Tudo o que he bom, aevcfer 
amddo; h&ra, Deosheinfi- 
nitamente bom, logo, &c. 

Hora, havia hum enfermo, 

For hora t 



Pray let him go. 
Away with thefe fopperies. 
Away with thefe compli- 
ments. 
Come, come, make hafte. 
Away, there is no danger. 
Away with this. 
Away for fhame. 
I cannot bear that. 

Sometimes one, fometimes 

another. 
They ftand now on one foot, 

and then on another. 
How now ? 
All that is good to be loved, 

now God is infinitely good, 

therefore, &c. 
Now there was a fick man. 
At prefent, for the prefent, 

now, at this time. 



VOCABULARY 



OF 



WORDS most- used in DISCOURSE, 



Do Ceo e dos Elementos. 

T)£0S, 

*"f Jesus Christo, 
Espirito Santo, 
A Trinddde, 
A Virgem, 

Os archdnjos, c/t/£& &* 

Os sdntos, 

Os bemaveyturddos, 

ceo, 

paraiso, 

Inferno, 

Purgatorio, 

Os diabos, 

°f°go\ 
dr, 
A terra, 
mdr, 
Os'ol, 
A lua t 

As estrellas, 
Os raws, 



Of the Heaven and the Ele- 
ments. 
GOD. 
Jesus Christ. 
The Holy Ghost. 
The Trinity. 
The Virgin. 
The angels. 
The arch-angels. 
The saints. 
The blessed. 
Heaven. 
Paradise. 
Hell. 

Purgatory, 
The devils. 
The fire. 
The air. 
The earth. 
The sea. 
The sun. 
The moon. 
The stars. 
The rayi. 
* A 



PORTUGUESE 



As nuvens, 
vento, 
A ckuva, 
trovao, 
relampago, 
Sardiva, 
rayo, 
A neve, 
A gedda, 
caramelo, 
orvalho, 
Ne'voa, 
Nevoe'iro, 
terremoto, 
diluvio, 
calor, 
Ofrio, 



The clouds. 

The wind. 

The rain. 

Thunder. 

The lightning. 

Hail. 

The thunderbolt/ 

The snow. 

The frost. 

The ice. 

The dew. 

A fog, or mist. 

A thick fog. 

The earthquake. 

The deluge, or flood. 

The heat. 

The cold. 



Do Tempo, 

dia, 

A noite, 

Meyo dia, 

Meya noite, 

A mankaa, 

Despots do meyo dia , 

Huma hora, 

Hum quarto de hora, 

Meya hora, 

Tres quartos de hera s 

Hoje, , 

O'ntem, 

Amanhaa, 

Antes d' ontem, 

Depots de a?nankda, 

Depots dejantdr, 

Depots de ce'a % 

Huma semdna, 

Hum mes, 

Mum anno, 

Dia sdnto, 

Dia de trabdlhc, 

O nascer do so/, 

^ par do til* 



Of the Time. 

The day. 

The night, 

Noon. 

Midnight. 

The morning. 

The afternoon. 

An hour. 

A quarter of an hour. 

ffilf an hour. 

Three-quarters of an hour. 

To-day. 

Yesterday. 

To-morrow. 

The day before yesterday. 

After to-morrow. 

After dinner. 

After supper. 

A week. 

A month. 

A year. 

A holy. day. 

A working day. 

The sun-rising. 

The sun-set. 



GRAMMAR. 

Tempo de sega, or da aceifa, The harvest. 
Tempo de vindima, The vintage. 



Das Estacoens do TSmpo. 


Of the Seasons. 


A primaverar, 


The spring. 


verao, 


The summer. 


outono, 


Autumn. 


inverno. 


Winter. 


Os Dias da Semana. 


The Days of the Week. 


Domingo, 
Segundafeira, 


Sunday. 


Monday. 


Tercafeira, 
Quartafeira, sk^tt^r?^ 


Tuesday.- 


Wednesday. 


Q uinta feira , £^r&t3Ls 
Sextafeira, 


Thursday. 
Friday. 


Sdbado, 


Saturday. 


Dos Meses. 


Of the Months. 


Janeiro, 


January. 


Fever Sir o t 


February. 


Marco % 


March. 


Abril, 


April. 


Mayo, 


May. 


Junho, 


June. 


Jul ho, 


J ul y- 


Agosto, 


August. 


Settmbro, 


September. . 


Outubro, 


October. 


Novembro, 


November. 


Dezembro, 


December. 



Dias Santos. 



Holy -Days of the Year. 



Dia de Anno bom, New Year's Day, 

Dia de Reys, a Epiphama, Twelfth Day. 
A Candelaria, Candlemas day. 

* A 2 





4 PORTUGUESE 




Purificagdoy 


The Purification. 




Entrudo, 


The Carnival, or Shrovetide. 




Qudrtajeira d&Cinzas, 


Ash Wednesday. 




A Quaresma, 


The Lent. 




Annunciacao, 


Lady Day in March. 


. - 


As Qudtro Temporas, 


The Ember Weeks. 




A Semdna sdnta, 


The Holy Week. 




Domingo de Ramos, 


Palm Sunday. 




Qudrtajeira de Trevas, 


Wednesday before Easter. 




Quintafeira de Endoincas, 


Maunday Thursday, the last 
Thursday in Lent. 




Sestafeira da Paixad, 


Good Friday. 




Pdscoa da Resurreycdd, 


Easter Day. 




Assumpcab de N. S a . 


Lady Day in harvest. 




As Rogagoens, or Ladainhas, 


Rogation Week. 




Ascensao, 


The Ascension. 




Pentecdste, 


The Pentecost, x>r Whitsun- 




m 


tide. 




Dia do Corpo de Deos, 


Corpus Christi Day. 




Dia de S* Jodo, 


Midsummer Day. 


.-s^We 


Dia de S. Pedro, 


Lammas Day. 


l/atWto: ^-^StZ&Z 


y Dia de to dos os Santos, 


All Saints Day. 


Srt*?-^^ -- 


Dia dos Finddos, 


All Souls. 


</ 


Dia de Si Martinho, 


Martinmas. 


'' 


Dia de Natal, 


Christmas Day. 




Vigilia, or vefpera, 


The eve. 




Da Igreja e Dignidades Ec- 


Of the Church and Eccle- 




clesiasticas. 


siastical Dignities* 




A ndve, 


The aisle of the church. 




Zimborio, 


The dome. 




. Pindculo, 


Pinnacle. 




Cdro, 


The choir. 




Cape Ha, 
Estdnte, 


The chapel. 




A reading desk, or chorister's 






desk. 




Sacristia, 


The vestry. 




Campandrio, ou tor re dos li- 


The- belfry, or steeple. 




nos, 


* 




Sino, 


The bell. 




Baddh) 


The clapper of the bell. 




Pia, 


The font. 


, 


Hyso'pe, 


A sprinkler. 




CmfeJJion*ri§, 


A confession teat. 





GRAMMAR. 5 


Tribuna, 


A tribune, or gallery. 


Cemiterio, 


A church-yard, a burying- 




place. 


Carneiro, 


A charneL 


Altar, 


An altar. 


Frontal, 


An antipendium, 


Pdllio, 


A canopy. 


Todlka do altar \ 


The altar cloth. • 


Missal, 


A missal, a mass-book. 


Sotdna, 


A cassock. 


Sobrepelliz, 


A surplice. 


Roquete, 


A short surplice, a bishop's 




surplice. 


papa, 
Hum car deal, 


The pope. 
A cardinal. 


Hum patridrca, 


A patriarch. 


Hum arcebispo, 


An archbishop. 


Hum bispo, 


A bishop. 


Hum legddo, 


A legate. 


Vice legddo, 


A vice-legate. 


Hum nuncio, 


A nuncio. 


Hum prelddo, 


A prelate. 


Hum commendador, 


A commander. 


Hum abbdde, 


An abbot. 


Huma abbadessa, 


Anabbess. 


% Hum prior, 


A prior. 


Hum reitor, 


A rector. 


Beneficiddo, 


Beneficed clergyman, or in- 




cumbent. 


Frdde, or religioso, 


A friar. 


Cor 6a, 


A shaven crown. 


Hum guar dido, 


A guardian. 


Hum definidor, 


A definitor. 


Hum provincial, 


A provincial. 


Hum gerdl, 


A general. 


Hum vigdrio, 


A vicar. 


Hum vigdrio gerdl, 


A vicar-general. 


Hum dead, 


A dean. 


Hum arcedidgo, 


Archdeacon. 


Didcono, 


Deacon. 


Subdidcono, 


A sub-deacon. • 


Hum conego, 


A canon. 


Arcipreste, 


Arch-priest. 


Hum clerigo, 


A priest. 


Capclldo, 


A chaplain. 



PORTUGUESE 



Hum esmoler, 


An almoner 


Hum pdrroco, 


A curate. 


Beneficio simples, 


Sinecure. 


Freira, 


A nun. 


Hum pre gad or, 


A preacher, or lecturer. 


Sacristdo, or sancristdo, 


A sexton, a vestry -keeper. 


Menino do coro, 


A singing boy. 


Nomes das cousas que geral- 


Names of things most usually 


, mente.se comem. 


' eaten* 


Pao, 


Bread. 


A'goa, 


Water. 


Vinho, 


Wine. 


Carne i 


Meat, or flesh. 


Peixe, 


Fish. 


Cdrne cozida, 


Boiled meat. 


Cdrne afdda, 


Roast meat. 


Hum bocdde de pao, 


A mouthful of bread. 


Hum pastel, 


Apye, 


Sopa, 


Soup. 


Cdldo, 


Broth. 


Saldda, 


A sal lad. 


Molko, 


Any kind of sauce to dip in, 




provoking appetite. 


Fruta, 


Fruit. 


Queijo^ 


Cheese. 


Mantezga, 


Butter. 


Do Servico de huma M&sa. 


Of the Covering of the Table* 


A mesa, 


The table. 


Huma cadeira, 


A chair. 


A todlha da mesa, 


The table cloth. 


Todlka de maos, 


A towel. 


Hum guardandpo, 


A napkin. 


Humafdca, 


A knife. 


Hum gdrfo, 


A fork. 


Huma colher, 


A spoon. 


Hum prdto, 


A plate. 


Hum saleiro, 


A saltseller. 


Galheta do vindgre> 


A vinegar bottle* or cruet. 


Qalhita do azeite, 


A cruet, or vial for oil. 



* *^w»^ 


M%M 


GRAMMAR. 


Talker, 


A cruet-stand. 


Assucareiro, 


Sugar-basin. 


Bayxellaou servifo deprdta, 


A set of silver plate. 


Huma cubirta, 


A course. 


Prdto, guardandpo, fdca, 


A coven 


gdrfo, colher {tudo junto) 


, 


Jdrro, 


The ewer. 


■ Huma bacza, 


A basin. 


Hum cbpo, 


A glass. 
A bottle. 


Huma garrdfa, 


Huma tdfa, 


A cup. 


Casticdl, 


A candlestick. 


Vila, 


A candle. 


Tesouras de espevitdr, 


Snuffers. 


Huma sdlva, 


A salver. 


Huma escudella, 


A porringer. 
A bread-basket. 


Cisto para por o pao, 


Donzella, 


A dumb-waiter. 


Faqueiro, 


A case for knives. 


Loufa de Bdrra, 


Earthen ware. 


Louga dc estdnko, 


Pewter. 


Do Corner, e Beber. 


Of Eating and Drinking* 


Fdca, 


Beef. 


Carjieiro, 


Mutton. 


Vitella, 


Veal. . 


Cordiiro, 


Lamb. 


Gallinha, 


Hen, a fowl. 


Gdllo, 


Cock. 


Peru, 


A turkey. 


Almondegas, 


Force meat balls. 


Ojantdr, 


The dinner. 


Almoco % 


Breakfast. 


Cea, 


Supper. 


Merenda, 


The afternoon's luncheon. 


Consotida, 


A light supper, as upon a 




fast-day. 


Banquete, 


An entertainment, a banquet, 


,F6me t 
Side, 


Hunger. 
Thirst. 


FastiOi 
Pao, 


A loathing. 
Bread. 



- 



PORTUGUESE 



Pad fresco , or pao mo lie, 
Pao quente, 
Pao de todafarinha, 
Pad brdnco, or pao alvo, 
Arroz, 
Pao de rata, 
Pao de cevdda, 
■Pao de centio, 
Pao de avta, 
Pao de milho miudo, 
Pao de milho grdnde, ou de 

maiz, 
Pao livedo, 
Pao dsmo, 
Biscouto, 
Migdlka de pao, 
Fatia de pad, 
Codea de pao, 
Mass a. 
Tor (a, 
Rosea, 
Estofddo, 
Fidmbre, 

Cdrne assdda sobre grelhas, 
Cdrnefrita, 

Picddo, or cdrne piedda, 
y avalz, or porco month, 
Presunto, 
Porco, 
Cabrito, 
Toucznko, 
Hum Umbo, 
Maos de carnezro, 
Fressurd, or for fur a, 
Cachola de porco, 
Linguica, or ling 6i fa, 
Chourigo de sdngue de porco, 
Pdyo, 
Fricdsse, 
Figado, 
Leite, 
Ndta, 
Soro, 
Requeijde, 
Cpalhdda 9 



New bread. 
A hot loaf. 
Common bread. 
White bread. 
Rice. 

Brown bread. 
Barley bread. 
Rye bread. 
Oaten bread. 
Millet bread. 
Indian corn bread. 

Leavened bread. 

Unleavened bread. 

Biscuit. 

A crumb of bread. 

A slice of bread. 

A crust of bread. 

Dough. 

A tart. 

Bread made like a roll. 

Stewed meat. 

Cold meat. 

Broiled meat. 

Fried meat. 

Sausage meat. 

A wild boar. 

Ham, gammon of bacon. 

Pork. 

Kid. 

Bacon. 

A loin. 

Sheep's trotters. 

A pluck. 

A pig's head. 

A sausage. 

Black-pudding. 

A thick and short sausage. 

A fricassee. 

Liver. 

Milk. 

Cream. 

Whey. 

A kind of new cheese. 

Curdled milk. 



GRAMMAR. 



Gemma do ovo, 
Clara do 6vo s 
ovojrefco, 
ovo molle, 
ovo duro, 
ovo assddo, 
ovo gatlddo, 
ovos rcaes, 

ovos escalfados, 

ovos fritos, 

ovos mexidos, e fritos, 

Bolinholo, 

6vas de pe'ixt, 

Doces, 

Confeitos, 

Marmelada, 

Oque fe A'ssa. 

Hum capao, 
Humafranga, 
Hum frdngo, 
Pombos, 
Pombo trocdzy 

Gallinkola, 

Hu ma e specie degallinh 61a pe - 
quenadqualosCastelhdnos 
chamao gallineta cic'ga, 

Perdzz, 

Tdrdo, 

Faisao, 

Eaisaosinko, 

Hum kit do, 

Veddo, 

Hupi CoUho* 

Laparo, 

Le'bre, 

dde?n t 

Gdnso, or o macho da adem, 

Pdta t 

Pato, 



An egg. 

The yolk of an egg. 

The white of an egg, 

A new laid egg. 

A soft egg, 

A hard egg. 

A roasted egg. 

An egg with a chicken in it* 

Sweet eggs spun out like 

hairs. 
Poached eggs. 
Fried eggs. 
An amlet. 
A fritter. 
The roes of fish. 
Sweetmeats, 
Comfits. 
Marmalade. 

What is roasted, 

A capon. 
A pullet. 
A chicken. 
Pigeons. 

A wood culver, or wood- 
pigeon. 
A woodcock. 
A snipe. 



A partridge. 

A thrush. 

A pheasant. 

A pheasant-powt, 

A roasting-pig. 

A stag. 

A rabbit. 

A young coney. 

A hare. 

A duck. 

A drake. 

Goose. 

Gander, the male of the goose, 



io PORTUGUESE 

Calkdndra, A sky. lark. 

Codorriiz, i A quail. 



De outros P£ssaros. 

dguia, 

aguia ncva, 

Abutre, 

Abestrus, 

Esmerilkao, 

Gaviao, 

Mocho, 

Falcdo, 

F ale do que ainda nao voa, 

Gerifdlte, 

Sac re, 

Garga, 

Melharuco, 

Garcota, 

MilhdnOy or milhafrc, 

Corvo, 

Grdlha, 

Grdlho, 

Alveloa or rabita, 

Candrio, 

Pintacilgo,' 

Me'rfo, 

Ten til 'k do , 

Rouxinol, 

Verdelhao, 

Fapagdyo, 

Pega, 

Estornznho, or zorzdl, 

Franc elho, 

Mocho, 

Coruja, 

Morcego, 

Ave nocturna, como milro, 

que mama as cdbras, 
jrancolzm, 
Bufo, 
Cere eta, 
Corvo morinko, 



Of other Birds. 

An eagle. 

An eaglet. 

A vulture. 

An ostrich. 

A merlin. 

A sparrow hawk. 

The horned owl. 

A falcon. 

A jass-hawk. 

A ger-falcon. 

A saker, a saker-hawk, 

A heron. 

Tomtit. 

A little heron. 

A kite. 

A crow, or raven. 

A rook. 

A jack-daw. 

A wag-tail. 

A canary-bird. 

A gold-finch. 

A black-bird, 

A chaffinch. 

A nightingale. 

A green-bird. 

A parrot. 

A magpie. 

A starling. 

A hobby, a musket. 

Owl. 

A screech owl, 

A bat. 

A goat milker. 

A godwit, a moor-cock. 
A night crow, or raven, 
A teal. 
A cormorant. 



■ y^c^c^ 



w fz-'jv 



? 



£^-&C -£--'£. -£J<^'r-t~'' 



'f «-^^T^T--r, 



GRAMMAR. 



it 



Gdivota, 


A moor-hen, or gull. 


Gaivdo, t 


A martlet, or martin, a kind 




of swallow. 


Andorinha, 


A swallow. 


Mergulhao, 


A dive, or didapper. 


Marrica, 


A wild-duck. 


Picdnco, 


A wren, a little bird. 


Tar a I had, 


A kind of ortolan. 


Pavdo, 


A peacock. 


Pavoa, 


A pea-hen. 


Arara, 


A macaw. 


Parddl, 


A sparrow. 


Rota, 


A turtle-dove. 


Alcyon, 


A king's fisher. 


Cegonha, 


A stork. - 


Cuco, 


A cuckow. 


Cisne, 


A swan. 


Pintarroxo, 


A red robin. 


Grou, 


A crane. 


Pavoncino, 


A lapwing. 


Pelicdno, 


A pelican. 


Tarambola, 


A plover. 


Pisco, 


A bullfinch, or red-tail. 


Para os Dias de Peixe, ou de 


For Fish Days, or Fast Days. 


Jejum. 




So pa de crvas, &c. 


Soup meagre, or lenten pet. 




tage. 


Peixe, 


Fish. 


Peixe do mar, 


Sea- fish. 


Peixe do rio, ou da dgoa doce, 


Fresh-water fish. 


Savel, 


A shad. 


Anchova, 


An anchovy. 


Anguia, or Enguia, 


An eel. 


Bdrbo, 


A barbel. 


Lucio, 


A pike, or jack. 


Carpe, 


A carp. 


Siba* 


A cuttle. 


Lula> 


A calamary. 


Cdbra* 


The miller's thumb. 


Gorazi 


A rochet, or roach. 


Congro, 


A conger. [the gilt head. 


Dourada, 


Dorado, St. Peter's fish, or 



IS 

Linguado, 

Lagosta, 

Borddlo, 

Mugem, 

Rodovalho> 

Sdrda, 

Cavdlla, 

Sardinha, 

Bacalhdo, 

Arenque, 

Voador^ 

Arrenque defumo, 

Arrenque com was, 

Pescdda, 

Cado'z, 

ostra, 

Lamprea, 

Lampria pequena t 

Pdrco mannkOi 

Polvo, 

Perca, 

Tine a t 

Truta t 

Atum, 

Salmao, 

Camarao, 

Caranguejo, 

jimeijoa, 

Ervilhas, 

Fdvas, 

Espindfres, 

Alcachofras, 

Espdrgo, 

Couve, 

Repolho, 

Ndbos, 

Grelos de couve, 

Couve crespa, 

Couve Fler, 

Beldroegas, 

Cenouras, 

Celgas, or acclgas, 

Tmdtes, 



PORTUGUESE 



A sole. 

A lobster. 

A sturgeon; some call it 

shad-fish. 
A mullet. 
A byrt or turbot. 
A sort of little mackarel. 
A mackarel. 
A pilchard. 
Dry cod. 
A herring. . 
A flying.fish. 
A red herring, 
A hard-rowed herring. 
A kind of cod-fish. 
A gudgeon. 
An oyster. 
A lamprey. 
A lampern. 
A porpoise. 

Pourcontrell or many-feet. 
Perch. 
A tench. 
A trout. 
A tunny-fish. 
A salmon. 
A shrimp, or pawn. 
A crab. 
A cockle. 
Pease. 
Beans. 
Spinage. 
Artichokes. 
Asparagus. 
Cabbage, colewort. 
Summer cabbage. 
Turnips. 
Sprouts. 

Curled colewort. 
Cauliflower* 
Purslane. 
Carrots. 
Beets. 
Apples of love. 





GRAMMAR. 


Para temparar © 


Com&r. To season meat with. 


Sal, 


Salt. 


Pimenta, 


Pepper. 


Pimentdo, 


Cayan pepper. 


AzHte, 


Oil. . 


Vindgre, 


Vinegar. 


Mo star da. 


Mustard. 


Crdvo da lndia % 


Cloves. 


Canela, 


Cinnamon. 


Loureiro, 


: Laurel. 


Aleapdrras, 


Capers. 


Cogumelos, 


Mushrooms. 


Tubara da terra , 


Truffles. 


Cebolas, 


Onions. 


Our e'gao, 


Organy. 


Funcho, 


Fennel. 


Cebolinhas, 


Young onions. 


A'lho, 


Garlick. 


Lardnjas, 


Oranges. 


Limdens, 


Lemons. 


Pinhoens, 


The kernels of a pine apple, 


Perrexil, 


Wild parsley. 


Salsa, 


Garden parsley. 


Ortelda, 


Mint. 


Aipo, 


Cellery. 


Alho porro, 


Leek. 


Coentro, 


Coriander. 


A^afrdm, 


Saffron. 


Cominhos, 


Cummins. 


Para Salad* 


u For a Sallad. 


Almeirao, 


Wild succory. 
xendivia, Endive. 


Almeirao hortense,o 


Alfdce, 


Lettuce. 


CkicSr'ia, 


Succory. 


Agrioens, 


Water cresses. 


Mastrufos, or mastiirfos, Cresses. 


Cere/olio, 


Chervil. 


Rdbao, 


Raddish root. 



n 



14 PORTUGUESE 

Para Sombremcsa. For the Dessert. 



Mafaas, 




Apples. 


Peras t 




Pears. 


Pera bergamota, 




A bergamot pear. 


Pecegos, 




Peaches. 


Camoeza, 




A pippin. 


Albricbque, 




Apricot. 


Cerejas, 




Cherries. 


Cerejas de sdco, 




Hard cherries. 


Ginjas, 




Sour cherries. 


Ginja garrafdl, 




A very large sort of cherry, 
the fruit of the dwarf 
cherry-tree. 


Lardnjjx da China , 




China-orange. 


U'vas, ' 




Grapes. 


Pass as de uva, 




Raisins. 


V'va espim, 




Gooseberries. 


Figos, 




Figs. 


Figos Idmpos, 




The first figs that come in 
May. 


Ame'ixas, 




Plums. 


Pdssas de ameixas a 




Prunes. 


Amor as decarpa, oi 


"de sylva, 


Blackberries. 


Amoras que ndcem 


de huma 


Raspberries. 


sorfe de sylva tenra, 




Amoras que ndcem 


da amo- 


Mulberries. 


reira. 




• 


Marmelos, 




Quinces. 


Romdas, 




Pomegranates. 


Lima, 




A lime. 


Azeitonas, 




Olives. 


Amendoas, 




Almonds. 


Nesperas, 




Medlars. 


Melao, 




A melon. 


Melancta, or balancia, 


Water-melon. 


Castdnhas, 




Chesnuts. 


Nozes, 




Walnuts. 


Ave I an s, 




Hazelnuts. 


Mordngos, 




Strawberries. 


Medronho, 




A sort of fruit they have in 
Portugal like a strawberry, 
eating whereof, they say, 
makes people drunk. 



GRAMMAR. 



Tdmara, 

Fistico, 

Aifarroba, 

Bolota, 

'Sorva, 

Agofeifa, or macaa de nafega, 

Ddces, 



A date. 

A pistache-nut. 

A carob. 

A sweet acorn. 

Service. 

A jubub. 

Sweet-meats. 



Das A'rvorqs e Arbustos. 

Damasqueiro, 

jjmendoeira, 

Cerejeira, 

CastankeirOt 

Cidreira, 

Sorveira, 

Palmeira, 

Figueira, 

Marmeleiro, 

Maceira, 

Maceira da nafega^ 

Romeira, 

Limoeiro, 

Amoreira, 

Oliveira, 

Nesperiira, 

Laraajeira, 

Murta, 

Nogueira, 

Zambujeira, 

E'ra, 

Peceguiiro, 

Roseira. 

Ameixieira, 

Pereira, 

RosmaninhOy 

Pinkeiro, 

Giesta, 



Of Trees and Shrubs, 

An apricot-tree. 

An almond-tree. 

A cherry-tree. 

A chesnut-tree. 

A citron-tree. 

A service-tree. 

A palm-tree. 

A fig-tree. 

A quince-tree. 

An apple-tree. 

A jubub-tree. 

A pomegranate-tree. 

A lemon-tree. 

A mulberry-tree. 

An olive-tree. 

A medlar-tree. 

An orange-tree. 

Myrtle. 

A walnut-tree. 

A wild olive-tree. 

Ivy. 

A peach-tree. 

A rose-bush. 

A plum-tree. 

A pear-tree. 

Rosemary. 

A pine-tree. 

Broom. 



Dos Reptis, e Anim&es am- 

phibios. 
Minkoca % 
Serpente^ 



Of Reptiles and Amphibious 

Creatures* 
An earth-worm. 
A serpent. 



16 PORTUGUESE 


Strpente com dzas t 


A flying serpent. 


A'spide, 


An asp. 


Cobra, 


A snake. 


Cobra de cascavil, 


A rattle-snake. 


Vibora, 


A viper. 


Lagdrto, 


A lizard. 


O'sga, 


An evet, eft, or newU 


Alacrao, 


A scorpion. 


Crocodilo, 


A crocodile. 


Jacare, or crocodilo da Ame- 


An alligator. 


rica, 


. 


Castor, 


A beaver. 


Cdgado, 


A land tortoise. 


Lontra, 


An otter. 


Dos Insectos. 


Of Insects, 


Ardnhn* 


A spider. 


Formiga, 


A pismire or ant. 


Caracol, 


A snail. 


Rda 9 


A frog. 


Sdpo, 


A toad. 


Oucdo, 


Hand- worm. 


Escaravelho, 


A beetle. 


Caruncho, 


Wood -worm 


Piolko t or lagarta da hortaliqt 


i Caterpillar. 


Cigar r a, 


Grasshopper, 


Borboleta, 


A butterfly. 


Grillo, 


A cricket. 


Piolko, 


A louse. 


Piolho ladro, 


Crab -louse. 


Lendea, 


A nit. 


Pulga, 


A flea. 


Mdsca, 


A fly. 


Persove'jo, 


A bug. , 
A tick. 


Carrapdto, 


Gafanhoto, 


A locust. 


Polilha, or trafa, 


Moth. 


Vespa, or abespora, 


A wasp. 


Ab'elha, 


A bee. 


Zdngo, or Zangdo, 


A drone. 


Tavad, 


An ox fly. 


Boy de Deos, 


A lady-bird. 


Mosquito, 


A gnat. 






0t ■■-'. 






GRAMMAR, 



17 



Graos de Parentesco. 

Pay, 
May, 
Avo, 
Avo, 
Bis avo, 
Bis avo, 
Filho, 
FUha^ 
Irmdo, 
Irmdd, <u ? 
rimogenito, 
Ofilho mais moco, 
Tio, ■ - 

Tia, 

Sobrznho, 
Sobrinha, 
Primo, 
Prima, 

Primo com irmdo, 
Prima com irmdd, 
Cunhddo, 
Cunhdda, 
Mtyo irmdo, 
Sogro, 
Sogra, 
Padrdsto, 
Madras ta, 
Enteddo, 
Entedda, 
Genro, 
N6ra, 
Neta, 
Neto, 
Bisneto, 
Bisneta, 

Consorte, masc. and fern. 
Marido, 
Mother, 
Irmdo gemeo, 
Co lag 0, or irmdo de leite, 
Bastdrdo, 
Gompddre, 



Degrees of Kindred. 

Father. 
Mother. 
Grandfather. 
Grandmother, 
Great grandfather. 
Great grandmother. 
Son. 

Daughter. 
Brother. 
Sister. 

The eldest son. 
The youngest son. 
Uncle. 
Aunt. 
Nephew. 
Niece. 
Cousin. 

A female cousin. 
The male first cousin. 
The female first cousin. 
Brother-in-law. 
Sister-in-law. 
Half-brother. 
Father-in-law. 
Mother-in-law. 
A step -father. 
A step-mother. 
A step-son. 
A step-daughter. 
A son-in-law. 
A daughter-in-law. 
A grand-daughter. 
A grand-son. 
A great grand-son. 
A great grand-daughter. 
-A consort. 
Husband. . 
Wife. 

A twin-brother. 
A foster-brother. 
A bastard! 
A male-gossip. 
*B 



PORTUGUESE 



Comddre, 
Afilhddo, 
Afilhdda, 
Padrinho, 
Madrinha, 
parent e t 
A parente, 

Parente por cffiniddde, or 
consanguinidade. 



A female gossip. 
A god-son. 
A god-daughter. 
A god-father. 
A god -mother. 
A male relation. 
A female relation. 
A kin, a relation either of 
affinity or consanguinity. 



Dos differ&ntes Generos de 
Estado de hum Homem, 
ou de huma Molher, e das 
suas qualidades, 

Hum homem, 

Huma molher, 

Hum homem de iddde, 

Huma molher de iddde, 

Hum velhoj 

Huma velha, 

Hum mo go, ou mane e bo, 

Huma rapariga, 

Hum amdnte, 

Huma amiga, 

Huma cridnga, ou menino, 

Hum rapdz, 

Hum rapazinho, 

Huma menina, v 

Huma donzella, 

Huma vzrgem, 

A' mo, 

Ama, 

Criddo, 

Cridda, 
' Cidaddo, 

Rustico, 

Hum estrangiiro, 

Hum viuvo, 

Tluma viuva, 

Hum herdeiro, 

Huma herdeira, 

Solteiro; 

Estado de solteiro, 



Of the conditions of Man 
and Woman, as well as of 
their qualities* 



A man. 

A woman. 

An aged man. 

An aged woman. 

An old man. 

An old woman. 

A young man. 

A girl. 

A lover. 

A mistress. 

A child, a little child. 

A boy. 

A little boy. 

A little girl. 

A maiden. 

A virgin. 

A master. 

A mistress. 

A male- servant. 

A female- servant. 

A citizen. 

A countryman. 

A stranger, or foreigner, 

A widower. ' 

A widow. 

An heir. 

An heiress. 

A bachelor. 

Bachelorship. 



GRAMMAR. 



Homem casddo y 

Mother casada, 

Mo I her que estd depdrto. 

Destro y 

Agudo, 

Recatddo, 

Astute^ or velhdcut 

Esperto, or vivo, 

Doudo, 

Malicioso, 

Timido, ' 

Valero so, 

Tonto, 

Embusteiro, 

Grosseiro, 

Bern criddo t 

Cortez, 

jfusto, 

Desavergonhddo, 

Impertinente, 

Importuno, 

Descuidddo, 

Temerdrio, 

Constdnte, 

Devoto, 

Diligente, \_sivo. 

Misericordioso, or compas- 

Paciente, 

Ambicioso, 

Cobigoso, 

Sober bo, 

Cobdrde, 

Lisonjeiro, 

Goloso, 

Desledl, 

Desagradecido, 

Inhumdno, 

Insolente, 

Luxurioso, 

Teimoso, 

Preguifoso, 

Prodigo, 

Molherengo, 

Atrevzdo 9 

Alegre, 



19 



A married man. 
A married woman. 
A lying-in woman. 
Dexterous. 
Sharp. 
Cautious. 

Cunning, sly, crafty. 
Sprightly. 
Mad. 

Malicious. 
Fearful. 
Brave. 
Stupid. 
Deceitful. 
Clownish. 
Well-bred. 
Courteous. 
Just. 

Impudent. 
Impertinent. 
Troublesome* 
Careless. 
Rash. 
Constant. 
Devout. 
Diligent. 
Merciful. 
Patient. 
Ambitious. 
Covetous. 
Proud. 
Coward. 
A flatterer. 
Glutton. 
Treacherous. 
Ungrateful. 
Inhumane. 
Insolent. 
Lewd. 

Pofitive, stubborn. 
Slothful. 
Prodigal. 
Given to women. 
Bold. 
Merry. 
Ba 



20 

Que tern ciumes, 

Aclultero, 

Salteador, 

Matador, 

Murmur ad or, 

Calumniador, 

Feiticeiro, 

Traidor, 

Malvddo, 

Rebelde, 

Pe'rfido, 

Bobo, 

JHentiroso, 

Altivo, 

Coxa, 

Estropeddo das maos, 

Qego, 

Mouco, or surdo, 

Canhoto, or esquerdo, 

Mudo, 



PORTU 



CUES E 

Jealous. 

Adulterer. 

A highwayman. 

A muiderer. 

A censurer. 

A calumniator. 

A sorcerer. 

A traitor. 

Wicked. 

A rebel. 

Perfidious. 

A buffoon. 

A lyar. 

Haughty. 

Lame orthe legs. 

Lame of the hand; 

Blind. 

Deaf. 

Left-handed. 

Dumb. 



Dos Moradores de 
Cidade. 



huma Of the Inhabitants of a 

, City. 



Fiddlgo, 

Nvbre, 

Mecdnico, 

Tendiiro, 

Mercador, or homem de nego- 

cio, 
vulgo, or a pk'be, 
Candlha, or a mms vil gente 

da ple'be, 
Official, 

JornaUiro, 

Ourwes, 

Ou rives do ouro, 

Livreiro* 

Impressor, 

Barbe'iro, 

Merc ad or de seda, 

Merc a dor de pdnno, 



A nobleman. 
A gentleman. 
A mechanic. 
A shop-keeper. 
Merchant, or tradesman. 

The mob. . 
The rabble. 

A work-man, a man that 

labours with his hands. 
A journeyman. 
A silver-smith. 
A gold-smith. 
A book-seller. 
A printer. 
A barber. 
A mercer. 
A woollen-draper. 






GRA 

Mercador de pdnno, de linko, 

e roupas da India, ox fan- 

queiro, 
Alfaydte, 

Alfaydte remenddo, 
Costureira, 

C/iapeleiro, or Sombreireiro, 
Sapatciro, 

Remenddo, (sapatiiroj, 
Ferreiro, 
Alveitdr, 
Cerralheiro, 
Parteira, 
Medico, 
Ckariatdo, 

Cirurgiam, or surgiao, 
Tira denies, 
Sellei.ro, 
Carpenteiro, 
Pioneiro, or gastador, (in an 

array.) 
Padeiro, 
Carniceiro, 
Fruteiro, 
Molher que vende verduras 

ou or tali fas, 
P-asteleiro, 

Tavemezro, or vendeiro, 
Cervejeiro, or o quefaz cerveja 
Estalajadeiro, 
Bofarinheiro, 
Relojoeiro, 
Pregoeiro, 

Joyeiro, or joyalheiro, 
Boticdrio, 
Vidraceiro^ 
Carvoeiro, 
Jardmtiro, 
Let r ado, 
Procurator, 
Advogado, 
Jfuiz, 
Carcereiro, 
Car r ctsco, 
Mario la, 



M M A R. 
A linen-draper. 



A taylor. 

Botcher. 

A sempstress. 

A hatter. 

Shoemaker. 

A cobler. 

A blacksmith. 

Farrier. 

A locksmith. 

A midwife. 

A physician. 

A quack. 

A surgeon. 

A tooth drawer. 

A sadler. 

A carpenter. . 

A pioneer. 

A baker, 
A butcher. 
A fruiterer. 
A herb woman. 

A pastry-cook. 

A vintner. 

A brewer. 

An inn- keeper. 

A pedlar. 

A Watch-maker, 

A crier. 

A jeweller. 

An apothecary. 

A glazier. 

A coal man. 

A gardener. 

A lawyer. 

A solicitor. 

An advocate, or a pleader, 

A judge. 

A gaoler. 

A hangman* 

A porter. 



22 



PORTUGUESE 



Os cinco Sentfdos. 



A vista, 
O ouvido, 
olfacto, 
gosto, 
O facto, 



The Jive Senses. 



The sight. 
The hearing, 
The smell. 
The taste. 
The feeling. 



As Partes doCorpoHumano. 

Cabeqa, 

Miolos, or cerebro, 

To u tig o, 

Testa, 

Molleira, 

Fontes, 

Orilha, 

Cartilagem, 

Timpano, 

Sobrancelha, 

Pdlpebras, or Capellas dos 

olhos, 
Pest ana Si :fi 

Lagrimal, 
A'lvo do 6 1 ho, 
Meninas dos olhos, 
NariZt 

Mafda do rosto, 
Veritas, 
Sefito, or diaphrdgmo do 

nanz, 
A ponta do nariz, 
A bScd, 
Os denies, 
A gengiva, 
A lingo a, 
Paddr, paladar, or ceo da 

hot a, 
Q'^xdda, 
A bdrba, 

<%x^<*/-& _ _ _ _ 



The Parts of the Human 
Body, 

The head. 

The brains. 

The hinder part of the head. 

The forehead. 

The mould of the head. 

The temples. 

The ear. 

The gristle, or Cartilage. 

The drum of the ear. 

Eye-brow. 

The eye-lid. 



L ,i 



The eye- lashes. - ~< fa 

The corner of the eye. 

The white of the eye. 

The eye-balls. 

The nose. 

The ball of the cheeks. 

The nostrils. 

The gristle of the nose. 



The tip of the nose. 

The mouth. 

The teeth. 

The gum. 

Tongue. 

The roof, or palate of the 

rnourh. 
The jaw. 
The chin, 

Z&, Zg*U* ///&- >*~<) 



3L 



u 



GRAMMAR. 23 


As bar has, 


The beard. 


Bigodes, 


Whiskers. , 


pes cog o 9 


The neck. 


A nuca, 


The nape of the head. 


A garganta, 


The throat. 


Seyo, 


The bosom. 


Tit a, 


The pap. 


Peito, 


The breast. , 


Bico de peito, 


The nipple. 


Estomago, 


The stomach. 


Costelas, 


The ribs. 


Embigo, 


The navel. 


Bar rig a, 


The belly. 


Verilha, 


The groin, 


brdco, 


The arm. 


cotovelo, 


The elbow. 


Sobdco, or sovaco, 


The arm-pit. 


A mao, 


The hand. 


Pulso, 


The wrist. 


A pdlma da mao, 


The palm of the hand* 


Os dedos, 


The fingers. 


dedo polegdr, 


The thumb. 


dedo mostrador, 


The fore-finger. 


Dedo do meyo, 


The middle- finger. 


Dedo annular \ 


The ring-finger. 


Dedo meninho, or minima, 


The little- finger. 


Pontas dos dedos, 


The tips, or tops of the fin« 


Juntas, e nos dos dedos, 


gers. 
The joints, and knuckles of ' * * 

the fingers. 1** $&***£ (TVuU&tf* 
A toe. ^ 




Dedo do pe, 


A unha, 


The nail. 


As c'ostas, 


The back. 


Os ombros, 


The shoulders. 


Ilhdrgas, 


The sides. 


As nddegas, 


The buttocks. 


Coxa, 


The thigh. 


y oelho, 


The knee. 


Barriga da perna, 

Espinhdgo, 

Tornozelo, 


The calf of the leg. 


The ridge-bone of the back. 


The ancle. 


Ope, 


The foot. 


Sola do pe t 


The sole of the foot. 


coracao, 


The heart. 


Os bifcs, 


The lungs. 



figado, 

hdco, 

Os rins, 

A boca do estomago, 

As tripas, 

Ofel, 

A mddre, 

Bexiga, 

Sdngue, 

Cuspo, 

Ourina, 

Excremento, 

Suot, 

Monco or rdnho, 

Ldgrima, ' 

Car epa, or cdspa, 



PORTUGUESE 



The liver. 

The spleen. 

The kidneys. 

The pit of the stomach. 

The guts. 

The gall. 

The womb. 

The bladder. 

The blood. 

Spittle. 

Urine. 

Dung. 

Sweat or perspiration. 

Mucus. 

Tear. 

Scurf. 



Dos Vestidos. 

Hum vestzdo, 

Cabelleira, 

Cravat a, 

Chapio, 

A'bas do chapeo, . \_peo, 

Cdrdao, oxxjzta, para o cha- 

Barrete, 

Capote, 

Gib&o, 

Vestia, or colete, 

Camisa, 

Casdca, 

Cas actio, 

Cal^oefts, 

Ceroulas, 

Me as, or meyas, . 

Meas de cabresiilho, 

Ligas, 

Sapdtos, 

Chinelas, m : 

Biotas, 

Five las, 

Esporas, 

Punhos, 

Tatim, or taly 9 



OfCloaths. 

A suit of cloaths. 

A wig. 

A cravat or neckcloth. 

A hat. 

The brims. 

A hatband. 

A cap. 

A cloak. 

A doublet. 

A waistcoat. 

A shirt. 

A coat. 

A great coat. 

Breeches. 

Drawers. 

Stockings. 

Stirrup stockings. 

Garters. 

Shoes. 

Slippers, 

Boots. 

Buckles. 

Spurs. 

Ruffles. 

A shoulder-belt. 



GRAMMAR, 



25 



Boldrie, 

Expdda, 

Luvas, 

Cinta, 

Lingo, 

Lengo para pescogo, 

Samdrra, or pellote do cdmpo, 



A sword-belt. 

A sword v 

Gloves. 

A girdle. 

Handkerchief. 

A neck handkerchief. 

A shepherd's jacket. 



Para Molheres, 

Camisa de mo the res, 

Tone ado, 

Sdya, 

Mantilha, 

Mdnto, 



Aventdl, 

Braceletes, 

Anel, 

Brincos, 

Leque, 

Penteador, 

Toucador, 

Sindes, 

Espelho, 

Regal 0, 

Espartilho, 

Pente, 

Alfinetes, 

Tesoura, 

Dedal, 

Agulha, 

Fio, 

Fio de perolas, 

Polvilhos, 

Joyas, 

Cor, 

Palito, 

Raca, 

Fuso, 

Almofadinka para alfinetes, 



For Women. 

A shift, or smock. 

A head dress. 

A petticoat. 

A little cloak women wear on 
. their heads. 

A mantle, a kind of cloak 
women wear in Portugal, 
covering their head and the 
upper part of their body, 

An apron. 

Bracelets. 

Ring. 

Ear-rings. 

A fan. 

A. combing cloth. 

A toilet, a dressing table. 

Patches to wear on one's face. 

A looking-glass. 

A muff. 

Stays. 

A comb. 

Pins. 

A pair, of scissars. 

A thimble. 

A needle. 

Thread. 

A necklace of pearls. 

Powder. 

Jewels. 

Paint. 

A tooth-pick. 

A distaff. 

The spindle. 

Small pincushion. 



f6 : P O R T U 

Agdlha de toucar, 

Fttas, 

Fichu fsorte de lingo para o 
pescoco,) 

Tenazznhas, 

PendenteSy 

Palatina, 

Guar da infante, or Guard In- 
fante, 

V'eo, 

Ren da, 

Bilros, 

Bilros feitos de SJfo, 

Agoa da rainha de Ungria, 

A'goa de cheiro, 

Justilho, 



GUESE 
Bodkin. 
Ribbons. 
A necklace. 

Nippers. 

Bob, or pendant 

Tippet. 

Farthingale^ or hoop, 

Veil. 

Lace. 

Bobbins. 

Bones. 

Hungary water. 

Scented water. 

Bodice. 



Os doze Signos Celestes*. The twelve Celestial Signs, 



Aries, 

Touro, 

Gemini or Geminis* 

Cancer, 

Leao, 

Virgem, 

Libra, 

Escorpiao, 

Sagitdrio, 

Capricornio, , 

Aqudrio, 

Peixes, 



Aries, or the ram. 
The bull. 
The twins. 
The crab. 
The lion. 
The virgin. 
The balance. 
The scorpion. 
The archer. 
The goat. 
The water-bearer. 
The fishes. 



De huma Casa e do que Ihe 
pertence. 

Cdsa, 

Alicerse, 

Parede, 

Tabique, 

Pdteo, or Patio, 

Anddr, or sobrddo, 

Fachdda, 

Janella, 



Of a House, and all that be. 
longs to it. 

A house. 

Foundation. 

A wail. 

A light brick-wall. 

A court, or yard. 

A floor. 

The front. 

A window. 



GRAMMAR, 



*7 



Abobada, 

As escddas, 

Degrdos, 

Telhddo, 

Tel has, 

Ladrilhos, or tijolos, 

Sdla or quarto, 

Antecdmara, 

Sdla, 

Tecto, 

Alco<;a, 

Balcdo, 

Gabinete, 

Almdrio, 

Guarda-roupa, 

Adega, 

Co^cinha, 

Despensa, 

Chemine, 

Cavallariga, 

Gallinheiro, or c as a das gaU 

linhas, 
PoUiro, 
Jar dim, 
Necessdria, 
Cdsa dejantdr, 
Quarto de cdma, 
Anddr rente da Rua, 
Porta, 
Postigo, 

Limindr, or lumidr, 
Clara boia, 
Alger oz, " 

Beiras, or abas do telhddo, 
A couceira da porta, 
Fechadtira, 
Cadeddo, 
Ferrolho, 
. Trdnca da porta, 
Cdno da chave, 
Chdve meslra, 
Guardas dafechadura, 
Palhetdo da chdve, 



A vault. 
The stairs. 
Steps. 

A tiled roof. 
Tiles. 
Bricks* 
A room. 
Antichamber. 
A hall. 
A roof. 
An alcove. 
A balcony. 
Closet. 
A cupboard. 
Wardrobe. 
A cellar. 
A kitchen. 
A pantry. 
A chimney. 
The stable. 
A hen-house. 

A hen-roost. 

A garden. 

Water closet. 

A dining-room. 

Bed-chamber. 

A pariour. 

The door. 

A wicket. 

The threshold. 

Sky-lights. 

The gutter tile. 

The eaves. 

The hinges. 

A lock. 

A padlock. 

The bolt- 

The bar of a door. 

The pipe of a key; 

A masrer-key. 

The wards of a lock. 

Key bit. 



28 

Vidrdga, 

Escddafeita a carracol, 

Escdda secreta, 

Viga, ■ 

Paride mestra* 

Par ides meyas, 

A'rca % 

Cdma,- • 

Sobreceo da cdma, 

Cortinas da cdma, 

Lenfoes, 

Cabeceira da cdma, 

Pe'z da cdma, 

Colcha, 

Colchdo, 

Cobertor, 

Cobertor defelpa, 

Cama de Arma-fao, 

Travesseiro, 

Tapete, 

Tapegarza, 

Pederneira, 

I'sca, 

Mecha, 

Enxergao, 

Esteira^ 

Cdens da ckemine, 

Folks, 

Tendzes, 

Ferra, 

Abdno or abanador, 

Panel/a, 

Testo, 

A'za da pan ell a, 

Ferro para aticdr o lumt, 

Escumadeira, 

Colher grdnde, 

Caldeira, 

Sertda, oxfrigideira, 

Co ad or, 

Grelhas, 

Rdlo, 



PORTUGUESE 



The glass of a window. 
A winding stair-case. 
Back- stairs, a private stair. 

case. 
A beam. 
The main wall. 
The party walls. 
C hest. 
Bed. 

The bed's tester. 
Bed curtains. 
Sheets. 

The bed's head. 
Bed's feet. 

Counterpane, a quilt. 
A matrass. 
A blanket. 
A rug. 
Bedstead. 
A pillow. 
A carpet. , 
Tapestry. 
A flint. 
Tinder. 
Match. 
A straw -bed. 
A mat. 
Hand-irons. 
Bellows. 
Tongs. 
A shovel. 
Fire-pan. 
A pipkin. 
The pot-Jid. 

The ear of a pot, or pipkin. 
A poker. 
A skimmer. 
A ladle. 
A kettle. 
A frying pan. 
A cullender, or strainer. 
Gridiron. 
A grater. 



GRA 



Espeto, 
Almofariz, 



Mao do almofariz, 

Redoma^ 

EcUde, 

Sabao, 

Rodilha, 

Esfregao, 

For no, 

Pa do for no, 

Vasculho para alimpdr ofor- 

no, 
Farinha, 
Trinchante, 
Mordomo, 
Escudeiro, 
Camareiro msr, 
Escova, 
V as sour a, 
Despenseiro, 
Pagem, 
Lqcayo, 
Cockeiro, 
Cocheira, 
Mdfo dos cavallos, ou da es 

trebaria, 
Copeiro, 

Escudeiro de humafiddlga, 
A'niO) ou senhor da casa, 
A'ma, ou senhora da cdsa, 
Grimpa, 



MMAR. 29 


A spit. 


A mortar wherein things are 


pounded. 


A pestle. 


A vial, 


A bucket, or pail. 


Soap. 


A kitchen towel. 


A dish-clout. 


Oven. 


The peel of the oven. 


- A maukin, a coal-rake to 


make clean an oven. 


Meal-flour. 


A carver. 


A steward. 


A valet-de-chambre. 


A chamberlain. 


A brush. 


A broom. 


A steward. 


A page. ' 


A footman. 


A coachman. 


A coach-house. 


- A groom. 



A butler. 

A lady's gentleman usher. 
The master of the house. 
The mistress of the house. 
Weather- cock. 



Cores, 



Colours, 



Brdnco, 
Azul, 

Azul celeste, 
Azul ferrate, 
Azul cldro, 
Cor de camurca, 
Amarelo, 
Cor de rosa, 
Cir de pdlha. 



White. 
Blue. 

Sky-colour. 
Dark blue. 
Light blue. 
Light yellow. 
Yellow. 
Rosy colour. 
Straw colour. 



go 

. Verde, 
Cor de virde mar, or virde 

claro, 
Cor vermilha, or lncarnada, 
Cor vermelha muito viva, or 

carmin. 
Cor de cdrne, 
Cor carmesin, 
Cor nigra, or prita, 
Cor de met, 
Furta cores, 
€6r viva, 
Cor triste, 
Cor escura, 
Cor carregdda, 
Cor defogo, 
Pdrdo, 
Cor de cz'nza, 
Es car lata, 
Leonddo, 
Cor de lardnja, 
Cor de azeitona, 
Roxo, 
-Roxo, or cor de aurora, 



PORTUGUESE 

Green. 
Sea-green. 



Red colour. 

Carmine, a bright red colour. 

Flesh colour. 

Crimson red. 

Black colour. 

A dark yellow. 

A deep changeable colour. 

A lively and gay colour. 

A dull colour. 

A dark colour. 

A deep colour. 

Fire colour. 

Grey. 

Ash colour. 

Scarlet. 

Tawney. 

Orange colour. 

Olive colour. 

Purple, violet. 

Aurora colour. 



Roxo sometimes signifies red or rosy colour ; particularly 
in poetry, as in Camo'ens, Canto I. Stanza 82. 

Para que ao Portuguez se Ike torndsse, 
Em roxo sdngue a dgoa, que bebesse % 



Animaes. 



Beasts, 



Bista domestica, 

Best a brdva, 

Bista de cdrga, 

Bista de sella, 

Gddo, 

Gado grosso, 

Gddo miudo, 

Rebdnho, 

Mandda de g&do grosso, 

Touro, 

Bezirra, 



Tame beast. 

A wild beast. 

A beast of burthen. 

A beast for the saddle. 

Cattle. 

Great cattle. 

Small cattle. 

A flock. 

A herd of big cattle. 

A bull. 

Heifer. 



Bezerre, 



Boy, 

Burro, 

Burra, 

Porco, 

Porca, 

Faca, 

Egoa, 

Cria, 

Potra, 

Cavdllo, 

Cavdllo anao, 

Cavdllo de posta, 

Garranhdd, or cavdllo de 

langaminto, 
Cavallo de aluguel, 
Cavdllo de coche, 
Cavdllo que dnda de chouto, 
Cavdllo pequino que serve 

para senhoras, 
Cavdllo que toma ofreio entre 

denies, 
Cavdllo rijo da boca, 
Cavdllo doce defreio, 

Cavallo que tern boa boca, 
Cavdllo que tropessa, 
Cavdllo espantadico, 
Cavdllo ardinte, oxfogozo, 
Cavallo quern or de e da educes, 
Cavdllo rebelldo, 
Cavdllo que nao soffre dncas, 

Cavdllo malmandddo, 
Cavdllo de albdrda, 
Cavallo de cdrro, 
Cavdllo de sella, 
Cavallo de correr, 
Cavdllo de gucrra, 
Cavdllo ajaezddo, 
Cavdllo de Barb aria, 
Cavdllo capddo, 
Cavdllo sem ser capddo, 
CavdUo que da aosfelles, 



GRAMMAR. $i 

A calf,"_a steer, a young bul- 
lock. 
An ox. 
An ass. 
A she-ass. 
A hog, or pig. 
A sow. 

A young mare, also a nag. 
A mare. 
A foal, a filly. 
A colt, ok young horse. 
A horse. 
A nag. 

A post horse. 
A stallion. 

A hackney-horse. 
A coach-horse. 
A jolting-horse. 
A palfrey. 

A horse that champs the bit. 

A hard-mouthed horse. 

A' tender-mouthed horse, one 

that easily submits to the curb. 

A horse that will eat any thing. 

A stumbling-horse. 

A startling-horse. 

A fiery horse. 

A biting ^nd kicking horse. 

A untamed horse. 

A horse that will not carry 

double. 
A restive horse. t , 
A pack-horse. 
A cart-horse. 
A saddle-horse. 
A race-horse. 
A war-horse. 

A horse with all his furniture. 
A Moorish horse, a barb. 
A gelding. 
A storre -horse. 
A broken winded horse. 



PORTUGUESE 



Cavdllo quatrdlvo, 

Cavdllo alazdo, 
Cavdllo bdio, 
Cavdllo castdnho, 
Cavdllo bdio e castanho, 
Cavdllo rocim, 
Cavdllo remendddo, 
Cavdllo rudo or russo porcel- 

lano, 
Cavdllo que soffre ancas, 
Cavdllo trotaoy 
Cavdllo que serve para anddr 

a cdfa., 
Cavdllo que dnda de furta 

passo, 
Cdo, 

Cdo de quinia, 
Cdo de edea, 
Cdo de dgoa, 
Cdo de gddo, 
Cdo de mostra, podengo, or 

perdigueiro, 
Cdo defila, 
Cdo sac a dor, 
Cdo de busca, 
Aldo, 
Gdlgo, 
Cdo para cagdr rapo%as t 

lontras, 
Cachorrinho, 
Cachorrinho defrdlda, 
Cachorro, 
Mdcho, or mulo, 
Mula, 
Corga, 

Corg a de tres dnnos, 
Corca de dous dnnos, 
Cor fa, 

Corga ou cora de hum anno, 
Gdmo, 
Veddo, 

Cdbra montez, 

Veddo grdnde decinco dnnos, 
Doninka, 
Teixugo, or.texiigo, 



A horse that has four white 

feet. 
A sorrel horse. 
A bay horse. 

A chesnut-coloured horse. 
A chesnut bay. 
A worthless nag, a poor jade. 
A dapple horse. 
A dapple-grey horse. 

A double horse. 
A trotting-horse. 
A hunter. 

A pad, an easy-paced horse. 

A dog. 

A house dog. 

A hound. 

A water spaniel. 

A shepherd's dog. 

A setting dog. 

A great cur, a mastiff dog. 

A dog tumbler. 

A finder. 

A bull-dog. 

A greyhound. 

A terrier. 

A little puppy, a whelp. 

A lap-dog. 

A little dog. 

A he-mule. 

A she-mule. 

A she-deer, a doe, 

A spade. 

A pricket. 

A wild buck. 

A fawn. 

A fallow deer. 

A stag. 

A wild she goat. 

A hart. 

A weasel. 

A badger. 



GR A 

Gdto de algdlia, 
Doninkade rabomuifelpudo, 

a mo do de raposa, 
Elephdnte, 
Foinha y fuinka, 
Arminho, 
Ourico cackeiro, 
Arganaz, 
Rato, 
Raposa t 
Lobo, 
Rata da India, 

Forao, 

Toupeira, 

Lead, 

Leo a, 

Zibetina, 

Leo par do, 

U'rso, 

U'rsa, 

U'rso peque.no, • 

Tigre, 

For co yiontez, 



Jvf MAR. 

A civet cat. 
A squirrel. 



33 



An elephant. 

A marten v or martern. 

An ermin. 

An hedge-hog. 

A dormouse. 

A rat. 

A fox. 

A wolf. 

A rat of India of the bigness 

of a cat. 
A ferret. 
A mole. 
A lion. 
A lioness. 
A musk cat. 
A leopard. 
A he-bear. 
A she-bear. 
A bear's cub. 
A tiger. 
A wild bear. 



Das cousas do Campo. 

Cdsa do cdmpo, or quinta, 
Cdsa de lavrador, 
Quinteiro, 
Boyeiro, 

Vaqueiro, 

Porqueiro, 

Pastor, 

Surrao, 

Cajddo, 

Pastora* 

Herdade, 

Hortolao, 
Hortah'fa, 
Cava dor, 
Vinhateiro* 



Of country affairs. 

A country house. 

A farm-house. 

A husbandman, a farmer. 

A herdsman, he that ploughs 

with oxen, or tends them. 
A cow- keeper. 
A swine-herd. 
A shepherd. 
A scrip, or small bag. 
A shepherd's hook. 
A shepherdess. 
A great or large field, a wide 

arable grourid. 
A gardener. 
All sorts of herbage. 
A ploughman. 
A vine dresser. 
C 



34 PORTUGUESE 


Lavrador, 


A farmer, one who cultivates 




ground, whether his own 




or another's. 


Pdstos, 


Feeding ground, pasture, 




sheep-walk. 


Arddo, 


A plough. 


Ferro do arado, 


The plough. share. 


Rdbo do arado, 


1* he plough. handle. 


Abegao, or official que faz 


A plough-Wright. 


arados, 




Aguilhdda, 


A goad. 


Ensinho, 


A rake. 


Grade, 


A harrow. 


SemeadSr, 


A sower. 


Rogador, 


A weeder. 


Fouce rogadoura., 


A weeding-hook. 


F ouce, 


A scythe, or sickle,. 


Poddo, 


$. pruning- knife. 


Sega dor, 


A reaper, or mower, harvest 




man. 


Mangoal, 


A flail. 


Fore ado, 


A prong to cast up sheaves of 




corn with. 


Cacador, 


A huntsman. 


Pescador, 


A fisherman. 


Rego., 


A furrow. 


Terra auefica levdntada en* 


A balk, or ridge of land be- 


tre dous regvs, 


tween two furrows. 


Outeiro, 


A hill. 


Monte, or montdnha, 


A mountain. 


Vdlle, 


A valley. 


Lagoa, 


A moor, fen, or marsh, a 




standing water, but some- 




times dry. 


Lag o f 


A lake or standing pool, but 




always full of water. 


Ribeira, 


A brook, a stream of water, 




with a gentle or natural 




current. 


Ribeirinho, 


A rivulet, a streamlet. 


P/dno, or ptantcie, 


A plain. 


Penha, or rocha, 


A rock. 


Penhasco, 


A great rock. 


Descrto* 


A desert or wilderness. 



GRAM 

Dtspenhadciro, 

Bosque, 

Bosque pequeno, 

Peddco de chao se?n arvores, 

dentro de hum bosque, 
Pomdr, or verge/, 
Prddo, 
Ramdda, 
Fonte, 
Trigo, 

Trigo can dial, 
Trigo bretdnha, 
Cmteo, 
Feraa, 

Tremez, 

E spilt a, 
Espiga, 
Cab eg a da espiga, 

Ba'wJia, donde sake a espiga, 

depois de formdda, 
Legumes, 
Graos de bico, 
Lent ilka, 

Tramcco, or tramcc*, 
Feijoens, 

Feijao sapdta, or b&jtf, 
Feijao fra dink o , 

Chicharo, 

Car r eta , 

Carro, 

Rbda, 

Caimbas, 

E'ixo, 

Rdyo da roda, 

Currdl de boys, 

Cur r 61 de ovelhas, 

Curral de cabras, 

Chiqueiro de porcos, 

E'rva, 

Trigo em trva, 



MAR. 35 

A precipice, 

A wood. 

A grove, or thicket. 

A glade in a wood. 

An orchard. 

A meadow. 

A bower. 

A fountain. 

Wheat. 

The best wheat. 

Red wheat. 

Rye. 

Meslin, mixed corn, as wheat 

and rye, &c. 
The corn of three months 

growth. 
Spelt. 

Ear of corn. 
The grain at the top of ths 

ear of corn. 
The husk in which the ear of 

corn is lodged. 
Pulse. 

Spanish pease. 
A lentil. 
A lupine. 
French-beans. 
Kidney-beans. 
A sort of small French beans 

with a black spot. 
Chicklings, a sort of peas, 
A waggon. 
A cart. 
A wheel. 

The felloes of the wheel, 
The axle-tree of a wheel. 
The spoke of a wheel. 
An ox-stall. 
A sheep-fold. 
A house for goats. 
A hog's-sty. 
Grass. 
Green corn. 



*C 2 



36 PORTUGUESE 


Sedra, 


Standing corn. 


Tdrro t 


A milk-pail. 


Cincho, 


A cheese- vat, to make cheese 


Enxdda, 


in. 
A mattock, a hoe. 


Enxadao, or alviao, 


A mattock. 


Cdnga, 


A yoke for oxen. 


Cangdlhos, 


The arms of the yoke used 




for oxen. 


Sebe, 


A hedge or fence. 


quefaz sebes, 


Hedger. 


Fouce rocadoura de que uzao 
pdrafazer sebes, 


Hedging bill. 




Tempo detosquia e afesta que 


The sheep-shearing, the time 


nellefdzem os rusticos, 


of shearing sheep. 


Ca n tiga do s seg adores desp 6% s, 


Harvest home. 


de acabddo o tempo da 




sega % 




Sdrca, 


A bramble. 


Mat a, 


A thicket, a forest. 


Mdto, 


A heaih. 


Leira, or tabolezro, 


A bed in a garden. 


Chorro de dgoa 9 


A water- spout. 


V ere da, 


A path. 


Rdsto, 


The track. 


Cesta, 


A basket. 


Cabdz, 


A frail, a pannier. 


Cabana, or ch&upana, 


A cottage, a hut. 


Cabdfo, 


A dry hollow gourd used to 




keep seeds in. 


Cousas pertenc&ntes a 


Things relating to War. 


Guerra. • 




Servico ou vida militdr, 


Warfare. 


Militdr ou servir na guerra, 


To serve in the army. 


Artilharia, artelharia, ou 


Artillery. 


artilheria, 




Cankdo, oupefa de artilharia, 


A cannon. 


Canhdo deferro, 


Iron cannon. 


Canhdo de bronze, 


Brass cannon. 


Alma, do canhdo, 


The mouth of a cannon. 


Fog do do canhdo, 


The touch-hole of a cannon. 


Culdtra do canhdo, 


The breech of a cannon. 



GRAM 

Botdo, ou extremiddde da 

cu latra, 
Bdlas encadeddas, 
Bala de canhdo, 

Carrita do canhdo ', 

Polvora, 

Meyo canhdo, 

Canhdo dobrddo, 

Canhdo para bater huma 

praga, 
Canhdo, de vinte e qudtro, 
Calibre, 
Carregdr, 
Escorvdr, 
Fazer pontaria, 
Petrechos, or muni g Sens de 

gue'rra, 
Encravdr huma pica, 
Descavalgdr huma pega, 
Despardr, 
Tiro de pega, 
Trim de artilharia, 
Colubrina, 
Falconete, 
Petdrdo, 
Pedreiro, . v 

Bdmba, 

Bombdrda, 

Morteiro, 

Granada, 

Espingdrda, 

Pistola, 

Carabina, 

Mosquete, 

Mackadinha, 

Lang a, 

Alabdrda, 

Partasdna, 

Pique, 

Cal&r os piques pdra resistir 

d cavalaria, 
Alfdnge, 
Espdda, 



MAR. 
The pummel. 



37 



Chain shots. 

A cannon bullet, cannon- 
ball, or cannon-shot. 
The carriage of a cannon. 
Gun-powder. 
A demi-cannon. 
A double cannon. 
A battering cannon. 

A twenty- four pounder. 

Caliber. 

To load. 

To prime. 

To level. 

Military stores. 

To nail up a gun. 

To dismount a gun. 

To fire. 

A cannon shot. 

The train of artillery. 

A culverin. 

A falconet. 

A petard. 

A swivel gun, pederero 3 or 

paterero. 
A bomb. 

A great gun, a bombard. 
A mortar-piece. 
A granade. 
A firelock. 
A pistol. 
A carabine, 
A musket. 
A battfe-ax. 
A lance. 
An halbert. 
A partizan. 
A pike. 
To present the pikes against 

the cavalry. 
Scymeter. 
A sword. 



38 

Disembainhdr a esp&da, 
Pun ho da e spa da, 
Mac a a da espdda, 
Guarnicdo da espada, 
Folka da espada, 
Meter vido a espdda, 

Matar, , 

Ferir, 

Desbaratdr, 

Saquedr, 

Punhal, 

Bayoneta, 

Caldr a bayoneta, 

Capacite, 

Morrido, 

Viseira, 

Gorjdl, or go la, 

Peito de drmas, 

Courdca, 

Espalddr, 

Cossolete, 

Br o quel, . 

Escudo, 

Addga, 

Sdya de mdlha, 

Rey de armas, 

Arduto, - 
General, 

Tenente general, 
S argent o mor de batdlka, 
Sargento, 
Sargento mor, 
Mariscdl, or marichdU 
Mestre de cdmpo general, 
Cor one I, 

Mestre de cdmpo, 
Cor one I de infant aria, 
Official de guerra, 
Mrigadeiro, 
Tenente coronel, 
Ajuddnte de sargento mor, 
Ajuddnte de tenente de mestre 
de cdmpo, 



PORTUGUESE 



To unsheath the sword. 
The handle of a sword. 
The pommel of a sword. 
The hilt of a sword. 
The blade of a sword. 
To clap one's hand on one's 

sword. 
To kill. 
To wound. 
To rout. 
To sack. 
A poniard. 
A bayonet. 
To fix the bayonets. 
A helmet. 
A morrion. 

The vizor of an helmet. 
The gorged 
A breast-plate. 
A cuirass. 
The back-plate. 
A corslet, 
A buckler. 
A shield. 

Dagger, a short sword. 
A coat of mail. 
The king at arms, or king of 

heralds. 
A herald. 
A general. 
A lieutenant general. 
A major general. 
A serjeant. 
Major. 
Marshal. 

Master de camp general. 
Colonel. 
Master de camp. 
Colonel of foot. 
An officer. 
Brigadier. 
Lieutenant-colonel. 
Adjutant. 
Aid de camp. 



GRAM 

Capiiao, 

Posto de capitdo, 

Tenente, 

Corneta, 

Alftres, 

Bandeiras, 

Estanddrte, 

Alferes de cavalaria que trdz 

o estanddrte, 
Pagador, 
Provedor dos mantimentos 

de huma armada, 
Commissario, 
Commissdrio gerdl, 
Engenheiro, 
Quartet ' mestre, 
Cdbo de esquddra, 
Tambor, ou caixa, 
Tambor ou o que tdca tambor, 
Baquetas, 
Cordeis de tambor \ 
Toques do tambor, 
To car o tambor ; 
Alvorada, ou general, 

Mostra, 

Passar mostra, 

Trombeta, 

Trombeteiro, ou trombeta, 

Pifano, 

Soldo, 

So Id ado, 

Soldddo que esta de sentinella, 

Entrar de gudrda, 

Sentinella, 

Render a guar da , sentinellas, 

&c. 
Blocdr, or bloquedr, , 
Infante, or soldddo de $>i t 
Granadeiro, 
Bigodes, 
Dragao, 

Soldddo de.cavdllo, 
Montdr a cavdllo, 



MAR. 39 

Captain. 

Captaincy or captainship. 

Lieutenant. 

Cornet. 

Ensign. 

Colours. 

Standard. 

Standard-bearer. 

Pay-master. 
Purveyor. 

Commissary. 

Commissary-general. 

Engineer. 

Quarter-master. 

Corporal. 

Drum. 

A drummer. 

Drum-sticks. 

Drum-strings. 

The beats of a drum. 

To beat a drum. 

The general, one of the beats 

of the drum. 
Muster. 

To muster, to review forces. 
A trumpet. 
A trumpeter. 
A fifer or fife. 
Wages, or pay for soldiers. 
A soldier. 
Soldier on duty. 
To mqunt, or go upon the 

guard. 
Duty, centinel. 
To relieve the guard, &c . . 

To block up^ 

A foot soldier, 

Grenadier. 

Whiskers. 

Dragoon. 

Trooper, or horse soldier, 

To get on horseback, 



4o 
Apedr-se, 
Guarda da pessoa real, or 

archeiro, 
Couraceiro, 
Mosqueteiro, 
Fuzileiro, 
Alabardeiro, 
Genisero, 

Soldddo armada com langa, 
Soldddo que leva pique, or 

piqueiro, 
Besteiro, ou soldddo quepele- 

ja com besta, 
Pioneiro, 

Mineiro, ou minador, 
Bombardeiro, 
tiro da ar til k aria, ou o 

espago que a bala despa- 

rdda corre ; Alcance, 
Artilheiro, 

A arte da artilharia, 

General de artilharia, 

Voluntdrio, 

Recrutas, 

Explorador, ou cor red or de 

exercito, 
Espia, 
O que leva viveres ao exc'r- 

cito, ou vivandeiro, 
Soldado quefaz correrias, 

Timbale or atabale 9 
Infanteria, 
C aval aria, 
Cavalaria ligeira, 
Vangudrda, 
Corpo de batalha, 
Retagudrda, 
Corpo de reserva, 
Corpo de guarda, 
Piquete, 

A'la, 
Batalhdo, 



PORTUGUESE 

To alight. 
Life-guard-man. 



Cuirassier. 

Musketeer. 

Fuselier. 

Halberdier. 

Janissary. 

A spearman. 

A pikeman. 

Cross-bow man. 

A pioneer. 
Miner. 

A bombardier. 
Gunshot, or the space to 
which a shot can be thrown. 

Matross, also a gunner, or 

cannoneer. 
Gunnery. 

General of the artillery. 
A volunteer. 
Recruits. 
Scout, 

Spy. 
Sutler. 

A marauder, a soldier that 

goes a marauding. 
Kettle-drum. 
The infantry. 
Cavalry. 
Light -horse. 
The vanguard. 
The main body of an army. 
The rear. 

The corps de reserve. 
The corps de guard. 
The piquets of an army, or 

piquet guard. 
The wing of an array. 
Battalion, 



GRAM 

Destacamento, 

Regimento, 

Companhia, 

Esquadrdo, 

Mochzla, 

Bagdgem, ou bagdge, 

Bated ores do cdmpo, 

Aimazem, ou armazem, 

Mural has, 

Amea, ou ameya, 

Parapeito, 

Castillo, 

F6rte, ^ 

Fortaleza, 

Fortificafao, 

Torre, 

Citadella, or cidadella, 

Baludrte, 

Fileira, 

Cortina, 

Meya lua, 

Tronara, 

Terra-pleno, 

Rebelim, ou Revdim, 

Contrascdrpa, 

Barreira, 

Falsabrdga, 

Fosso, 

Guarita, 

Casamdta, [berta, 

Cor re dor s ou estrdda enco- 

Cestoens, 

Estacdda, ou palissdda, 

Reduto, 

At a lay a, 

Mdnta, ou Mantelete, 

Faxina, 

Mina, 

Contramina, 

Fazer vodr a mina, 

Trincheira, 

Abrir as trincheiras, 

Cdmpo, 

Vtver€s t o\x munigocns de boca, 



MAR. 41 

Detachment. 

Regiment. 

A company. 

A squadron. 

Knapsack. 

Baggage. 

Discoverers. 

Magazines. 

Walls. 

A battlement. 

The parapet. 

A castle. 

A fort. 

A fortress. 

Fortification. 

A tower. 

A citadel. 

Bulwark. 

Afile. 

A curtain. 

Half moon. 

A loop-hole. 

A platform of earth. 

A ravelin. 

Counterscarp. 

A barrier. 

A faussbraye. 

A ditch. 

A centry-box. 

A casemate. 

The covered way. 

Gabions. 

A pahs :de. 

A redoubt. 

A watch tower. 

A mantelet, or cover for men 

from the shot. 
Fascines. 
A mine. 
A counter mine. 
To spnng a mine. 
A trench. 

To open the trenches. 
Camp. 
Provisions. 



4* 

Bisonho, 

Bat a I ha, 

Ddr batdlha, 

Escaramuga, 

Sitio, or cerco, 

Quartet, 

Encamisdda, 

Sortida, 

Bater, 

Brecha, 

Pontdfi, 

Escaldda, 

As salt o, 

Dar assdlto, 

Tomdr por assdlto, 

Chamdda, 

Capitular, 

Capitulagdo, 

Trego as, 

Guarnigdo, 

Preboste, 

Preboste-general, 

Leva, , 

Levant dr so Id ados, oxxjazer 

levade gente, 
Levantdr o sitio, 
Levantdr o cdmpo, 
Assent dr o cdmpo, 
Cdmpo voldnte, 
Campdnha, 
Meter -se em campdnha, 

Guerredr, 

Peg a de campdnha, 

Forrdgem, 

Quartets deinverno, 

Dar quartet, 

Aquarteldr-se, 

Marchdr, 

Mar char com bandeiras des- 

pregddas, 
Tocdr a recolher, 
Entregdr huma praca, 
Fila da vangudrda^ 
Fila do C$ntro, 



PORTUGUESE 



A new recruit. 

A battle. 

To give battle. 

A skirmish. 

A siege. 

A quarter. \ 

A camisado. 

A sally. 

To batter. 

A breach. 

A pontoon. 

An escalade. 

An assault. 

To storm. 

To take by storm. 

The chamade. 

To capitulate. 

Capitulation. 

Truce. 

Garrison. 

A provost. 

A provost-marshal. 

Levy. 

To raise men, to levy, or raise 

soldiers. 
To. raise the siege. 
To decamp. 
To pitch one's camp. 
A flying camp. 
A campaign." 
To begin the campaign, to 

open the field. 
To war, to fight. 
A field-piece. 
A forage. 
Winter quarters. 
To give quarter. 
To take quarter. 
To march. 
To march with flying colours. 

To beat tap-tow. 
To surrender a place. 
Front rank. 
Centre rank. 



GRAMMAR. 



43 



Fila da Rectagudrda, 


Rear rank. 


Direita, 


Right. 


Esquerda, 


Left. 


Tempos, 


Motions. 


Exercicio, 


Exercise. 


Fechos, 


Lock. 


Cao ou Ptrro da Arma, 


Cock. 


Cronka, 


Butt. 


A boca da Arma, 


Muzzle. 


cdno, 


The barrel. 


Far eta, 


Ramrod. 


Gatilko, 


Trigger. 


Ptllotao, 


Platoon. 


Batalhao, 


Battalion. 


Ala, 


Wing. 


Devisao, 


Division. 


Linha ou F Heir a, 


Line. 


Cafadores, 


Riflemen. 


Flan co, 


Flank. 


Est ado Mayor, 


StafF. 


Frente, 


Front. 


Infantaria Ligeira, 


Light infantry. 


Regulamentos, 


Regulations. 


Palavras de Cornando. 


Military words of Command* 


Sentido, 


Attention. 


Armas ao Hombro> 


Shoulder arms*. 


Descanfar sobre. as Armas, 


Order arms. 


Meter as Bayonetas, 


Fix bayonets. 


Apresentdr as Armas, 


Present arms. 


Caldr as Bayonetas, 


Charge bayonets. 


Descangdr as Armas, 


Support arms. 


Tirdr as Bayonetas, 


Unfix bayonets. 


Cruzdr as Armas, 


Pile arms. 


Preparer, 


Make ready. 


Carregar, 


Load. 


Tirdr o Cartucho, 


Handle cartridge. 


Escorvdr, 


Prime. 


Tirdr as Varetas, 


Draw ramrods. 


Atuchar o Cartucho, 


Ram down cartridge. 


Fogo, 


Fire. 


Armas a Cora, 


Present. 



44 PORT 

Meter o cartucho, 

Fogo por pellotoes, 

Fogo de Filas, 

Alto, 

Formdr em linka 4 

Fogo obliquo, 

Formdr, 

Marcha, 

Ordem cerrdda, 

Desfildr, 

Columna cerrdda, 

Meia volta d esquerda, 

Voltdr, 

Avanfar, 

Cerrdr as Fileiras, 



UGUESE 
Cast about. 
Firing by platoons. 
File firing. 
Halt. 

To form in line. 
Oblique firing. 
Form. 
March. 
Close order. 
To file. 
, Close column. 
On your left backward wheel 
Wheel. 
Advance. 
Close the ranks. 



Navegacao. 

Navio, 
JNdo, 

JNdo de guirra, 
JSJavio de carga, ou mer- 
cantile 
Navio veleiro, 

Navio ronctiro, 

Gale, 

Galkacdy 

Gale ao, 

Ga/eota, 

Com it re, 

Fragdta, 

Car? dca\ 

Fusta, 

Pindca, 

Bat ca de passdgem. 

Bar co y 

Bdrca, 

Canoa, 

Gondola, 

Esquije, 

Chalupa, ou balandra % 

Chalupa p equina, 



Navigation. 

A ship. 

A large ship. 

A line of battle ship. 

A merchant-ship^ a mer- 
chantman. 

A very good sailer, or a ship 
that sails well. - 

A bad sailer. 

A galley. 

A galleass. 

A gal I ton. 

A galliot, a small galley. 

The boatswain ot a galley. 

A frigate. 

A carrack. 

A foist. 

A pinnace. 

A ferry-boat. 

A boat. 

A bark, great boat. 

A canoe. 

Gondola, a small boat, much 
used in Venice. 

A skiff. 

A sloop. 

A shallop. 



GRAM 

Bergantim, 

Balsa, 

Capitdnia, 

Almirdnta, 

Armada , 

Fro fa, 

Es quadra, 

A bordo, 

Popa, 

Proa, 

Pegas de proa para dar caga 

ao inimzgo, 
Tar tana, 
Bruloie, 
Pa tax o, 
Falua, 

Batel, or bateira, 
Caravela, 
Sorts depatdxo para servzco 

de kuma ndo de guerra, 
Ndo de linha, 
Gudrda costa, 
Galeota da qudl se langam as 

bomb as, 
Navio que serve pdra anddr 

a cor so, 
Corsdrio, 
Hydcte, 

Navio de transporte, 
Ndo da India Oriental, 
Ndo da India Occidental, 
Sorte de embarcagbo hequena 

Holiandeza de hum so mastro 
Navio para levdr carvdo, 
Embarcagoens pequcnas, 
Embarcagdo.ou barco grdndt 
que serve para levdr fa- 
zendas a bordo, 
EmSar cacao grdnde, ou ca- 
ravela, que serve para 
commerctdr peila costa, 
Embarcagdo de avizo t 
Pa quite, 
Bdrco de pescar. 
Ldncka. 



45 



MAR. 

A brigantine, or brig, 

A float. 

The admiral's ship. 

The vice-admiral's ship. 

A fleet, a navy. 

A fleet of merchant ships. 

A squadron, part of a fleet. 

On board. 

The poop, stern, or steerage, 

The prow, or head. 

Chase guns. 

A tartan. 

A fire-ship. 

A patache. 

A felucca. 

A small bark, a wherry. 

A caravel. 

A tender. 

A line of battle-ship. 
A guard-ship. 
Bomb-ketch. 

A cruiser. 

A privateer. 
Yacht. 
A transport. 
East India-man. 
West India-ship. 
A Dutch dogger. 
» 

A collier. 
Small craft. 
A barge, a lighter. 



A coasting vessel. 



Advice-boat. 
Packet boat. 
A fishing- boat 
Boat. 



46 

Remos, 

Pd do renw, 

Sentina, 

Lastro, ou lasto, 

Lastdr, ou langdr lastro ao 

navio, 
Mdstro, or drvore, 
Mdstro grdnde,^ 
Mdstro de mezena, 
Mdstro do traquete, 
Guru pes, 
Gdvea, 

Quilha, 

Verga, ou entena, 

Lai%, ou extremidddes das 

virgas f 
Prdnchas, que cabrem os 

costddos do navio da parte 

defora, 
Vela* 
Vela, mestra, or a vela do 

mastro grdnde, 
Vela da Gdvea, 
Vela do joanete do mdstro 

grdnde, 
Papafigos, 
Mezena, 
Gdta, ou vela de cima da 

mezena, 
Traquete, 
Veldcho, 

Joanete do traquete, 
Cevadeira, 
Vela latina, 
Fazerforqa de vela, 
Mastareos, 

Mastareo da mezena, ou ma- 
star eo da gdta, 
Portinhila, 
Bandeiras, 
Flemmulas ou galhardetes, 



PORTUGUESE 

Oars. 

The blade of the oar. 

The well. 

Ballast. 

To ballast a ship. 



A mast. 

The main mast. 

The mizen mast. 

The fore mast. 

The bowsprit, or boltsprit. 

The round-top, main-top, or 

scuttle of a mast. 
The keel. 
A yard. 
The yard-arm. 

Side-planks, or side of a ship. 



A sail. 

The main sheet. 

The main-top-sail. 
Main-top-gallant-sail . 

The mizen and fore-sail. 

Mizen-sail. 

Mizen-top-sail. 

The fore-sail. 
The fore- top-sail. 
The fore- top -gallant- sail. 
The sprit-sail. 
A shoulder of mutton sail. 
To crowd the sail. 
The topmasts,* or top-gallant- 
masts. 
Mizen-top-mast. 

A port-hole. 
The colours." 
Streamers, pendants. 



% By vela is oftentimes meant the ship itself. 



Ag&lha de mar ear ■, 

Bit a co la, 

Cost ur as do navio, 

Leme, 

Cdna do leme, 

Cuberta, 

Cuberta corrida, 

Escotilhas, 

Escotilhdo, 

Castillo de pSfa, 
Castillo de proa, 
Garrar a ancora, 



Ancora, 

Meter a ancora na lancha, 
ou bote depots de levantdla, 
Ancora de reboque, 
Ancora de esperdn^a, 
U'nkas da ancora, 
Argola da ancora, 
Estdr a ancora a pique, 
Arndrra, 

Picdr, ou coridr as amdrras, 
Sonda., ou prumo, 
Cutelos, 
Mare', 
Bosina, 
Prepardr hum navio % de ve- 

lasy cor das, &c. 
Piloto, 
Escrivdo, 
Pilotdgem, 
Carta de mar ear, 
Capitdo, 
Capiido teninte, 
Contramestre, 
Marinheiro, 
Camarote, 

Marinheiro que he camardda 
oupertence ao mesmo rancho 
Torment a, 
Borrdsca f 
Bondnca, 
Calmaria. 



GRAMMAR. 

The mariner's compos. 

Bittacle. 

The seams of a ship. 

Helm, or rudder. 

The whip, or whip-staff. 

Deck. 

Flush fore and aft. 

The hatches ; scuttles. 

A room by the hatches, 

keep the provisions. 
The hind castle. 
The fore castle. 
To drive ; or when 

drags her anchor. 
The anchor. 
To boat the anchor. 



to 



ship 



A kedger. 

Sheet anchor. 

The flooks of an anchor. 

The ring of an anchor. - 

Is for theanchor to be a-peak, 

A cable. 

To cut the cablae. 

The sounding lead. 

Studding sails. 

The tide. 

A speaking trumpet. 

To rig a ship. 

Pilot, or steersman. 
A purser, 
Pilotage. 
Sea-chart. 
A captain. 
First lieutenant. 
A boatswain. 
A sailor. 
A cabin. 
A messmate. 

A tempest. 
A storm. 
Fair weather. 
Calm. 



48 PORTU 

Vento em popa, 

Navio arras ado em popa, 

Derrota, 

Alar a bolina, 

lr pela bolina, 

No da bo Una, 

Barlavento, 

Ganhdr a barlavento, 

Barlaventedr, ou deitdr a 
barlavento, 

Sotavento, 

Escovens, 

Escotas, 

Veldme, cordas, e o mats que 
he necessdrio para pre- 
parer hum navio, 

Cor da, 

Enxdrcias, 

Arribdr, 

Bombordo, 

Estibordo, 

L6, 

Meter de 16, . 

Bomb a, 

Ddr a bomb a, 

Bdlde para deitdr ago a na 

bomba, 
Escuma que sake da bomba 

depois de ter tirddo a 

ago a, 
Navio, cujadgoase naopode 

tirar com a bdmba, 
Manga de couro por Snde 

sane a agoa da bomba, 
Brdfo da bomba, 
parol, 
Vento, 



GUESE 

The wind full a-stern, a fore-* 

wind. 
A ship that sails before the 

wind. 
The course, or way of a ship. 
To sharp the main bowling, 

to haul up the bowling. 
To tack upon a wind, sail 

upon a bowling. 
The bowling knot. 
Windward. 
To get the wind. 
To ply to windward. 

Leeward. 
Hawsers. 
Tacks. 

Tackle, or tackling, the rig- 
ging of a ship. 

A rope. 

Shrouds. 

To put into a harbour. 

Larboard. 

Starboard. 

Loof. 

To loof, or keep the ship 

nearer the wind. 
A pump. 
To pump, 
Pump-can. 

Pump-suck. 



A ship that is stoaked. 

Pump-dale. 

The pump handle. 

Light, lantern, or lighthouse. 

Wind. 



GRA 

Rosa da Agulha, ou dos 
Ventos. 

Norte, 

Norte £a nordeste, 

Nor nordeste, 

Nordeste £a norte, 

Nordeste, 

Nordeste £a teste, 

Les nordeste, 

Leste, £a nordeste, 

Leste, 

Leste 4 a tf sueste, 

Les sueste, 

Sueste 4* a leste, 

Sueste, 

Sueste, 4* a sul, 

Susueste, 

Sul 4 a a sueste, 

Sul, 

Sul £ a sudoeste, 

Susudoeste, 

Sudoeste 4* sul, 

Sudoeste, 

Sudoeste 4* a oeste, 

Oes sudoeste, 

Oeste 4 a a sudoeste, 

Oeste, 

Oeste 4 a a nor oeste, 

Oes noroeste, 

Nor oeste 4* a oeste, 

Noroeste, 

Noroeste 4 s a norte, 

Nor noroeste, 

Norte 4 a a noroeste, 

Vento travessao,outravessia, 
Dar a embarcafao a travez, 
Pairdr, 

Esporao, 

Co Ike r hum cdbo, 

Largdr mais cabo, 

Abrzr ago a, 

Fazer agodda, 

ArpaB, 



M M A R. 49 

The Fly of the Mariner's 
Compass. 

North. 
N. by E. 
N. N. E. 
N. E. by N. 
N. E. 

N. E. by E. 
E. N.E. 
E. byN. 
East. 
E. by S. 
E. S. E. 
S. E. by E. 
S. E. 

S. E. by S. 
S. S. E. 
• S. by E. 
South. 
S. byW. 
S. S. W. 
S. W. by S. 
S. W. 

S. W. by W. l 
W. S. W. 
W. by S. 
West. 
W. by N. 
W. N. W. 
N. W. by W. 
N. W. 

N. W. by N. 
N. N. W. 
N. by W. 

Contrary wind. 

To hull. 

To ply to and again in one's 

station. 
Beak. 

To coil a cable. 
To pay more cable. 
To leak, or spring a leak. 
To take in fresh water. 
A grapple; 
D ' 



$<<> PORT 

Arpdr hum ndvio, 

Fatexa, 

Peda$o de lona bredda que se 
poem ao redor do masto t 
das bombas para que a 
dgoa nao penUre, 

Passador, 

Cerda com que seprinde o Vote, 
ou lancha d pdpa do navio, 
Apito, 
Abadernas, 
Abita, 
Emprodr, 



Guindr o navzo, 

Parte superior, ou metis aha 

dapopa de hum navio t 
Apagafanoes, 
Arreigddas, 
Brides, 
£arredouras 9 
Bartidouro-, . 
Bastdrdos, 
Bigota, 
Botalos, 
Bracear 9 
Bfagos, 

Bragueiro, or vtrguetro, 
Branddes, 
Bucdrdas, 
Cacholas, 
Caddste, 
Caderndl, 

Cavcrnas, 

Colkeddres, 

Compassdr hum navw, 

Cossduros, 

Crdca, 

Estdr hum ndvio lancado d 

bdnda, 
Cabrestaiitc, 
Bar cdfa y 



UGUESE 

To grapple a ship. 

Grapple. 

Tarpaulin. 



A fidd, or pin of iron to ope* 

the strands of ropes, 
Boat rope, or gift-rope, 

A boatswain's call. 

Nippers. 

Bits. 

To steer right forward, to 
turn the prow straight for- 
ward. 

To yaw or make yaws. 

Thetafferel. 

Leech-lines. 

Puttocks. 

Bunt lines. 

Bow-studding-sails* 

Boat's skit. 

Parrels. 

A dead-eye. 

Studding-sail-booms, 

To brace. 

Braces. 

The rudder's rope. 

Back-stays. 

Breast-hooks. 

Cheeks. 

Stand-post* 

A large block with more than 

one shive. 
The floor-timbers. 
Lines of the shrouds. 
To trim a ship. 
Trucks. 
The foulness of the ship's 

bottom. 
Is for a ship to heel. 

The capstan. 
To chase. 



GRAMMAR. 



£* 



Curvas, 

Mesas da guarnicao, 

Desdstre, 

Enborndes, 

Porao, 

Mdca, 

Co rive z, 

Camarate do cirurgiao, 

Erete, 

Cdrga, 

O'rdem que o capitao recebe 

para ddr a vela, 
A accdm de imbarcdr se, 
Desembdrque, 
Embargo, 
Ancoragem, 
Batdlha naval, 
Caravela mexeriqueira, ou de 

espia, 
Arriar, ou arrear, 
Arredr as velas, 
Arredr bandeira, 
Levantar ferro y levdr dnco- 

ras, levar ferro, levar-se, 

ou levar 9 
Leva, 

Boledr a pica, 

Pega de leva, 

Rebocdr, ou levdr de reb6que > 

Mazer costuras, 

Passdgem, 

Passageiro, 

Vidgem, 

Navio cujo capitao tern cartas 

de repres alias, 
Querenar hum navio, 
Brear as costuras do navio, 
Dar a costa, 
Solucdr a nao, 

Naufragdr, 

Naufrdgio, 

Patrao t q\x mistrc de ndo, 



The knees. 

Chain-wales. 

Boat's skit. 

Scupper-holes, 

The hold of a ship. . 

Hammock. 

Deck or quarter-deck. 

Cockpit. 

Freight. 

Cargo. 

Sailing orders.' 

Embarkation. 

Landing. 

Embargo. 

Anchorage. 

Naval battle* 

A ship for espial, or look out, 

To veer. 
To strike sail. 
To strike the flag. 
To weigh anchor. 



The action of weighing or 
taking up the anchor. 

To move a gun towards star- 
board or larboard. 

The signal gun. 

To tow. 

To splice. 

Passage. 

Passenger. 

Voyage. 

Letters of marque. 

To careep a ship. 
To pay the seams of a ship. 
To run a-ground or on shore. 
Is for a ship to roll, or to • float 

in rough water. 
To suffer a wreck, to be 

wrecked. 
Shipwreck. 
Shipmaster. 



5* PORTU 

Carpenteiro de navio s, 

Estaleiro, 

Embarcdr, 

Embarcdr, 

Grumete, 

Rapaz que serve como migo 

do navio, 
Rapdz que serve ao capitao, 
Calafdte, 

Calajetdr hum navio, 
Calafeto, 
Arsenal, 6u ribeira das naos, 

Emmastear hum navio, 

Remdr, 
Remador, 
For gad o, 
. Despenseiro, 

Marinheiros, e toda a Sutra 
gent e que per ten ce ao navio, 
Chusma, 
Guarmgao da ndo, 

sobrecdrga do navio, 

Balestilha, 

Quadrdnte, 

Out ante, 

De re, ' 

Paravante, 

Situafao de huma costa, ilha, 

&c. a respeito de qnalquer 

outro lugdr, 
Quarentena, 
Baliza, 
Larga, 
Amarar, 
Cagar a vela, 

Cacear hum navio, 



Langdr hum navio do mar, 
Fugir, 



GUESE 

Shipwright. 

Stocks. 

To ship. 

To go aboard, to take ship. 

ping. 
The meanest sort of sailors ; 

or servant to the sailors. 
Ship-boy. 

A cabin-boy. 

A calker. 

To calk a ship. 

Oakham. 

An arsenal, a store-house, 

dock-yard. 
To fit a ship, or vessel, with 

masts. 
To row. 
Rower. 
Galley-slave. 
Steward. 
The crew of a ship. 

Crew of galley slaves. 
Marines, soldiers who serve 

on board of ships. 
Supercargo. 
Cross-staff. 
Quadrant. 
Hadley's quadrant. 
Aft. 
Fore. 
The bearing. 



Quarantine. 

Sea mark. 

Large. 

To bear off. 

To turn the sail to the wind 
side. 

It is said of a ship that is hur- 
ried away from her course 
by strong winds, tides, &c» 

To launch a ship. 

To bear away. 



GRAM 

Entrar com vinto fresco e 

bom no porto, 
Bordo, 

BbrdO) ou bdnda, 
Navzo de alto bordo, 
Cdfa, 

Presa, ou tomadia, 
Estar de vergaddlto, 
Ventos de moncao, ougeroes, 
Anddr de conserva, 

Dar, oufazir hum bordo, 



MAR. 

To bear in the harbour. 



5% 



Estar d cap a, ou por-se a 
cap a, 

Do Commercio, e do que lhe 
pertence. 

Conta, 

Conta de venda, 

Fazer huma conta, 

Pedzr contas, 

Bar a conta , 

Conta cor rente, 

Dinhetro de contddo, 

Fundos Publicos, 

que negocea em comprdr e 

vender acfoens, 
Balldngo, 
Fdrdo, 
Banc 0, 
Banaueiro, 
Que'bra, 

Falido, ou quebrddo, 
Ajuste, ou concerto, 
Troca, 
Portador, * 
Lancador, 
que lanca mdis, 
Letra de cdmbio, 
Negocidr huma letra de 

cdmbio, 
Conta, 
Partida, 
Cenhtcimentfe 



Tack. 

Broadside. 

First rate man of war. 

Chace. 

Prize, or capture. 

To stand for the offing. 

Trade winds. 

To keep company together, 

to sail under a convoy. 
To tack the ship, or tack 

about, or to bring her head 

about. 
To lie by at sea, to back the 

sails. 

Of Trade, and of Things re- 
lating to it. 

Account. 

Account of sales. 

To cast up an account. 

To Call to an account. 

To pay on account. 

Account current. 

Ready money. 

Stocks. 

Jobber. 

Balance. 
Bale. 
Bank. 
Banker. 
Bankruptcy. 
Bankrupt. 
Bargain* 
Barter. 
Bearer. 
Bidder. 
Out bidder. 

Bill of exchange, a draught, 
To negotiate a bill of ex- 
change. 
Bill. 
Parcel. 
Bill of lading. 



54 PORT-U 

Escritura de ohrigagao, 
Gudrdalivros, ou o que em 

huma cdsa de negocio tern 

a seu cargo os livros, 
Occupacao, or negocio, 
■Comprador, 
Dinhei.ro, 
Forte, ou carreto, 
Caxiiro, ou o que guar da a 

caixa 9 
Cento, 
Certidao, 
Cam bio, 
Freguez, 
G est os, 
Bardto, 
Cdro, 

Recibo da alfdndega, 
Commissao x 
Mercancia, 
Compromisso, 
Consignagao, 
Consumo, 
Conteudo, 
Contrdto, 
Corr'espondencia 9 
Correspondente, 
Preco, 
Alfdndega, 

Gudrdas a" alfdndega, 
Gudrdas que estao vigidndo 

ate que os navios esteja'o 

desearregddos, 
Feitoria, 
Escritorio, 
Credit o, 
Acredor, 
Cor rente, 
Costume, 
Data, 

Contratador, 
Trdfego, ou negocio, 
Divida, 
Devcdor, 

Dinheiro dcsembolcddo, 
Desconto, 



GUESE 

Bond, engagement. 
Book-keeper. 



Business. 

Buyer. 

Cash. 

Carriage. 

A cashier, or cask keeper • 

Cent. 

Certificate. 

Change, exchange. 

Chap, chapman, or customer. 

Charges. 

Cheap. 

Dear. 

Clearance, or cocket. 

Commission. 

Commodity. 

Compromise. 

Consignment. 

Consumption. 

Contents. 

Contract. 

Correspondence. 

Correspondent, 

Price, rate. 

Custom-house. 

Custom-house officers. 

Tidesmen, or tide waiters. 



Factory, settlement, 

Counting-house* 

Credit. 

Creditor. 

Current. 

Custom. 

Date. 

Dealer. 

Dealing, traffick. 

Debt. 

Debtor. 

Disbursement. 

Discount. 



GRA 

£xtrdcto, ou copia, 

Deposito, 

Direitos qne a alfandega tor- 
na a dar a os exportadores 
de certasfazendas,queja os 
tinkao pago na supozifao 
de serempara consumo in- 
terior : servindo isto para 
animar o commercio, 

A credo r imp or tun o 9 

Copia, 

Cor re tor, 

Corretor de letras de cdmbio 9 

Assegurador, ou segurador, 

Endosso, 

Endossador, 

Abarcador, 

Levantaminto de prego, 

Entrada ox ass into no registo, 

Equivalents > 

Exigencia, 

Despeza, 

Extracfao, or exportacao, 

Extorsao, 

Feitor, or commissario, 

Feira, 

Fio, ou ardme no qual se en- 

fiaoospapeis n um escritorio, 

Qudtro, cinco t &.c.por cento, 

Fretdr, 

Erete, 

que fr eta humnavio, 

Cabeddl, ou quantia de din- 
keiro destinddo para algu* 
ma cousa $ 

Gdnho, 

que gdnha, 

Fazendas ou ejfeitos> 

Estrea, 

Escritura, or lettra % 

Entrdda, 

lmportador, 

Renda, 

Interesse, 

Communicafaofiu commtrcio 



MMAR. 

Docket. 

Deposite. 

Draw-back. 



SS 



Dun. 

Duplicate. 

A broker. 

Ex change- broker • 

Insurer or under-writer. 

Endorsement. 

Endorser. 

Engrosser. 

Enhancement. 

'Entry. 

Equivalent. 

Exigency. 

Expence. 

Export, or exportatioai 

Extortion. 

Factor. 

Fair. 

File for papers. 

Four, five, &c. per cent, 

To freight a ship. 

Freight. 

A freighter. 

Fund. 



Gain, or profit, 
Gainer. 
Goods, effects. 
Handsel. 
Hand-writing. 
A custom for imported com- 
modities. 
Importer. 
Income. 
Interest. 
Intercourse , 



56 PORTU 

Jnventdrio, 

Insuffiaencia, ou fdlta de 

meyos para pag&r, 
Facttira, 
Arras, 

Escritura de arrendamento, 
Arrendador, 
Livro de razao, 
Empristimo, 
Dinkeiro emprestddo, 
Carta, 

Sobrescrito da carta, 
Fechdr huma carta, 
Fechdr huma carta com sinete, 
Mai a em que o cor re o trdz as 

cartas, 
Hypotheca, 
Acredor hypothecario, 
que hypotheca, 
Fiador, 
Pagamento, 
Fdlta de pagaminio t 
Escrito de divida, 
Dono, 
Pacote, 
Serapilheira^ 
Br ah ante, 
Md$o de cartas, 
Companheiro de alguim no 

wgocio, ou socio, 
Soeieddde, ou companhia no 

negocio, 
Pmhor, 
Contrdto do seguro de mer- 

cancids, 
Seguro, 
Segurdr, 

Protestdr huma letra, 
Accitdr huma litra, 
Protesto* 
Sacdr huma letra, 
Correoaondese tdngao as cartas 
Correo que leva cartas, 
, Porte de cartas, 
Premio ou dinheiro que st 

pdga aos seguradores, 



GUESE 

Inventory. 

Insolvency. 

Invoice. 

Jointure. 

Lease. 

Lessee. 

Ledger-book. 

Loan. 

Money lent. 

Letter. 

The direction of a letter. 

To make or close up a letter. 

To make and seal up a letter. 

Mail. 

Mortgage. 

Mortgagee. 

Mortgager. 

Bail. 

Payment. 

Non-payment. 

Note, or promissory note. 

Owner. 

Pack, a truss. 

Packcloth, wrapper. 

Packthread- 

Packet of letters. 

Partner. 

Partnership. 

Pawn, or pledge. 
Policy of insurance. 

Insurance; 

To insure. 

To protest a bill. 

To accept a bill. 

Protest. 

To draw a bill. 

Post-office. 

Post-man, or letter carrier, 

Postage. 

Premium. 



GRAMMAR, 


Dinheiro que se pdga aos 


Primage. 


marinheiros por terem 




carregddo o navio, 




Capital, 


Principal, or capital. 


Per das e ddnos, 


Losses and damages. 


Importdncia, 


Proceed. 


lmportdncia liquida, 


Neat proceed. 


Promessa, 


Promise. 


Bens, 


Property. 


Pontualiddde, 


Punctuality. 


Compra, 


Purchase. 


Recibo, 


Receipt. 


Recdmbio, 


Re- ex change. 


Arbitro, ou louvddo, 


Referee or umpire. 


Louvamento, ou arbitrie, 


Reference. 


Regatao, 


Regrater. 


Quitacdo, 


Release. 


Remessa, 


Remittance. 


Venda das cousaspor mi6do, 


Retail. 


como fdzem os mercador es 




de retdlho, 




Mercador de retdlho y 


Retailer. 


Riquezas, ' 


Riches, wealth. 


Venda, 


Sale. 


Padrdo, 


A pattern. 


Amostra, 


Sample. 


Sinete, 


Seal. 


Ldcre, 


Sealing-wax. 


Ajustaminto de contas, 

Loja, 

Mercador que tern loja, 


Settlement of accounts. 


Shop. 
Shop-keeper. 


Livro em que o mercador de 


Shop-book. 


loja tern suas contas, 




Contrabandista, 


Smuggler. 


Fazenda de contrabdndo. 


Contraband, or prohibited 




goods, goods smuggled, or 


Fazir contrabdndo, 


run* 
To run, to smuggle prohibited 




goods. 


Modelo, ou fill dos pezos e 


Standard measure. 


medidas puhlicas, 


, 


Armazem or Almazim, 


Warehouse. 


Sobrescrevente, 


Subscriber. 


Sobscripsdo, 


Subscription. 


Tdra, 


Tare. 


Fazenda roirn. 


Trash of goods. 



&. 



PORTUGUESE 



Risco, 

Juros, 

V'so, j ; 

Usurdrio. 

Vsura, 

Obrea, 

Mercancias* 

Valor, 

Avar la, 

Direitos, 

Tributo, ou contribuigao, 

Tdxas, 

Sz'sa, 

Siseiro, 

Cdes, ~ . 

Direito que se pdga, por des- 

embarcarfazendas no cdes, 
Collector do mhmo direito, 

ou tributo, 
Dizimos, 

Dizimador, ou dizimeiro, 
Louca vidrdda, sem ser da 

China, 
Mercador de atacddo, 
Vindaquesejazporpartidas % 

Da Moeda, ou Dinheiro Por- 
tuguez. 

This mark * is prefixed 

* Real, 
JDes re'is, 

Vintem, 

Tostdo, ou 5 vintems, 

4 Tost Sens, ou hum crusado, 

Crusado novo, ou 24 vintens, 

8 Tostoens, 

Hum quarto, de ouro, ou 12 

tostoens, 
* • Milreis, ou 10 tostoens, 
16 Tostoens, 
lAeya moeda de ouro, 
3,200, ou 3* tostoens, 
Moeda de ouro de 4,800, 
Pe'ga de 6,400, 
Dobrao ou 1 2,800, 



Rick. 
Interest. 
Usance. 
Usurer- 
Usury. 
Wafer. 
Wares. 

Worth, or value 
Average. 

Duties or custom* 
.Cess, tribute. 
Taxes. 
Excise. 
Exciseman. 
Wharf. 
Wharfage. 

Wharfinger. 

Tithes. 

Tithe-gatherer. 
Dutch ware. 

Wholesale dealer. 
Wholesale. 



Of the Portuguese Coin, 

to the imaginary money* 

A ree, equal to ^^d. 
10 rees, *£</. 
A vintin, l^d, 
A testoon, 6^d. 
A crusade, 2s. 3d. 
A new crusade, 2j. 8jdf. 
8 testoons, 4J. 6d, 
12 testoons, 6s, gd. 

A mil ree, 5 s. y^d. 
16 testoons, gs. 
Half moidore, 13J. 6d* 
32 testoons, i8j-. 
A moidore, 1/. ys. 
Joanese, 1/. 16s, 
128 testoons, g/. I2J. 



GRAMMAR, 



C O L L E C 9 A O A COLLECTION 



DE 



Adagics Portugueses. 



OF 



Portuguese Proverbs. 



A A'goa o dd, a dgoa o leva, "\K7 



Na dgoa envolta phca o pes- 
cador, 

Estdcomo o ptixe n 9 a go a, 
Trazer a dgoa para o moinho, 
Levdr dgoa ao mar % 
As ago as est do bdixas, 
que nao pode al sir, dives 

sqffrer, 
Come como hum aldrve. 
Meter a pdiha na albdrda, 
Mazao tostddo antes morto 

que cangddo, 
Huma disgrdga ale dug a a 

Sutra, 
Estar na aldea, e naa ver as 

edsas, 



Quern trabdlha % tern alfdya,: 
Fdllo-Jhe em dtkos, responde- 

me em bugalhos, 
Em tempo nevdda o dlho vale 

hum cavdllo, 



HAT is got over the 
devil's back will be 
spent under his belly ; also 
lightly come, lightly go. 

To fish in troubled waters, 
(to make a benefit of pub- 
lic troubles.) 

He lives in clover. 

To bring grist to the mill. 

To carry coals to Newcastle. 

He or she is at a low ebb. 

What can't be cured'must be 
endured. 

He eats like a thresher. 

To cheat, to impose, upon. 

A dark sorrel horse will die 
before he'll jade. 

One mischief draws on ano- 
ther. 

We say ; you can't see wood 
for trees ; or to be like the 
butcher that looked for his 
knife when he had it in his 
mouth. 

He that works has furniture. 

I talk of chalk and you of 
cheese. 

Garlick in the foggy weather. 
is as good as a horse ; it 
means that garlick is a 
good defence for travellers 
againn dampness and cold 
weather. 



60 P'ORTU 

Tezo como hum alho, 



Sua alma, sua palma, 
Na almoeda tern a bdrba 
queda, 



Pagdr os altos de vasio, 

Quern dma a beltrdo, dma a 

seu cao, 
Cdda anal dma seu semeU 

hdnte, 
Tambim os ameagddos cbmem 

pdo, 

Contas de perto, e amigos de 

longe, 
Nao se deve perder a amizade 

por da cd ' aquella pdlha, 
Tarn bom he Pedro como seu 

dmo, 
Furtdr o carnei'ro, '"e dar os 

pes pello amor de Deos< 
Nem hum dedofaT, mao, nem 

huma andorinha verdo, 

Levdr palhas, e ardlhos, 
Na ariauberta o jus to pecca, 

De hum argueiro^faztr hum 

cavalle'iro, 
Com drte t e com engdno se 

vive miyo anno ; com en- 

gdno, e com arte se vive a 

Sutra parte, 
Quern a boa arvore se chega, 

boa sdmbra o cob re, 

A'sno morto, cevdda ao rdbo, 

A'sno que tern fame, cdrdof 
seme, 



GUESE 

As stiff as garliclc ; that is a 
healthy, strong, robust per- 
son. 

As you brew, even so bake. , 

At a sale keep your beard on 
your chin still ; that is, let 
not your beard wag too 
fast in bidding, lest you 
overbid and repent. 

To have but little or no sense 
at all. 

Love me, love my dog. 

Like will to like, or like 

loves to like. 
Threatened folks eat bread ; 

we say, threatened folks 

live long. 
Even reckonings make long 

friends. 
An inch breaks no squares. 

Like master, like man. 

We say, to steal a goose and 

give the giblets in alms. 
One swallow does not make 

summer. Una kirundo non 
facit ver, says Horace, 
To sweep stakes. 
That is, it is opportunity that 

makes the thief. 
We say to make mountains 

of mole-hills. 
That is, all a man's life is a 

cheat. 



That is, he that relies on good 
worthy people, reaps a be- 
nefit. 

A day after the fair, or after 
meat, mustard 

We say, hungry dogs will cat 
dirty pudding. 



GRAM 

Sopa de mel nao se fez para 

a boca do dsno, 
Mais quiro dsno que me leve, 

que cavdllo que me derrube^ 

Mais val ma avenga que boa 

sentenga, 
Quern nao se aventura, nao 

an da a ca vdllo t nememm ula 
Nao deites azeite nofogo, 
Boca nao admittefiador, 
Da mdo a boca se perde a 

sopa, 
Em boca cerrdda nao entra 

mo tea. 
Quern tern boca vdi a Roma, 



Pilla boca m'orre o peixe, 

Cdda bofarinkciro louva seus 

alfinetes, 
Quern tern qudtro, egdsta cin- 

co t nao ha mister bolsa 

nem bolsinho, 
Cavdrvdipella vinhaporonde 

vdi a may, vdi aftlha, 
Matdr dous coelhos de. huma 

cajad&da, 
Quern cdnta, seus males es- 

pdnta. 



Deitdr a cdpa a touro, 



Viva el rey y e da ed a ddpa % 



MAR. 61 

Good things are not fit for 

fools. 
Better be an old man's dar- 
ling, than a young man's 

warling. 
It is better to agree at any 

rate, than go to law. 
Nothing venture, nothing 

have. 
Do not throw oil into tie fire. 
The belly has no ears. 
Much falls between he cup 

and the lip. 
A close mouth catctes no 

flies. 
That is, a man may go any 

where, if he has language 

to speak for himself and 

ask his way. 
Much talking brings much 

.woe. 
Every man thinks his own 

geese swans. 
He that hath four and spends 

five hath no need of a 

purse. 
Like father like son. 

We say, to kill two birds 
with one stone. 

The person who sings makes 
easy his misfortunes ; that 
is, singing causes him not 
to reflect on it so much as 
he otherwise would. 

To throw one's cloak at the 
bull; that is, to venture 
all a man has to save his 
life. 

Let the king live, and give 
me the cloak ; that is spo- 
ken of persons who, under 
a pretence of authority, 
rob and plunder other peo- 
ple, and at the same time 



6z 



PORT 



Anddi de cdpa cahida, 

cdo com r diva de sen do no 
tram, 

Quern com cdens se langa, com 

pul t [a$i se levdnta, 
A cdrie de lobo dente de cdo, 



Quern jaz cdsa na prdca, 
hurts dizem que he aha, 
Sutros que he baixa, 



A cavdllo dado nao Uhes o 

dente, 
Quern qutr cavdllo semtdcha, 

sem elle se dcka, 
Na terra dos cegos, o torto 

he rey, 
Cobra boafdma, e deita*te„a 

dormir, 
Fazer as contas sem a hos- 

peda, 
Do contddo come o lobo % 



Em tdsa de ladrdo naojalles 
em corda. 



Do couro Ike sdhem as cor- 
' re as, 



UGUESE 

pretend they are doing jus - 
tice to the power reposed 
in their hands. 

To be behind-hand in the 
world. 

A mad dog bites his own mas- 
ter ; there is no trusting to 
madmen, ^people in a rage. 

We say, iie with beggars and 
you will get fleas. 

That is, to return railing for 
railing ; or, as our modern 
proverb says, give him a 
Rowland for his Oliver ; 
the Latins say, par pari 
referre. 

That is, a man in public bu- 
siness can't please every 
body ; or as Solon says : 
'tis rare that statesmen can 
all parties please. 

Never look in the mouth of 
a gift horse. 

'Tis a good horse that never 
stumbles. 

In a country of blind men, he 
that has one eye is the king. 

When your name is up, you 
may lie a-bed till noon. 

To. reckon without the hos- 
tess ; or as we say, the host. 

The wolf eats of what is 
counted ; that is, thieves 
will steal, though they 
know it will be missed, 
much more if they think 
it will not. 

You should not mention a 
halter to any whose rela- 
tions or friends have suf- 
fered by it ; that is, no man 
should be hit in the teeth 
of his disgrace. 

The thongs come out of his 
skin ; that is, he pays for it. 



GRAMMAR. 



63 



Cortdr vestido confcrme To cut one's coat according 



panrtOy 

Cria corvo, tirdrvos-hd 
clho t 



Tdnta culpa tern ladrdo 

como consentidor, 
Dddivas quebrdntao pc'nhas, 



Melh6r hefazir de bdlde que 
estdr debdlde, 

jyeitdr azeite nofogo t 

Nao he demo tarn feio 
como pintao, 

Primeiro sao denies , que pa- 
rentes, 



Ld vai a lingo a, onde dinte 

grita, 
Qu&ndo cuidas meter dinte 

em seguro, topardz duro, 



Ddr com a lingoa nos dentes t 

Quern nao f alia t nao ouve 
Deos, 

Ventura te de Dios,filho; 
que saber pouco te bdsta, 



Cdda qual por si, e Deos por 

tddos, 
Mm bans dias, boas ebras, 



to the cloth. 

It is said of a person that, be- 
ing received in distress, de- 
frauds or grows too great 
for him that entertained 
him. 

The receiver is as bad as the 
thief. 

Gifts break rocks'; that is, 
kindness overcomes the 
hardest hearts ; and bribes 
or presents corrupt the 
most resolved. 

It is better to work for no- 
thing than to be lazy and 
do nothing at all. 

To makebad worse. Horace 
says, Oleum adder e camino. 

We say, the lion is not so 
fierce as his picture. 

We say, near is my coat, but 
nearer is my skin, &c. Te- 
rence says, Heus proximus 
, sum egomei mihi. 

To scratch where it itches. 

Harm watch, harm catch, 
Horace says, 
-—etfragili queer ens Mi- 

dere dentem, 
— Offendet solid 

To contradict one's self, to 
belie. 

A man may hold his tongue 
in an ill time : also spare to 
speak and spare to speed. 

God give you good luck, 
child, for a little learning 
will serve your turn ; be- 
cause it is fortune that raises 
men more than merit. 

Every one for himself, and 
God for all. 

The better days (he better 



64 P O R T U 

Para dia de sao cerejo, 



Tudo p'ode o dinheirc, 

homem propoem, e Deos 

dispoem, 
Dor me como hum argandz, 
A bom entendedor poucas pa- 

Idvras bastaot 
Gdto escaldado da dgoa fria 

ha medo, 
No escudelldr verds quern te 

que'r bem 9 ou mat, 

Esmolou sao Matthcus, es- 
molou para os sens, 

Nao ha mclh'or espelho que o 
amigo velhot 



Nem estopa com tigoens, nem 
mother com vardens, 



Falldr sem cuiddr t he atirar 
sem afrontar, 



Fdlla pouco e bem, terte hdo 
por alguem, 



Quern a fdma tern per did a % 
morto dnda nesta vida, 

A quern md fdma tern, nem 
accompdnhes, nem digas 
bem 9 

Aproveitador de farelos t 
esperdicador dejarinha, 



Naofdzem boafarinha, 



GUESE 
deeds. 

We say, when two Sundays 
come together, that is ne- 
ver. 

Money governs the world. 

Man proposes, and God dis-. 
poses. 

He sleeps like a dormouse. 

A word to the wise is enough. 

We say, a burnt child dreads 
the fire. 

That is, people's affections 
are discovered by their li- 
berality. 

Charity begins at home. 

There is no better looking- 
glass than an old friend; 
that is, such a one will not 
flatter a man, but tell him 
the truth. 

That is, conversation of wo- 
men is dangerous ; it is not 
good jesting with edged 
tools. 

To let one's tongue run, with- 
out reflecting on what one 
says, is like shooting at 
random. 

Talk little and well, and 
you'll be counted some- 
body; that is, you'll be 
esteemed. 

He who has lost his reputa- 
tion is as good as dead 
whilst living. 

Do not keep company with, 
not be fond, of one that 
has an ill name. 

That is, one that saves at the 
spiggot and lets it run out 
at the bung ; also, penny 
wise and pound foolish. 

They can't set their horses 



Quern ma afaz nellajdz, 
Agora da pao e mel, e depots 

da r a pao efel, 
Lingoa doce como fnel, e co- 

ragdo amargoso comofel, 
Batir o ferro qudndo est a. 

quente, 

Quem com ferro mat a, a 

ferro mo'rre. 
Carregddo de ferro, carre- 

gddc de mido, 



Quem tefazfesta, naosoendo, 
fazer, ou te quer engandr, 
ou te ha mister, 

Nad fies, nem profies, nem 
arrendes, vivirds intre as 
gentes, 

Mijdr claro, dar huma fig a 

ao medico, 
Se nao bebe na tavirnafolga 

nella, 
Achou forma para o seu sa- 

pdto, 

Nao sejdisforneiro setendes 
a Qabtfa de manteiga, 



A'o kemem ousddo afortuna 

I he dd a mdo, 
Roup a defrancezes, 

Cahir da frigideira nas bra- 

sas, 
Dizem osfilhos do soalheiro, 

e que ouvem dizir a sius 



GRAMMAR. 65 

together. 
Self do self harm. 

After sweet meat comes sour 
sauce. 

An honey tongue, an heart 
of gall. 

To beat the iron whilst it is 
hot, or, to make hay whilst 
the sun slimes. 

He who kills by the sword 
dies by the sword. 

He who is loaded with iron 
is loaded with fear ; that 
is, he who loads himself 
with armour and weapons 
against danger, discovers 
he is much afraid. 

He that makes more of you 
than he is wont to do, ei- 
ther designs to cheat you, 
or stand in need of you. 

Do not trust, nor contend, 
nor hire, and you'll live 
among men ; that is, you'll 
live peaceably. 

Tell the truth and shame the 
devil. 

We say he does not smoke 
but smokes. 

He has found a last to his 
shoe; that is, he has met 
with his match. 

Do not undertake to be a 
baker if your head is made 
of butter ; that is, do not 
take upon you any busi- 
ness you are unfit for. 

Fortune favours the bold. 



Things left at random, or 
exposed to be pillaged. 

To fall out of the frying-pan 
into the fire. 

Little pitchers have great 

ears. 
£ 



66 



PORTUGUESE 



pays dofumeiro, 
Perto vat o/6mo da ckdma, 

Quern huma viz furta, Jicl 
nunca, 

Mai vdi ao fdso qudndo a 
bdrba n&a dnda em cima, 



Cdda terra com seu dso, cdda 

roca com seujuso, 
Qudntas cabecas t tdntas ca* 

rapufas, 
Quern Ike doer a cabiga que 

a apc'rte, 

Se queres saber quern he o 
villao, metelhe a vara na 
mao t 

Nao ha rosa sent espinkos, 



Anddr % anddr, vir morrer a 
beira, 



Quern nao dive, nao time, 

Quern qudndo pode, nao que'r t 
qudndo quer, nao pode, 

Homem honrddo nao ha mis- 
ter gabado, 

He'mem grdnde, besta depdo t 



Dcbaixo de md cdpajdz bom 
hbedor t 



We say there is no smoke 

without some fire. 
He who once steals is never 

trusty ; or, once a thief, 

always a thief. 
Alas for the spindle when the 

beard is not over it ! By 

the spindle is meant the 

woman, and by the beard 

is meant the man. 
So many countries, so many 

customs. 
Several men, several minds. 

We say, if any fool finds the 
cap fit him, let him put it 
on. 

Set a beggar on horseback, 
and he will ride to the 
devil. 

There is no rose without 
thorns, there is no sweet 
without some sweat. 

To eat an whole ox and 
faint at the tail. This pro- 
verb is spoken when any 
body falls short of a thing 
after having used all his 
endeavours. 

Out of debt out of danger. 

It is good to make hay while 
the sun shines. 

We say, a good face needs 
no band. 

This proverb intimates, that 
things are not to be valued 
by their bulk, but accord- 
ing to their intrinsic worth 
and value ; and so we say, 
a lark is better than a 
kite. 

A tattered cloak may cover a 
good drinker ; that is, men 
•re not to be judged by 



Quern muito abrdfa, fiouco 

aperta, 
No apougut, quern malfdl.la, 

ma I duvc t 



Quern em mais alto nada, 
mais presto se afoga, 

JJdspede com sol t ha honor, 
Hospeda formosa, ddno faz 

d bolsa, 
kospede e o peixe aos tres 

diasfede, 

Horta sem dgoa 9 cdsa sem 
telhddo, mother sem amor, 
marido sem cuidddo, de 
graca he cdro, 



Honra ao bom para que te 
honre, e ao mdo para que 
te nao deshenre, 

HSnra he dos dmos, a que se 

faz aos criddos, 
Officio de conselho, honra 
sem proviito, 



H6memapercebido t meyo com- 
batido, 



GRAMMAR* 

outward appearance. 



6 7 



All grasp, all lose ; or covet 
all, and lose all. 

He that speaks knavishly shall 
hear knavishly. Terence 
says, Qui per git ea, qua; 
vult, dicere, ea, qua non 
Quit, audiet. 

This is, the highest charges 
are the more liable and 
nearer to the downfall. 

First come, first served. 

A beautiful hostess, or land- 
lady, is bad for the purse. 

Fresh fish, and new come 
guests, smell when they 
are three days old. 

That is, a garden without 
water, a house untiled, a 
wife without love, and a 
careless husband, are all 
alike, being all stark 
nought. 

Honour a good man, that he 
may honour you ; and an 
ill man, that he may not 
dishonour you. 

The honour done to servants 
redounds to their masters. 

An office in the council is 
honour without profit ; 
that is, to be of the coun- 
cil of a town, by which 
nothing is got in Portugal. 

A man that is prepared, has 
half the battle over. . 



E» 



68 PORTUGUESE 



DIALOG OS FAMILIAR 

F A M I L I A R E S. DIALOGUES. 



VrrLs* DIALOGO I. DIALOGUE I. 

W vruz c£~ A 

J'ENHA vm. muito bons f^ OOD morrow, sir. 

d/as, ■** 

Co mo estavm.f ou comopas- How do you do, sir ? 

sa vm. ? 

Bern, nao muito-bim, voupas- Well ; not very well ; so, so. 

sdndo % 

Muito bem para servir a vm. Very well to serve you. 

As or dens de ju?n. At your service. 

FicO'lhc muito obrigddo, I am obliged to you. 

Agradecido, • I thank you. 

Qomo estd r ou pdssa o senhor How does your brother do ? 

seu irmdo ? 

Muito bem t nao muito bem, He is very well ; not very 

well. 

Elle Ur.d gosto de ver a vm. He will be glad to see you. 

Nao terei tempo para kir a I shall have no time to see 

velo hoje, him to day. 

Faqa favor de assentdr-se, Be pleased to sit down. 

Da huma cadiira ao senhor ; Give a chair to the gentle- 
man. 

Ndo he necessdrio, There's no occasion. 

Tenho que hir a fazer huma I must go to make a visit in 

visita aquinestavisinhdnca the neighbourhood. 

Vm. tern pressa, You are in haste.* 

Eu tigo voitarei, I'll be back, or return pre- 
sently. 

Adeos men senhor, Farewell, sir. 

Folgo de ver a vm* com boa I am glad to see you in good 

saude, health. 

BHjo as maos de vm. I kiss your hand. 

Sou criddo de vm. I am your servant. 

Sou muito seu criddo, Your most humble servant. 



GRAMMAR. 69 

DIALOGO II. DIALOGUE II. 

Para fazer huma Visita de To visit in the morning, 
Manhaa. 



ONDE estd ten dmo ? 
Ainda dormej 
Nao, senhor, tile estd acor da-do 
Estd elleja levantddo ? 
Nad, senhor, ilk ainda estd 

na cdma, 
Que vergonha de estdr ainda 

na cdma a estas horas ! 
Ontem d noitefui para a cdma 

tad tdrde, que nao me pude 

levari tar cido esta manhaa, 
Quejizerao vm ce \ depois de eta ? 
Dancdmos, cantdmos, rimos t 

ejugdmos, 
A quejogo ? 
A' os centos, 
Quanto me peza de nao tir 

sabido ! 
Quern ganhou? quern perdio? 
Eu ganhei dez moedas, 
Alt que horas jugdrao vm ces ? 
Ati duas horas despois da 

meya noite, 
A que horas Joi vm, para a 

cdma ? 
As tris, as tris horas e meya, 

Nao me admiro que vm* se 

lev ante tao tarde, 
Que hSras sao ? 
Que horas Ihe parece U vnu 

que sejao, 
Pareceme que apenas sad oito, 
Sim ! oito ! ja dcrao dez, 

Entdo he preciso que me le- 
vdnte quanto mats depris* 
sa pudc'r, 



*\71THERE is your master ? 

*r Is he asleep still ? 
No, sir, he is awake. 
Is he up ? 
No, sir, he is still a-bed. 

What a shame 'tis to be a-bed 

at this time a-day. 
I went to bed so late last 

night I could not rise early 

this morning. 
What did you do after supper ? 
We danced, we sung, we 

laughed, we played. 
At what game ? 
We played at piquet. 
How grieved am I, I did not 

know it ? 
Who won ? who lost ? 
I won ten moidores. 
Till what hour did you play ? 
Till two in the morning. 

At what o'clock fed you go 

to bed ? 
At three, half an hour after 

three. 
I don't wonder at your rising 

so late. 
What's o'clock? 
What do you think it is ? 

Scarce eight, I believe yet. 
How ! eight ! it has struck 

ten. 
Then* I must rise with all 

speed. 



7° PORTUGUESE 

D I A LOGO III. DIALOGUE III. 
Para vestir-se. To dress one's self. 



Q 



UEMestdahz? 
Que quer vm. ? 



Despdxa-te? acende o lume, e 

veste~me, 
Ha muito bom lume, 
Dd-me a minha camisa, 
Eila aqui estd, senhor^ 
Nao esta quinte, estdmuitofria 
Eu a aquentarei, sevm. quizer 
Nao, nao; trdze-me as min- 

has meyas de seda, 
Huma dillas esta rota, 
Da-ike hu??iponto,concerta-a, 
Dei-a ao que as concerta, 

Fize'ste-bem, 

O'nde estao as minhas ckinelas 

O'nde estd a minha roupa de 

chdmbre? 
Pentea-me, 
Pro cur a outro pente, 
Dd-me o mSu lenfo, 
Eis aqui hum lavddo, 
Dd-me o que estd na minha 

algibeirq, 
Dei-o d lavandeira, tile estd- 

va sujo, 
Trouxe ellaja a minha roupa? 
Sim, senhor,enaoJdlta nada, 
Trdze-me os mens calgoens, 
Que vestido quer vm. para 

hoje? 
mesmo de ontem, 
alfaidte ha de trazer logo 

o seu vestido, 
Bdtem d porta, ve Id quern he, 

Quern he? 
Hi o alfaidte, 
Deixa-o entrdr, 



TI7 HO is there ? 
* * What will you please 

to have ? 
Be quick, make a fire, dress 

me. 
There is a fine fire. 
Give me my shirt. 
Here it is, Sir. 
> 'Tis not warm, 'tis quite cold. 
If you please I'll warm it. 
No, no ; bring me my silk 

stockings. 

Or i 
ne ot them is torn. 

Stitch it a little, mend it. 
I have given it to the stock- 
ing mender* 
You have done right. 
Where are my slippers ? 
Where is my night gown. 

Comb my head. 

Look for another comb. 

Give me my handkerchief. 

Here is a cleaa one. 

Give me that which is in my 
pocket. 

I gave it to the washer-wo- 
man, it was foul. 

Has she brought my linen ? 

Yes, there wants nothing. 

Bring me my breeches. 

What clothes will you wear 
to-day ? 

Those I wore yesterday. 

The taylor will bring your 
cloth suit presently. 

Somebody knocks, see who 

it is. 
Who is it ? 
It is the taylor. 

Let him come in* 



GRAMMAR. 



7* 



D I A L O G O IV. DIALOGUE IV. 



O Senhor c o Alfaiate. 



rpRAZElS o men vestidot 

Sim, senhor, eilo aqui, 

Hd muito tempo que estou 

esperdndopor cite, 
Nao pude vir att agora, 
Nao estdva acabado, 
Ainda ndo estdva forrddo, . 
Quervm. vestzr a casdea para 

ver se Ike estd bem ? 
Vejdmos se estd bemfeita, 

Tenho para mim que ike kdja 

de agraddr, 
Parece-me muito comprida, 

He costume agora de trazi- 

las compridas, 
Abotoai-a, 
He muito apertdda, 
Assim dive sir para que Ike 

esteja bem ao corpo, 
Nao sao as mdngas demasid- 

damente Idrgas ? 
Nao, senhor, estao-lhe admu 

rdve/mente, 
Os calf tens sao mu"ito aper- 

tddos? 
E'sta he a moda de agora, 
Este vestido estd-lhe bizar- 

ramente, 
He muito curto, muito com- 
' prido, muito grdnde, muito 

pequeno, 
Tendes feito a vossa conta f 
Nat, senhor, nao tive tempo, 
Traziua amanhaa, e pag&r- 

vos-hei) 



The Gentleman and the 
Taylor, 

T\0 you bring ray suit of 

-*-* clothes? 

Yes, sir, here it is. 

You make me wait a great 

while. 
I could not come sooner. 
It was not finished. 
The lining was not sewed. 
Will you please to try the 

close coat on ? 
Let us see whether it be well 

made,- 
I believe it will pkase you. 

It seems to me to be very 

long. 
They wear them long now. 

Button it. 

It is too close* 

To fit properly, it ought to 

be close. 
Are not the sleeves too wide ? 

No, sir, they fit very well. 

The breeches are very nar* 
row. 

That is the fashion. 

This suit becomes you migh- 
ty well. 

'Tis too short, too long, too 
big, too little. 

Have you made your bill ? 
No, sir, I had no time. 
Bring it to-morrow, I'll pay 
you. 



72 



PORTUGUESE 




V>^£^=«>^ 



D I A J, O G O V. DIALOGUE V. 



Para almocar. 

rjiRA'ZE-nos algtima cousa 

-*■ para almofdr, 

Sim, senhor, ha linguifas e 

pastelinhos, 
Ghstavvi.de presunto? 

Sim, trdze-o ; comeremos 

huma talhdda delle, 
Estende hum guardandpo so- 

bre aquilla mesa, 
Dd-ncs prdtos,fdcas, e gar- 

Jos, 
Lava OS copos, 4 
Dd huma cadeira ao senhor, 
Assente^se vm. assente-se ao 

pi do lume, 
'* Nao tenko frio, aqui jicarei 

muito hem, 
Vejdmos se o vinho he bom, 

Dd cd aquella garrdja com 
» aquelle copo, 
Frifajavor de provdr aquelle 

vinho, 
Como Ihe agrdda ; que diz 

vm. delle ? 
Nao he mdo, he mtiito bom, 
Eis aqui as linguifas, tit a 

aquelle prdto, 
Coma vm. linguicas, 
Ja comi algumas, illas sao 

muito boas, 
Dd-mede beber, 
A' saude de vm. 
Bom proveitofdca a vm, 
Dd de beber ao senhor, 

E'u bebi ainda agora, 

Os pastelinhos irao bem bSns, 

Estdvao hum pouco mats co- 
zidos que deviao estdr, 



To breakfast. 

T3RING us something for 

-*-* breakfast. 

Yes, sir, there are some sau- 
sages and petty-patees. 

Do you choose the gammon 
of bacon ? 

Yes, bring it ; we will eat a 
slice of it. 

Lay a napkin on that table. 

Give us plates, knives, and 

forks. 
Rinse the glasses. 
Reach the gentleman a chair. 
Sit down, sir ; sit by the fire. 

I am not cold, I shall be very 

well here. 
Let us see whether the wine 

be good, 
Give me that bottle and a 

glass. 
Taste that wine, pray. 

How do you like it ? what 

say you to it ? 
It is not bad. it is very good. 
Here are the sausages, take 

away this plate. 
Eat some sausages, sir. 
I have eat some, they are very 

good. 
Give me some drink. 
Your health, sir. 
Much good may it do you. 
Give the gentleman some 

drink. 
I drank but just now. 
The petty-patees were very 

good. 
They were baked a little too 

much. 



73 



Fm» nao come, 

Tenho comido tanto, que nao 
poderei jantar, 



Vm. estd zombdndo, vm. nao 

tern comido nada, 
Tenho comido com muito 

gosto, tdnto das linguicas 

como do presunto, 



GRAMMAR. 

You do not e&. 

I have eat too much, I shall 
not be able to eat any din- 
ner. 

You only jest, you have eat 
nothing at all. 

I have eat very heartily both 
of sausages and gammon of 
bacon* 



DIALOGOVI. DIALOGUE VI. 



Para fallar Portugue'z. 



C 



0M0 vat vm. com o sen 
Portuguez? 
Esia vm.ja muito adiantddo 

nelle? - 
Ainda me fdlta muito ; nao 
KK set quasi ndda, 

Dizem porlm que vm, of alia 

muito bem, 
Prouvera a Deos que assim 

fosse ! 
Os que dizem isso, estdo muito 

enganddos, 
Esteja vm. na certeza que 

assim mo aisserao, 
Posso fallar algumas paldv- 

ras que aprendi de cor, 
E unicamente o que he neces- 

sdrio para come far afalldr^ 
comecar nao he bastdnte, 

he preciso que vm. acdbe, 
Faile vm. sempre ou berth, ou 

mal, 
Tenho medo de dar erros, 

Nao tenha vm. medo; a lin- 

goa Portugueza nao he 

dijficil, 
Conheco is so, e tambem que 

ilia he muito ehgracdda, 
•Quefeliciddde seria a minha 

se eu a soubssse bem ! 



To speak Portuguese. 

TJOW goes on your Po- 

A ■** tuguese ? 

Are you much improved in 

it now ? 
Far from it ; I know nothing 

almost. 
It is said, however, you speak 

it very well. 
Would to God it were true ! 

Those that say so are much 

mistaken. 
I assure you I was told so. 

I can say a few words which 
I have learnt by heart. 

And so much as is necessary 
to begin to speak. 

The beginning is not all, you' 
must make an end. 

Be always speaking, whether 
H well, or ill. 

I am afraid to commit blun- 
ders. 

Never fear; the Portuguese 
language is not hard. 

I know it; and that it has 
abundance of graces. 

How happy should I be, if I 
were master of it ! 



74 PORTU 

A applicagao he o unico meyo 

para aprende-la, 
Qudnto tempo hd que vm. a- 

prende ? 
Apenas ha hum mez, 
Co mo se chdma o seumistre ? 

Chdma-se 

Hd muito tempo que o con- 

hefo 9 
Elle tern ensinddo a muitos 

dos mens arm'gos, 
Nao Ihe diz elle ser preciso 

que fdlle sempre Portu- 

guez? 
Sim, senhor, assim me diz 
- muitas vezes, 
Pots, porque nao f alia vm.? 
Com quern quer vm. que eu 

fdlle. 
Com osquefalldrem com vm, 

E'u quizera falldr, mas nao 

me atrevo, 
He preciso que vm. nd6 tenha 

medo, nem se peje dos que 

o ouvzrcmfalldr, 



GUESE 

Application is the only way 
of learning it. 

How long have you been 
learning ? 

Scarce a month yet. 

What is your master's name ? 

His name is 

I have known him a great 
while. 

He has taught several friends 
of mine. 

Does not he tell you that you 
must constantly talk Por- 
tuguese ? 

Yes, Sir, he often tells me so; 

Why do not you talk then ? 
Who would you have me 

talk with ? 
With those who shall talk to 

you. 
I would fain talk, but dare 

not. 
You must not be afraid, you 

must be bold. 



DIALOGO VII. DIALOGUE VII. 



Q 



Do Tempo. 
UE tempo faz ? 



tempo estd admirdvel, 

tempo estd roim, 

Fazfrio f faz cdlma ? 

Naofuzfrio, nab* faz cdlma, 

Chbve ? nao chove ? 

Nao o creyo, 

O vento estd mud ado, 

Teremos chuva, 

Hoje nao hd de chover, 

Chove, Chove a cdntaros, 

Estd nevdndo % 

Troveja, 



Of the Weather. 

TX7HAT sort of weather 
vv is it? 
It is fine weather. 
It is bad weather. 
Is it cold ? is it hot ? 
It is not cold, it is not hot. 
Does it rain ? does it not rain ? 
I do not believe it. 
The wind is changed. 
We shall have rain. 
It will not rain to-day. 
It rains, it pours. 
It snows. 
It thunders. 



GRAM 

Cake pedra, 
Relampaguia, 
Faz muita cdlma, 
Geou a noite passdda ? 
Nao, senhor, mas agora estd 

gedndo, 
Parice-me que kd nevotiro, 

Vm, nao se engdna, assim he, 

Vm. tern humgrdnde catarro, 

ou defluxo, 
Hd quirizc dias que o tenho, 
Qu» horas sao, 
He cedo, nno he tdrde, 
He tempo de almogdr ? 
Poucofdlta para serem horas 

dejantdr, 
Que farimos depots de jan- 

tdr $ 
Daremos hum passeyo, ou 

ire mo s passe^r, 
Vdmos ddr huma volta, 
Nao vdmos for a com isle 

tempo, 



M A R. 7S 

It bails. 

It lightens. 

It is very hot. 

Has it freezed last night ? 

No, Sir, but it freezes now. 

It appears to me to be a great 
fog. 

You are not mistaken, it is 
very true. 

You have caught a violent 
cold. 

I have had it this fortnight. 

What's o'clock ? 

'Tis early, 'tis not late. 

Is ii breakfast -time? 

'Twill be dinner-time imme- 
diately. 

What shall we do after din- 
ner? 

We'll take a walk. 

Let us t^ke a turn now. 
We must not go abroad this 
weather. 



DIALOGO, VIII. 
Para perguntdr que novas ha. 

CUE vai de novo ? ou que 
novas ha? 

Sdbe vm. alguma cousa de no- 
vo P 

Nao tinho ouvido ndda de 
novo, 

Be que sefdlla pel la ciddde ? 

Nao sefdlla de nada, 

Nao tendes ouvido falldr de 
guerra, 

Nao Sugo falldr ndda disso, 

Poremfdlla-se de hum cerco, 

Fallou-st nisso, mas nao he 

verddde, 



DIALOGUE . VIIL 

To enquire after news. 
TT7HAT news is stirring ? 

Do you know any news ? 

I have heard none. 

What's the talk of the town ? 
There's no talk of any thing. 
Have you heard no talk of 

war ? 
I have heard nothing of it. 
There's a talk however of a 

siege. 
There was such a discourse, 

but it was not true. 



7 6 PORTU 

Antes pello contrdrio jdlla- 

se de pdz, 
Assim o creyo, 
Que se diz na corte ? 
Fdlla-se de huma vidgern, 
Qudndo vos pare$e que el rey 

part ird? 
Nao se sdbe. Nao se diz 



O'nde, ou para Snde se diz 

que elle ird ? 
Huns dizem que ird para 

Fldndres, e outros para 

Alemanha, 
E que diz a Gazeta ? 
E'u nao a li, 
He verddde o que se diz do 

Sr. ? 

Pais que se diz delle? 
Dizem que estd ferido mor- 

talmente, 
Muito mepesaria disso ; elle 

he hum h'omem de bem, 
Quern oferio ? 
Dous marotos que o investi- 

rao, 
Sdbe-se o porque? 

A noticia que corre he, que 
diu num delles hum bo- 
Jetao, 

E'u nao creyo isso ; nem eu 
tao p&uco, 

Eilo. vdi, cedo saber t mo s a 
verddde, 



DIALOGO IX. 

Para escrever. 
T\A'LME huma folha de 
•*-*^ papel, huma penna t e hu- 
ma pouca de tinta, 
I'de aomeu quarto, e achareis 
em cima da mesa titdo o que 
zosfor precisoy 



GUESE 

On the contrary there's a 

talk of peace. 
I believe so. 

What say they at court ? 
They talk of a voyage. 
When do you think the king 

will set out ? 
'Tis not known, they do not 

say when. 
Where do they say he'll go ? 

Some say into Flanders, 
others into Germany. 

And what says the Gazette ? 

I have not read it. 

Is it true what's reported of 

Mr. ? 

What of him ? 

They say he is mortally 

wounded. 
I should be sorry for that, 

he's an honest man. 
Who wounded him ? 
Two rogues that set upon 

him. 
Is it known upon what ac- 
count ? 
The report is that he gave 

one. of them a box on the 

ear. 
1 don't believe it. Nor I 

neither. 
However, we shall soon know 

the truth. 

DIALOGUE IX. 
To write, 

GIVE me a sheet of pa- 
per, a pen, and a little 
ink. 
Step to my closet, you'll find 
on the table whatever yon 
wfcnt. 



&RAM 

Nad ha pSnnas, 
Hdgrdnde quantiddde deltas 

na escrivaninha, 
Nao prestao para nada, 
La kd Sutras, 
Nao estao aparddas, 
O'nde estd o v'o'sso canivcte f 
Sabeis vos apardr pennas ? 
E'U apdro-as a meu mcdo, 
E'sta nao estd md, 
Em quanta acdbo esta carta, 

fazeime o favor defechdr 

as Sutras, e fazir hum 

mdco deltas, 
Que sello quer vm. que eu Ike 

pSnha ? 
Stlla-o com o miu sintte, ou 

com as minhas drmas, 
Com que Idcre quer vm, que 

as Jtche, 
Feckdi-as com o vermelho ou 

com oprtto ; seja qudljor, 
t nao importa, 
Tern vm. posto a ddta ? 
Par tee -me que sim, mas ainda 

nao a assini%> 
A qudntos estdmos hoje do 

mez ? 
A Suto, a diz, a quin%e, a 

vinte, 
Ponde o sobrescrito ? 
O'nde estd a area? 
V6s nunca tindes aria, 

Ahi hd alguma no areeiro, 
A hi estd o siu criddo ; quer 

Wn. que elle live as cartas 

ao correo, 
Leva as minhas cartas ao 

correo, e nao te esquecas de 

pagdr o porte, 
Nao tinho dinhiiro, 
Ahi estdhuma moeda deouro, 
Vdi deprissa, evem logo. 



MAR. 77 

There are no pens. 

There are a great many in the 
standish. 

They are good for nothing. 

There are some others. 

They are not made. 

Where is your penknife. 

Gan you make pens ? 

I make them my own way. 

This is not had. 

While I make an end of this 
letter, do me the* favour to 
make a packet of the rest. 

What seal will you have me 

put to it ? 
S^al it with my cypher, or 

coat of arms. 
What wax shall I put to it ? 

Put either red, or black, no 
matter which. 

Have you put the date ? 

I believe I have, but I have 
TK>t signed it. 

What day of the month is 
this? 

The eighth, the tenth, fif- 
teenth, twentieth. 

Put the address. 

Where is the powder ? 

You never have powder or 
sand. 

There's some in the sand box. 

There's your servant, will 
you let him carry the let- 
ter's to the post-office ? 

Carry my letters to the post- 
office, and don't forget to 
pay postage. 

I have no money. 

There's a moidore. 

Go quickly, and return as 
£oon as possible. 



78 



PORTUGUESE 



DIALOGO X. 

Para comprar. 



e 



UE quir vm. 



Que to hum bom pdnno fino 

para hum vestido, 
Tenha vm. a bonddde de en- 

trdr, e vera o mdis bilo 

pdnno que hd em Londres, 
Deixe-me ver o mdhor que 

vm, tern, 
Aqui tern vm, hum excellente, 

que agora se costuma tra- 

zer, 
He hum bom pdnno, mas a 

cor nao me agrdda, 
Ahi tern vm, Sutra pega que 

tern a cor mdis cldra, 
Agrddame a cor, mas o panno 

nao he forte, nao tern cor- 

po, 
Veja esta pica ; vm. nao ac- 

hara em nenhuma parte 

Sutra tap boa como ilia, 
Qudnto pede vm. por cdda 

ana ? 
seujusto preco he — 

Sr.naohemeu costume por-me 
a regatedr ; faca-me favor 
de dizer me o ultimo preco, 

Ja disse a vm. que aquelle he 
o seujusto prtgo, 

He muito cdro t dar Ike hei a 
vm, — 

Nao posso abater hum ceitil, 

Vm. nao ha de vender por 
esse precd, [ 

Vm. quiz saber o&ltimo pre- 
co, e eu disse -the, 



DIALOGUE X. 

To buy. 

"ITTHATdoyou want, sir? 
* ™ What would you please 

to have ? 
I want a good fine cloth to 

make me a suit of clothes. 
Be pleased to walk in, sir, 

you'll see the finest in 

London. 
Shew me the best you have. 

There's a very fine one, and 
what's worn at present. 

'Tis a good cloth, but I don't 

like the colour. 
There's another lighter piece. 

I like that colour well, but 

the cloth is not strong, 'tis 

too thin. 
Look upon this piece here, 

sir, you'll not find the like 

any where else. 
What do you ask for it an 

ell? 
Without exacting, it is 

worth - 

Sir, I am not used to stand 

haggling; pray tell me 

your lowest price. 
I have told you, sir, 'tis 

worth that. 
'Tis too dear, I'll give you— 

I can't bate a farthing. 

You shall not have what you 

ask. 
You asked me the lowest 

price, and I have told you- 



GRAM 

Bora vamos, corts vm. Id 

diias anas delle, 
Asseguro-lhc a vm, como ho~ 

mem de bem que sou, que 

nao gdnho ndda com vm. 
Ahi tern vm, cinco moe'das de 

our o t de-me a demasia, 
TSnha a bonddde de ddr-mt 

Sutra em lugdr de'sta, por- 

que nao he de pezo y 
Ahi esta outra, 
A Dios t criddo de vm. 



MAR. 79 

Come, come, cut off two ells 

of it. 
I protest, on the word of an 

honest man, I don't get 

any thing by you. 
There's five moidores, give 

me the change. 
Be pleased, sir, to let me have 

another for this, it wants 

weight. 
There's another. ' 
Farewell ; sir, your servant. 



DIALOGO XI. 
Para hum a Jornada. 

SUA NT AS ttgoas ha da- 
qui a N.f 
Ha outo legoas, 
JWj nao poderemos chegdr 

Id hoje, he muito tarde, 
Nao he sendo meyo dia, vm ces 
ainda tern bastdnte, tempo, 

He a estrdda boa ? 

Nao he muito boa pdssao-se 

bosques e rios, 
Ha algum perigo nella ? 

Nao hd notzcias disso ; he 
estrdda real em que se en- 
contra gente a cada pdsso, 

Pois nao dizem que hdladro- 
ens nos bosques ? 

Nao ha de que tcr mido, nem 
de dia, nem de noite, 

Por onde se vdif- 

Qudndo vm ces chegdr em ao pe 
do outeiro, he preciso, que 
tomem d mao direita, 

Pois nao he necessdrio subir 
hum outeiro f 



DIALOGUE XI. 

For a Journey. 

TTOW many leagues is it 
-*-*■ from this place to N. ? 
It is eight leagues. 
We shall not be able to get 

thither to day, it is too late. 
It is not more than twelve 

o'clock, you have time 

enough yet. 
Is the road good ? 
So, so ; there are woods and 

rivers to pass. 
Is there any danger upon that 

road ? 
There's no talk of it, it is a 

highway, where you meet 

people every moment. 
Do not they say there are 

robbers in the woods ? 
There's nothing to be feared 

either by day or night. 
Which way must one take ? 
When you come near the 

hill, you must take to the 

right hand. 
Is it not necessary to ascend 

a hill then ? 



8o PORTU 

Nao, Sr. nao hd outro outeu 
ro sendo huma pequena 
ladiira, (ou descidaj no 
bdsque, 

Custa a atin&r com o caminho 

, pello meyo dos bosques ? 

Vm ctt nao podem err a - to •, 

Logo que vm e " sahirem do 
bosque, lembrem-se de to- 
mdr d mao esquerda, 

Vm cei muitos dnnos, ftco-lhe 
muito ob rig d do, 

Vdmos, vdmos, senkores, to- 
me mo s hum cavdllo, 

Onde estd o mar quiz ? 

Ellefoi adidnte, 

E'lle ha de estar esperdndo por 
vos logo all for a da ciddde, 

Por que esta vm a agora espe- 
rdndo ? hora, vdmo-nos 
da qui, acabemos, 

Fiquem-se embora, senhores, 
a Deos, 

Fagao vm ces muito boa Jor- 
nada, 



GUESE 

No, sir, there is no other hill 
but a little declivity in the 
wood. 

Is it a difficult way through 

the woods ? 
You can't lose your way. 
As soon as you are out of the 

wood, remember to keep 

to the left hand. 
I thank you, sir, and am very 

much obliged to you. 
Come, come, gentlemen, let's 

take a horse, 
Where is the marquis ? 
He is gone before. 
He'll wait for you just out of 

town. 
What do you stay for now ? 

come, come, let's be gone, 

let's have done. 
Farewel, gentlemen, fare- 

wel. 
I wish you a very good jour- 
ney. 



DIALOGO XII. 
Da Cea e da Pousada. 

/^OMQUE assim estdmos 

^ chegddos a estaldgem, 

Apeemo-nos, senhorts, 

Pe'ga nos c avail 'os destes sen- 
kores, e trdta dtlles, 

Vejdmos agora o que vm. nos 
hd de ddr para cedr, 

Hum capao, meya duzia de 
pombos, huma saldda, sets 
codornizes, e huma duzia 
do calhdndras, 

Querem vm iet mais alguma 
cousa ? « 

1'sto he bastdnte, dai-nos al- 
gum vinho que seja bom, e 
huma sobrtmesa, 



DIALOGUE XII. 
Of the Supper and Lodging, 

CO, we are arrived at the 

^ inn. 

Let's alight, gentlemen. 

Take these gentlemen's horses, 
and take care of them. 

Now let's see what you'll 
give us for supper. 

A capon, half a dozen of pi- 
geons, a sallad, six quails, 
and a dozen of larks. 

Will you have nothing else ? 

That's enough, give us some 
good wine, and a dessert. 



GRAMMAR. 

Deixem vrrf* isso por minha 

Conta, eu Ihes prometo que 
fiquem ban servidos, 
Alumia aos senhores. 
Dai-nos de cear o mdis dc- 

pr ess a que f 61 possivel, 
Antes que vm er tenhao des~ 

calgddo as botas, estard a 

cea na mesa, 
Tende cuidado que trdgao 

para cima as nossas mdlas 

e pis tolas, 
Descalcdi-me as botas, e de- 

spois ireis ver se tern dado 

algumfeno aos cavdllos, 



81 

Let me alone, I'll please you, 
I warrant you. 

Light the gentlemen. 

Let's have our supper as 

soon as possible. 
Before you have pulled your 

boots off, supper shall be 

upon the table. 
Let our portmanteaus and 

pistols be carried up stairs. 



Levai-os ao rio, e tende cui- 
dado que Ihes dim alguma 
avea, 

E'u terei cuidado de tudo, 
estijao vm c " descangddos t 

Senkores, a cea est a prompta, 
estd na mesa, 

Nos vdmosjd, 

Vdmos cear, senhores, para 
nos hirmos deitdr cedo, 

Ddi-nos dgoa para lavdr as 

maos, 
Sentemo-?ios, senhores, sente- 

monos a mesa, 
Dai-nos de beber, 
Asaude de vm ces meus senhores, 
He bom vinho ? 
Nao he mdo, 

cap do, nao esta bemassddo, 
Dai-nos hitmas poucas de 

lardnjas, ehuma pouca de 

pimenta, 
Porque nao come vm" destes 

pombos f 
Eu tenho comido humpombo, 

e tris calhdndras, 
D/ze ao estalajadiiro que I he 

querimos^falldr, 



Pull off my boots, and then 
you shall go to see whether 
they have given the horses 
any bay. 

You shall carry them to the 
river, and take care they 
give them some oats. 

I'll take care of every thing, 
don't trouble yourself. 

Gentlemen, supper is ready, 
it is upon the table. 

We'll come presently. 

Let's go to supper, gentle- 
men, that we may go to 
bed in good time. 

Give us water to wash our 
hands. 

Let us sit down, gentlemen, 
let's sit down at table. 

Give us some drink. 

To your health, gentlemen. 

Is the wine good ? 

It is not bad. 

The capon is not done enough 

Give us some oranges with a 
little pepper. 

Why don't you eat of these 

pigeons ? 
I have eaten one pigeon and 

three larks. 
Tell the landlord we want to 

speak with him. 
* F 



8a PORTUGUESE 

DIALOGO XIII. DIALOGUE XIII. 



Do saltar e do correr. 

TTO R A vdmos, quer vm, 

tt saltdr? 

Nao he bom saltdr logo des- 
pots de corner, 

De que mo do de saltdr gosta 
vm. ma s? 

mdis commum he apes jun- 
tos, 

Quer vm. quesaltimos so com 
hum pe ? 

Como vm. quize'r, 

Esteheh urn sdlto m uitogrdnde 

Qudntos pes saltou vm. ? 

Mdis de quairo, , 

Aposto que saltopor cima da- 

quelle barrdnco, . 
Vm. sdlta com humpdo com- 

prido, 
Demos huma carreira, 
Quer vm. que corrdmos a pe 

ou a cavdilo ? 
De htima e Sutra sorte, 
Diga vm. donde se hd de 

comecar, e onde se hd de 

acabdr, 
Comecemos a correr da qui, 

Correremos ate chegdr a e'sta 

drvore, 
Tinho ccrrido trez vexes 

dcsde o lugar as sin a I ado 

ate a arvorc, 
Vm, nao esperou pello sindl 

paraprincipidr a correr ■, 
Aquelle cavallo correo muito 

hem, 
Qudntas carreiras tern elle 

dado? 
Tres ou qudtro, 
Vm, tern ganhddo, 



Of jumping and running. ^ 

f^ O M E, will you go to 

^^ jumping ? 

It is not good to jump imme- 
diately after dinner. 

What leaping do you like 
best ? 

The most usual is with one 
foot close to the other. 

Shall we hop with one leg ? 

As you please. 

This is a very great leap. 

How many feet have you 

leap'd ? 
More than four. 
I lay I leap clearly over that 

ditch. 
You jump with a long stick. 

Let us run races. 

Shall we run on foot or on 

horseback ? 
Both ways. 
Appoint the race. 



This shall be the starting 

place. 
This tree shall be the goal. 

I have run three times from 
the starting-place to the 
tree. 

You did not stay for the sig- 
nal to start. 

That horse has run his race 
very well. 

How many heats has he run ? 

Three or four. 

You have won the plate. 



GRAMMAR. 



83 



CARTAS 

DE 

C O M M E R C I O. 



LETTERS 

on BUSINESS, or 

MERCANTILE AF- 
FAIRS. 



Senkor F. F. 
Londres. 



30 de Janeiro 
de 1813. 



Mr. F. F. 
London. 



The 30th of Jan. 
1813. 



TDECEBI' as siias de 3 e 5 
-*- ** do passddo, no dia 5 do 
corrente, vindas pelo Navio 
F. F. capitdo B. B. pelas 
quaes vejo, Vm ce . pretende 
carregdr as fazendas que re- 
commendii ao seu cuidddo 
pela minha ultima, no pri- 
meiro Navio para esta. 

Inclusas remit a Vm ce . 
mats algumas amostras y po- 
rem dezejo que queira reco- 
mendar ao Tintureiro, que 
as cores sejao vivas efirmes. 

Pelo ultimo Navio que da- 
qui parti Ihe remeti a conta 
de venda, da sua parti da de 
.meias de seda, e das tres 
Cdxas de Ckapeos, pelo Navio 
A; eachdndo Vm ce . algumas 
partidas de qualquer distes 
dous generos, que Ihe agrd- 
dem> as pode manddr, pdis sao 
agora mui procurddos; de've 
comtudo ter muito cuidddo 
em que sejao da ultima mo da, 
Tenho verijicddo oajuste das 
20 Pip as de Azeite da safra 
proxima, para partirem 



VOURS of the 3d and i 5 th 
■** of last Month, came to 
Hand on the ,5th Current by 
the Ship F. F. Captain B. B. ; 
and therein I take Notice, 
that you intend to put on 
board the next good Ship 
bound hither, the Goods I 
recommended to your Care 
in my last. Herewith I send 
you more Patterns, but I 
would desire you to be soli- 
citous witfc your Dyer, that 
the Colours may be lively 
and durable. By the last 
Ship I remitted you Account 
of Sales, of the Parcel of Silk 
Stockings, and the three 
Boxes of Hats, by the Ship 
A; and if you meet with a 
Parcel of either, or both, to 
your Mind, please to send 
them, such Articles being 
now in Demand, but great 
Care must be taken of th'e 
Fashion and Make. I have 
taken care to secure your 
twenty Pipes of Oil for the 
first Ships in the Season, and 



F 2 



84 PORTU 

pelos primeiros Navios: igu- 
almente tenho carregddo no 
Navio N. Capitao F. as 
suas 20 Pipas de Vinho 
tinto ; assim como tamtemas 
doze e tres quartos de /franco, 
cuja Factura remeto inclusa : 
Os conhecimentos, Ihos re- 
meter e\ pel cor r eio. Heide 
estimdr c-hegue tudo a salva- 
mento. He qudnto por hora 
se me offer ice. a dizerlhe ; no 
entretdnto sou 

De Vm ce . muito 
Venerador e Criddo. 

Senkor Diogo Jones, 

VOU por e'sta avisdr a 
Fm ce . que pilo Navio Derby, 
Ihe remeti duds saquinkas de 
diamdntes, importdndo e?n 
Pagodas 4396. 25 Fan. 10 
Casks, em retorno dos seus 
fundos em men podir ; os 
quaes fiz registrar nos livros 
da Companhia em conform!- 
ddde com as suas brdems. 

Inclusqs acharp, Conhe- 
cimento, Factum e a sua 
Vonta corrente fechdda, que 
desejo cheguem a salvamento 
e me alegrarei de que fag a 
grandes intereces, 

Como eu est ou para vol tar 
para a Europa, dminka eke- 
gdda a Londres, terei ahonra 
de ver, e Ihe darii entao, 
huma relagao exacta do com- 
mercio da India. 

Tenho, gosto de sir, 
De VrrA Reverente Crd\ 
e Venerador* 

Forte de S. Jorge, 
1.2 de Jan\ 1813. 



GUESE 

pet on board the Ship N. 
Capt. F. your twenty Pipes 
of Red, and twelve Pipes and 
three Hogsheads of White 
Wine, of which the Invoice 
goes herewith, and ihe Bills 
of Lading shall be sent by 
the post, and I hope will 
come safe to hand ; which 
being all that is necessary at 
present, I remain, 

Sir, 
Your humble Servant. 



Mr. James Jones. 
Sir, 
THESE will advise you, 
that by this Ship the Derby, 
I have ma.de the return. of 
your Stock in my Hands 
in two Bulses of Diamonds, 
amounting to Pagodas 4396, 
25 Fan. 10 Casks, having 
registered the?n according to 
your Order in the Company's 
Books; inclosed is a Bill of 
Lading, together with In- 
voice, and your Account 
current closed, which I wish 
may come safe to you, and 
turn to a good Account. As 
I am returning to Europe, at 
my Arrival in London, I 
shall have the honour to see 
you, and give you an exact 
Account of the Trade in In- 
dia. I am entirely, 
Sir, 
Your humble Servant. 

Fort St. George, 
Jan. 12, 1813. 



GRAM 

Lisboa 4 dt Marco dt 1811. 
Snr. Joao Ferrier. 
Londrts : 

ACIiO-MEfavorecido com 
a sua de 3 do passddo, e vejo, 
que em ex'cucdo as minhas 
ordems, Vm a . tern comprddo 
os quinhfntos Barn's de Aren- 
que.i defimv, a nl.por Last, 
Estou cerio que esse he 
menor preco por que Vm cc . os 
pode obter, e nao tenho a 
menor duvida que had de cor- 
res-ponder na sua aualiddde. 

meu Navzo se estd a 
aparelhar para os ir buscdr y 
c vis to Hit nao demanddr 
mats de novt pes d* dgua, 
poderd mesmo carregdr no 
seu Cdes fcomo Vm ct . teve a 
bonddde de me diztrj que 
poupara quatro penny s per 
barril, dt despesas, Julgo 
que elle poderd carregdr sette 
centos Barris, ou mais. 
Capitao lis to nao ttr despe- 
zas a fazer, nao necessitard 
dt dinheiro. 

Agradeco-lht muito a sua 
informacao relativamente ao 
cdmhio entre Londres e esta 
Prdca r mas como julgo as 
remessas sobre Exchequer 
hum pouco arriscddas, Vm ce . 
se servird sacdr sobre mim 
ao cdmbio mats vantajoso 
possively ficdndo na ctrteza, 
que as suas Lettras serao 
pdgas com aponctuatidddt 
do costume, 

Tenho gosto de ser, 

Dt Vm c \ m". Attcnto Vtn". 



MAR. 85 

Lisbon, 4 March, 181 1» 
Mr. John Ferrier, 
London. 
Sir, 

1 AM favoured with 
yours of the 3d of last month, 
and find, in Compliance to 
my Order, you have bought 
the five hundred Barrels of 
red Herrings, at 11/. per 
Last. I make no doubt, but 
that was the lowest Price you 
could get them for, and the 
goodness of them does answer 
it. My Ship is getting ready 
with all speed to go down to 
fetch them, and she may be 
laden at your Quay, as she 
draws no more than nine feet 
of water, (as you are pleased 
to mention,) which will save 
the Charge of four Pence per 
Barrel ; I judge she will 
carry seven hundred Barrels, 
or more. The Captain will 
not have Occasion for any 
Money, so will want no Sup- 
ply. I thank you for the In- 
formation you gave me in 
relation to the Exchange be- 
tween London and this Place, 
but as I look upon the Re- 
mittance of the Money hence, 
as hazardous in Exchequer 
Bills, you will be pleased to 
draw on me at the most com« 
modious Exchange possible, 
and your Bills at the usual 
Course, which shall meet 
with all due honour from, 
Sir, 
Your humble Servant. 



U PORTU 

Londres 18 de Marco 
dt 1813. 

Snr. J. Morrice. 
Cadiz. 

TENHO recebido em siu 
devido tempo as suas difftr- 
entes cart as \ ass'tm como tarn- 
bem a m.inha conta corrente, 
a qudl tenho laucddo nos 
mens Livros em conformi- 
ddde com Vm ct , 

A sua ultima he de 29 do 
passddo, e nella me man da 
recibo das tres Lettras, em- 
portdndo em sets mil Pecas 
de Oito, que meu Irmao Jozi 
I he remeteu por minha Conta 
tordem: espero fazer triste 
Negocio com el las depois de 
hum desembolco de tdnto 
tempo, e com ham cdmbio tao 
desfavordvel. Ac ho que os 
limites que elle Ihe deu,forao 
muito abaxo do cdmbio, e 
preco da prdta : por em visto 
eu ier esperado todo este 
tempo, e nao haver probabili- 
ddde de hum ou outro baixar, 
'Vm ee . se strvird remeter-me 
meu dinheiro, ao cdmbio cor- 
rente, para esta Prd$a, ou 
Amsterdam, como Iheparecer 
mats conveniente aos mens 
interesses. 

Se prefo da cochenilha, 
oudaPratadescesse tdnto, que 
Vm". julgdsse sir mats con- 
veniente para ?mm, empregdr 
meu dinheiro em qualquer 
destes dpis generos, do que 
reme&r-me Lettras, nesse 
cdzo poderd fazer 9 deu 
chdndo eu isso inteiramenie 
d sua disposifao, na certeza 



GUESE 

London, March 18, 1813. 

Mr. J. Morrice. 

Cadiz. 
Sir, 

YOUR several Letter* 
came to hand in due Time, 
as did mv Account Current, 
which I have noted in con- 
formity with you ; your last 
to me was of 29 of last 
Mouth, wherein you give me 
Receipt of the three Bills, 
amounting to six thousand 
Pieces of Eight, which my 
Brother Joseph sent to you for 
my Account and by my Or- 
der ; I shall make but a sorry 
Bargain of them, after so 
long a Disbursement ; be- 
sides they cost me a dear Ex- 
change; I find his limits to 
you were much under the 
Price of Plate and Exchange : 
Now since I have waited all 
this Time, and there being no 
Probability of their falling, 
be pleased to send my Money, 
as the Exchange comes, 
either for this Place or Am- 
sterdam, which you judge 
will turn most to Account. 
If the Plate or Cochineal 
should fall to a Price, which 
you may conceive will an- 
swer better than by Remit- 
tance at a due Exchange, in 
such case invest my Money 
in either of them, which 1 do 
entirely leave to you, being 
persuaded, you will act in my 
Affairs equal to your own. 
I should be glad to hear of 
the Fleet's Arrival ; for per- 
haps, it might give some fa- 



GRAMMA R. 87 

de que tratard dos mius in- vourable turn to business, s° 



teresses, com mesmo disvdo 
coma se Jossem seus pro- 
prios. 

Estimaria saber da eke- 
gdda do comhoy, porque po~ 
deria ser produzisse alguma 
?nuddnca favor dvel no Corn- 
met cio, e que <ada hum po- 
dessefazer tiso dos seus ca- 
pitaes ; pois ao p resent e as 
circumstancias nao convidao 
a ndda. He qudnto por 
agora se me offer ice a dizer- 
Ihe. No entretdnto ten ho o 
gosto de sir 

De Vm". m t0 . At tent 

Verf. e Criddo. 



that one could make som e 
use of one's money, for at 
present, ii does not invite one 
to any thing ; which is all 
from, 

Sir, 
Your humble Servant. 



Londres 3 de Abril 
de 1813. 

Sen™. Mills & C\ 
Porto. 
ESTA serve de informar 
a Vm* 5 . que de Sexta feira a 
ioto dias s<* hao de abrir os 
Livros do Banco de Ingla- 
terra, pari, pagar os deviden- 
dos vend dos ate aquelle dia t 
em que eu nao deicharei de 
receber que Ikes pertence 
dos juros respectivos ate a 
esse tempo, em virtude dos 
poderes que me conjerirao 
para esse Jim, e depots de os,_ 
ttr recebido, Ihos remetrei. 
Deos guarde a V?n ces , 
m m . annos. 

De Vm« s . m". 
Ven'.eCrd 9 . 



London the 3d of April, 
1813. 

Messieurs Mills & Co. 
Oporto. 
THIS may serve to in- 
form you that the Books will 
be opened at the Bank of 
England on Friday se'nnight, 
to pay the dividends due up 
to this time to the parties 
concerned, when I shall be 
ready to receive whatever be- 
longs to you both, with the 
respective interests thereon, 
by virtue of your powers 
given to me for that purpose, 
and on receipt thereof, shall 
remit the same to you, whom 
God preserve many years. 
Your most humble Servant. 



88 P O R T U 

Hum Escrito, ou Bilhete 
aberto, a hum Amigo ou 
Vezinho, em qualquer oca- 
siao. 

AO Senr. G. S. que seu 
creado T. M. Ihe roga o fa- 
vor , de Ihe enviar pelo Por- 
ta dor 

deque agora precis a, 
e por que Ihe fear a muito 
obrigado. 



GUESE 

A short open Escrito, or 
Message, to a Friend or 
Neighbour, for any thing 
upon occasion, 

TO Mr. G. S. that T- 
M. his most humble Servant, 
desires the favour of him, to 
send by the Bearer 

' having 
at present immediate occa- 
sion for it, and he shall always 
remain obliged to him as his 
Humble Servant. 



Carta, ou Instrumento de 
Procuracao. 

SAIBAM todos qudntos 

tste instrumento, ou Carta de 

procuracao virem, que eu 

A B. de Londres, hbmem de 

negocipyl.enko nomeddo e con- 

stituido e por esta presente 

nomio, ordeno, constituo e 

faco o Senhor B C. de 

JS/ecociante, meo verdadeiro 

e legitimo procurador, por 

mi$n e em meu Nome e ao men 

uso,pode demanddr, areca- 

dar, e re$eber de T. B. Ne- 

gociante a soma de a 

mhn devida pelo ditto T. B. 

ddndn e por esta concedendo 

ao meu ditto ProcuradSr o 

meu podir plenano e autori- 

dddede exercitdr, e de usar de 

todas e taes accoes e Sutras 

cousas em direito necess arias, 

para a cobrdnca da dltta di- 

vida, e em meu nome, de dar t 

e fazer quitagoes ou Sutras 

descdrgas, e geralmente de 

[fazer e executar na materia 

sobreditta tad piendriaminte 



A Letter of Attorney. 

KNOW all Men by 
these Presents, That I A. B. 
of London, Merchant, have 
named and constituted, and 
by these presents do name, 
ordain, appoint, and make 
my trusty friend, B. C. of 
Merchant, 
my true and lawful Attorney, 
for me, and in my name, and 
to my Use, to Demand, sue 
for, recover, and receive of 
T. B. of 
Merchant, the Sum of 

to me due and owing 
by and from the said T. B. 
giving, and hereby granting 
unto my said Attorney, my 
full Power and Authority to 
use and exercise all such Acts, 
Things, and Devices in the 
Law, as shall be necessary 
for the recovering of the said 
Debt, and give Acquittance, 
or other Discharges, in my 
Name ; to make and give, 
and generally to do and exe- 



GRAM 

como se eu mismo fizesse ou 
pudesse fazer, estando pes- 
soalmente presente; ratifi- 
cdndo, confirmdndo, e outdr- 
gando toda e qualquer cousa 
que o ditto meu procurador 
legitimamentejizer ou causdr 
de se fazer nella por esta 
presente. Em testemunha do 
que Assinei e sellei esta em 
aos 20 dias do mez de 
Marco de 1807. por A. B. 

Assinado e Sellado 
didnte de 

r. a.\ 

M.B.f 



Testemunhas. 



Carta ou o Instrumento de 
Fretamento. 

ESTA carta ou Instru- 
mento de Fretamento contra- 
tddo,feito aos dias 

do mez de do Anno 

de do nacimento de 

nosso Senkor Jesus Christo, 
&c. Entre Z B, Mestre, 
debaixo de Deos, do navio 
nomeddo, de do- 

zentas e cincoenta toneladas 
que ao presente esta Surto e 
an cor ado no Rio de 
de huma parte , e E. T. M. 
B* X. &c. homens de negbcio 
da Sutra parte: Certificao 
que ditto Mestre tern dado 
em aluguel ejretado ditto 
Navio aos dittos homens de 
negbcio e que elles os dittos 
Homens de negbcio tern to- 
mddo em aluguel pella via- 
gem aos concertos e as condi- 
foes, asaber ; ditto Mestre 
fa% concerto, promete e otbr- 



M A R. % 

cute on the Premises, as fully 
as myself might or could do, 
were I peisonally present; 
ratifying, confirming and al- 
lowing all and whatsoever 
my said Attorney shall law- 
fully do, or cause to be done 
therein, by these- Presents. 
In witness whereof I have 
hereunto set my Hand and 
Seal, in the 20th of March, 
1807. 

Sealed and delivered A. B. 
In the Presence of 
T. A. 
M. B. 



The Copy of a Charter -Party 
of Affreightment. 

THIS Charter Party of 
Affreightment,indented,made 
the of 

the Month of 
Anno Domini, 
between T. A. Master, under 
God, of the good Ship or 
Vessel, called the 
of the Burthen of 
Tuns, or thereabouts, now 
riding at Anchor, in the Ri- 
ver of of 
the one Part, and E, T, M, 
B, L, &c. Merchants, of the 
other Part, witnesseth, that 
the said Master has granted 
and let the said Ship to freight 
unto the said Merchants, and 
that they the said Merchants 
have accordingly hired her 
for the Voyage, and upon 
the Terms and Conditions 
following : That is to say, 
the said Master does cove- 



9 o PORTUGUESE 

ga, por elle tne'smo, seus Te r- 

tamenteiros, e Administra- 

ddres t e com os dittos ho- 

mtns de negocio, e qualquer 

delles t ou seus, e a qualquer 

dos sens Testamenteiros, Ad- 

ministr adores, e Constituin- 

tes, por estes present es ; que 

o ditto Navio forte e sao de 

quilka, e bem provzdo de 

mantimentos, enxdrcias e 

gente, e aparelhdds de todas 

as cSusas convenientes e ne- 

cess arias para fazer a via- 

gem adiante declardda ; com 

o primaro vent o favor dv el e 



nant, promise, and grant for 
himself, his Executors, and 
Administrators, to and with 
the said Merchants, and either 
ofth^m, their and either of 
their Executors, Adminis- 
trators, and Assigns, by these 
Presents ; That the said Ship, 
strong and sound, and well 
and sufficiently victualled, 
tackled, manned, and ap- 
parelled, with all Things fit, 
needful and necessary for the 
Performance of the Voyage 
hereafter mentioned, shall, 
with the first fair Wind and 



bom tempo que Deos permit- Weather, which God shall 
tir despois da ddta_ da pre- send, after the Date of these 



sente t partird do porto de 
com todas as taes 
Jazendas e Mercadorias que 
os dittos homens de negocio 
ou os Seus Constituintes, en- 
trementes carregarao ou me~ 
terao abordo delle, e com elle 
em direitura dard a vela e 
aplicard ao como 

o vento e o tempo mdis favo - 
recirem ao ditto Navio na 
sua via gem ; e cm c keg an do 
tao pcrto do ditto lugar de 
elle o ditto Mestre 
ou os Seus Constituintts den- 
tro de I 'ias de tra- 

baho para se contdrem logo 
dtipors de til sua thegada, 
nao stimente dt scare gar ao y 
entrega*ao as dittas jazen- 
das e mcrcadoias metidas 
abordo do ditto Nrvzo ao 
Ssbrc ditto, avs dittos 
Jtomens de negocio, aos stus 
Feitores ou Constituinies, ou 



Presents, depart from the 
Port of with 

all such Goods and Merchan- 
dize as the said Merchants, or 
their Assigns, shall in the 
mean time lade and put on 
board of her, and therewith 
directly sail, and apply unto 
as Wind and 
Weather shall best serve for 
the said Ship to sail, and 
being arrived as near to the 
said Place of 

he the said Master, or As- 
signs shall and will, within 

working Days 
next from and after such her 
At rival to be accounted, not 
only unlade and deliver the 
said Goods and Merchandize 
put on board the said bhip at 

aforesaid, unto 
the said Merchants, their 
Factors, or Assigns, or some 
or one of them, in Safety, 



a algum ou algum dales a and well conditioned, the 
SalvamintQ e bim acondu Dangers of the Seas, and 



GRAM 

eionadas, salvo o risco dos 
mares, e o tolhimento de 
principes e Governaddres, 
mas tambem receberuo, tor- 
nardo a care gar, e tomardo 
aborao do ditto Navio, de e 
dos dittos homens de negccio, 
dos st us Feitdres ou Consti- 
tutes, ou de alguns ou aL- 
gum delles, to das as taesfa- 
zendas e mercadorias que 
elles ou qualquer delles all 
caregardo, ou meter ao abordo 
delie ate o comprimento in- 
teiro da carga do ditto Na- 
vio ; asaber ; tdnto quant o 
bem, se poder arrumdr de- 
baixo da cubertz no conves, 
t adidnte do mastro grdnde, 
Salvo o lugar para os man- 
time ntos, enxdrcias e apareL 
hos do ditto Navio, e os dit- 
tos dias de tra- 
bdlho sendo acabddos, ou o 
ditto navio stndo all mais 
depressa despachddo, o que 
prima ro succe »ir t elk o ditto 
Mestre ou os seus constitu- 
intes com a primeira boa oc- 
casido de tempo e vento favo- 
rdvel em dereitura navega- 
rdo e tor nardo a vir com o 
ditto Navio e a Sua Cdrgd, 
do ditto porto de descaregar, 
e recaregar de 
aqui dentro de 

dias de trabalho logo 
despois da entrada do ditto 
Navio dad a na alfdndega 
desta ditta eUe o 

ditto Mestre ou os sius Con- 
stituintes descaregarao e en- 
tregardo as dittas fazendas 
e mercadorias carregddas 
tbordo do ditto Navio ao 



M A R. 91 

Restraint of Princes and 
Rulers excepted, but also 
shall and will receive, relade, 
and take on board the said 
Ship, of and from the said 
Merchants, their Factors, or 
Assigns, or some or one of 
them, all such G<'ods and 
Merchandize, as they or any 
of them shall there please to 
lade and put on board her, ta 
the said Ship's full and com- 
pleat Lading; that is to say, 
as much as can conveniently 
be stowed in the whole Hold, 
and between Decks, afore 
the main mast, Room only 
reserved for the said Ship's 
Provisions, Tackle, and Ap- 
parel, and the said 
working Days being expired, 
or the said Ship there sooner 
dispatched, which first shall 
happen, he the said Master, 
or his Assigns, shall and will, 
with the then next Oppor- 
tunity of Wind and Wea- 
ther from her said unlading 
and reUding Port of 
aforesaid. directly sail, return, 
and come back with the said 
Ship and Lading unto the 
Port of and here 

within working 

Days next after the said Ship 
shall he entered in the Cus- 
tom-House ot this said 

he the said Master, or 
his Assigns, shall and will 
unlade, and deliver the said 
Goods and Merchandizes, 
laden on board the said Ship 
at her lading and re lading 
afoiesaid, unto the 
said Merchants, their Exectu 



9 » PORTU 

seu descmrregdr e recarregdr 
sob re ditto, aos dit- 
tos homens de negocio, e os 
seus TestamenteiroS) Admi- 
nistradores, ou Constituintes, 
a sahamento, salvo o risco 
dos mares e o tojhimento de 
Principes e Covernadoi es, e 
assim se acabara a ditta des~ 
tindda Vidgem Eos 

dittos homens de negocio con- 
ce'rtam, prometem, e otorgam 
por elles mesmos e qualquer 
delles, ou seus, e qualquer de 
seus Testamenteiros, Admi- 
nistr adores, e Constituintes 
poresta presente : que 
os seus Testamenteiros, Ad- 
mmistradores, Feitores ou 
Constituintes naosomtnte des- 
caregardo e recaregardo o 
ditto navio ao seuporto, de 
descaregdr, e recaregar de 
sobre ditto, e des pa- 
char do e descaregarao o mes- 
mo neste narna- 

neira e forma acima decla- 
rdda: e dentro dos tertos 
dias e tempos sobre nomed- 
,dos ; Mas tambem por in- 
teiro de to do o J>ete que se 
veneer, para se pagar e 
pedir por e durante esta pre- 
sente destinada viagtm ; bem 
e verdadeiramente pagardo 
ou cauti do que se pdgue ao 
ditto Mestre, aos seus Testa- 
menteiros, Administradores 
ou. Constituintes a 

somma de de din- 

keiro corrtnte de 
na maniira efo ma seguinte ; 
Asaber parte 

delle dentro em 
dids despots da entrdda do 



GUESE 

tors, Administrators, or As- 
signs, in safety, and well con- 
ditioned, the Dangers of the 
Seas, and Restraint of Princes 
and Rulers, excepted, and so 
end the said intended Voyage ; 
and the said Merchants do co- 
venant, promise, and grant, for 
themselves,andeither of them, 
their, and either of their Exe- 
cutors and Administrators, to 
and with the said Master, his 
Executors and Administra- 
tors, and Assigns, by these 
Presents, that their 

Executors, Administrators, 
Factors, or Assigns, shall and 
will not only unlade and re- 
lade the said Ship, at her un- 
lading and re lading Port of 
aforesaid, and dis- 
patch, and discharge the same 
at this , in the Man- 

ner and Form as above ex- 
pressed, and within the re- 
spective Days and Times 
above mentioned, but also 
shall and will, in full of all 
Freight to be due, payable, or 
demandable, for or during 
this present intended Voyage, 
well and duly pay, or cause 
to be paid, unto the said 
Master, his Executors, Ad- 
ministrators, or Assigns, 

the Sum of 
of lawful mo- 
ney of in the Man- 
ner and Form following : 
That is to say, 
Part thereof within 
D^ys after the said Ship shall 
be entered into the Custom 
House of Item* 
more thereof 



GRAMMAR 

ditto navio ddda na alfdn- within 
dega de Item 

mats dentro em 

dias proximos seguintes, 
t o rest ante do ditto frtte in- 
teiro dentro em dias 

logo despots da descdrga do 
ditto Navio anui em 

sohre ditto, £ acordase 
reciprocamente por e entre 
dmbas as partes por clles 
mesmos, os seus particuldres 
Testamenteiros, e Adminis- 
tr adores que to dos os gdstos 
dos portos que se vend rem 
para pagdrse ou pedirse, du- 
rante esta presente destindda 
vidgem ; serdo pdgos e satis - 
feitos na maneira e forma 
seguinte ; As a be r 
delles, pellos dittos homens de 
negScio ou sens Testamen- 
teiros ou Constituintes : 
.Afe'm disso, por esta se con- 
certa que poderd sir e seja 
licito aos, e pellos dittos ho- 
mens de negocio, os seus fei- 
tores y ou Constituintes de 
reter o ditto navio em de- 
tenca ao seu por to, descarga 
e recdrga sobre ditta, e tam- 
bem em .... sobre ditto, 
tanto tempo e tdntos 'dias que 
se requeirdo, alem dos dias 
certos acima apontddos, sdlvo 
que nao pdssem 
dias por intiiro ; Elles os 
dittos homens de negocio, os 
seus Feitores, Constituintes 
por cdda hum e cada tdl din 
pagan do ao ditto Mestre ou 
aos seus Constituintes de dia 
em dia, como mesmo se ven- 
eer para se pagdr, qualquer 
evusa sobrtditta em contrario 



93 
Days then 
next following, and the re- 
maining part of the said whole 
Freight within Days 

next after the said Ship shall 
be delivered after lading here 
at aforesaid; and 

it is mutually agreed by and 
between the said Parties to 
these Presents, for themselves, 
their several Executors and 
Administrators, That all Port 
Charges which shall grow 
due, payable, or demandable, 
during this present intended 
Voyage, shall be paid and 
satisfied in the Manner and 
Form following; That is to 
say, thereof by the 

said Merchants, their Execu- 
tors, Factors, or Assigns, and 
the other thereof 

by the said Master, his Exe- 
cutors or Assigns : Further, 
it is hereby agreed, that it 
shall and may be lawful unto 
and for the said Merchants, 
their Factors, or Assigns, to 
keep the said Ship in Demur- 
rage at her unlading and re- 
lading Port above mentioned, 
and also at afore- 

said, over and above the re- 
spected Days aforementioned, 
such other Time and Num- 
ber of Days as will be requi- 
site, so as the same exceed not 
Days in the whole, 
they the said Merchants, 
their Factors, for each and 
every such Day, paying unto 
the said Master, or his Assigns 
Day by Day, 
where the same shall grow 
due and payable, any thing 



g4 ' PO-RTU 

ndo obstante ; e pillo com- 
priminto de todas, e de cdda, 
huma das cousas acima de- 
clarddas, as quaes por parte 
e pillo que toca ao ditto 
Mestre, aos sius Testamen- 
teiros, Administr adores ou 
Constituintes e cdda hum 
delles sao e devem de set avi- 
das, tidas, observddas e com- 
pridas, o ditto Mestre se 
cbriga a si mismo, os seus 
Tes lament eiros, e Adminis- 
tradores, juntamente com o 
ditto Navio, o seu frete, en- 
xdrcias e aparelhos aos dittos 
homens de negocio, aos seus 
Testamentiiros, Administr a- 
dores e Constituintes, e cdda 
hum delles na soma ou pina 
de dinhiiro corrinte de 

para se pagdr bem t verda- 
reirdmente por est a presente, 
e tambem pello compriminto 
de to das e de cdda huma das 
cousas sobre dittas, os quaes 
por parte e pello que toca aos 
dittos homens de negocio, aos 
seus Testamentiiros Admi- 
nistradores, Constituintes ou 
qualquer delles, sao e devem 
de sir guardadas, pdgas, e 
Comp ridas ; os di ttos h omens 
de negocio se obrigao a si 
mismo s, os sius Testamen- 
teiros, e Administr adores, 
junta e separadaminte com 
a suas fazindas que se care- 
garao abordo do ditto Navio 
nest a presente destindda vid- 
gem, ao ditto Mestre aos 
seus Testamentiiros, Admi- 
nistr adores e Constituintes, 
e a cdda hum delles, na se- 
melhdnte Soma da pina de 



G U E S E 

aforesaid to the contrary not- 
withstanding ; and for the 
Performance of all and sin- 
gular the Premises, which on 
the Part and Rehalf of the 
said Master, his Executors, 
Administrators, and Assigns, 
and every of them, are and 
ought to be well and truly 
holden, observed, and per- 
formed, the said Master doth 
bind and oblige himself, his 
Executors, and Administra- 
tors, together with the said 
Ship and her Freight, Tackle 
and Apparel unto the said 
Merchants, their Executors, 
Administrators, and Assigns, 
and every of them, in the 
Sum or Penalty of 
Pounds of lawful Money of 
well and truly to 
be paid by these Presents, 
and likewise for the Per- 
formance of all and singular 
the Premises, which on the 
Part and Behalf of the said 
Merchants their Executors, 
Administrators, and Assigns, 
or any of them, are and ought 
to be kept, paid and perform- 
ed, the said Merchants do bind 
and oblige themselves, their 
Executors, and Administra- 
tors, jointly and severally, to- 
gether with their Goods, to be 
laden on board the said Ship, 
this present intended Voyage, 
unto the said Master, his 
Executors, Administrators, 
and Assigns, and every of 
them, in the like Sum and 
Penalty of of 

like lawful Money of 

also well and truly 



GRAM 

de Semelhante din- 
heir o corrente de 
para sir pugo Oem e verda- 
deimente par csta pr e shite ; 
Em Testemunha do que as 
partes SobreJittas assindr ao 
e Seidrao reciprocamente es- 
tas presentes Cartas de fre- 
tamento contratddas, ao dia 
e anno primeiro acima dec la- 
rddo. 

T.B. 
Sellado e entregue 
diante de 
A. B. C. D. 



MAR. 95 

to be paid by these Presents. 
In Witness whereof, the Par- 
ties aforesaid to these present 
Charter-parties indented, 
have interchangeably put 
their Hands and Seals the 
Day and Year first above 
written. 

T.B. 
Sealed and delivered in 
the Presence of 
A. B. C. D. 



Ap61ice de Seguro; 

Em o Nome de Deos, 
Amen, 

Tan to no sen proprio no me, 
como, por, ou em o nome, ou 
no?nes de todos e cad a pes s 6a 
pu pessoas a quern o mesmo 
pertencer, possa ou poderd 
pertencer, em parte ou em 
todo, faz o Seguro, causa, 
asi mesmo e a eiies, e a cada 
hum delles, de assegurdrse, 
per dido s ou ndo perdidos 

sobre qualquer 
genero de fazendas e Merca- 
dorias quaesque'r, carrega- 
das ou para se carregdrem 
abordo do bom Navio por 
nome do porte de 

toneldJas, deque 
hi Me st re debdlxo de Deos 
P. M. ou quern quer que for 
por Mistre do ditto Navio, 
§u o Mestre, dtlle se nomee 
ou nomeard ; principidndo 
a aventura sobre as dittas 
fazendas t Mercadonas de t e 



A Policy of Assurance, 

In the Name of God, 
Amen, as well 

in his own Name, as for and in 
theName and Names of all and 
every other Person and Per- 
sons to whom the same doth, 
mav or shall appertain, in 
Part, or in all, does make As- 
surance, and causes himself 
and them, and every of them, 
to be insured, lost, or not lost 
upon any kind 
of Goods and Merchandize 
whatsoever, laden or to be 
laden aboard the good Ship 
called the Burthen 

Tons, or there- 
abouts ; whereof P. M. is 
Master, under God, for this 
present Voyage 
or whosoever else shall go 
for Masier in the said Ship, 
or by whatsoever Name or 
Names the said Ship, or 
the Master thereof, ' is or 
shall be named or called; 



96 P O R T U 

logo despots de carregallas 
abbrdo do ditto Navio 
e assim se continuard e f- 
card ate que o ditto Navio 
com as dittas fazendas e 
Mercadorias quaes quer eke- 
gar 4 as mesmasaki 

descarregddas em Salvamen- 
to ; e sera licit o parao ditto 
navio, nesta vidgem, depardr 
e deter se em qudesquer pbr- 
tos, ou lug ares sem 

prejuizo a este Seguro. As 
dittas fazendas e Mercado- 
rias por concerto, sao, e se~ 
rdo av alia das em 
Sem que se*de Sutra conta 
dill asmSsmas, tocdnte as 
Aveniuras e riscos com que 
nos os Seguraddres nos con- 
tentamos e que tomdmos sdbre 
nos nesta vidgem ; Ellas sdo 
dos Mares, das ndos degue'r- 
ra, defdgo, inimigos, Corsa- 
rios, Ladroes, Roubaddres, 
Alijamentos oufazindas per- 
didas e deitddasno mar, lettras 
de Marca, e contra Marca, 
sobresdltos,tomadiasylo Mar, 
citacoes, tolhimentos e dettn- 
fas de to dos os Reys, Prin- 
cipes e povos de nag do, con- 
dicao ou qualiddde qualquer, 
barratria e contrdstes enga- 
nbsos do mtstre e dos Marin- 
heir os, e de to dos os outros 
perigos; perdas e desastres 
que ja vierao ou que virdo, 
ou prejuizo, desaproveita- 
mento ou d-dno das dittas fa- 
zendas e mercadorias, ou de 
algua parte dellas. E se 
aedso succedir alguma per da 
©u desventura, serd licito aos 
jts seguraddres, Feitdrcs, Ser~ 



GUESE 

beginning the Adventure 
upon the said Goods and 
Merchandise from and im- 
mediately following the Lad- 
ing thereof aboard the said 
Ship and so shall 

continue and endure until the 
said Ship* with the said Goods 
and Merchandise whatsoever 
shall be arrived and 

the same there safely landed ; 
and it shall be lawful for the 
said Ship in this Voyage to 
stop and stay at any Port or 
Places without 

prejudice to this Assurance. 
The said Goods and Mer- 
chandise by Agreement, are 
and shall be valued at 

without further Ac- 
count to be given for the 
same, touching the Adven- 
tures and Perils which we the 
Assurersarecontentedtobear, 
and do take upon us in this 
Voyage ; they are of the Seas, 
Men of War, Fire, Enemies, 
Pirates, Rovers, Thieves, 
Jetsons, Letters of Marque 
and Counter-marque, Sur- 
prisals, Takings of Sea, Ar- 
rests, Restraints, and Detain- 
ments of all Kings, Princes, 
and People of what Na- 
tion, Conditions, or Quality 
soever, Baratry of the Master 
and Mariners, and of all other 
Perils, Losses and Misfor- 
tunes, that have or shall come 
to the Hurt, Detriment, or 
Damage of the said Goods 
and Merchandise, or any part 
thereof; and in Case of any 
Loss or Misfortune, it shall 
be lawful to the assured *ac- 



GRAMMAR. 97 

vos cConstituintesde manddr tors, Servants, and Assigns, 



fazer diligencias e trabalhar 
por, em, e dcerca da defiza, 
Salvamento, e recobramento 
das dittas faztndas e merca- 
dorias, ou de alguma parte 
del las semprejuizo diste Se- 
guro, aos gdstos do que nos 
os asseguradores contribui- 
r ernes cada hum confer me a 
Sua quantia nelle assegu- 
rdda ; e nos os Assegura- 
dores es tamos de acordo e 
concerto que e'sta escritura e 
segiiro terd tdnta forca 6 
valor como a mats authintica 
Apolice ou Escritura de Se- 
guro ddntes feita em qual- 
quer parte de 

, E as sim nos os 
Asseguradores somos con- 
tentes e poresta prometemos e 
nos obrigdmos cada hum por 
sua propria parte, os nossos 
Herdeiros, Testamenteiros, 
Administr adores e Consti- 
tuintes pillo verdadeiro com- 
primento das cousas acima 
declarddas, confessdndo que 
estamos pdgos e satisfeitos do 
que se nos dive dconta deste 
Seguro. 

Em testeinunha do que nos 
os Seguradores, assinamos ao 
pi deste, com as quantias as- 
segurddas, &c. 

JLu A. B. sou contentecom 
este Seguro por cem iivros 
Ester L L. em de £. ioo. 



to sue, labour, and travel, 
for, in, and about the De- 
fence, Safeguard, and Reco- 
very of the said Goods and 
Merchandise or any part 
thereof, without Prejudice to 
this Assurance, to the Charges 
whereof, we the Assurers 
will contribute each one ac- 
cording to the Rate and 
Quantity of his Sum herein 
assured : And it is agreed by 
us the Insurers, that this 
Writing and Assurance shall 
be of as much Force and Ef- 
fect, as the surest Policy or 
Writing of Assurance here- 
tofore made in 
or elsewhere in 
and so we the Assurers are 
contented, and do hereby 
promise and bind ourselves, 
each one for his own Part, 
our Heirs, Executors, and 
Assigns, to the Assured, 
their Executors, Administra- 
tors, and Assigns, for the 
true Performance of the Pre- 
mises, confessing ourselves 
paid the Consideration due 
unto us for this Assurance, 
by In Witness 

whereof, we the Assurers 
have subscribed our Names 
and Sums assured in 

I A. B. am contented with 
this Assurance for One hun- 
dred Pounds. Witness my 
Hand the 15th oV 

March, 1811. 



> 



LOO 



Conhecimento. 
DIGO'tu T,B % dc 



*G 



A Bill of Lading. 
SHIPPED, by the Grace 



Q 8 PORTU 

Mistrt ou Capitdo que 
sou do Navio que Deos salve 
por Nome que ao 

presinte estd surto e anco- 
rddo no por to de 
para com o favor de Deos 
seguir a sua vidgem ao por to 
de aonde he minha 

direita descdrga, que he ver- 
dade, que recebi, e tenho car- 
regddo dentro do ditto Na- 
vio debdixo de cuberta en- 
xuta e btm acondiciondda de 
Marcado coma- 
marca de fo'ra, o qual me 
obrigo o prometo, levdndome 
Deos a bom salvamento e 
ditto Navio ao ditto Porto, 
de entregdr em no me do so- 
heditto a T. M. 
auzente a quern seus poderes 
tiver pagdndome de 

frete para assim com- 

prir eguardar, obrigo minha 
pessoa, e bems e ditto Navio ; 
em ctrtesa do qual dei tres 
conhecimentos de hum theor, 
assinddos por ?nim ou por 
meu Escri-vao ; hum com- 
prido os dutros nao vdlhao ; 
feito em 14 de 

Margo de 1811 Annos* 



Ignoro conteudo. 



GUESE 

of God, in good Order, and 
well-conditioned, by 

in and upon the good 
Ship called the 
whereof is Master under God, 
for this present Voyage 

and now riding at 
Anchor in and, 

by God's Grace, bound for 

to say 
being marked and numbered 
as in the Margin, and are to 
be delivered in like good 
Order, and well-conditioned, 
at the aforesaid Port of 

the Danger of the 
Seas only excepted, unto Mr. 
or his Assigns, he 
or they paying for the said 
Goods with 

Primage and Average, as is 
accustomed. In Witness 
whereof, the Master and 
Purser of the said Ship has 
affirmed to three Bills of 
Lading, all of this Tenor and 
Date ; the one of which three 
Bills being accomplished, the 
other two to stand void. 
And so God send the good 
Ship to her desired Port in 
Safety. Amen. Dated in 
the 14th of March 
1811. 

Inside and Contents un- 
known. 



Instrument o ou Escritura de 
Compromisso. 



A Letter of Licence. 



A TO DOS qudntos este TO all People, to whom 

presinte Instrumznto ou this present Writing shall 

Escritura de Compromisso come, We the Creditors of 

wircm, de nos Acreddres de G. M. of 



GRAM 
G. Af. Negociante de 

Saude ; Como o ditto 
G. M> ao presente fica de- 
vendo e em dereito dive a 
nos os Acredores dille ditto 
G. M. van as e divers as som- 
mas de Dinhiiro, fee. As 
quaes em rasao de muitas 
dividas e algumas deltas mui 
grdndes, que tambim em di- 
rcito se I he divem a ille, nao 
se pbdem arrecaddr sem al- 
guma dilacdo de tempo, e 
por sir em algumas dellas ir- 
recuperdveis sem demdnda, 
elle estd por bra muito desa- 
bilitddo de fazir pagamento 
a nbs os seus Acredores da 
no ssi intiira e just a divida 
conjorme a sua vontdde e 
desijo; a respeito de que, 
elle nos pede com todo o en- 
carecimento que nos os dittos 
Acredores, e cada hum de 
nbsfossemos servidos de ddr 
e concedir a elle o Ditto G. 
M. a os seus Testamentiiros, 
Administr adores, ou Consti- 
tuintcs, tdnta I argues a ou 
dilacdo de timpo pillo paga- ' 
minto e satisfagdo de nossas 
dividas par ticuldres, que Ike 
parecir jus to, e rasao pillo 
alcdnce e cobrdnca das dittas 
dividas : A saber, que nos e 
cada hum de nos Jicdssemos 
contintes a tomdr e receber 
de nossas dividas intiiras 
em para se repartirem 

em partes, para se 

pagdrem em paga- 

mintos diver sos ma maneira 
e forma Seguznte : Asabir r o 
prxmeiro pagaminto dilla ha 
de ser e o res to pagdr- 



MAR. 99 

Merchant, send greeting. 
Whereas the said G. M. at 
this present Time, does stand 
indebted, and does justly owe 
unto us the said Creditors of 
him the said G. M. divers 
and sundry Sums of Money, 
&c. which, by reason of many 
Debts, and some of them very 
great, that are likewise justly 
owing unto him, and cannot 
be had or recovered without 
some Respite of Time, and 
some of them not without 
Suit, he is very much dis- 
abled at present to make 
Payment unto us the said 
Creditors, our whole and just 
Debt, as he seems willing and 
desirous ; in consideration 
whereof, he instantly desires 
us, That we the said Credi- 
tors, and every one of us, 
would be pleased to give and 
grant unto the said G. M. his 
Executors, Administrators, 
or Assigns, such Liberty or 
Respite of Time, for the 
Payment and Satisfaction of 
our several Debts, as he 
thinks reasonable for the ob~ 
taining, getting, and reco- 
vering of the said Debts: 
viz. That we and every one 
of us would be content to 
take, and accept of our whole 
Debts in to be di- 

vided in Parts, to 

be paid at several 

Payments, in Manner and 
Form following: viz. The 
first Payment thereof to be 
and the Residue to 
be paid at next 

in full Payment and Satiifac- 

2 



10© 

se-hd em proximo 

pella inteira pdga e 
Satisfacdo das dittas dividas 
especejicddas ; E pello mdis 
ptendrio comprimento dos 
vdrios pagamintos sobre- 
dittos em tdlmaniira e forma 
como acima se limita. e de- 
cldra ; ao verdadeiro intent o 
desias presentes elle o ditto 
G. M. ao ou antes do 
sera obrigddo a nos os dittos 
acredores na mesma confor- 
midade, por huma obrigacdo 
que sefard na melhor forma 
de dereiio com todos, e cada 
hum dos pagamentos, na ma- 
niira acima limit dda, em hum 
certo lugdr ou lug are s con- 
venientes de nos os dittos 
Acredores nomeados, eapina 
de cada huma das obrigacoes 
ha de ser dobrdda da Somma 
inteira, inclusanella mesma, 
para ser a nos entregue e a 
cada hum de nos, os nossos 
Testamenteiros, ou Consti- 
tuent es, ao ou antes do 

proximo Segumte da data 
dista ; por esta causa Sdiba- 
se ; que nos os dittos Acre- 
dores aqui a baixo assinddos, 
e cada hum de nos para si em 
particular, e por sens Testa- 
menteiros, Administr adores e 
Constituintes ao respiito do 
emcima especifcddo e decla- 
rddo, por estes presentes, de 
vontade propria, consenti- 
fnos, contratdmos, promete- 
mos e concorddmos, ao e com 
o ditto G. M. ou seus Testa- 
menteiros, Administr adores 
e Constituintes por isles pre- 
sentes que nos os dittos Acre- 



PORTUGUESE 



tion of the said several Debts: 
And for the more full Per- 
formance of the said several 
Payments aforesaid, in such 
Manner and Form as is above 
limited and declared, accord- 
ing to the true meaning of 
these Presents, he the said 
G. M. shall and will, at, or 
before the become 

bound unto us the said Cre- 
ditors respectively, by one 
Obligation in due Form of 
Law to be made, including all 
and every one of the Payments 
in such Sort as is above li- 
mited at some convenient 
Place or Places by 

each of us the said Creditors 
to be nominated and ap- 
pointed, and the Penalty of 
every Obligation to be dou- 
bled the whole Sum included 
in the Condition of the same 
to be delivered unto us, and 
every one of us, our Execu- 
tors or Assigns, at or before 
the next ensuing the 

Date hereof : Know ye there- 
fore, that we the said Cre- 
ditors, whose Names are here 
under-written, and every one 
of us for his own Part, and 
for his Executors, Adminis- 
trators and Assigns, for the 
Consideration above specified 
and expressed, do by these 
Presents willingly consent, 
covenant, promise and agree 
to and with the said G. M. 
his Executors, Administra- 
tors, and Assigns, to accept 
of the said G. M. his Execu- 
tors and Assigns, all and 
every of the said Debts and 



GRAMMAR. 



Jo res, e eada hum de nos, os, 
nossos Testamenteiros, Ad- 
mini sir adores e Constituintes, 
aceitaremos do ditto G, M, 
dos sens Testamenteiros, Ad- 
•mini str adores e Constitu- 
intes, to das e eada huma de 
tdes dividas e quantias de 
dinheiro do ditto G. M. a nos 
e eada hum de nos, devidas e 
vencidas em virtude de tdes 
obrigacoens, Segurdnfa ou 
Segurancas sobredittas, para 
se pagdrem em tdl modo e 
maneira, e aos tdes dias e 
tempos que acima se limit ao e 
requerem. E a/em disso, que 
nos os dittos Acredores e 
eada hum de nos, ou nossos e 
eada hum de nossos Testa- 
menteiros Administr adores e 
Constituintes, em conformi- 
ddde a entrega da ditta Obti* 
gacao a nos e a eada hum de 
ntissos Testamenteiros, Ad- 
ministr adores, e Constitu- 
intes ao custo do ditto G. M. 
os seus Testamenteiros, Ad- 
ministr adores, e Constitu- 
intes, Sellaremos, assinare- 
mos, e na melhor forma e di- 
reito eniregaremos ao ditto 
G. M. a nossa gerdl e suffi- 
eiente descdrga, para ser ren- 
dida por elle o ditto G. M. 
ou seus Testamenteiros, Admi- 
nistradores, e Constituintes, 
a data e a limitacdo, antes 
do dia e data desta abriga- 
^ao nova; em testemunka do 
que temos assinddo e sellddo 
esta. 

Datdda aos 15 de Maio 
de 1813. 



101 

Sums of Money by the said 
G. M. unto us, and every 
one of us, owing, and paying 
upon such Obligations, As- 
surance and Assurances, as 
aforesaid, to be paid in such 
Manner and Sort, and at such 
Days and Times, as is above 
limited and required. And 
further, that we the said Cre- 
ditors, and every of us, our, 
and every of our Executors, 
Administrators, and Assigns 
respectively, upon the De- 
livery of the said Obligation 
to us, and to every of us, and 
every of our Executors, Ad- 
ministrators, and Assigns, 
shall and will, at the Charge 
of the said G. M. his Exe- 
cutors, Administrators, and 
Assigns, seal, subscribe, and, 
in due form of Law, deliver 
to the said G. M. our suffi- 
cient general release, for 
him, his Executors, Admi- 
nistrators, or Assigns, to bear 
Date and Limitation, before 
the Day of the Date oi this 
new Obligation to be made 
for the Debt. In Witness 
whereof, we have hereunto 
set. our Hands and Seals. 

Dated the 15th of May 
1813, &c. 



102 



PORTUGUESE 



Letra de Cambio. 



Bills of Exchange. 



Londres, 
5 deJunho, 1811. 



por 300 Milreis. 



A VISTA desta minha 
primeira Letra de Cambio, 
pagard Vm. ao Senhor T. M. 
ou Ordem a somma de tre- 
zentos Milreis em dinheiro 
corrente de Portugal, Valor 
rectbido do Senhor T. D. 
ccmo por aviso de 
Seu Venerador e Creddo. 

Ao Senhor T. M. Nego- 
ciante em Lisboa. 

T.M. 



London, 
5th of June, 181 



for 300 Milreas. 



AT Sight of this my first 
Bill of Exchange, please to 
pay co Mr. T. M. or Order, 
the Sum of Three Hundred 
Milreas in current Money 
of Portugal, Value received 
of Mr. T. D. placing it to 
Account, as per Advice, 
from, Sir, 

Yours, H. S. 

To Mr. T. M. Merchant 
in Lisbon. T. M. 



Lisboa, 
7 de Junho 181 



250/. Esterl. 



A QUARENTA bias 
Fist a desta minha Segunda 
Letra de Cambio, fa primeira 
nao sendo pdgaj pagard Vm. 
ao Senhor F. G. & Com- 
panhia, ou Ordem a Somma 
de dozentas e Cinquenta livras 
Esterlinas em moeda corrente 
de Inglaterra, valor recebido 
do Senhor J. D. como por 
aviso de 

Seu Venerador e Creddo. 
U.S. 

Ao Senhor T. B. Nego- 
ciante em Londres. 



Lisbon, for 250/. Sterling. 

7th of June, 1811. 

AT Forty days Sight, of 
this my second Bill of Ex- 
change, my first and third 
not being paid, please to pay 
to Mr. F. G. and Company, 
or Order, the Sum of two 
Hundred and fifty Pounds 
Sterling, in current Money 
of England, Value received 
of Mr. J. D. and place it to 
account, as per Advice, from 
Sir, Yours, H. S. 

To Mr. T. B.»Merchant 
in London. F. P. 



GRAMMAR. 



*°3 



Protesto de buma Letra de 
Cambio. 



SA1BAM todos a quern 
est a presente escntura tocar 
que aos do mzz 

de, do anno de 
a requenmento de P. C. Ne- 
gociante de eu 

M. M Tabaliao de nctas ju- 
rddo e admitido ptlla auto- 
rid ade del Rti, &c. fm a 
cdsa da mordda dp Senhor 
T. B. sobre quern a Letra de 
Cambio acima referida he 
sacdda, e mostrii a original 
ao ditto T. B. requerendo a 
sua aceitafao delta: o qual 
me respondeo que nao aceita- 
ria a ditta Letra por kumas 
rasoens que escreveria ao 
Senhor T. P. sacador ; pella 
qual rasao eu o ditto Taba- 
liao protestei, por este pre- 
sente protesto, tdnto contra 
o ditto F. P o sacador como 
tambem contra o ditto T. B. 
sobre quern hi sac a da, de- 
mdis contra todas as outras 
pessoas, Endossadores, ou 
outras nil la inter essddas, 
por todos os Cdmbios, Re- 
cambio s, ddnos e inter esses 
qudesquir : Em presenga de 
H. y, S. T. chamados por 
Testemunhas a este presente 
acto,feito no meu Escritorio 
em o dia e anno acima de- 
clarado. 

M» N. Notario Publico. 



A Protest of a Bill of Ex- 
change. 

KN'OW all Persons whom 
this piesent Writing may 
concern, that the of 

in the Year at 

the Request of Mr. P. C. of 
Merchant, I, M. N- 
Public Notary, sworn and 
admitted by authority of his 
most sacred Majesty, did go 
to trie Dwell in?- house or 
Habitation of Mr. T. B. 
upon whom the above named 
Bill of Exchange is -drawn, 
and shewed the Original unto 
the said Mr. T. B. demand- 
ing his Acceptance of the 
same, who answered me he 
should no* acsept the same 
Bill, for some Reasons he 
should write Mr. F. P. the 
Drawer, Wherefore I the 
said Notary did protest, and 
by these Presents protest, as 
well against the said F. P. the 
Drawer, as likewise against 
the said T. B. upon whom 
it is drawn ; as also against 
all other Persons, Indorsers, 
or others therein concerned, 
for all Changes, Rechanges, 
Damages and Interest what- 
soever, in Presence of H- J. 
and S. T. called for Wit- 
nesses to this present Act, 
done in my Office in 
the Day and Year above men- 
tioned. 

M. N. Notary Public. 



104 PORTUGUESE 

Formas de Recibos. Forms of Receipts, 






Dinheiro reeebido por inteiro. Money received in Full. 



Recebi, do Senhor Thomas 
Crew, Seis Livras Sete Shu 
lins Seis penny s res to de 
todas as contas, com o ditto. 
i° de Janeiro. 



Dinheiro reeebido por Conta 
de meu Amo. 

Recebi do Sr. Jonas Lee, 
quatro Livras e Cinco Shilins 
por Conta de meu amo Moises 
Trust. 

W.S. 
82 ydt Fever eiro 1811. 



Received ist January 
181 i s of Mr. Thomas Crew, 
Six Pounds Seven Shillings 
and Sixpence, in full of all 
Demands per 



For another's Use. 



Received 22d February, 
l8li, of Mr. Jonas Lee, 
Four Pounds Five Shillings, 
for the Use of my Master 
Moses Trust, per 

W. S. 



Dinheiro reeebido a conta. Money received in Part. 



Recebi a 30 de Marco ; 
1811, do Sr. Jacinto Cook, 
Cinco Livras Cinco Shilins, 
& conta de dozeLivras e dez 
Shilins, por Conta de meu 
pai Antonio Truelove, 
30 de Mar go 1811, 



Dinheiro reeebido a. c6nta de 
Contas que nao estaoajus- 
tadas. 

Recebi) da Senhor a Mar- 
tka Rich, por maos de Pedro 
Cornet, onze Livras d Conta t 
24 de AMI 1811. 



Received 30th of March, 
1811, of Mr. James Cook, 
Five Pounds Ten Shillings, 
in Part of Twelve Pounds 
Ten Shillings, for my Father 
Anthony True-love, per 



Money received on Accounts 
unsettled. 



Received 24th April 
1811, of Mrs. Martha Rich, 
by the Hands of Peter Cor- 
net, Eleven Pounds on Ac- 
count, 



GRAMMAR. 



105 



Quando hum Rol ou Conta When a Bill is paid in Full* 
se paga por inteiro. 

Recebi, a 15 de Mayo, Received 15th May, 1811, 

j8n, o empo'rte d'esta Conta, the full Contents hereof, 



Ouando se paga dinheiro a When a Bill is paid in Part. 
Conta de hum rol. 

Recebi, Sete livras a conta Received 26th June, 

destt Rol !8n, Seven Pounds in Part 

6 de Junho de 1811. hereof, 



Notas ou Obrigacoens que 
faz hum Homem quando 
totna dinheiro imprestado. 

Londres, 4 de Junho, 1811. 

Eu abaixo Jlrmddo pro- 
meto, pagar ao Sr. E D. 
Banaueiro do Thtsouro de 
sua Majestade, do Excise^ ou 
a sua ordem, quarenta dias 
despois da data desta obriga- 
cao quatro centas e trinta 
livras por valor recebido 

Chris tovao Wade, 

^•43° 



Promissory Notes for a 
Mans Self. 

London, June 4th, i8u. 
I Promise to pay to Mr. 
Edward Draper, Cashier of 
his Majesty's Revenue of 
Excise, or Order, forty Days 
after Date, Four Hundred 
and Thirty Pounds, Value 
received 

Christopher Wade. 

^•480 



Eu abaixo firmado pro- 
meto pagar ao Sr. Paulo 
Barker ou a sua ordem em 
sendo requerido, trezentas, e 
noventa, e quatro livras dous 
Shilins e Seis pennys por 
valor recebido hoje 17 de 
Julho, 1811. 

Philip Venham, 

£- 394 2 6 



I Promise to pay to Paul 
Barker, Esq. or Order, on 
demand, Three hundred and 
ninety-four Pounds, Two 
Shillings and Six-pence, 
Value received this 17th of 
July, 1811. 

Philip Venham. 

£- 394 2 6 



io<5 PORTU 

EU abaixo firmado pro- 
mtto pagar ao Sr. J. T. ou 
d sua ordem % quarentae move 
livras, e tres Shilins 6 mezes 
despois da data desta obriga- 
fao, por valor recebido em 
verdads do que asignei est a 
24 de Agosto 1811. 

£•49 3 o 

N. B. Observese que em 
notas ou obrigafiens stmpre 
se decldra a soma recbida 
stm a qual nao sao de nen- 
humaforga nemtem Author i- 
dade. 



GUESE 

I Promise to pay to Mr. 
J. T. or Order, Forty nine 
Pounds Three Shillings, six 
Months after Date, Value re- 
ceived. Witness my Hand 
this 24th of August, 1811. 
William Jones. 

'/"•49 3 o 



N. B. Observe in Pro- 
missory Notes that the woids 
" Value received" arc men- 
tioned, or they are of no 
Force. 



GRAMMAR. 107 



A NEW 

P O RTUGUESE 

GRAMMAR. 



PART IV. 

containing 

Several Useful and Entertaining Passages, 

collected from the best 

PORTUGUESE WRITERS. 



T^NTRE os bons ditos de Souz^ni, poeta Persi- 
ano, se conta, que bebendo com outro poeta, 
seu amigo, certo licor, se queixava, de que era mu- 
ito quente & dizendolhe, amigo, pobre de ti que 
daqui a poucos dias te farao beber no inferno agoas 
suifureas, & ardentes, que te abrazarao as entran- 
has ; nao importa, replicou Souzeni; bastara que 
me lembre algum dos teus versos, que ellas se farao 
mais frias, que neve. 



Catharina Parthenay, sobrinha da c61ebre Anna 
Partbenay, deu esta bella resposta a Henrique IV. 
" Saiba vossa mag de queeu sou muito pobre para ser 
" sua consorte; e que no mesmo tempo descendo de 
" huma familia muitc illustre, para ser sua dama." 



108 PORTUGUESE 

Huma Princ£za Catholica, e de rara virtude ven- 
do reduzklo o Marechal de Saxonia as agonias da 
morte, disse, que era para sentir o nao se poder re- 
zar hum Deprofundis pella alma de hum que tinha 
feitONcantar tantos Te Dewri. 



A Dom Christovao de Moura, Marquez de Cas- 
tello Rodrigo, e Vice Rey de Portugal por Dom 
Philipe Terceiro, indo por huma sal a do Pa<;o de 
Lisboa, hum soldado honrado, que" tinha bem ser- 
vido na India, Ihe dava hunrmemorial, e pedia, que 
se lembrasse dos seus pap&s, porque havia largo 
tempo, que andava pretendendo. Respondeo-lhe 
o Marquez, que havia muita Gente para despachar, 
e nao se podiao despachar todos com brevidade; o 
soldado adiantando o passo se atravessou diante sem 
descomposi^o, e fazendo parar o Vice Rey lhe disse 
com grande confian9&; " senhor Dom Christovao 
^^^^despache Vs. os homens, e deixe a Gente." O Mar- 
quez aceitou o memorial, e o despachou no mesmo 
dia. 



Mandando hum Fidalgo em Lisboa abrir em hu- 
ma ruaos Alicerces para se fazerem humas casas, 
sem licen9a da camera, passando por alii o procurador 
da cidade> poz pena aos. officiaes, que nao trabal- 
liassem na obra sem licen^a dos Vereadores ; e os 
officiaes dizendo-o ao Fidalgo mandou-lhes elle que 
nao deixassem de trabalhar, e que nao fiz^ssem ca« 
so do que dizia aquelle villao ruim; tornando o 
procurador da cidade por alii e achando os officiaes 
trabalhando, mandou que dessem com elles no tron- 
co ; e nao fait and o quern lhe contasse o que o Fi- 
dalgo dissera, teve-o em 61ho ; e no tempo que el- 
le hia atravessando pello Rocio para sua casa, sahio- 
lhe ao caminho a cavallo, e com huma lan$a que 
levava, dando na sua sombra, lhe disse : porque o 



GRAMMAR. 109 

que dissestes, foi em minha ausencia, ddu em vos- 
sa sombra ; se mo tivesseis dito no rosto, dera na 
vossa pessoa. 



Abou Hanifah, o mais celebre doutor dos Mus- 
sulmanes, tendo recebido huma bofetada, disse ao 
que o tinha insultado : eu poderia vingarme, pa- 
gandovos na mesma moeda; mas nao o quero fazer. 
Poderia accusarvos ao calife : mas, nao quero ser ac- 
cusador. Poderia nas minhas ora^oens queixarme a 
Deos d^staarTronta; mas nem isso quero fazer. Por 
iim poderia pedir a Deos, que se quer no dia do juizo 
vos castigasse ; porem o mesmo senhor me livre de 
semeihante pensamento; mas antes, se succedesse 
que neste iKstante chegasse aquelle formidavel dia; 
e seaminhaintercessao tivesse alguma efficaciapara 
com Deos- nao quizera por companheiro senao a 
vos para entrar no Paraiso. Que admirdvel exem- 
plo para os Christaos aprenderem a perdoar as inju- 
rias ! 



Da Peregrinacao. 

Passadas que se dao peregrinando. sao degraos para 
a easa do desengano. Das suas fontes sahem os rios 
muito pequenos, e crescem correndo, e levao mares 
ao mar. Homens, que da sua terra nao sahem, sao 
navios, que acabao no estaleiro. A sabedoria como 
vinda do ceo, anda neste globo terrestre perigrina ; 
nao he facil achala senao peregrinando ; errando por 
este mundo, se apprende a nao cometter erros. Va- 
pores, que na terra eram lodo, apartados della se 
taztfm estrellas. " Aos homens que querem luzir, 
deve a patria servir, como aos planetas o horizonte, 
de bei'90, para ensayo do seu luzimento, longe do 
ponto ortivo, e remontados a mais altaregiao, apurao 
as influencias, e duplicao as luzes. Que nome teriao 



110 PORTUGUESE 

hoje no mimdo Socrates, Pithagoras, e Platao,eou- 
tros sabios da antiguidade, se a modo de cepos, ou 
troncos, que aonde nascerao fazem raiz e no seu 
primeiro chao apodrecem, nao buscarao fora da Patria 
as noticias, que lbes faltavao. Nao se ornara Her- 
cules com os despojos dos Monstros, que domou, se 
os nao fora buscarpelo mundo; asuadilatada viagem 
devem os Argonautas a conquista do vello de ouro; 
Se nao correra Ulysses remotos climas, fora a Aldea 
de Ithaca de toda a sua gloria o theatro. Homens 
perpetuamente caseiros, sao gallos, que so sabem 
do seu poleiro. Sabios peregrinos, imitao no seu 
curso as fontes, que passando por veas de prata, ouro, 
esmeraldas, e saffiras, tomao, e comsigo levao a flor 
uxxlcM^e&z suas preciosas qualidades. Zombe embora Plu- 
tarco dos que louvao a peregrina^o, e diga, que 
se parecem com os que julgao as estrellas en antes 
mais nobres, e felices, que as fixas. Nao ha escola 
mais util para a vida, que as muitas vidas ou modos 
de viver, que na variedade das Na9oens se observa. 
Vem-se muitas cousas nunca vistas; aprendem-se 
muitas, que se nao sabiao, faz-se o homem capaz de 
toda a casta de negocios, e folga de ver este mundo, 
antes desahir delle. At6 para os principes, que das 
suas cortes fazem na terra o seu paraiso, bom he que 
peregrinem, para conhecerem o mundo, que elles 
governao. Os com modos, as delicias, os obsequios 
dos subditos, podem dar a conhecer a hum homem, 
que nasceo soberano, mas com. este conhecimento, 
nao o fazem digno da soberania : se nao sahira 
Alexandre da sua Macedonia, nao passara dos li- 
mites de regulo e nao chegara a avassallaro mundo. 



Do Tempo future 

Trate o homem do presente, e nao queira pene^ 
trar no futuro ; quern de tao longe poem a mira, 
nao pode dar no alvo. Muitas vezes bom he igno- 



GRAMMAR. ill 

rar o que ha de succeder ; porque se for bem, a di- 
la^ao he tormeuto ; e se for mao, o trabalho he sem 
provei to. Para futuros, nao ha seguran9a. Ao 
Embaixador, que na guerra movida por Lui^XI. 
Rev de Franca, a Carlos Duque de Borgonha, pro- 
curava attrahir ao Emperador Frederico, com pro- 
messa de se repartirem com elle os despojos, e os 
estados, respondeo o dito Emperador com este 
apoiogo : Tres ca9adores com a esperar^a de apan- 
harem hum urso, se comprometterao na reparti^ao 
delle. Chegados a boca da caverna, sahio a fera com 
tao grande impeto, que hum dos ca^adores botou a 
fugir, outro subio a huma arvore, e o outro se estendeo 
no chao fingiudo-se morto ; chegouse o urso a elle, 
poz-lhe o focinho no nariz, e nos ouvidos, e nao lhe 
conhecendo folego, nem sinal de vida, o deixou por 
morto. O que estava na arvore, disse ao compan- 
heiro ; homem, que te disse o urso, quando te fallou 
a puridade, com o fociuho nos ouvidos ? Disseme 
que era nial feito, dispor da pelle, e carne do urso, 
antes de o verem morto. Com isto o Emperador 
deu a entender ao Embaixador, que era preciso 
apanhar primeiro ao Duque de Borgonha, que depois 
se trataria da repart'^ao dos seus estados. Dos suc- 
cessos do tempo futuro, so Deos tern certeza. 



Dos Ricos. 

Em lugares estereis, sem hervas, nem plantas 
produz a natureza o ouro, para mostrar que 03 
amadores das riquezas nao tern fe, nem honra. Os 
ricos facinorosos, que ainda que celebrados nas 
historias, sao o opprobrio da sua posteridade, pode- 
riao ter boa fama, se lhes nao facilitara este metal a 
execu^ao de seus danados intentos. Em todas as 
idades forao as riquezas antagonistas da virtude ; 
ellas inventarao os mais enormes delitos ; ellas en- 
sinarao os filhos a tirar a seus pais a vida ; en- 



\w 



m% PORTUG UESE 

sinarao os poderosos a opprimir os innoc£ntes, ar* 
ruinar as familias, saquear os templos, & despir os 
altares; -el I as induzirao os amigos a que faltassem a 
fe> in'citarao os vassallos a negar aos principes a 
obediencia, a os libidinosos derao meyos para violar 
a pudicicia das donzellas, e estragar a honra dos 
. maridos: finalmente ellas ainda que boas para a 
vida civil, sao causa de todos os males; e posto que 
os sabios se souberao aproveitar dellas, a cornea, 
e o mao uso das mesmas, encherao o mundo todo 
de criminosos. Homens ricos ordinariamente se 
perdem, por terem muito, e saberem pouco ; des- 
prezao o saber, porque lhes parece, que para todo 
o genero de-yida, lhes basta o ten A Aristippo 
perguntou Dionysio, porque razao os filosofos fre- 
quentavao as cazas dos ricos, e nao os ricos as dos 
,M-up&y filosofos. Respondeo Aristippo, que os filosofos 
7/^fwff? conhecem o que lhes falta, e os ricos ignorao o de 
que necessitao. Senhores ricos, e filosofos pobres, 
nao podem fazer cousas grandes, porque a estes lhes 
falta dinheiro, e aquelles espirito. Dizia Diogenes, 
que uiuitos ricos sao como as plantas, que nascem 
em desertos, e despenhadeiros, porque dos frutos, 
-que ellas dao, nao comem os homens, mas corvos, 
milhafres, e feras ; tambem as riquezas de muitos 
nao sao para sugeitos benemeritos, mas para cho- 
carreiros, espadachins, rufioes, e meretrizes. 

Est ado da Lnsitania at 6 ao tempo em que foi 
reduzida em Provincia Romana, For A . C 
do AmaraL Extrahido das Manor ias da 
Academia de Lisboa. 

Huma historia sincera envergonlia-se da gloria 
vaa, que se busca em anliguidades mentirozas : 
Desgosta-se desses sonhos agradaveis, pasto de 
hum a es.te'ril recrea^ao ; e se saborea so com a ver- 



GRAMMAR. 113 

dade pura. Tal be a sorte deste escrito, derigido a 
fazer prezentes aos Portugueses os verdadeiros cos- 
tumes, e Leis de seus Maiores: rejeita tudo quanto 
a lmpostura, ou a credulidade moderna lhe conta 
dos Seculos, que a Providencia quiz esconder-lhe : 
e se contenta com as escassas memorias, que pode 
collier dos Faros monumentosantigosque lhe res'tao. 
Nao tenta entrar pelas espessas trevas dos primeiros 
36 Seculos do mundo, em que nao acha quern o 
encaminhe. Pois que os Hebreos unicos guias 
Segurps, que introduzem em muitos outros paizes, 
nem bum so passo dao para este que habitamos ; e 
apenas dao motivo a conjectural*, que das Colonias 
sahidas do Oritxite para povoar a terra, algumas se 
estcnderao ate a esta extremidade ; mas nem donde, 
nem quando viessem o pode colh&r a bistoria. 

Nao acba depois dos Hebreos, outros, de quern se 
fie, senao os Romanes: e ainda estes pouco lhe 
sabem dizer de hum Paiz tao apartado, em quanto 
a ambicao de o senborear os nao ayizinha a elle : 
mal conservao huma obscura tradi9ao de que a estas 
partes vierao Celtas, Iberos, Persas, Lusos, e 
Gregos : de buns apenas ficara resto na deriva^ao 
do nome ; de outros na berai^a de alguns costumes. 
A navegacao com que alguns Povos do fundo do 
Mediterraneo come^ao a enriquecer, as traz at4 
estas ultimas Costas, e vai logo espalbar pello 
Mundo, a fama das ricas minas, e do fertil torrao 
deste Paiz desconhecido ainda, antes que da quali- 
dade de seus babitantes : nao tarda com tudo a 
mostrar-se esta ; continua a vir em busca dos tbe- 
souros descobertos a ambicao estrangeira ; e ve 
erguer daqui, quaes feras acossadas nos seus covis, 
homens bravos para defender os bens que a Proyi- 
denciajhes destinara. ti esta h6 a primeira Scena 
que se nos representa no Terreno Lusitano ; hum 
Campo de Batalha, continuadaja com os -Fenicios, 
ja com os Cartbaginezes ; que depois de disputarem 

* H 



114 PORTUGUESE 

por largo tempo com estes Barbaros a sorte das 
armas, os deixao ainda por domar aos Romanos 
quando lhes cedem a conquista do Mundo. Mas 
ao justo motivo da defeza propria succedem depois 
outros, que facilmente poem as armas na mao a 
huns homens, a quern a Falta do commercio, e de 
artes quasi nao deixa outro meio de enriquecer, que 
a pilhagem ; nome com que muitas das suas guerras 
sao infamadas pelos Povos mais polidos que elles. 
E o mesmo habito de peleijar lhes vai alimentando 
hum natural feroz, que ja os nao deixa accommodar 
com o socego da paz, e que os faz buscar inimigos 
dentro em caza, quando lhes faltao os de fora. 

Estes vicios, e virtudes de guerra, he o que de 
principio nelles distinguem os Romanos, nao os 
vendo senao armados no campo; e de que nao po- 
dem deixar de dar testemunho estes mesmos vai- 
dosos despreza^ores de tudo o que nao he Romano. 
Mas em fim a medida que se lhes chegao mais 
perto, e se envolvem com elles, la vao divisando 
por entre alguns claros.que as armas deixao, a forma 
do seu governo interior. 

Vem que este Terreno, que designao pelo nome 
de Lusitania, he habitado de Povos differentes in- 
dependentes huns dos outros, e governados cada 
hum por suas Lets, costumes particulares ; leis 
raras, e costumes singelos, ainda com a marca da 
Natureza nao contrafeita. 

Como a seguran$a propria he quern so forma 
estes corpos, nao largao da liberdade que receberao 
da natureza. mais que o puramente preciso para 
conservar essa mesma seguran^a. A guerra a que 
sao dados he que os obriga a criar hum Superior, 
a que jurao fidelidade ; mas conseguida a, paz, 
expira o governo do General, e a obediencia dos 
Soldados. 

Se ha que estabelecer de novo para o bem corn- 
mum da Sociedade, servem-se do meio usado das 



GRAMMAR. 115 

puras Democracias, Assembleas geraes, em que 
cada pessoa tern o arbitrio de approvar, ou rejeitar 
o que se propoem : e ainda nesta ac$ao respira o ar 
militar, em que sao criados ; hum bater da espada 
no broquel he" o signal de approva^o; hum susurro 
inquieto o de desapprovar. 

A' simplicidade da Legislacao segue a das 
penas; sao os reos do crime capital apedrejados, e ^ 
para que o horror do crime se extend a alem ainda \ff^}: : ) 
do castigo, todo o que passa depois da execu9&5, S 4&m& 
he* obrigado a lan9ar alguma pedra sobre o cadaver 
do justi9ado. 

Nao desmente da parte Legislativa, a do Com- 
mercio interior ainda pouco sujeito a fraudes; nao 
os move a contratar a sede insaciavel do ouro, que 
mal conhecem : as mutuas necessidades, a que so 
procurao soccorrer, os ensina a trocar entre si as 
cousas precisas a vida. Estas lhes dictao tambem 
o que devem conceder aocorpo ; comeres, e bebi- 
das simples, quaes a Natureza as produsia : vesti- 
dos sem mais estudo que o do fim para que os usao ; . 
cama sem regalo, nem despeza ; emfirn a tudo o 
preciso para a conserva^ao se accode com o menos 
apparato que pode ser. 

A esta sobriedade bem propria de si para dar a 
saude, e vigor do corpo, ajuntao o trabalho aturado; 
os homens o da guerra quasi continua, e nos inter- 
vallos della o de exercicios semelharites a guerra ; 
as mulheres o da cultura dos campos, e de todo o 
trato domes tico, que com discreta economia lhes he 
cedido pelos homens occupados com as armas. E 
se faz memoria dos seus bailes, e cantares, nao sao 
tan to fructo do ocio, como do innocente prazer da 
vida social. 

Deste modo sobrio, e trabalhado de vida era 
consequencia a raridade de doen^as : para alguma, 
que accaso haja, nao he venal a cura, nem o reme- 
dio, nao se tendo alguem por desobrigado de con- 

*H2 



116 PORTUGUESE 

correr para hum officio de rigorosa humartidade : 
he o enfermo exposto em publico; e os que tern 
sido feridos do mesmo' mal ensinao os remedios 
com que conseguirao a saude. 

Nos que habitavao as vizinhan9as do Minho, 
como erao os Gronios, ou Gravios, os Amphilocios, 
e outros, se vem assaz retratados os costumes dos 
Greg'os, de quern os Antigos querem que elles 
descendao : Jogos, e certames publicos, cazamen- 
tos, arte de augurar tudo he de Gregcs. Idolatras 
como seus Maiores, nada eonservao da Religiao pura 
que a Razao Ihes mostrara, mais que o reconheci- 
mento de que ha hum. Ente maior que elles, a 
que devem dar culto : porem estragado este na- 
tural sentimento pela corrup^o do coracao, imagi- 
nao Divindades indignas, a que honrao com hum 
culto igualmenteindigno. Se querem dar-ihes gra- 
cas pello feliz successo de huma batalha, as maos 
clireitas dos prizioneiros sao o triste trofeo que lhes 
levantao. Se antes de qualquer ac9ao procurao saber 
o seu bom ou mao exito, dentro as entranhas de 
hum inimigo he que vao buscar este fatal segredo : 
se querem. fazer religioso hum juramento, he pre- 
ciso que as entranhas quentes de hum homem, e de 
hum cavallo lhes sirvao de banho, em que depois 
de mettidas as maos, as poem sobre o altar, junto 
ao qual se deve fazer esta ridic^ula ceremonia. Em- 
iim he sempre sangue o que applaca huns Deoses, 
que estes Idfolatras guerreiros formavao a sua seme- 
lhan9a. 

Estes sao os poucos vestigios, e quasi apagados, 
que se encontrao dos costumes domesticos dos Lusi- 
tanos, que de ordinario so se viao no campo de ba- 
talha, detendo, ou fazendo retroceder os passos aos 
i Conquistadores do mundo. Mal o podera crer quern 
mede a forca de hum Estado pelo fausto de seus 
habitadores, pela magnificencia de suas obras, e por 
todo o explendor que encanta os sentidos ; quem 



GRAMMAR. 117 

nao avalia quanto pode hum Povo, em que todos os 
indlviduos saoaptos para a defesa da Patria, em que 
ha tantosSoldados como homens endurecidos todos 
no trabalho, e todos animados do amor da liberdade. 

Hum Povo, como este, foi o que sem arte, e sem 
disciplina, em tendo na frente hum homem que o 
soubesse maudar, escarne^ por muitas vezes das 
tropas mais bem reguladas, e deu muitos dias de 
magoa, e de deslustre aos soberbos Romanos. Viri- 
ato, Sertorio, e ainda outros de menos nome forao 
instrumentos da gloria Lusitaua, que sobrepujando 
a emulacao ficou eternizada nos escritos de seus 
mesmos inimigos, e nos marmores que o tempo con- 
sum idor nao acabou de gastar. 

Por mais de Secuio e meio andarao os Romanos 
na porfiada lida de subjugar este ultimo peda^o da, 
Hespanha que ja contao to'da por huma po^ao certa 
dos seus dominios : todos os annos lhe nomeao Go- 
vernador: mas por mais que teritem mandarPretor 
como para Provincia pacifica, a cada passo se vem 
obrigados a lhe mandar Consul armado ; depois de 
terem separado o seu Governo do de quasi todo o 
resto da Hespanha- Esedequandoem quandoalgum 
destes Generaes consegue a gloria de a pacificar, e 
sujeitar as Leis Romanas, pouco tempo lhe dura 
verde o louro ; na sua mesma cabeca lhe murcha, 
ou ao mais tarde na de seu successor : ate que a 
longa experiencia os desengana, que he preciso mu- 
dar de systema; e que so costumando primeiro os 
Lusitanos a se sujeitar como amigos, he que os po- 
derao insensivelmente ir passando a obedecer como 
Vassalos. 






Sobre aPoesia Bucolica dos PoStos Portugufae? 
Por Joaquim de Foyos. Eatrahido das Me- 
morials de Litteraturada Academia de Lisboa. 

Assim como entre as duas especies de ora^ao, por 



118 PO RTUGUESE 

que o homem tanto excecle aos outros animaes, se 
cultivou primeiro o Verso, assim de todas as sortes 
de Poesias parece ter sido pfimeira a Bucolica. 
Ainda que o genero humano nao nasceo da terra, e 
dos duros troncos das arvores, coino imaginarao 
muitos Poetas, e parece que chegarao a crer alguns 
Filosofos ; comtudo depois do diluvio, espalhados 
os homens por toda a face da terra, e perdidos pouco 
apouco os conhecimentos que herdarao de seus ma- 
iores, e so conservavao na Sociedade, he summamente 
provavel, que huma grande parte delles viesse succes- 
sivamentea passar por estes tres generos de vida: Sel- 
vagem, Pastoral, Agricola. Os muitos Povos, que 
ainda hoje habitao, e se achao na primeira, ou se- 
gunda destas vidas, confirmao a verdade desta con- 
jectura. Mas o homem, vivendo huma vida silvestre 
nos bosques, separado de toda a Sociedade, e susten- 
tando-se Unicamente de ca9a, e dos fructbs espon- 
taneos da terra, nem se acha em circumstancias de 
adiantar os seus conhecimentos* nem tern tempo para 
cultivalios; occupado, e attento todo em buscar 
o necessario fysico, que nao pode achar sem muita 
difficuldade, e trabalho. E ainda que aconte9a J , quue 
por ve.zes lhe sobre algum espa^o livre destas con- 
tinuas fadigas, satisfeitos todos os seus naturaes de- 
sejos, e appetites, cancado o corpo, e entorpecidos 
os membros, lhe entorpecerao juntamente as facul- 
dades da alma, desacostumadas a discorrer, e a 
exercitar-se em outros objectos, e se entregara doce- 
inente a o sonmo. Nao succedera assim, aos Pas- 
tores, que tendo gado, que com seu leite lhes sub- 
mi nistre o sustento, e com suas pelles o vestido, 
passarao huma boa parte da sua vida quietos,"e de^- 
can^ados, sem mais outro cuidado que o de condu- 
zir, e defender os seus rebanhos, e manadas. Obri- 
gados de necessidades mutuas, e attrahidos do natu- 
ral deleite, que causa a companhia dos que tern as 
mesmas precisoes que nos, e nellas nos podem dar 



GRAMMAR. 119 

algum auxilio, e recebello, se chegarao, quando o 
permittir a abundancia dos pastos, huns para os 
outros, communicarao eutre si os seus pensamentos, 
c desejos, praticarao sobre as cousas que mais amao, 
e celebrarao a sua felicidade. 

Huma vez juntos os homens, e em ocio, contentes, 
e sem can^o, impossivel he, que nao inventem 
di versos jogos, e toda a sorte de desenfado, e 1 ecrea- 
$ao para evitar o tedio de huma vida socegada, e 
satisfeita. Entre estes divertimentos nao devia ter 
ultimo lugar a Poesia. As faculdades do homem 
tern huma natural disposi^ao para ella; ou a Poesia 
consista na imita^ao, como querem Platao, e Aris- 
toteles, ainda que clara e distinctamente nunca nos 
dissessem o que esta imita^o seja ; * ou em huma 
ora9ao levantada sobre as expressoes vulgares, in- 
vertida com figuras, e harmoniosamente modulada, 
e compassada com o metro, e com o rhythmo. Em 
qualquer destas cousas que fa9amos consistir a Poe- 
sia, ou em todas ellas, para todas recebeo o homem 
da Natureza huma admi ravel propensao. 

As nossas sensa^oes sao nao somente a origem, e 
fundamento de todas as nossas ideas, mas transfor- 
mando-se de diversos modos, sao todos os nossos 
juizos, e raciocinios, as nossas artes, as nossas Scien- 
cios, e, em huma palavra, tudo quanto sabemos, e 
conhecemos. Mas a imita^o he huma sensa9ao 
facil, e para que esta disposta a conforma^ao dos 
nossos orgaos, e das nossas potencias, e por conse- 
quencia huma sensa^ao, que nos achamos por ex- 
tremo grata, e deleitavcl. Deste mesmo principio 
se segue outro, o qual aqui igualmente pertence, e 
vem a ser, que h& natural ao homem nao so a ora- 
^ao, e a harmonia, mas tambem essa mesma ora^ao 
variada com dirTerentes tropos, e figuras ; isto he, 
com diversos modos de exprimir as cousas, e os 
pensamentos, ja com a mesma harmonia ; isto he, 
eom o rhythmo, e ja com o metro. 



191) PORTUGUESE 

Conhecer-se-ha claramente a dependencia qu& 
estes dous puincipius tern entre si, se considerar-mos, 
que a imitac;ao, (aqual eu jamostrei ser hum exerci- 
cio summamente gosfcoso ao homcm, e ham modo 
facillimo assim de elle apprender, como de commu- * 
nicar aos outros as seus sentimentos) huma vez 
feita, e praticada com a «ra9ao, traz necessaria- 
mente comsigo todas aquellas variedades da mesma 
ora9ao,- que apontei acima. Daqui vem affirmarem 
agudamente, e com razao justissima os mais celebres 
Filosofos, que quizerao descer a discussoes desle 
genero, que a Poesia era tao antiga, como o genero 
humano. Certamente parece ter nascido logo com 
as primeirasSociedades, que elles formarao, e quando 
elles conservavaoainda muito, assim da rusticidade, 
como da singeleza, e innocencia natural. Do que 
parece,/ ou claramente provado, ou deduzido com 
assaz probabilidade, que a Poesia nasceo, e se in- 
ventou entre Pastores. Mas em que genero de 
Poesia se exercitariao estes primeiros homens? Nao 
sera difficii conhecello, se reflect! rmos, qual seria a 
materia que, segundo as circumstancias em que se ' 
achavao, se lhes ofFerecia para os seus cantos. Aris- 
toteles foi de parecer, que dos primeiros inventores 
os que tinhao genio elevado imitavao accoes illus- 
tres, e feitas por personage ns grandes, e pelo con- 
trario os que tinhao engenho mais rasteiro, cantavao 
as accoes dos homens vis, em cujo vituperio com- 
punhao ohias ridiculas, assim como os outros se 
exercitavao em hymnos e encomios. 

Porem este erudito, e intelligente Filosofo nao 
fala naquelie lugar da primeira origem' da Poesia 
rignrosamente, mas sim do modo com que ella, de- 
pois de inventada, se foi dividindo em diversas es- 
pecies ; porque suppoe tempos em que hs ja grande 
a disigualdade dos homens; o que nao tern lugar 
nas primeiras e simplicissimas sociedades de Pas- 
tores. 



GRAMMAR. 121 

He* pois summamente verosimil, que estes homens 
quizessem imitar aquellas cousas, que com mais 
frequencia se offereciao aos seus sentidos, que satis- 
faziao as suas necessidades, e que coustituiao a bem- 
aventuran^a da sua socegada vida, e felice estado, 
por que nellas empregavao toda a sua attencao, e 
cuidado. Cantariao pois os seus rebanhos, os mon- 
tes e os valles, em que os apascentavao, os rios; e 
fontes, a que os levavao a beber ; a aiva, e serena 
madrugada, que os chamava ao trabalho ; a sesta, 
que os convidava ao descai^o ; e os rafciros, que 
lhes guardavao o gado. Cautariao, como era natu- 
ral, as paixoes e afFectos da sua alma ; porem nao 
afFectos violentos, e desesperados, que nao t rao pro- 
prios daquella vida, mas doces e suaves, e que so 
lhes causavao aquella inquieta9ao, e desasocego, a 
que se nao pudesse seguir fim alguin funesto. 

Como estes argumentos sao todos proprios da 
Poesia Bucolica, segue-se ligitimamente/que ella foi 
a primeira, que no Mundo hiveniarao os homens. 
Sendo pbis a Poesia Pastoral a primeira oiigem de 
toda a erudi9ao humana, e os primeiros esfoi^os, 
que fizerao as faculdades do homem para se puli- 
rem, e cultivarem, justamente me persuadi, que a 
Academia, instituida toda para utilicade pubhea, e 
que alem de outros mais gloriosos, e louvaveis em- 
penhos, tomou a si o de dar a conhecer os princi- 
pios, e progressos da nossa Litteratura, havia de 
levar em gosto que hum Socio seu tratasse dos mere- 
cimentos dos nossos Poetas Bucolicos. Dcste ira- 
balho, Senhores, posto que maior que minhas fbi^as, 
me quiz encarregar, por ser dos mais leves e faeeis, 
que tao illustre corpo podia commetter a algum de 
seus membros. 

Vos tratareis verdades sublimes, por extremo re- 
motas, e escondidas a commum comprehen^ao dos 
homens; medireis o espa90 immenso dos C'eos ; 
poreis Leis aos corpos mais vastos, mais distantes, 



nz PORTUGUESE 

e ate mais rebeldes do Universo ; com vossas por- 
fiadas investigates, e rara sagacidade obrigareis a 
Natureza a que vos descubra, e patentee aquillo 
mesmo, em que ella punba maior estudo em occul- 
tar. Assim para felicidade dos outros homens aug- 
mentareis, e aperfei^oareis os seus conbecimentos ; 
mas sereis muito particularmente felices vos, e feliz 
a Patria, em cuja utilidade haveis de empregar os 
vossos talentos, e todos estes trabalhos, e fadigas : 
e ella vo lo sabera agradecer com o premio, que so 
desejao as almas grandes, do louvor, e da gloria. Eu, 
gozando-me, *e comprazendo-me do vosso alto mere- 
cimento, de que vos quizestes me coubesse tambem 
alguma parte, me contentarei com examihar a pro- 
priedade, e elegancia de huma palavra; a verdade, 
novidade, e belleza de hum pensamento ; a inno- 
cencia, e sa singeleza de hum *Pegureiro ; e isto 
propter aquce rivum, ou quando muito, sub ramis ar- 
boris altce. 

Mas torriando ao meu assumpto, de que me fize- 
rao desviar os vossos justos louvores, nao sao pouco 
relevantes, nem concorrem medianamente para a 
instruc^ao, e cultura dos homens os trabalhos dos 
Poetas. Negallo seria nao conhecer o modo, por 
que se dilatao, e aperfei9oao as nossas faculdades, e 
ignorar inteiramente a Historia dos varios progres- 
sos do entendimento humano. A restauracao das 
letras, com que se desterrou a ignorancia, e bar- 
baridade, a que nos tinhao reduzido as Na9oes 
do Norte, e as continuas irrup9oes dos Sarracenos, 
tern as suas sementes nos Trovadores Proven9aes, 
e Lombardos, que fructificando felizmente che- 
garao a produzir os dous abalisados engenhos de 
Dante, e Petrarca. Cultivada por estes dous gran- 
des homens, e por alguns mais seus contemporaneos 
a Lingua 1 oscana, preparou a Italia, e a sua imita- 
^ao a toda a Europa para hum conhecimento pro* 
f undo da Lingua Latina, e da Grega. Com taes 



GRAMMAR. 123 

disposicoes, e auxilios se instruirao as Na9oes Euro- 
peas nas Artes, e Sciencias, e em toda a sorte de 
erudi9ao daquelles sabios Povos ; e inflammadas 
cada vez mais no desejo de saber, tern levado muitas 
das Artes, e Sciencias dos antigos a hum ponto in- 
crivel de perfei9ao, &c. 

Analyse e combinagoes filosoficas sobre a elocucao 
e estylo de Sd de Miranda, Ferreira, Ber~ 
nardes, Caminha e Camoes. Pr. Francisco 
Dias* 

Quando entrei nesta coraposicao, julguei que 
devia tomar hum ponto fixo, donde viesse deduzin- 
do a sua analyse, e que o Sa de Miranda devia* 
indispensavelmente formar a epoca, donde, segundo 
a ordem do tempo, havia de dimanar todo o seu - 
progresso, como de hum escritor, que, lan90u os 
fundamentos da Poesia Portugueza. Mas antes que 
entrasse nesta diiigencia, vi que me era de precisa 
necessidade fazer huma descrip9ao exacta do esta- 
do, em que se achava a Lingua, quando o Poeta 
Miranda appareceo ql sondar as qualidades princi- l4^xL: 
paes dacompos'^ao e estylo daquelle Padre da Poesia 
Portugueza, donde passou para FUrreira, para Ber- 
nardes, para Caminha, e ultimamente para Camoes, 
o maior Poeta da Na9ao, e o que mais enriqueceo, e 
apurou o nosso Idioma ; discorrendo por aqielles 
pontos, que mais me pareccrao dignos de compara- 
9ao no genero Sublime, como mais nobre, e como 
aquelle que mais esfo^o pede da fantasia humana; 
fazendo juizo de cada hum dos Poetas da Analyse, e 
finaimente indicando as origens donde nascerao as 
expresses, e formulas combinadas; no quejulgo ter 
satisfeito ao Assumpto, que he certamente mais 
difficultoso do que parece. 

-f" Na execu9ao deste tao trabalhoso argumento me 
conduzi, segundo as luzes, que pude adquirir na 



124 PORTUGUESE 

li9aq de Aristoteles, Cicero, Longino, Quintiliano, 
e muito mais na de Locke, Condillac, Du Marsais, 
e em especial na do sobre todos sabio Commentario, 
que o grande Voltaire fez as Obras de Pedro Cor- 
neiile, onde se vem as regras do gosto na sua maior 
elevagao. 

Todas estas materias sao novas em Portugal, e por 
consequencia nao tive a quern seguir : e apezar dos 
defeitos, posso dizer, 

....... que aqui vereis presente 

Cousas, que juntas se dchao raramente. Camoes Lus. 

Introducfao. 

H6 o talento da palavra a, mais nobre faculdade 
do ente racional, como instrumento, com que nao 
so expoe as suas ideas, mas at6 pinta os mais occultos 
sentimentos do espiritor com rasgos tao vivos, e 
sublimes, que os faz passar aos cora$oes mais izen- 
tos de interesse. AquellaFilosofia inataao cora$aO 
do homem, que preside a todas as ac9oes, que mais 
o eleVao, foi quern formou os sinaes representativos 
das suas ideas simplices, e compostas ; e quern, a 
foi 9a de in Anitas combina9oes, lhe fez conceber o 
grande pensainento do transumpto mental consig- 
nado nas palavras por huma successao de ideas nao 
interrompidas, cujo nexo constitue a pintura eterna 
nao so do fysico, mas, o que he mais prodigioso, do 
nioral humano. 

Aquella mesma filosofia, que dirigindo e elevando 
o espirito humano desde as id£as simplices ate as 
implexas, lhe deo as primeiras no9oes da expressao 
simples e primitiva, como mais adaptada as necessi- 
dades do homem ; a propo^ao que lhe foi am- 
pliandp a esfera dos seus conhecimentos, lhe foi 
ministrando expressao complexa, isto he, figurada 
com a qual pinta aos olhos, e da corpo, e vida as 
inais sublimes abstrac9oes, que pqde conceber o en- 
tendimento humano. 



GRAMMAR. m 

\ Deste immenso aggregado de idea's simpleces, t 
compostas, como consequencia natural, procedeo a 
vivacidade da expressao, e a riqueza das Linguas, 
que se elevarao ao mais distincto grao de perfei$ao, 
segundo o'numero de acontecimentos, e revolugoes 
notaveis ; e muito mais segundo o trato frequente yS^J^^d 
com as'nacoes estranhas, e communica9ao social dos 
povos entre si ; por isso mesmo que das grandes ' 
crizes procede a effervescencia das paixoes, que 
pondo em movimento, e actividade a massa das ideas, 
gera novos pensamentos, e nova elocu9ao. 

Daqui se infere, que os melhores de todos os 
idiomas devem forcosamente ser os daquelles povos 
que mais revolu^oes experimentarao, e que melhor 
conhecerao as leis da Sociedade. Ve-se pois pello 
que nos ensina a historia, que as Na9oes mais puli- 
das e sabias, tanto na linguagem, como nos cos- 
tumes, forao quasi sempre as que situadas junto ao 
mar conhecerao mais cedo a necessidade da com- 
municacao dos povos estranhos, por meio do Com- 
mercio ; ou aquellas, cujos acontecimentos Ihes 
clerao lugar distincto nos annaes do genero hu- 
mano. 

Por isso vemos, que as Linguas geraes do Malabar, 
Coromandel, e da China, regioes maritimas, assim 
como tambem a Arabe, sao as mais bellas, e antigas 
de todas as Linguas da Asia. Os Povos da Grecia^ 
que gozando do mais formoso espectaculo da Na- 
tu'reza, experimentarao tantas, e tao notaveis revo- 
lu^oes, inventarao o mais significativo, e harmonico 
de todos os Idiomas, onde se achao consignados os 
mais insignes monumentos do genio, e donde pro- 
cedeo a magestade da Lingua dos Romanos, nao 
mais famosos pelas suas conquistas, que pelos es- 
criptos immortaes, com que illustrarao os Seculos, 
O mesmo se deve considerar dos Italianos, Fran- 
ceses, Hespanhoes, e Inglezes, cujos Idiomas tendo 
crigem ua Lingua Latina, se tern elevado ao mais 



126 PORTUGUESE 

alto ponto de perfei9ao possivel, e nos quaes exis- 
tern monumentos para quem todo o louvor he dimi- 
nuto. 

Mas este concurso de circunstancias parece, que 
ainda nao foi a causa sufficiente da perfei9ao das 
Linguas : ainda ali se diviza hum vacuo, que pre- 
ciza ser occupado. Aqui rem a Poesia com toda a 
sua pompa e magestade, desatando or voos, pulin- 
do e aperfei9oando os Idiomas, dando a tudo alma, 
e vida, ja elevando-se aos maiores assumptos nos 
louvores do Ente Supremo, e no Panegyrico dos 
grandes horn ens, persuadindo a imita9ao das ac9oes 
nobres, e dignas dos mais distinctos applausos. Ella 
lheabre osseus thesouros; ellaosenriquece; ellalhes 
da foi^a, elegancia, e harmonia, sem o que seriao huns 
cadaveres seccos, e inanimados. Sem a Poesia, nada 
seriao talvez os Gregos, e os Romanos, que tan to 
encherao o mundo com a fama das suas victorias, 
com a grandeza das suas ac^oes, e muito mais com 
a perfei9ao, com que cultivarao todas as Artes de 
genio, de jque tantos, e tao admiraveis testemunhos 
nos deixarao principalmente nos seus escritos. A 
Poesia pois, que tendo entre os antigos hum carac- 
ter cle harmonia muito diverso da Poesia moderna, 
veio pella ignorancia dos Seculos a tal decadencia, 
que pouco faltou par ficar inteiramente ignorada. 

Das reliquias da Lingua Latina, e Grega se 
formarao os Idiomas modernos, com di versa Syn- 
taxe; e com elles resuscitarao, ou pormelhor dizer, 
formarao os Proven9aes huma Poesia toda nova na 
disposi9ao das cesuras, e combina9oes harmonicas. 

Os Italianos restauradores de quasi todas as 
Artes, forao os primeiros, que tratarao a Poesia com 
dignidade, aperfei^oando os metros, e harmonias, que 
os mesmos Proven9aes, eSicilianos tinhao inventado; 
e tanto se'applicarao a ella, que ja no decimo quarto 
Seculo era famoso Poeta o celebre Dante, quem 
fixou todas as accentua9oes harmonicas do hende- 



GRAMMAR. 127 

casyllabo, que ficou sendo o mais necessario metro 
da Poesia Italiana, Castelhana, e Portugueza. 

Entrarao os Mouros em Hespanha, e com elles a 
Poesia: porem o desassocego da guerra nao deo 
lugar aos antigos possuidores desta Regiao, tao 
infestada de Na9oes estranhas, a cultivar a Poesia 
seriarnente, nem a pulir os seus Jdiomas tao cedo 
como os Italianos. Da longa dominacao, que os 
Romanos tiverao em Hespanha se havia nella intro- 
duzido o uzo da Lingua Latina, que veio a ser vui- 
gar : della, e de varios dialectos barbaros, se forma- 
rao os dous mais bellos, e sonoros Idiomas de Hes- 
panha, e talves da Europa, o Castelhano, e o Por- 
tuguez; 

Estas duas Linguas se forao igualmente aper- 
feicoando, de sorte que a hum mesmo tempo che- 
garao ao seu auge. Com tudo, sendo a Na$ao Por- 
tugueza mais moderna, e occupando muito menos 
espaco de terreno, que a Castelhana, veio mais cedo 
a produzir monumentos, que assaz distinguirao, e 
acreditarao o seu Idioma. As historias de Joao de 
Barros dadas a luz no meio do Seculo decimo sexto, 4fJj$%> 
e traduzidas em todas as Linguas cultas da Europa, 
fizerao mostrar ao Mundo litterario, que a Lingua 
Portugueza era a mais hi ha da Latina. Hum 
numero sufficiente de Escritores, que logo depois 
vierao, acabarao de determinar o genio da Lingua, 
cujo caracter he elegancia, e perspicuidade. Sen- 
do pois a Lingua Portugueza desde a sua origem 
inui doce, e sonora, resultado natural da quantidade 
proporcionada das suas vog&es, e consoantes, das 
quaes as primeiras, nao sao tao frequentes, e con- V ^^W' 
. junctas, que enfraque^ao a harmonia, e facao Ian- 
&a*<6i guida e pouco notada, como se ve na Lingua Italiana ; 
nem as segundas com nimia frequencia se atro- 
pellao, e produzem sons rudes e asperos, como nas 
Linguas do Norte. Todas estas felices disposicoes, 
alem do genio, convidavao a Na$ao a cultura da 



128 PORTUGUESE 

Poesia para que sempre teve natural inclina9ao. 
Deixemos «a miuda investiga^ao destas causas, a 
qual sera mais propria de quern tentar escrever a 
hisloria da Lingua. Deixemos tambem as Poesias 
anteriores ao Seculo de quinhentos, muitas das 
quaes existem em algumas Bibliothecas antrgas, 
coirio as d 1 El Rei D. Diniz, na do Convento da 
Ordem de Christo em Thomar, e outras andao em- 
pregadas no celebre Cancioneiro de Resende, col- 
3ec*9ao preciosa, donde se podem extrahir as maiores 
luzes a respeito da Natureza, e origem da nossa 
Poesia : -e come^ando a tratar do auge a que esta 
elevou a Lingua Portugueza; as gra9as, e numero, 
que lhe communicou; principiaremos a discorrer 
de huma epoca-mais vizinha a nos, e esta seja deter- 
minada pelo famoso Sa de Miranda. 

Veja-mos pois os assumptos, que este Poeta tra- 
tou, a qualidade de sua imitacao em geral, o uzo 
que fez do hendecasyllabo, ate ao seu tempo pouco 
au nada conhecido em Portugal, e em'toda a Hes- 
panha ; como tratou, como aperfei9o6u o Soneto, 
do qiial se deve reputar inventor entre nos, novas 
gra9as que accrescentou a nossa Lingua, e como 
finaimente preparou aos Poetas, que lhe succederao, 
hum novo caminho para se elevarem ate a immortal 
Lusiada. 

Mas antes que entremos neste exame, vejamos 
primeiro o estado em que o Sa de Miranda, achou o 
Idioma. 

A Na9ao Portugueza, que ate ao rim do reinado 
de D. Fernando jazia na ignorancia, occupada uni- 
camente da cultura das suas terras, quanto lhe era 
preciso para o consumo interior do Reino, e para 
entreter huma lisreira sombra de commercio ex- 
terior, continuamente vexaclo pella tjrannia Ara- 
bica, que infestando os mares, era eterno obstaculo a 
navega9ao; vivendo como desterrada na soliclao dos 
campos, sem communica9ao, nem policia, fallava 



GRAMMAR. 129 

huma linguagem informe, e grosseira, chea de sons 

rudes, que as Linguas barbaras lhe tinhao commu- 

nicado; e a pezar de ter hurna origem tao pura, 

como a Lingua Latina, donde procedia, so conser- 

vava alguma energia natural nascida das significa- 

9oes primitivas das suas vozes, que, alem de serem 

maculadas de infinitas anomalias, e dissonancias, 

erao privadas de translates, que dao fo^a e eleva- 

9&0 a os Idiomas. Chea pois de construccoes erro- 

neas, de dithongos asperos, e desinencias rudes, is, 

pobre de termos, sem idea do nexo7"que subsiste 

nas particulas, sem syntaxeTsem hannonia o seu Jy^ a ^ 

periodo incerto, e desunido vacillara sem caracter. 

A grande revolugao de D. Joao I. fazendo a mais 
viva commo9ao no genio dos Portuguezes, com ella 
lhe vierao novos estimulos de gloria, que eleva o 
espirito; novas emprezas, novos pensamentos, nova 
for^a, nova energia as suas enuncia9oes ; novos 
objcctos do discurso, e nova linguagem. Hum 
Latim barbaro ate alii organo das Leis, e instru- 
mentos publicos, cessou de ser a linguagem do 
Foro. 

Da conquista de Ceuta nasceo a idea, a grande 
idea dos descubrimentos, que mostrando a necessi- 
dade de cultivar as Mathematicas, e a Astronomia, 
cud faes7 ^quaes existiao naquelles tempos obseuros,, y 
alargou a esfera da Mechanical que fazendo novas 
investiga9oes sobre a ac9ao dos ventos, e resistencia 
das agoas, extrahindo a somma da combina9ao dos 
movimentos resultantes da ac9ao, e reac9ao destes 
dous Elementos, alcan90u mais perfeito conheci- 
mento das leis dos liquidos, e do equilibrio, e aper- 
fei9odu finalmente a Arte de navegar. Novos 
Astros, novos mares e costas, novas ilhas, novos 
mundos enchem de admira9ao todo o universo. 



130 PORTUGUESE 

Extractos Poeticos. 

. r . .^J , » I MB M6MMMaM> i ,, w .. ,», i ■ , — .„. I ■■■ I l — iT l T t 

From the third Canto of the Luciai> 
oe Camoes. 



TTSTA'VAS linda Inez posta em sossego, 
De teus annos colhendo o doce fruto, 
Naquelle engano da alma, ledo, e cego, 
Que a fortuna nao deixa durar muito : 
Nos saudosos campos do Mondego, 
De teus formosos olhos nunca enxuto, 
Aos montes ensinando, e as ervinhas. 
O nome, que no peito escrito tinhas. 

Do teu principe alii te respondiao 

As lembran9as, que na alma lhe moravao, 
Que sempre ante seus olhos te traziao : 
Quando dos teus formosos se apartavao : 
De noite em doces sonhos, que mentiao, 
De dia em pensamentos, que voavao : 
E quanto em fim cuidava, e quanto via, 
E'rao tudo memorias de alegria. 

D'outras bellas senhoras, e princezas, 
Os dezejados talamos engeita, 
Que tudo em fim, tu puro amor desprezas, 
Quando hum gesto, suave te sug&ta : 
Vendo estas namoradas estranhezas, 
O velho pay sesudo, que respeita,- 
O murmurar do povo e a fantasia, 
Do filho, que casarse nao queria. 

Tirar Inez ao mundo determina, , 
For lhe tirar o filho, que tern preso, 
Crendo co'sangue so da morte indina, 
Matar do firme amor o fogo aceso : 
Que furor consentio, que a espada fina, 



GRAMMAR. 131 

Que pdde sustentar o grande peso 
Do furor Mauro, fosse levantada, 
Contra huma fraea dama delicada ? 

Traziao-na os horriferos algozes 
Ante o Rey, ja movido a piedade, 
Mas o povo com falsas, e ferozes 
Razoens, a morte crua o persuade. 
Ella com tristes e piedosas vozes, 
Sahidas so de magoa e saudade 
Do seu Principe e filhos que deixava, 
Que mais que a propria morte a magoava. 

Para o ceo cristalino levantando, 
Com lagrimas os olhos piedosos, 
Os olhos, porque as maos lhe estava atando 
Hum dos duros ministros rigorosos: 
E depois nos meninos atentando, 
Que tao queridos tinha, e tao mimosos ? 
Cuja orfandade como mai temia, 
Para o avo cruel assim dizia. 

Se ja nas brutas feras, cuja mente 
Natura fez cruel de nascimento ; 
E nas aves agrestes, que somente 
Nas rapinas aerias tern o intento, 
Com pequenas criangas vio a gente, 
Terem tao piedoso sentimento, 
Como coa may de Nino ja mostrarao, 
E cos Irmaos, que Roma edificarao : 

O'tu que tens de humano o gesto, e o peito, 
Se de humano he matar huma donzella 
Fraca, e sem for9a so por ter sugeito 
O cora9ao, a quern soube vencella, 
A 6stas criancinhas tern respeito 
Pois o nao tens a morte escura della, 
Movate a piedade sua, e minha, 
Pois te nao move a culpa, que nao tinha, 

E se vencendo a Maura resistencia, 



132 PORTUGUESE 

A morte sabcs dar com fogo, e ferro, 
Sabe tambem dar vida com elemencia, 
A quem para perdella nao fez erro. 
Mas se te assi mer^ce esta innocencia, 
Poe-me em perpetuo e misero desterro, 
Na Scythia fria, ou la na Libia ardente, 
Onde em lagrimas viva eternamente. 

Poe-me onde se use toda a feridade, 
Entre leoens, e tigres; e verei 
Se nelles achar posso a piedade, 
Que entre peitos humanos nao achei ; 
Alii co' amor intrinseco, e vontade, 
Naquelle por quem morro^ criarei 
Estas reliquias suas, que aqui viste, 
Que refrigerio sejao da mai triste. 

Queria perdoar-lhe o re} r benino, 
Movido das palavras, que o magoao, 
Mas o pertinaz povo, e seu destino, 
(Que desta sorte o quiz) lhe nao perdoao ; 
Arrancao das espadas de a90 flno, 
Os que por bom tal feito alii pregdao, 
Contra huma dama, 6 peitos carniceiros, 
Ferozes vos mostraes, e cavalleiros ? 

Qua! contra a linda moga Policena, 
Consolagao extrema da may velha, 
Porque a sombra de Achiles a condena, 
C* o ferro o duro Pirro se aparelha : 
Mas ell a os olhos, com que o ar serena 
(Bern como paciente, e mansa ovelha) 
Na misera may postos, que endoud^ce, 
Ad duro sacrif icio se ofYerece : 

Taes contra Inez os brutos matadores, 
No colo de alabastro, que sostinha 
As obras, co que amor matou de amdres 
A'queile, que depois a fez rainba : 
As espadas banhando, e as brancas flores, 



GRAMMAR. 1S5 

Que ella dos olhos seus regadas tiuha, 
Se incarnic^avao fervidos, e iiosos, 
No futuro castigo nao cuidosos. 

Bern puderas, 6 sol, da vista destes, 
Teus ray os apartar aquelle dia, 
Como da seva mesa de Thyestes 
Quando os filhos por mao de Atreu comia : 
Vos 6 concavos valles que pudestes, 
A voz extrema ouvir da boca fria, 
O nome do seu Pedro, que lhe ouvistes, 
Por muito grande esp^o repetistes. 

Assi como a bonina, que cortada 

Antes de tempo foi, Candida, e bella, 
Sendo das maos lascivas mal tratada, 
Da menina, que a trouxe na cap^ila, 

. O cheiro traz perdido, e a cor murcliada, 
Tal esta morta a pallida donzelia, 
Secas do rosto as rosas, e perdida 
A branca, e viva cor, co' a doce vida. 

As fllhas do Mondego a morte escura, 
Longo tempo chorando memorarao, 
E por memoria eterna em fonte pura, 
As lagrimas choradas transformarao : 
O nome lhe puzerao, que inda dura, 
Dos amores de Inez, que alii passarao; 
Vede, que fresca fonte rega as flores, 
Que lagrimas sao agoa, e o nome amores. 



From the fifth Canto of the same, 



Porem ja cincos soes erao passados, 
Que dalii nos partiramos, cortando 
Os mares nunca de outrem navegados, 
Prosperamente os ventos assoprando : 
Quando huma noite estando descuidados, 
Na cortadora proa vigiando, 



134 PO RTUGJJ ESE 

Huraa nuvem que os ares escur^ce, 
Sobre nossas cabe$as apparece. 

Tam temerosa vinba, e carregada, 

Que poz nos cora9dens hum grande medo, 
Bramindo o negro mar de longe brada, 
Como se desse em vao h'algum roehedo : 
O' potestade, disse, sublimada, 
Que amea90 divino, ou que segredo, 
Este clima, e este mar nos apresenta, 
Que mor cousa parece, que tormenta ? 

Nao acabava, quando huma flgura, 
Se nos mostra no ar, robusta, e valida, 
De disforme, e grandissima estatura, 
O rosto carregado, a barba esquallida : 
Os olhos encovados, e a postura 
Medonha, e ma, e a cor terrena, e pallida, 
O boca negra, os dentes amar611os. 

Tam grande £ra de membros, que bem posso 
Certitlcarte, que este era o segundo, 
De Rhodes estranhissimo Colosso, 
Que hum dos sete milagres foi do mundo : 
Co' hum torn de voz nos falla horrendo e grosso, 
Que pareceo sahir do mar prof undo, 
Arrepiaose as carnes,, e o cabello, 
A mi, e a todos, s6 de ouvilo, e velo. 

E disse, o' gente ousada mais que quantas 
No mundo cometterao grandes cousas ; 
Tu, que por guerras cruas, taes, e tantas, 
E por trabalhos vaos nunca repousas, 
Pois vedados t6rminos quebrantas, 
E navegar meus longos mares ousas, 
Que eu tanto tempo ha que guardo, e tenho 
Nunca avados de estranho ou proprio lenho ; 

Pois vens ver os segredos escondidos 
Da natureza, e do humido elemento, 
Anenlmm grande humano concedidos 
De nobre ou de immortal merecimento : 



GRAMMAR. 155 

Ouve os damnos de mi, que apercebidos 

Estao a teu sobejo atrevimento, 

Por todo o largo mar, e pela terra, 

Que inda has-de subjugar com dura gueVra. 

Sabe que quantas naos esta viagem, 
Que tu fazes, fizerern de atrevidas, 
Inimiga terao esta paragem 
Com veutos, e tormentas desmedidas. 
E da primeira armada, que passagem 
Fizer por estas ondas itisofxridas, 
Eu farei de im proviso tal castigo, 
Que seja mor o datnno que o perigo. 

Aqui esp^ro' tomar, se nao me engano, 
De quern me descubrio alta viuganga ; 
E nao se acabara so nisto p damno 
Dje vossa pertinace confianga ; 
Antes em vossas naos vereis cada anno 
(Se h6 verdade o que meu juizo alcanca) 
is T aufragios, perdigoes de toda sorte, 
Que o menor mal de todos seja a morte. 

E do primeiro illustre que a ventura 
Com fama alta fizer tocar os Ceos, 
Serei eterna e nova sepultura, 
Por juizos incognitos de Deos: 
Aqui por a da Turca armada dura 
Os soberbos e prosperos tropheos : 
Com i go de seus damnos o ameaga 
A destruida Quiloa, com Mombaga. 

Outro tambem v'ui de honrada fama, 
Liberal, Cavalleiro, e namorado, 
E comsigo trara a formosa Dam a, 
Que Amor por gram merce Ihe tera dado : 
Triste ventura e negro fado os chama 
Neste terreno meu, que duro, e irado, 



136 PORTUGUESE 

Os deixara de hum cm naufragio vivos, 
Para verem trabalhos excessivos. 

Verao morrer com fome os filhos charos, 
Em tanto amor gerados, e nascidos : 
Verao os Cafres asperos, e avaros, 
Tirar a iinda Dama os seus vestidos : 
Os crystallinos membros, e preclaros, 
A' calm a, ao frio, ao ar verao despidos ; 
Despois de ter pizado longamente 
Co' os delicados pes a area ardente. 

E verao mais os olhos que escaparem 
De tanto mal, de tanta desventura, 
Os dous am antes miseros ficarem 
Na fervida e implacabil espessura. 
Alii, despois que as pedras abrandarem 
Com lagrimas de dor, de magoa pura, 
Abra9ados, as almas soltarao 
Da formosa e miserrima prisao. 

Mais hia por diante o monstro horrendo 
Dizendo nossos fados, quando a^ado 
£.he dice eu: quern es tu que esse estupendo 
Corpo, certo me tern maravilhado ? 
A boca, e os olhos negros retorcendo, 
E dando hum espantoso e grande brddo, 
Me respondeo com voz pesada e amara, 
Como quern da pergunta lhe pezara: 

Eu sou aquelle occulto e grande Cabo 
A quern chamais vos outros Tormentorio ; 
Que nunca a Ptolemeo, Pomponio, Estrabo, 
Plinio, e quantos passarao fui notorio. 
Aqui toda a Africana costa acabo 
Neste meu nunca visto Promontorio, 
Que para o Polo Antarctico se estende, 
A quern vossa ousadia tanto offende. 

Fui dos filhos asperrimos da Terra, 



GRAMMAR. 137 

Qual Encelado, Egeo, e o Centimano; 
Chameime Adamastor, e fui na gueVra 
Contra o que vibra os raios de Vulcano : 
Nao que puzesse serra sobre serra, 
Mas conquistando as ondas do Occeano 
Fui Capitao do mar, por onde andava 
A armada de Neptuno, que eu buscava. 

Amores da alta Esposa de Peleo 

Me fizeram tomar tamanha empreza, 

Todas as Deosas desprezei do Ceo, 

So por amar das aguas a Princeza : 

Hum dia a vi, co'as filhas de Nereo, 

Sahir nua na praia; e logo preza 

A vontade senti, de tal maneira 

Que inda nao sin to cousa que mais.queira. 

Como fosse impossivel alcant^alla 
Pela grandeza fea de meu gesto, 
Deterfninei por armas de tomalla, 
E a Doris este caso manifesto : 
De medo a Deosa entao por mi lhe falla; 
Mas ella co' hum formoso riso honesto 
Respondeo : Qual sera o amor bastante 
De Nympba que sustente o de hum Gigante ? 

Com tudo, por livrarmos o Occeano 
De tanta guerra, eu buscarei maneira, 
Com que com minha hdnra escuse o damno : 
Tal resposta me torna a mensageira. 
Eu que cahir nao pude neste engano 
(Que he grande dos amantes a cegueira) 
Encheram-me com grandes abondan^as 
O peito de dezejos, e esperangas. 

Ja nescio, ja da guerra desistindo, 
Huma noite de Doris promettida, 
Me apparece de longe o gesto lindo, 
Da branca Thetis, unica despida : 
Como doudo corri, de 16nge abrindo 



158 PORTUGUESE 

Os br&90s, para aquella que era vida 
Deste corpo ; e comedo os olhos bellos 
A lhe beijar, as faces, e os cabellos. 

Oh que nao sei de nojo como o conte ! 
Que crendo ter nos br^os quern amava, 
Abra9ado me achei co' hum duro monte 
De aspero mato, e de espessura brava : 
Estando co' hum penedo frdnte afronte, 
Que eu pelo rosto angelico apertava, 
Nao fiquei homem nao, mas mudo, e quedo. 
E junto de hum penedo outro penedo. 

O' Nympha a mais formosa do Oceeano : 
Ja que minha prese^a nao te agrada, 
Que te custava ter-me neste engano, 
Ou fosse monte, nuvem, sonho, ou nada .? 
De aqui me parto irado, e quasi insano, 
Da magoa, e da deshonra alii passada, 
A buscar outro mundo, onde nao visse 
Quern de meu pranto, e de men mal se risse. 

Erao ja neste tempo meus irmaos 
Vencidos, e em miseVia extrema postos ; 
E, por mais segurar-se os Deoses vaos, 
Aguns a varios montes sotopostos : 
E como contra o Ceo nao valem maos, 
Eu que chorando andava meus desgostos 
Comecei a sentir do fado imigo, 
Por meus atrevimentos, o castigo. 

Converte-se-me a carne em terra dura, 
Em penedos os ossos se fizeram : 
Estes menibros que ves, e esta ngura, 
Por estas longas aguas se estenderain : 

. Emfim minha grandissima estatura 
Neste remoto cabo converteram 
Os Decses ; e por mais dobradas magoas, 
Me anda Thetis cercando destas agoas. 

Assim contava, e co' hum medonho choro, 



GRAMMAR. i 39 

Subito dante os olhos se apartou ; 
Desfez-se a nuvem negra, e co* hum sonoro 
Bramido muito longe o mar sodu. 
Eu, levant ando as maos ao sancto coro 
Dos Anjos, que tao longe nos guiou, 
A Deos pedi, que removesse os duros 
Casos que Adamastor, contpu futuros. 



From the second Canto of the same, 



Ouvio-lhe estas palavras piedosas 
A formosa Dione, e commovida, 
De entre as Nympbas se vai, que saudosas 
Ficarao desta subila partida. 
Ja pen^tra as estrelias luminosas; 
Ja na terceira Esfera recebida 
Avante passa ; e la no sexto C6o 
Para onde estava o Padre se moveo. 

E como hia affrontada do caminbo, 
Tao formosa no gesto se mostrava, 
Que as estrelias, o Ceo, e o ar vizinho 
E tudo quanto a via namorava. 
Dos olhos onde faz seu filbo o ninho 
Huns espiritos vivos inspirava, 
Com que os Polos gelados accendia, 
E tornava de fogo a Esfera fria. 

E por mais namorar o Soberano 

Padre, de quem foi sempre amada, e cbdra, 
Se lhe apresenta assi como ao Troiano 
Na selva Idea ja se apresentara. 
Se a vira o ca9ador, que o vulto humano 
Perdeo, vendo a Diana na agua clara, 
Nunca os famintos galgos o mataram ; 
Que primeiro desejos o acaharam, 



140 PORTUGUESE 

Os crespos fios de ouro se espraziam 
Pelo colo, que a neve escurecia : 
Andando, as lacteas tetas lhe tremiam 
Com quern Amor brincava, e nao se via : 
Da alva pretina chamas lhe sahiam, 
Onde o menino as almas accendia : 
Pelas lisas columnas lhe trepavam. 
Desejos, que como hera se enrol avam: 

Co' hum delgado cendal as partes cobre, 
De quern vergonha he natural reparo : 
Porem nem tudo esconde, nem descobre 
O veo dos roxos lirios pouco avaro : 
Mas para que o des£jo accenda, e dobre, 
Lhe poe diante aquelle objecto raro. 
Ja se sentem no C6o, por toda a parte, 
Ciumes em' Vulcano, amor em Marte. 

E mostrando no angelico semblante 
Co' o riso huma tristeza misturada ; 
Como dama que foi do incauto amante 
Em brincos amorosos mal tratada ; 
Que se queixa, e se ri n' hum mesmo instante, 
E se mostra entre alegre magoada ; 
Desta arte a Deosa, a quern nenhuma iguala, 
Mais mimosa que triste a o Padre fala. 



From the first Idyl of Boccage, 



A' foz do Tejo, em bronca penedia, 
Minada pelas ondas salitrosas, 
Prisioneiro de Amor, Tritao gemia. 

Luziao-lhe as espadoas escamosas, 
Sustentava o maritimo instrumento, 
O buzio atroador nas maos callosas : 



G RAM MAR. 141 

Conchas da cor do liquido Elemento 
Parte do corpo enorme lhe vestiao, 
Igual na ligeireza ao proprio vento : 

Da barba salsas gotas lhe cahiao, 
E nos olhos, que Amor affogueava, 

Em borbotoes as lagrimas ferviao. 

*. 

Lilia que hum Bosque proximo habitava, 
Lilia a Napea, desdenhosa, e bella, 
Amorosos clamores lhe arrancava : 

Hum dia a vio na praia, e so de v£lla 
Seu cora9ao feroz enfeiti9ado, 
Voou, gemendo, para os olhos della. 

Das entranhas do Pelago salgado, 
Louco de Amores, louco de suadades. 
O queixoso Amador tinha saltado : 

Do Pai, que abafa as negras tempestades, 
Ja, seu voraz tormento era sabido, 
E das outras Equoreas Divindades, 

De aereas esperan9as illudido, 
Grao tempo seu espirito saudoso, 
Rastejando a cruel, vagou perdido ; 

Grao tempo glorias vaas sonhou teimoso, 
Antes que desse fructuosa entrada 
A o acre desengano, o peito ancioso. &c. 



F1M, 






Londres : Impresso por T. C. Hansard, Peterboro' Court, Fleet Street ; onde 
se actia tambem hum sortimento completo dos Caracteres necossarios e 
particulars para imprimir, na Lingua Portuguesa. 



Books lately published, by F. Win grave, in tht 
Portuguese and Spanish Languages. 

1. A Dictionary of the Portuguese and English Languages, 
in Two Parts ; Portuguese and English, and English and Portu- 
guese : wherein, First-*>The Words are explained in their diffe- 
rent meanings, by Examples from the best Portuguese and Eng- 
lish Writers. Secondly — The Etymology of the Portuguese ge- 
nerally indicated from the Latin, Arabic and other Languages. 
Throughout the whole are interspersed, a great number of 
Phrases and Proverbs. By Anthony Vieyra. In Two Large 
Volumes, 8vo, a new Edition, carefully revised, and greatly im- 
proved, with upwards of 12,000 new Articles, and Commercial 
Phrases, by Mr. J. P. Aillaud, and the Portuguese words pro- 
perly accented, to facilitate the Pronunciation to Learners. 

2. An Abridgement of the same in a pocket Volume. 

5. A New Grammar of the Portuguese and English Languages. 
By Mr. Vieyra, 8vo. A New Edition, greatly improved by Sir. 
Aillaud, with the Portuguese Words properly accented. 

4. Exercises upon the different Parts of Speech of the Portu- 
guese Language, referring to Mr. Vieyra' s Grammar. 12rno. 

5. Nova Grammatica Ingleza, a qual serve para Instruir aos 
Portuguezes na Lingua Ingleza, 8vo. Nova EdicuS revista, e 
eonsideravelmente augmentada. 

6. Historia de Portugal, por Antonio de Moraes Silva, natu- 
ral do Rio de Janeiro, e continuada ate os nossos tempos, por 
Hippolyto' Jose da Costa, 3 torn. 12mo. 

7. Historia de Gil Braz de Santiihana traduzida em Portu- 
guez, 4 torn. 12mo. 

8. Selections in Portuguese and English, with the Portuguese 
Words properly accented, for the Use of Persons learning those 
Languages, 8vo, 

9. A New Dictionary of the Spanish and English Languages, 
in Two Parts — 1. Spanish and English; 2. English and Spanish. 
By Joseph Babetti. A New Edition, corrected and improved. 
2 vols. Svo. 

10. The same abridged in a small size. 

11. A New Spanish Grammar : or, the Elements of the Spanish 
Language. By Mr. Delpino. A new Edition, improved by 
Delpueyo. Svo. 

12. Fernandez's New Practical Grammar of the Spanish Lan- 
guage ; a New Edition, considerably enlarged by the Author, 

. Svo. 

13. Exercises upon the Rules of Construction of the Spanish 
Languages; with references to the above Grammar. By Mr. 
Fernandez. A New Edition, greatly improved by the Author. 
12m©, 



14. Mr. Fernandez's new Dictionary of the Spanish and*Eng- 
lish Languages under one Alphabet. I2mo. 

15. Las Aventuras de Gil Blas de Santiflafra ;* Restituidas al 
Castellano, por el Sapientisimo Padre Isla, y en esta Nueya Edi- 
tion, revisadas por el Rev. Don Felipe Fernandez, 4 vol. I2mo. 

16. The same, vols. 2, 3, and 4 to complete sets. 

17. Don Quixote de la Mancha, corapuesto por Miguel de 
Cervantes Saavedra. Nueva Edicion por M. Fernandez, 4 torn. 
12mo. 

18. Novelas Nuevas, por Mr. De Florian, traducidas libre- 
mente, e illustradas con algunas notas curiosas e instructivas, por 
Don Gaspar Zavala y Zamofa, 12mo. 

19. Gonzalvo de Cordova, por Mr. De Florian, trad, por D. 
Juan Lopez de Penal von, 2 torn. l£mo. 

20. Historia de la Conqvista de Mexico, por .Don Antonio 
de Soils, 3 torn. 8vo. 




LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



003 183 743 1 f 



J 



